JP7385317B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that can execute a display performance using a display device when a game ball enters a winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can perform display effects using character images, symbols, and the like.

JP2016-202930A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology for increasing the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later to aid understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In a state where the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, a first effect can be executed to display on the display means information related to the expected number of balls to be acquired per hit included in the hold by pre-reading;
A gaming machine characterized by :

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4. It is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in a non-time saving state. It is an explanatory diagram of fluctuation pattern judgment table T6 in a time saving state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory diagram of the big prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a preliminary determination information storage area. It is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is an explanatory diagram of a basic performance pattern determination table T52. It is an explanatory diagram of a chance up performance pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of processing during a fluctuation performance. It is a flowchart of display control processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a movement mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect of a sub-display screen 64. FIG. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern side-by-side presentation A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern side-by-side presentation B. It is a figure for explaining decorative pattern side-by-side presentation C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern reverse movement effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern reverse movement effect B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern reverse movement effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern warp effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern warp effect B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern warp effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern movement effect A. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern movement effect B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern movement effect C. It is a diagram for explaining aspect change variation effect A. It is a diagram for explaining aspect change variation effect B. It is a diagram for explaining aspect change variation effect C. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern change effects A and B. It is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern change effects C and D. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern change effect E. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining character pop-out effect 1; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining character pop-out effect 2; It is a diagram for explaining a numerical pattern change effect. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining pending icon shielding effects A and B. FIG. It is a diagram for explaining pending icon shielding effect C. It is a diagram for explaining pending icon shielding effects D and E. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining icon image display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for explaining icon image display performance B. It is a diagram for explaining icon image display effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining icon shape area rendering A. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining icon shape area rendering B; It is a diagram for explaining icon shape area rendering C. It is a figure for explaining pending icon continuous change effect A. It is a figure for explaining pending icon continuous change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a pending icon continuous change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining symbol variation update effect A. It is a diagram for explaining symbol variation update effect B. It is a diagram for explaining symbol variation update effect C. It is a figure for explaining the winning expectation degree suggestion production 1. It is a figure for explaining the hit expectation level suggestion production 2. It is a figure for explaining the hit expectation level suggestion performance 3. It is a figure for explaining pending icon change production A. It is a figure for explaining pending icon change production B. It is a figure for explaining pending icon change effect C. It is a figure for explaining performance button operation performance A. It is a diagram for explaining presentation button operation presentation B. It is a diagram for explaining a performance button operation performance C. It is a diagram for explaining battle character selection effect A. It is a diagram for explaining battle character selection performance B. It is a diagram for explaining battle character selection effect C. FIG. 2 is a first diagram illustrating a display performance of information related to the expected number of acquired pitches. FIG. 7 is a second diagram illustrating a display performance of information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. FIG. 7 is a third diagram illustrating a display performance of information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level increasing item presentation 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an expectation level increasing item performance 2. It is a diagram for explaining the expectation level increasing item presentation 3. It is a diagram for explaining numerical total effect 1. It is a diagram for explaining numerical total effects 2, 3, and 4. It is a diagram for explaining numerical total presentation 5. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining pending look-ahead effect 1; It is a figure for explaining pending prefetch effect 2. It is a figure for explaining pending look-ahead effect 3. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a decorative portion arranged at the lower right portion of the center decorative portion. It is a schematic diagram of the first movable accessory 14. It is a schematic diagram of the fixed prize winning device 19. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining ball entry suggestion performance 1. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining ball entering suggestion productions 2, 3, and 4. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining ball entry suggestion effects 5, 6, and 7.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained so as to correspond to the left-right direction as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires game balls based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached inside the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame part) 53, an outer frame (base frame part) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. We are prepared. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, the production button 63, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), the sword member 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, It includes a select button 68, a frame movable body 69, an audio button 55, and a brightness button 56. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the gaming area 3 of the gaming board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be launched at a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle. A movable frame body 69 (also referred to as a movable frame accessory 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided on the right and left sides of the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 is configured such that two members disposed on the left and right sides of the handle 60 are movable in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured such that its main surface moves toward or away from the handle 60. The frame movable bodies 69 are normally stationary at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) where they are distant from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively, and move toward the handle 60 from the retracted positions so as to approach each other (advance). ) and can come to rest at the position where it touches the handle 60. When the frame movable body 69 is in the advanced position, it touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60.

A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit disposed near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the performance button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up and down and left and right depending on the performance and the like. The sword member 65 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub display screen 64R, a left sub display screen 64L, and an upper sub display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged at paired positions on the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is a diagonally linear light emitting section disposed between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonally linear light emitting section disposed between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during games and the like. The select button 68 is located near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and to the left of the production button 63, and is an operation section composed of an upper button, a right button, a lower button, and a left button, and is used to select the production mode. The button is operated (pressed) by the player when changing the performance or various parameters related to the performance. The volume button 55 is an operation section that is arranged near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and between the select button 68 and the production button 63, and is composed of a volume down button and a volume up button. It is operated (pressed) by the player when raising or lowering the level. The brightness button 56 is located between the select button 68 and the production button 63 and in front of the volume button 55, and is an operation section consisting of a brightness down button and a brightness up button, and is used to increase the brightness level. It is operated (pressed) by the player when lowering it.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration body 10, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning part. A device (belly button) 19, a normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first grand prize device (first attacker) 31, and a second grand prize device (second attacker) 36 , a large winning opening starting opening 17, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), an out opening 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided protrudingly. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and emits light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the board lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and is configured to have a continuous shape and emit light.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the gaming area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a pending image display area in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed. area, and a pending digested image display area (the pending display area) in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also called hold icons 9A and 9B. The pending digested image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, and the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply called a hold icon.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left", "middle", and "right". A left presentation pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium performance pattern (medium decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol and a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero number such as "777". If it is a miss, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a miss, such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result not only on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b but also on the image display device 7. Note that the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Furthermore, the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be a manner in which they are scrolled in the vertical direction, or may be in any other manner. The combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the performance displaying the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be referred to as "variable performance of performance symbols", "fluctuation performance of decorative symbols", or simply "fluctuation performance" and "fluctuation display". It should be noted that the variation performance of this decorative pattern is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance) during the period from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops (also referred to as a special symbol variation period). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing until it stops, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol variation performance, a jackpot performance that is performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. In the performance symbol variation performance, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed in addition to the performance symbols. In addition to the production pattern, the image display device 7 also includes an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can indicate that the special pattern is changing or indicate the lottery result of the special pattern. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figures reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of stored second special figures reserved, which will be described later. and a second hold display area. By displaying the holding images 9A and 9B, the stored number of first special figure holdings displayed on the first special figure holding display 43a, which will be described later, and the number of second special figure holdings displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b are determined. The number of memories can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays the pending digest image 9C. The pending digest image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the pending digest image 9C, the first special symbol pending or the first special symbol is displayed. 2. It is possible to clearly display to the player that the special figure reservation is extinguished ("extinguishment of special figure reservation" to be described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member is movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). The first movable accessory 14 normally remains stationary at a retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a. It can stand still at any advanced position in front of the vehicle. The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers a part of the image display device 7 from above to below at the advanced position.

A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decoration part) written with "OARO" is movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 normally remains stationary at a retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

The center decoration body 10 is located near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A stage portion 11 is formed at a lower portion of the center decoration body 10 that corresponds to a lower portion of the image display device 7. The stage part 11 has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage part 11 to a first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10, which corresponds to the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 includes an inlet section through which game balls flow in and an outlet section through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flowed in through the inlet section to flow out to the stage section 11 through the exit section.

The fixed winning device (belly button) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and is located at a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball entering hole) where the ease of entering the game ball always remains unchanged. (fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like and determining a jackpot.

The normal variable prize winning device (electronic chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting hole 20 in the gaming area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is an opportunity for a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. Note that the electric chew 22 only needs to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible for the ball to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big prize winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow a game ball to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to release the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for obtaining a normal symbol random number (a winning random number) and determining a winning number.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is used as a predetermined random number. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing it with the value corresponding to the "jackpot". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a first special symbol display 41a or a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is made. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed special symbols, and the jackpot lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this symbol matching game.

In addition, "normal symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win". It is a process of determining whether or not it is a hit by doing so. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the lottery result is not announced immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, but the normal symbol is displayed fluctuating on the regular symbol display 42, which will be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed (lit or extinguished) and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the gaming area 3, and is connected to the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , a V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening/closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits reception of game balls through a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening 30 can pass inside the first grand prize winning device 31. . The first big winning hole sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the winning of a game ball into the first big winning hole 30. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to move the game ball. It is in the first state (rotating state) in which it distributes to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in the second state (stopping state) in which it is located at the origin and distributes game balls to the non-V area 70. . In addition, the V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, but may have the function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V area 39 in a retracted state (first state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70 in the advancing state. (Second state). In addition, in the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity for transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. In other words, the V area 39 serves as a variable probability operation opening. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a variable probability operation opening. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged at the upper right of the first big winning hole 30 in the gaming area 3, and the second big winning hole (second special winning hole) 35 It is equipped with The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second big prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The grand prize opening starting hole 17 is arranged above the first grand prize opening 30 in the gaming area 3, and the first grand prize opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes. However, the gaming machine 1 does not need to include the big winning opening opening opening 17.

The general winning hole 27 is provided at the lower part of the gaming area 3. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later. The general winning hole 29 is located in the lower right part of the gaming area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first big winning hole 30.

The gaming area 3 includes a left gaming area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right gaming area 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting." In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting opening 20 by playing left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured so that by hitting right, you can aim to pass through the gate 28 and win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , and a general figure reservation display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The first special symbol reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation reservations (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reservation display 43b displays the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of stored operation reservations (common symbol reservations) of the ordinary symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Below, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a "special symbol." Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as the "special symbol display 41." In addition, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b are also collectively referred to as the "special figure holding display 43."

The special symbol display device 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (fluctuating display) and then stops displaying the special symbol (identification information). , jackpot lottery) results. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, the first jackpot 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that was won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you can select one or two from the left as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display jackpot symbols. If it is a loss, a losing symbol such as "●●●●●●●○" with only the rightmost LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for that winning are , is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special drawing holding, and if it is winning in the second starting opening 21, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5). , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are 4 pieces. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special symbol reservation" refers to determining the jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game, the right to draw a jackpot for that prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number of prizes. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b each include, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up LEDs corresponding to the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (fluctuatingly displaying) and then stop displaying them. The normal pattern that is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern that is stopped and the normal pattern that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal pattern that is selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stopping pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (normal pattern with a predetermined stopping pattern, that is, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. will be held. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" with only the right LED lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as a normal losing symbol may be adopted. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. As for the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be lit alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) obtained for the passage is stored as a regular symbol in the regular symbol retention storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once it is memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of general figure reservations that can be stored in the ordinary figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passing of the game ball, in other words, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed, winnings may be won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right to draw a normal symbol lottery for the passing of the symbols, up to a predetermined number. The number of general drawings on hold is displayed on the general drawing holding display 44. The general figure reservation display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of ordinary figures held by lighting up the LEDs for the number of ordinary figures held.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls gaming profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes a sub-control unit. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the big winning opening opening starting port sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, and the first starting opening sensor 21a. Two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big winning hole solenoid 33, the second big winning hole solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The big winning opening opening starting port sensor 17a is provided inside the big winning opening starting opening 17, and detects the game ball that has entered the big winning opening starting opening 17. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30, and detects a game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35, and detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning hole 27. The normal winning hole sensor 29a detects the game ball that has passed into the normal winning hole 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

Display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol pending. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a shooting device 112 is connected via a shooting control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out rental balls. The paid-out rental balls are detected by the rental ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The production control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the production of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 , and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to programs for display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, and symbols. etc. (including performance patterns), background images, and other image data are stored. RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes a program stored in ROM 103. The performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. etc. is output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. Note that the voice control board 106 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a panel lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, and a frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. . The production control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and creates a light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and performs the operations according to the motion pattern data. The operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are controlled. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to control the lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable accessories 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A production button detection switch 63a and a selection button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The volume button detection switch 55a detects that the volume button 55 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the volume button 55 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the volume button detection switch 55a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The brightness button detection switch 56a detects that the brightness button 56 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the brightness button 56 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the brightness button detection switch 56a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. Further, a vibration motor is attached to the production button detection switch 63a, and can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the production button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. When the select button 68 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the select button detection switch 68a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. Additionally, a sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been investigated is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a fluctuation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a big prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation memory. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes advance determination commands, pending pitch count commands, A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the status of the gaming machine and the gaming status are set in the main control main processing (described later), and include a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, The ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a variable probability counter, a time saving counter, and the like. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area where a status in special operation processing, which will be described later, is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal symbol reservation storage area 86 stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth symbols of the ordinary symbol reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for. In addition, in the main RAM 84, in addition to the above-mentioned area, a winning type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. A drive data buffer and the like are provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and hold information do not change their status even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Furthermore, as the initial state of the counters, the ceiling counter is set to "500" and the other counters are set to "0".

The sub ROM93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a basic performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These decision tables are referred to by the production control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) that the production control microcomputer 91 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), including advance judgment commands, pending pitch count commands, fluctuation start commands, and fluctuation commands. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub-control main processing (described later). It is an output buffer) in which a variable performance start command, a fluctuation before end command, a variable performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reservation performance counter, a second special symbol reservation performance counter, and a regular symbol reservation performance counter. , ceiling effect counter, evening effect counter, fixed change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, the information other than the overnight presentation counter is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the gaming machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the above-mentioned commands, counters other than the evening performance counter, and advance determination information do not change their states even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The evening performance counter is reset by turning off and on the power of the gaming machine 1, and is set to 0 as an initial state. The information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to 500 and the other counters are set to 0 as the initial state of the counters.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7(A) shows the random number obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7(B) shows the random number obtained by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number," a "jackpot type random number," a "reach random number," a "fluctuation pattern random number," and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at timings described later. It is configured as follows. The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning jackpot type (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the performance symbol variation performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a loss, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one fluctuating performance symbol remaining among multiple performance symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state in which a combination of performance symbols indicates a jackpot (for example, a state of "7↓7"). Note that the performance symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are shaking within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 255. The “jackpot random number,” “jackpot type random number,” “reach random number,” and “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting hole (first starting hole 20 or second starting hole 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (winning random number)” is obtained based on passing through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the ordinary symbol retention storage area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "pre-read performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at timings to be described later. The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range from 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during the variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a preliminary determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a fluctuation start command being output from the main control section to the sub control section. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8(C) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the regular symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the acquired jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss" in the main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. This table is referred to for determination. In FIG. 8(A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number value is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65,535 )”, it is shown that it is determined to be a “lose”. In addition, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it will be determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)", it will be determined as a "jackpot". It is shown that this is determined to be a "loss". Details of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 indicates whether the reach random value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "reach exists" or "reach does not exist". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined that there is no reach. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined that there is a reach. It is shown that it is determined that there is no reach. The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is harder to reach in the event of a loss in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because in the time-saving state, more no-reach losses with short fluctuation times are selected, thereby speeding up the processing speed of special symbol reservations.

The normal symbol winning determination table T3 indicates whether the normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 255)", it is determined that the result is a "loss". In addition, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it will be determined as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it will be determined as a "win". , it is shown that it is determined to be a "lose".

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table that is referenced to do this. In FIG. 8(D), when in the "non-time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and when in the "time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second". It has been shown that

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is composed of "jackpot type" and "special symbol This is a table that is referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, when you win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot", and the special symbol 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special pattern stop pattern data" corresponding to the special pattern stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game can be determined. "command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not planning jackpot" This will be explained later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127). . In FIG. 10, for example, a prize is won in the first starting slot 20 in a non-time saving state, it is determined as a "lose" in the jackpot determination table T1, it is determined as "reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~2'', and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is between "0 and 60", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, a prize is won in the second starting port 21 in the time saving state, it is determined to be a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, it is determined to be a "16 RV passing planned jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table T5, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Furthermore, when reaching a reach, it is also determined whether the reach is a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) with different variation times are set. SP1-3 are progressively executed after normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-association.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the gaming control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 12(A), in the "non-time saving state", the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11", and in the "time saving state", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12". It has been shown that FIG. 12(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 seconds. However, the opening of this electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular winning number, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening pattern determination table T8. The big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 is based on the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9), in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21". ”, and when the special pattern stop symbol data is “14H”, “15H”, or “22H”, the release pattern is determined to be “open pattern 22”, and when the special pattern stop pattern data is “13H”, the release pattern is It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23." FIG. 13(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 21, the open pattern 22, and the open pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening), and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is performed once, The second big prize opening 35 is opened for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th R, open the first grand prize opening 30 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 opening time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th R, the opening number is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and in the 16th R, open the second grand prize opening 35 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the first grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening 35 will be opened even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular number of prizes, maximum 9). Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 14(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol When the data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and the special figure stopping symbol data is determined to be "opening pattern 33". It is shown that when it is "15H" or "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". FIG. 14(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 8th and 10th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and the second prize is won. At this time, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. .

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of jackpot drawings (special symbol drawings). In the case of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When you win a jackpot, the jackpot game opens the jackpot (first jackpot 30 and second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed (jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. A jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-not-passing planned jackpot." "V passing planned jackpot" operates the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, and V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 (V passing scheduled opening pattern) during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpot where the special pattern stop symbol data is 11H to 14H, 21H corresponds to the "V passing expected jackpot (probable variable jackpot)". The combinations of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 are (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33) ) or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. "V non-passing expected jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (opening pattern not expected to pass V) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, This is a jackpot that activates the V opening/closing member 71. Here, the jackpot with the special symbol stop symbol data of 15H and 22H corresponds to the "V non-passing expected jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V area is 39 becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The “V passing planned jackpot” includes “16RV passing planned jackpot”, “16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and “16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot”. The actual total number of rounds in the "16 RV expected jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the jackpot opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass expected jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, in 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass through V", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short and no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: Opening pattern 34), and the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass through V" and the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is scheduled to pass V" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 are the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In addition, as will be described later, in the case of "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass V" and "16R (actually 13R) jackpot scheduled to pass V", the time-saving game (100 times in this example) will be performed after the jackpot game ends. It has become. In other words, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass through V", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy, high base state). For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass" and a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass", and the gaming state after the jackpot is uncertain. It becomes difficult to determine whether the state will be a time-saving state (low-accuracy, high-base state) or a high-accuracy, time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state). In addition, after the end of the time-saving game, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state) for "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to not pass V", and the gaming state becomes "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass V". appears to be in a normal high-accuracy-low base state. That is, in the "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state will be as follows. Being in a high probability low base state but with a high probability becomes a latent state (latent probability variable state), and this latent probability variable state is difficult for the player to discern. In other words, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability (high base state) and the high probability time saving state (high probability high base state) after the jackpot game of "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot", and the time saving end of "16R (actually 13R) V not planned jackpot" The subsequent low-probability, low-base state and the high-probability, low-base state after the end of the time saving of "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, as shown in Figure 9, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V and 60/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V not. 128 (approximately 47%). On the other hand, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass through V, and 45/128 (approximately 64.8%) for jackpots scheduled to pass through V. 35.2%). In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 is more popular than the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol lottery). The lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can perform "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" on the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability fluctuation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variable state)", and the probability fluctuation An uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in a high probability state than in a normal probability state, as probability fluctuation control for special symbols. A high probability state is achieved by making a jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, The probability that the display result (stopping symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol is increased.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 to shorten the fluctuation time is referred to as a "time-saving state", and the state in which the fluctuation time is not controlled to shorten is simply referred to as a "non-time-saving state". That's what it means. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of derivation and display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 executes a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often in a time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. Determine the variation pattern used. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed, the variation of the special symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 81 may perform probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control simultaneously, or only one of them, for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-saving state, but does not perform them in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol probability fluctuation control by creating a normal symbol hit determination table T3 (where the number of normal symbol random numbers (random winning numbers) that are determined to be hits is greater in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8(C)). Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol (stopped symbol) becomes a winning symbol is increased. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but it is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes control to increase the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, and control for extending the opening time and increasing number of openings for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, a state where these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not being executed is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not need to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the control for increasing the number of openings for the electric chew 22. It is only necessary that by executing one or more controls, the electric chew 22 can be opened more easily than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning the V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the player passes to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high-accuracy, high-base state" or a "high-accuracy, time-saving state." Specifically, jackpots in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is in a high-probability, high-base state are of the jackpot types shown in FIG. 16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot.” "16RV jackpot expected to pass" and "16R (actually 15R) V pass planned jackpot" are in a high probability high base state, after playing a jackpot game, winning the next jackpot (next jackpot) and executing that jackpot game. Ends with. "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is a high probability high base state, after the jackpot game, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this case), and a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning a jackpot scheduled to not pass V will be a normal probability state (non-high probability (that is, a state of low probability), a short-time state, and a high-base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state." Specifically, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is a low-probability-high base state is the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. In this jackpot, the low probability/high base state means that after the jackpot game, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this case), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. The game ends when the game is executed. When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low base state (non-electronic support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may also be referred to as the "normal gaming state" or the "low probability non-time saving state (also simply referred to as the non-time saving state)". Further, the state in which a special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a "specific gaming state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the game can be progressed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. Due to the electric support control, the electric chew 22 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 21 than to win a prize in the first starting port 20. be. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is hit to the right in order to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to get more starting prizes (winning into the starting hole) than if you hit left-handed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, even during the jackpot game, the game is played with the right hand. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the ball to the left. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the first starting port 20 than to win a prize in the second starting port 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. This allows you to win more starting prizes than if you hit right-handed.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be explained based on FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the validity determining means (FIG. 23) and the preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, and the like. The initial values of the flags are "1", that is, "ON" for the ceiling flag, and the initial values of the other flags are "0", that is, "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial values of the counters are "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial settings are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal symbol random number value) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing is repeatedly executed. . Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing until the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is carried out both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning opening. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting hole sensor 20a, the second starting hole sensor 21a, the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the normal winning hole sensor 27a, and the normal winning hole sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs starting opening sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V area sensor detection processing (step S106), and hold ball detection processing. The numerical processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, the second special figure holding display 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If no game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbols reserved is the number of normal symbols reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of regular symbols reserved. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label -TRND-H), and stores the obtained random value in the first to Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbols reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If no game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved special drawings 2 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved 2nd special symbols. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: Value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-AS value), -TRND-RC value) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label -TRND-T1). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for special figure 2 advance determination processing (FIG. 18), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 advance determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "4 (upper limit)" ( Step S211). The number of reserved special symbols 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are obtained. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for special figure 1 advance determination processing (FIG. 19), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: Step S208). do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to pre-determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. Refer to this to determine in advance whether or not it is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "649", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". In addition, in this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, a preliminary determination table T1 different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the preliminary jackpot determination is "lose" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type preliminary determination (step S305). In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number is any one of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance that it is a "16RV passing planned jackpot". In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later; however, in other embodiments, a preliminary determination different from the jackpot type determination table T5 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a fluctuating pattern random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the preliminary judgment buffer by the special drawing 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And obtain the reach random value. Next, since the time-saving state is here (the time-saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state, and determines the jackpot preliminary determination result in step S304. A fluctuation pattern is identified from the preliminary judgment result of reach/absence obtained from the reach random value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches are selected. For example, if a loss with a reach is determined in advance from the jackpot preliminary determination result and the preliminary determination result of the presence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1 to 2". ”, the variation pattern “P64” is selected, and the number of reserved pitches is “3 to 4”, the variation pattern “P68” is selected. Note that in this embodiment, preliminary determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later; however, as another embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 may be used. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The preliminary determination command includes a jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type preliminary determination result), and a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created advance determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: Step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 advance determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S401: NO). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). do. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. ”) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot in advance. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "164", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". Note that the preliminary jackpot determination may use a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special drawing 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the explanation will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process moves to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbols are not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbols is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved pitches is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol being "0", in step S203 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol is "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is extinguished and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol becomes “0” immediately. This also applies to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of pending special symbols becomes "1", and then in step S1404 and step S212 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), which will be described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first inputs the normal symbol random number value ( Read out the winning random value). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the normal symbol random value is between "0" and "2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is determined to be a "lose". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the gaming state determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8 (D)) . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start variable display of the normal symbols (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). If the variable time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols continues. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "loss", (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "win" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew release pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and determines the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 using the gaming state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. Select. Here, in the non-time-saving state, "open pattern 11" is selected, and in the time-saving state, "open pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation according to the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, if the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 6 pieces), or the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the time to close the electric chew 22 has arrived. One of the things that has been achieved is that it has been fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (occlusions) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and the main processing finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into "1" of "special operation status", They are called "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation processing, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of an opening command, etc. is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), in other words, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 21 is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the storage location of the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b from the current position to the side from which it is read. At the same time as shifting by one, the pending information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, if pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the second special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are respectively on the left side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, a variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" ( Step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the first starting slot 20 is stored in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a from the current position to the side where they are read out. At the same time, the reservation information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) are respectively on the right side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and a variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on/off a demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, and then sets a customer waiting standby command to display a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol reservation is a jackpot that provides a greater profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol reservation (V-passing expected jackpot) It has become easier to win.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), a jackpot determination is made with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability variable flag is ON), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the table for high probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") of the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value using the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") of the jackpot judgment table T1. Determine whether or not.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special figure 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special figure 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and the process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the jackpot determination result is "lose", special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the gaming state is a time saving state (step S1600). A determination as to whether or not the time saving state is established is made based on whether the time saving flag is ON or not. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process moves to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process moves to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is the special drawing 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is special map 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type will definitely be a V-passing planned jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is special map 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

If the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass through V in a non-time-saving state among the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuating pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process for the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ” to “P3” (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is “P21” to “P23”) are referenced (addresses are set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" for special drawing 2 is selected.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, we will use the portions ("P4" to "P6") corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ) is referred to. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure pending) of the first special figure pending storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random value to determine whether or not there is a reach. Here, since it is a non-time saving state, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach judgment value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13") of the reach judgment table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random value is a reach establishment random value (step S1607: YES), that is, when there is a reach and there is a loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for a loss with reach in a non-time saving state, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The "P14" part (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P24" to "P31") is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as a variation pattern from the readout variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Since the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, a shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold. In other words, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short fluctuation patterns are increasingly selected. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

If the reach random value is not a reach established random value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach and there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time-saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no-reach loss (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state no reach loss, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The "P16" part (in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is "P32" to "P33" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, so the shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, so a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 that is referenced is different from. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. is referred to as "P41" to "P43", and in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P61" to "P63". From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" for special drawing 2 is selected. For example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44 ” to “P46”) are referenced. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: Step S108). This starts the variable display of special symbols.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: Step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The special symbol fluctuation time is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the stoppage of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of special symbols at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: Step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs game state management processing (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time saving times, and the details will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern for the jackpot and the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and uses the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning hole. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. Together with the setting of the opening pattern of the big prize opening and the V opening/closing member, the value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the won jackpot. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, the round counter is set to "16" (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting the probability change flag and the time saving flag (returning them to OFF), and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the present process ends.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: Step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set in the probability change counter when transitioning to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, when transitioning to the time saving state, the time saving counter is set to "100". As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state specification command includes information regarding the current gaming state (whether the ceiling flag is ON or not, the ceiling counter value, whether or not it is in a variable probability state, the variable variable counter value, whether or not it is in a time saving state, and the time saving counter value, etc.). include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until b time saving (play time) is reached, and counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during low probability state). . Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" is set to the ceiling counter as the specified rotation speed. As a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the counter value has become "0" (step S2012). In other words, it is determined whether or not the specified number of rotations has elapsed until reaching b time saving (play time). If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the ceiling counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2013), and "700" is set in the time saving counter as the number of time saving times (number of times of granting). Then, the ceiling flag is turned off (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: Step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process ends. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2106). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned off in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in a low base state when in a non-time saving state, it is in a low base state while a jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: Step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 31 and second jackpot device 36) based on the opening pattern have been completed in the jackpot game being executed. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process moves to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), a V opening/closing member operation process for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big prize opening 30, and in the V opening/closing member operation process, it is operated according to the V opening/closing member opening pattern T9. When a game ball of a predetermined number wins, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period. Details of the V opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process moves to step S2210.

If the grand prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the grand prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the big winning hole may be, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big winning hole that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. This includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process moves to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning hole (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning hole opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) depending on the type of jackpot. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the grand prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the opening of the big winning opening during one round. It is also possible to determine whether it is the first opening or not, and to set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2202 described above, if the grand prize opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the grand prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or the time has come to close the grand prize opening. (i.e., that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since opening the big prize opening). Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the time (interval time) for closing the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since closing the big prize opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0" or not. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (step S2227), and a jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when a game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot" is "16R (actually 13R) V-not-passing planned jackpot". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass into the V area 39 in "Jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 in a "16R (actually 13R) V-passing expected jackpot" for the player, "16R (actually 13R) V-not expected jackpot" ”, it can be recognized that no game ball has passed into the V area 39. In addition, the ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V area 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed and the present process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: Step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the round counter values are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in this round.

If it is an opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball won in the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process moves to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not a winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first big prize opening 30 in this round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-circuits the V opening/closing member 71 and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed when the first ball wins, regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is to allow the short circuit to be opened (in this case, for 0.1 seconds) at the same time. In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not played. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, for 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and while the V opening/closing member 71 is open. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when a jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (described later in the V area sensor detection processing (see Figure 33)). Further, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This takes into consideration the period until the game ball that enters the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when V passing (passing of a game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned ON when V passing is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is assumed that it will not be turned on. Note that when the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). This prevents the V flag from being turned on and set to a high probability state based on V passing due to fraudulent activity. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON or not. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first grand prize opening 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process moves to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process moves to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is a long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process moves to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long when the second ball wins (in this case, a maximum of 31.5 seconds). ). In addition, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (29.5 seconds maximum opening time of the grand prize opening + 2 seconds interval closing time), generally speaking, the second ball will win the prize. The time from the end of the round to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, in the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period when the V opening/closing member 71 is closed at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V opening/closing member 71 is open. If the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S2550). As mentioned above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended depending on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after closing the big prize opening. Make a judgment.

If the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the first winning flag and the second winning flag (step S2551), and performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and after several seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period starts. Make the settings and finish this process.

If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). For example, in the case of a short-circuit opening, the condition for closing the V opening/closing member 71 may include that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after opening the V opening/closing member 71. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and the present processing ends. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), this process ends with the V opening/closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: Step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step S2305), The V flag is turned OFF (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets the time saving counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy, high-base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of revolutions until b time saving (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the jackpot game, when the probability change flag is OFF, when the game is hit 500 times, the game enters b time saving (play time). In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information regarding the set game state (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V is in the valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. be done. If it is not within the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is within the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets a V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Held pitch count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending pitch count process (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the special symbol 2 reserved number of balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols. . After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the production control microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the production control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015), and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of adding up the random numbers one by one, two or more may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 allows the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variable performance (step S4305). The process during the variable performance is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display performance, and the details will be described later. After the process during the variable performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the production button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 sends various commands set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 by the received command analysis process to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes audio production to output audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number updating processing.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading effect. The details of the pre-read effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of reserved balls has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the reservation display process, information is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 based on the information regarding the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command. The values of the first special symbol reservation performance counter, the second special symbol reservation performance counter, and the regular symbol reservation performance counter are updated. Thereby, information on each number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the hold pitch count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). "Variation performance start processing" is a process of selecting a fluctuation performance pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. Details of the variable performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variable effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Fluctuation performance end processing" is a process for stopping the fluctuation performance executed during special symbol fluctuation. In the fluctuating performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter etc. based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and also sets a fluctuating performance end command for ending the fluctuating performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or 2 which is changing is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. In addition, when the fluctuation stop command is not received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation production end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub-RAM 94 information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data that is included in the opening command and is set at the time of jackpot winning determination. Then, the opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is selected in the performance command set area of the sub-RAM 94 by selecting the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores the predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. The image data is read from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4475, if the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening game performance pattern (content) to be executed during opening of the big prize opening or during an interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, select a preset round performance performance pattern corresponding to the winning type and number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and send a round performance start command to the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected round performance. Set it in the command set area 94b. When the round performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, if the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, an ending performance pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and an ending performance start command for starting the selected ending performance is set in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processes, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the production control microcomputer 91 inputs information regarding the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (time saving flag, time saving counter, probability variation flag, probability variation counter, ceiling flag). , ceiling counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time-saving effect counter, probability-changing effect counter, and ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) in time saving is set in a time saving performance counter, the remaining number of fluctuations in probability changing is set in a probability variable performance counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is set in a ceiling performance counter. Thereby, information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability changes, and the number of ceilings can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 causes the sub-RAM 94 to hold information about passing the V when receiving the V passing command. Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) and ends this processing.

[Ahead production decision processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the pre-read effect determination process (FIG. 37: Step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs advance determination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the jackpot preliminary judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type preliminary judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-mentioned jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, the advance judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-read performance pattern information. The pre-read effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the pre-read effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604, which will be described later. FIG. 39(A) shows that the jackpot judgment information “Lose” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third pieces as the preliminary judgment results corresponding to the first to third pieces of special drawing 2 pending. A state is shown in which the data is stored in a storage area, and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area. FIG. 39(B) shows that from the state of FIG. 39(A), special drawing 2 has won, and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is added to the fourth special drawing 2 pending. A state in which the data is stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, jackpot judgment information "jackpot", jackpot type information "21H", and fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as preliminary judgment information. In addition, "Pattern A" is set as look-ahead performance pattern information in the 1st to 4th storage areas corresponding to the 1st to 4th special drawings 2 pending and the area corresponding to the fluctuation. has been done. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to this area, the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. 4. The preliminary determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: Step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the advance determination information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas. If the prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, if the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-read effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read performance pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "reach with reach" (step S4603). Whether it is a "big hit" or "a hit with reach" can be determined based on, for example, the preliminary determination result of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). If the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach loss" (step S4603: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, if the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "Jackpot" or "Lose with reach" (step S4603: YES), a pre-read performance execution determination that determines whether or not to execute the pre-read performance; Then, prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the prefetch performance random number, and performs the prefetch performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the prefetch performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93. Whether or not this is the case, and the prefetch effect pattern in the case of performing the prefetch effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-judgment result is "Jackpot" and the pre-read effect random number is "0-55", the pre-read effect is "none", and if the pre-read effect random value is "56-67", the pre-read effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. In addition, if the pre-judgment result is "reach and loss" and the pre-read effect random number is "0 to 107", the pre-read effect will be "none", and if the pre-read effect random value is "108 to 114", the pre-read effect will be When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. Note that the type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-read effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-read effect pattern is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when storing the pre-read effect pattern in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-judgment command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area are stored. A prefetch effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), "pattern A" is not only set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received advance determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and the corresponding area. Set "Pattern A" to "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effects that are executed before the variable effects corresponding to the fourth storage area (variable effects corresponding to this area and the first to third storage areas). . Note that whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing to execute the pre-read effect has already passed, the pre-read effect will not be executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-read effect, it will be executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. In step S4604, if it is determined that the prefetch effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variable effect start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: Step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current gaming status, symbol information indicating the symbol as a determination result of the winning determination process of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs basic performance pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic performance pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display of predetermined characters and their movements, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67) , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up production and look-ahead production on top of this basic production. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the basic performance pattern by referring to the basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic performance pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of core performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, and multiple types of core performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, Multiple types of basic performance patterns are set to perform no-reach, no-lose performance. The type of basic performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic performance pattern for performing the SP1 performance is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", a basic performance pattern that performs a no-reach performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up performance pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance up random number counter, and determines the chance up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are "P1" to "P16". The chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 includes a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". You may or may not be prepared.

In Figure 43, the chance-up effect patterns are "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", " 4-NO,” “4-SP1,” “4-SP2,” “4-SP3,” and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a count performance pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count performance pattern determination process includes the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during the probability change, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time saving, the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from the time the power is turned on, and the number of fluctuations after the jackpot game. This is a process for displaying the number of fluctuations and the like on the display screen 7a. The performance control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of probability variations on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability variation production counter at the time of probability variation. Moreover, the performance control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of probability changes based on the value of the time-saving performance counter when time is shortened.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the evening effect counter. The ceiling effect counter stores the number of changes remaining until the ceiling is reached, and the overnight effect counter records the number of changes since the power is turned on. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations since the power is turned on by incrementing the overnight performance counter each time it receives a variable performance end command from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2 (for example, TH2=200) when the value of the evening effect counter is TH1 (for example, TH1=10). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, no chance image is displayed. Thereby, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the gaming machine 1 has inherited the number of games from the previous day and that the ram has not been cleared. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH3 (for example, TH3=50). Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 may erase the display and chance image representing the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the evening performance counter is TH4 (for example, TH4=100). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display again the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH5 (for example, TH5=200). The production control microcomputer 91 may decide whether or not to display the value of the ceiling production counter based on the value of the evening production counter as described above, or may decide based on the value of the ceiling production counter. Good too. For example, the production control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the ceiling production counter is TH6 (for example, TH6=100), and displays the value of the ceiling production counter when the value of the ceiling production counter is TH7 (for example, TH7=70). At this time, the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be erased, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (for example, TH8=50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count performance pattern determination process, the combination of performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed may be determined by referring to the performance control microcomputer 91, the random number value, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54. Based on these, it is determined what kind of performance will be performed as a variable performance.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 is realized. Step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the variable effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a variable production timer (step S5030) and ends this process. A variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the variation effect timer.

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation performance (FIG. 36: Step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer has reached zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variable performance is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the command before the end of variation in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command from which the production control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 etc. that it is a specific timing during the variation production, and when the image control board 100 receives the variation before end command. According to the information included in the before-variation-end command, the content of the presentation is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc.

If it is not the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-read effect pattern information in the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command that does not include pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variable effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect that displays a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect to fade the preview image.

8. Operation of the image control microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. 45. Buffers and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after CPU initialization processing, display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If it has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying a variable effect (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads out a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the image display device 7. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying a prefetch effect (step S5004). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the image control microcomputer 101 skips the above-mentioned processing.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and displays the variable effect stop display on the image display device 7 (step S5006). . On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the image control microcomputer 101 skips the above-mentioned processing.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM 103 predetermined images instructed by various commands in addition to the above-mentioned commands, and causes the image display device 7 to display the read images. For example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an opening performance start command, it reads a predetermined opening performance image instructed in the opening performance start command from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Further, when a round performance start command is received, a predetermined round performance image instructed in the round performance start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image specified in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7, and this process is ended.

9. Operation of the movable body and display effect of the sub-display screen 64 Using FIGS. 69) and the display effect of the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be explained. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during game performance (display performance), initial operation when power is turned on, etc. will be carried out. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a display performance to display a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during a game performance (display performance) or during an initial operation when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, and has an upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and a lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper and lower ends of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the center is visible in front of the image display device 7 (front surface). As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). In the retracted position, the first movable accessory 14 may be partially stored so that the remaining part is visible, or may be completely stored and difficult to see. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to be able to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction in front of the display screen 7a. Moreover, it can stand still at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be set arbitrarily. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second mode). The first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion formed in at least a portion thereof, or may have transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 includes a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it, and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode) . In this second aspect, the decoration part stops in front of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can be moved upward (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIG. 48 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can stop there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. The frame movable accessory 69 is constituted by a pair of flat members arranged on both the left and right sides of the handle 60, and is configured to be movable in the left and right directions, respectively. The two members are made of flexible members and are configured such that one main surface of each member moves toward or away from the handle 60. As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 are normally stationary at retracted positions (home positions) far from the handle 60 on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively (first mode) . As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 each move (advance) from the retracted position in a direction approaching the handle 60, that is, move close to each other, and each move toward the handle 60. It can stand still at the position where it is touched (second mode). When the movable frame accessory 69 is in the advanced position, it touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60. The frame movable accessory 69 can move in the direction in which the two members are separated from each other so that the second mode changes to the first mode.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effect of the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U can each independently display images. Further, it is possible to perform effects linked to the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Production Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Mode Examples of the Present Embodiment Each production example (display production example, role object movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, examples of effects, modifications, and examples of aspects of the production example will also be explained. As mentioned above, the performance that will be described below is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, preliminary determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, etc. Further, in some display presentation examples, a hold display (hold icon) may be omitted.

The decorative pattern side-by-side effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 51 to 53. This decorative pattern side-by-side presentation is executed during the fluctuating presentation of the decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a side-by-side display of decorative patterns, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Horizontal decoration design A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern side-by-side presentation A. The decorative pattern side-by-side presentation is a presentation in which the combination of two decorative patterns arranged in a horizontal direction (horizontal direction) among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a is changed. 51(A) to (F) show an example of one variation of the special figure variation, and FIGS. 51(G) to (L) show an example of another one variation.

In the decorative pattern side-by-side presentation A, first, as shown in FIG. 51(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in high-speed fluctuations. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of numerical symbols are displayed vertically in each pattern array so that they can be visually recognized, like the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. It moves downward and frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are decelerated in order to change from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then are stopped and displayed at "3", respectively. At this time, "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a, and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of three positions, the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display screen 7a. In each fluctuating pattern arrangement, when one decorative pattern among "123456789" stops at either the upper, middle, or lower tier of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in each symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed (the same applies after the temporary stop display) on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. Here, the display stops at "3". As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are lined up horizontally in the upper row of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol in the lower row of the display screen 7a The "3" in 8R is not lined up in the horizontal direction with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(D), the "3" of the medium decorative pattern 8C, which was stopped and displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a, moves downward again, and is again stopped and displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a. . As a result, the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up horizontally in the lower row of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol in the upper row of the display screen 7a The "3" in 8L is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R). In this way, among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the combination of two decorative patterns arranged in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) changes (Fig. 51(C) is the first time, Fig. 51(D) is If the second time) is executed, it suggests that there is a high expectation of a jackpot.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(E), the "3" of the medium decorative pattern 8C that was stopped and displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a changes again (moves downward again). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the display screen 7a. Here, the display stops at "3". As a result, "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L in the upper row of the display screen 7a, "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C in the middle row of the display screen 7a, and "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R in the lower row of the display screen 7a are , line up diagonally in a row and win "333".

FIGS. 51(G) to (L) show examples of one variation different from those shown in FIGS. 51(A) to (F). In another variation, first, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 51(A). After that, as shown in FIG. 51(G), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are decelerated in order and change from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and then each is stopped and displayed at "3". . At this time, "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed on the middle stage of the display screen 7a, and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at any of the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display screen 7a. In each fluctuating pattern arrangement, when one decorative pattern among "123456789" stops at either the upper, middle, or lower tier of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in each symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a. Here, the display stops at "3". As a result, in the middle row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are lined up in the horizontal direction, and the right decorative pattern in the upper row of the display screen 7a The "3" in 8R is not lined up in the horizontal direction with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 51(I), "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C that was stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R that was stopped and displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a. 3'' move downward again, and are stopped and displayed again at the bottom of the display screen 7a. As a result, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up in the horizontal direction, and the left decorative pattern in the middle part of the display screen 7a The "3" in 8L is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R). In this way, among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the combination of two decorative patterns arranged in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction) changes (Fig. 51 (H) is the first time, Fig. 51 (I) is If the second time) is executed, it suggests that there is a high expectation of a jackpot.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(J), the "3" of the medium decorative pattern 8C that was stopped and displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a changes again (moves downward again). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(L), the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the display screen 7a. Here, the display stops at "3". After the decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward again and is stopped and displayed again on the lower stage of the display screen 7a. As a result, "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L at the bottom of the display screen 7a, "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C, and "3" in the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up horizontally, resulting in a hit of "333". .

[Horizontal decoration B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern side-by-side presentation B. The decorative pattern side-by-side presentation is a presentation in which the combination of two decorative patterns arranged in a horizontal direction (horizontal direction) among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a is changed.

In the decorative pattern side-by-side presentation B, first, as shown in FIG. 52(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in high-speed fluctuations. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of numerical symbols are displayed vertically in each pattern array so as to be visible, like the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. 52(B), and are framed from the top of the display screen 7a. It moves downward and frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 52(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate in order and change from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and then are each stopped at "3" (temporary stop display). The same applies hereafter). At this time, "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a, and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed on the lower stage of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of three positions, the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display screen 7a. In each fluctuating pattern arrangement, when one decorative pattern among "123456789" stops at either the top, middle, or bottom of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in each symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. Here, the display stops at "3". As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are lined up horizontally in the upper row of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol in the lower row of the display screen 7a The "3" in 8R is not lined up in the horizontal direction with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C).

Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 52(C). In other words, the medium decorative pattern 8C may stop at the middle or bottom of the display screen 7a, in addition to the top. Moreover, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped and displayed with a different number from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when "3" is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative pattern 8C, a jackpot of "333" is obtained on the diagonal line. On the other hand, when the medium decorative pattern 8C is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower rows (for example, FIG. 52(I)), it is fixed and stopped when it misses. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the same horizontal line (horizontal line), a re-fluctuation effect of the other decorative pattern (here, the right decorative pattern 8R) whose horizontal line is not aligned with the middle decorative pattern 8C is performed as a chance effect.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52(C), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are the same due to the stop display of the medium decorative pattern 8C. Since the numbers are lined up in the horizontal direction, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the remaining decorative patterns (right decorative pattern 8R) that are not lined up are re-varied.

After the right decorative pattern 8R changes again in FIG. 52(D), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 52(E). Here, the display stops at "3". Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 52(E). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the top or middle of the display screen 7a, in addition to the bottom. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed with a different number from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, when "3" is stopped and displayed in the upper row of the right decorative pattern 8R, it becomes a jackpot of "333" on the horizontal line (FIG. 52 (J)). On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower rows (for example, FIG. 52(K)), it is fixed and stopped when it misses. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(E), the number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the stop display is on a different line (horizontal line) from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. In this case, as a chance effect, one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward again and lines up with the right decorative pattern 8R, and the other one changes again.

That is, as shown in FIG. 52(E), when "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the lower row, then, as shown in FIG. 52(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C moves downward again. , the display stops at the bottom. As a result, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (medium decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same numbers, so as shown in FIG. 52(G). , re-variation is executed for the remaining decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) that are not lined up.

After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again in FIG. 52(G), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 52(H). Here, the display stops at "3". As a result, the jackpot of "333" is announced. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 52(H). That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may stop at the top or middle of the display screen 7a, in addition to the bottom. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L may be stopped and displayed with a different number from the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when "4" is stopped and displayed in the lower row of the left decorative pattern 8L, it is fixed and stopped at the edge of "433" on the horizontal line (FIG. 52(L)).

FIG. 52(I) shows a state in which, after FIG. 52(B), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at "4" in the middle of the display screen 7a. In this case, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have the same number and are not lined up in the horizontal direction, so a mismatch results in a fixed stop.

FIG. 52(J) shows a state in which the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at "3" in the upper row of the display screen 7a after FIG. 52(D). In this case, you will get a jackpot of "333" on the horizontal line.

FIG. 52(K) shows a state in which the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at "4" in the upper row of the display screen 7a after FIG. 52(D). In this case, a definite stop occurs when the horizontal line is off the line "334".

FIG. 52(L) shows a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at "3" at the bottom of the display screen 7a after FIG. 52(G). In this case, a definite stop occurs when the horizontal line deviates from "433".

[Decorative design side-by-side production C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern side-by-side presentation C. The decorative pattern side-by-side presentation is a presentation in which the combination of two decorative patterns arranged in a horizontal direction (horizontal direction) among the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a is changed. 53(A) to (F) show an example of one variation of the special figure variation, and FIGS. 53(G) to (L) show an example of another one variation.

In the decorative pattern side-by-side presentation C, first, as shown in FIG. 53(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in high-speed fluctuations. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of numerical symbols are displayed vertically in each pattern array so that they can be visually recognized, like the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. It moves downward and frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of three positions, the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display screen 7a. In each fluctuating pattern arrangement, when one decorative pattern among "123456789" stops at either the upper, middle, or lower tier of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears.

As shown in FIG. 53(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R decelerate in order and change from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and then are each stopped at "3" (temporary stop display). The same applies hereafter). At this time, both "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the upper stage of the display screen 7a. As a result, in the upper row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up in the horizontal direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C that is being displayed in a variable manner is , it is in a state where it is not lined up in the horizontal direction with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R). The medium decorative pattern 8C is decelerated and changes from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display, and a plurality of vertically arranged number symbols become visible in each symbol row.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a. Here, the display stops at "3". Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 53(C). That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C may stop at the top or bottom of the display screen 7a, in addition to the middle. Moreover, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped and displayed with a different number from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, if "3" is stopped and displayed on the upper row of the medium decorative pattern 8C, a jackpot of "333" will be achieved on the upper horizontal line. On the other hand, if the medium decorative pattern 8C is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, or lower rows, it will be fixed and stopped when it misses. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(C), a horizontal line (horizontal line) that has the same number "3" as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is different from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, i.e. , when the display is stopped in the middle or lower row, as a chance effect, one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward again and lines up with the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the other one changes again.

That is, as shown in FIG. 53(C), when "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the middle row, then as shown in FIG. 53(D), the left decorative pattern 8L (or the right decorative pattern 9R) ) moves downward again and stops at the middle row. As a result, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) are lined up horizontally with the same numbers, so as shown in FIG. 53(E). , re-variation is executed for the remaining decorative symbols (right decorative symbol 8R) that are not lined up.

After the right decorative pattern 8R changes again in FIG. 53(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 53(F). Here, the display stops at "3". This results in a jackpot of "333" on the horizontal line. Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 53(F). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the top or bottom of the display screen 7a, in addition to the middle. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed with a different number from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. For example, if the right decorative pattern 8R is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, or lower rows, it will definitely stop when it misses. On the other hand, when the number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, and it is stopped and displayed on a different line (horizontal line) from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, as a chance effect, One of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C moves again and lines up with the right decorative pattern 8R, and the other moves again.

FIGS. 53(G) to (L) show examples of one variation different from those shown in FIGS. 53(A) to (F). In another variation, first, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 53(A). After that, as shown in FIG. 53(G), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) simultaneously decelerate and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then stops and is displayed at "3" in the upper row of the display screen 7a. Here, too, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at any of the three positions of the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display screen 7a. In each fluctuating pattern arrangement, when one decorative pattern among "123456789" stops at either the upper, middle, or lower tier of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. In FIG. 53(G), in the upper row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are lined up in the horizontal direction, and the right decoration is changing. The symbol 8R is not lined up with the other two decorative symbols (the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative symbol 8C) in the horizontal direction.

Note that two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that in FIG. 53(G). be. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C may stop at the middle or bottom of the display screen 7a, in addition to the top. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped and displayed with different numbers, or may be stopped and displayed at different vertical positions. When the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed with different numbers, they are definitely stopped when they are out of alignment. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(G), when the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C have the same number and are stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line, three decorative patterns are displayed as a chance effect. 8L, 8C, and 8R change again, suggesting that the expectation of winning is high (for example, 30%). A combination other than the combination of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped and displayed as two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

That is, as shown in FIG. 53(G), two decorations are displayed by stopping two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C). Since the symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C) are lined up horizontally with the same numbers, the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are revaried as shown in FIG. 53(H). This suggests that the expectation of winning is high (for example, 30%).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(I), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then stops and is displayed at "3" in the middle of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 53(I), in the middle stage of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up in the horizontal direction, and the left decoration is changing. The pattern 8L is not lined up with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R) in the horizontal direction.

Note that two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that in FIG. 53(I). be. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the top or bottom of the display screen 7a, in addition to the middle. Further, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed with different numbers, and may be stopped and displayed at different vertical positions. When the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with different numbers from each other, they are definitely stopped when they miss. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(I), when the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same number and are stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line, as a chance effect (second time). The three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change again, suggesting that the expectation of winning is high (for example, 60%). As two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, a combination other than the combination of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 53(I), two decorations are displayed by stopping two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (in this case, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R). Since the symbols (the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same numbers, the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-varied as shown in FIG. 53(J). This second presentation suggests that the expected degree of winning is even higher (for example, 60).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(K), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then stops and displays at "3" at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 53(K), in the lower row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up in the horizontal direction, and the middle decoration is changing. The symbol 8C is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative symbols (the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L and the "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R).

Note that two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that in FIG. 53(K). be. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the middle or upper tier of the display screen 7a, in addition to the lower tier. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed with different numbers, or may be stopped and displayed at different vertical positions. When the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed with different numbers from each other, they are definitely stopped when they are out of alignment. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(K), when the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same number and are stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line (horizontal line), as a chance effect (third time). The remaining one decorative pattern that has not been changed again (here, the medium decorative pattern 8C) is stopped and displayed as the same numerical pattern (here, "3") as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, resulting in a jackpot. A combination other than the combination of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed as two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.

That is, as shown in FIG. 53(K), two decorations are displayed by stopping two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R). Since the symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same number, the third chance effect will stop the display in a jackpot format of "333" as shown in Figure 53 (L). be done.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the horizontal arrangement of decorative symbols is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L are lined up horizontally on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is the middle decorative pattern. As shown in FIG. 51(D), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned horizontally. It is possible to perform a second performance in which the left decorative patterns 8L and the middle decorative patterns 8C are lined up and not lined up along the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 52(C) and (F), and FIGS. 53(C) and (D).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51(C), in the first performance, the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at the upper stage of the display screen 7a and is aligned horizontally with the left decorative pattern 8L. , as shown in FIG. 51(D), in the second performance, after a temporary stop, it moves in the fluctuation direction (downward), temporarily stops again at the lower stage of the display screen 7a, and moves horizontally to the right decorative pattern 8R. Line up in the direction. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 52(C) and (F), and FIGS. 53(C) and (D).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the right decorative pattern 8R changes in the first effect, and as shown in FIG. 52(F), in the second effect, the right decorative pattern 8R changes. , the right decorative pattern R is temporarily stopped. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 53(B) and 53(D).
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the temporarily stopped middle decorative pattern 8C, left decorative pattern 8L, and right decorative pattern 8R each represent the same number "3". There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the side-by-side display of decorative symbols is shown.
[Modification 1]
The configurations of the side-by-side decorative designs A to C may be combined as appropriate. Furthermore, the configurations of the side-by-side decorative symbols A to C are merely examples, and some of the effects may not be provided.

[Modification 2]
In the horizontal decorative pattern performances A to C, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number "3". However, in the side-by-side decorative symbols A to C, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the left decorative symbol 8L, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped with at least one different number.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern side-by-side performances A to C, the movement or temporary stop timing of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be replaced with the movement or temporary stop timing of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, the movement or temporary stop timing of the middle decorative pattern 8C may be replaced with the movement or temporary stop timing of the right decorative pattern 8R. Further, the movement or temporary stop timing of the left decorative pattern 8L may be replaced with the movement or temporary stop timing of the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern representing one number,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern representing one number,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern representing one number,
The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are arranged in the first direction on the display means, and the third decorative pattern is aligned with the first decorative pattern in the first direction. A first performance in which they are not lined up along the line,
After the first performance, the first decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern are lined up along the first direction, and the second decorative pattern is aligned with the first decorative pattern and the third pattern. A second effect in which the objects are not lined up along the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the first performance, the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at a first position of the display means and aligned horizontally with the second decorative pattern,
In the second performance, after the temporary stop, the display device moves in the fluctuation direction, temporarily stops again at the second position of the display means, and lines up with the third decorative pattern in the horizontal direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
In the first performance, the third decorative pattern is changing;
In the second performance, the third decorative pattern is temporarily stopped;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
The first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern each represent the same number,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Decorative symbol reverse movement effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 54 to 56. This decorative pattern reverse movement performance is executed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern reverse movement effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64.

[Decorative pattern reverse movement effect A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern reverse movement effect A. In the decorative pattern reverse movement effect, two or more of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a temporarily stop, and one or more of them maintains the display. This is an effect in which the robot moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of movement (downward) and then stops at a position different from the position where it initially temporarily stopped. 54(A) to (D) show an example of one variation of the special figure variation, and FIGS. 54(E) to (H) show an example of another one variation. FIGS. 54(I) to (L) show yet another example of variation.

In the decorative symbol reverse movement performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 54(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at a high speed as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of numerical symbols are displayed vertically in each pattern array so that they can be visually recognized, like the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. It moves downward and frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 54(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are simultaneously decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display. The display becomes a low-speed fluctuation display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) is made at "3" at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of three positions, the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display screen 7a. In each fluctuating pattern arrangement, when one decorative pattern among "123456789" stops at either the upper, middle, or lower tier of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The right decorative pattern 8R maintains a state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are lined up in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction), and are being displayed in a variable manner. The right decorative pattern 8R is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the middle decorative pattern 8C).

As shown in FIG. 54(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (in this case, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed at the same time, so that the expectation described below can be expected. It is suggested that the suggestion effect will be executed. The expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the jackpot expectation level in the fluctuation based on the number and amount of movement of decorative symbols that move in the opposite direction to the fluctuation direction after a temporary stop.

FIG. 54(C) shows an example of an expectation level suggesting effect. In the expectation level suggesting performance, one or more of the two decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the lower or middle row of the display screen 7a are displayed in the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests that the expectation of winning is high. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the expected degree of winning varies. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 50%.

In FIG. 54(C), two of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the bottom of the display screen 7a maintain their display. while moving in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of fluctuation (downward). The two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expectation of winning in this variation is 50% (because the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two steps (lower row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(D), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) is made at "3" on the upper part of the display screen 7a. be done. As a result, the jackpot is confirmed and stopped at the top of the display screen 7a in the form of "333", and the jackpot is notified.

Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(D). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the middle or bottom of the display screen 7a, in addition to the top. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed with a different number from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, when the right decorative pattern 8R is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower rows, it is fixed and stopped when it misses. When the number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the display is stopped at a position that is different in the vertical direction from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C (in this case, the middle and lower tiers) , a re-fluctuation effect of one decorative pattern (here, the right decorative pattern 8R) whose horizontal lines are not aligned among the three decorative patterns is performed as a chance effect.

FIGS. 54(E) to (H) show examples of one variation different from those shown in FIGS. 54(A) to (D). In another variation, first, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 54(A). After that, as shown in FIG. 54(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) simultaneously decelerate and change at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) is made at "3" at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a state of high-speed fluctuation display. It is suggested that the expectation level suggesting performance is executed by simultaneously stopping and displaying two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C). . The expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the jackpot expectation level in the fluctuation based on the number and amount of movement of decorative symbols that move in the opposite direction to the fluctuation direction after a temporary stop. In the expectation level suggesting performance, one or more of the two decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the lower or middle row of the display screen 7a are displayed in the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests that the expectation of winning is high. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the expected degree of winning varies. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 50%.

After FIG. 54(B), in FIG. 54(E), one of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The two decorative patterns (middle decorative pattern 8C) move in the direction (upward) opposite to the direction of movement (downward) while maintaining their display. Then, one decorative pattern (medium decorative pattern 8C) is stopped and displayed in the middle stage of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expectation of winning in this variation is 20% (because the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (lower row → middle row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 54(F), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed at "3" in the middle of the display screen 7a. be done. As a result, the two "3" decorative patterns (the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) are arranged horizontally in the middle row of the display screen 7a.

Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(F). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the top or bottom of the display screen 7a, as well as the middle. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed with a different number from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, when the right decorative pattern 8R is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower rows, it is fixed and stopped when it misses. The number "3" is the same as the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the stop display is at the same vertical position as one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C (in this case, the middle or lower tier). In this case, a re-fluctuation performance of one decorative pattern (here, the left decorative pattern 8L) whose horizontal lines are not aligned among the three decorative patterns is performed as a chance performance.

That is, as shown in FIG. 54(F), when "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the middle row, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (middle decorative pattern 8C and Since the right decorative patterns 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same numbers, as shown in FIG. 54(G), the remaining decorative patterns (left decorative patterns 8L) that are not lined up are revaried.

After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again in FIG. 54(G), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 54(H). Here, the display stops at "4". As a result, the deviation of "433" is notified. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(H). That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may stop at the top or bottom of the display screen 7a, in addition to the middle. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L may be stopped and displayed with the same number as the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when "3" is stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left decorative pattern 8L, the jackpot of "333" is confirmed and stopped on the horizontal line.

FIGS. 54(I) to (L) show examples of one variation different from those shown in FIGS. 54(A) to (D). In another variation, first, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 54(A). After that, as shown in FIG. 54(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) simultaneously decelerate and change at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) is made at "3" at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a state of high-speed fluctuation display. It is suggested that the expectation level suggesting performance is executed by simultaneously stopping and displaying two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C). . The expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the jackpot expectation level in the fluctuation based on the number and amount of movement of decorative symbols that move in the opposite direction to the fluctuation direction after a temporary stop. In the expectation level suggesting performance, one or more of the two decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the lower or middle row of the display screen 7a are displayed in the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests that the expectation of winning is high. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the expected degree of winning varies. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 50%.

After FIG. 54(B), in FIG. 54(I), one of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L) move in the direction (upward) opposite to the direction of movement (downward) while maintaining their display. Then, one decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L) is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expected degree of winning in this variation is 30% (because the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is 2 steps (lower row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (J), the right decorative pattern 8R decelerates and changes from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed at "3" on the upper part of the display screen 7a. be done. As a result, the two "3" decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are arranged horizontally in the upper row of the display screen 7a.

Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(J). That is, the right decorative pattern 8R may stop at the middle or bottom of the display screen 7a, in addition to the top. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped and displayed with a different number from the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C. As an example, if the right decorative pattern 8R is a number other than "3" and is stopped and displayed in any of the upper, middle, and lower rows, it will definitely stop when it misses. It is the same number "3" as the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C, and is stopped and displayed at the same position in the vertical direction as one of the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C (in this case, the upper or lower row). In this case, as a chance performance, a re-fluctuation performance of one decorative pattern (in this case, the middle decorative pattern 8C) whose horizontal lines are not aligned among the three decorative patterns is performed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 54(J), when "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the upper row, two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (the left decorative pattern 8L and Since the right decorative symbols 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same numbers, as shown in FIG. 54(K), re-variation is executed for the remaining decorative symbols (medium decorative patterns 8C) that are not lined up.

After the medium decorative pattern 8C changes again in FIG. 54(K), the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 54(L). Here, the display stops at "4". As a result, the deviation of "343" is notified. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 54(L). In other words, the medium decorative pattern 8C may stop at the middle or bottom of the display screen 7a, in addition to the top. Moreover, the middle decorative pattern 8C may be stopped and displayed with the same number as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when "3" is stopped and displayed in the upper row of the medium decorative pattern 8C, the jackpot of "333" is determined to stop on the horizontal line.

[Decorative pattern reverse movement effect B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern reverse movement effect B. In the decorative pattern reverse movement effect, two or more of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a temporarily stop, and one or more of them maintains the display. This is an effect in which the robot moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of movement (downward) and then stops at a position different from the position where it initially temporarily stopped. 55(A) to (G) show an example of one variation of the special figure variation, and FIGS. 55(H) to (J) show an example of another one variation. FIGS. 55(K) to (L) show yet another example of one variation.

In the decorative pattern reverse movement performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 55(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuation on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at a high speed as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of numerical symbols are displayed vertically in each pattern array so that they can be visually recognized, like the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. It moves downward and frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 55(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are simultaneously decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display. The display changes at a low speed, and thereafter, a stop display (temporary stop display) of "3" is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of three positions, the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display screen 7a. In each fluctuating pattern arrangement, when one decorative pattern among "123456789" stops at either the upper, middle, or lower tier of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, in the upper row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up in the horizontal direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C that is being displayed in a variable manner is , it is in a state where it is not lined up in the horizontal direction with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R).

As shown in FIG. 55(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (in this case, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stopped and displayed at the same time, so that the expectation described below can be expected. It is suggested that the suggestion effect will be executed. The expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the jackpot expectation level in the fluctuation based on the number and amount of movement of decorative symbols that move in the opposite direction to the fluctuation direction after a temporary stop.

FIGS. 55(C) and 55(D) show an example of an expectation level suggesting effect. In the expectation level suggesting performance, one or more of the two decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the lower or middle row of the display screen 7a are displayed in the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests that the expectation of winning is high. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the expected degree of winning varies. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 50%.

When the expectation level suggestion effect is started, as shown in FIG. The symbol 8R) moves in the fluctuating direction (downward) while maintaining its display, and stops at the lower stage. Here, when the expectation level suggesting performance is started, the two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are moved downward by two steps, but the pattern may be different. That is, there are cases in which only one decorative pattern is moved downward, and there are cases in which the decorative pattern is moved downward by only one step. If there is one decorative pattern that moves downwards and it is one row, it is suggested that the number of decorative patterns that move upwards is 0 or 1, not 2, and the number of decorative patterns that move upwards. When is 1, it is suggested that the amount of movement is one step. In other words, it is suggested that the expected level of jackpot is either no or 20%. In FIG. 55(C), since the two decorative patterns have been moved two levels downward, the expected level of jackpot is either not suggested, or is suggested to be 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50%.

In FIG. 55(D), one of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the bottom of the display screen 7a (right decorative pattern 8R). ) moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. Then, one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a. The timing at which one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) moves is the same as the timing at which "3" enters the frame in the medium decorative pattern 8C during low-speed fluctuation, and the timing at which it arrives at the middle stage is also the same. This effect suggests that the expected degree of winning in this variation is 20% (because the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (lower row → middle row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(E), the "3" of the medium decorative pattern 8C that is changing at low speed and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R that has moved upward stop at the middle stage of the display screen 7a at the same timing. Is displayed. As a result, the two "3" decorative patterns (the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) are arranged horizontally in the middle row of the display screen 7a. In this way, three decorative patterns have the same number "3", two of them are lined up horizontally, and one decorative pattern is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns. In this case, a re-fluctuation performance of one decorative pattern (here, the left decorative pattern 8L) whose horizontal lines are not aligned among the three decorative patterns is performed as a chance performance.

That is, as shown in FIG. 55(E), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R) are lined up horizontally with the same number, As shown in FIG. 55(F), re-variation is performed for the remaining decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) that are not lined up.

After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again in FIG. 55(F), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55(G). Here, the display stops at "4". As a result, the deviation of "433" is notified. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L may be displayed in a stopped state in a manner different from that shown in FIG. 55(G). That is, the left decorative pattern 8L may stop at the top or bottom of the display screen 7a, in addition to the middle. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L may be stopped and displayed with the same number as the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R. As an example, when "3" is stopped and displayed in the middle row of the left decorative pattern 8L, the jackpot of "333" is confirmed and stopped on the horizontal line.

FIGS. 55(H) to (J) show examples of one variation different from those shown in FIGS. 55(A) to (G). In another variation, first, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55(A). After that, as shown in FIG. 55(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) is made at "3" in the upper row of the display screen 7a. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, in the upper row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up in the horizontal direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C that is being displayed in a variable manner is , it is in a state where it is not lined up in the horizontal direction with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R). It is suggested that the expectation level suggesting performance is executed by simultaneously stopping and displaying two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R). . The expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the jackpot expectation level in the fluctuation based on the number and amount of movement of decorative symbols that move in the opposite direction to the fluctuation direction after a temporary stop. In the expectation level suggesting performance, one or more of the two decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the lower or middle row of the display screen 7a are displayed in the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests that the expectation of winning is high. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the expected degree of winning varies. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 50%.

When the expectation level suggestion effect is started, as shown in FIG. One of the decorative symbols (right decorative symbol 8R) among the symbols 8R) moves in the fluctuating direction (downward) while maintaining its display, and stops at the lower stage. Here, it is assumed that one decorative pattern (the right decorative pattern 8R) moves downward two steps when the expectation level suggesting performance is started, but the pattern may be different. That is, there are cases in which two decorative patterns are moved downward, and there are cases in which the decorative patterns are moved downward by only one step. If there is one decorative pattern that moves downwards and it is one row, it is suggested that the number of decorative patterns that move upwards is 0 or 1, not 2, and the number of decorative patterns that move upwards. When is 1, it is suggested that the amount of movement is one step. In other words, it is suggested that the expected level of jackpot is either no or 20%. In FIG. 55(H), one decorative pattern has been moved two levels downward, suggesting that the expected level of jackpot is either not, 20%, or 30%.

In FIG. 55(I), one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the bottom of the display screen 7a is moved in the opposite direction to the direction of movement (downward) while maintaining the display. (upward). Then, one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expected degree of winning in this variation is 30% (because the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is 2 steps (lower row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(J), the "4" of the medium decorative pattern 8C, which is moving at a low speed, and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R, which has moved upward, stop at the top of the display screen 7a at the same timing. Is displayed. As a result, the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are lined up in the horizontal direction in the deviated manner of "343" on the upper stage of the display screen 7a and are fixed and stopped.

FIGS. 55(K) to (L) show examples of one variation different from those shown in FIGS. 55(A) to (G). In another variation, first, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55(A). After that, as shown in FIG. 55(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) simultaneously decelerate and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuating display, and then a stop display (temporary stop display) is made at "3" in the upper row of the display screen 7a. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, in the upper row of the display screen 7a, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up in the horizontal direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C that is being displayed in a variable manner is , it is in a state where it is not lined up in the horizontal direction with the other two decorative patterns (the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R). It is suggested that the expectation level suggesting performance is executed by simultaneously stopping and displaying two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R). . The expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the jackpot expectation level in the fluctuation based on the number and amount of movement of decorative symbols that move in the opposite direction to the fluctuation direction after a temporary stop. In the expectation level suggesting performance, one or more of the two decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the lower or middle row of the display screen 7a are displayed in the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. Moving in the opposite direction (upward) suggests that the expectation of winning is high. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the expected degree of winning varies. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 50%.

When the expectation level suggestion effect is started, as shown in FIG. The symbol 8R) moves in the fluctuating direction (downward) while maintaining its display, and stops at the lower stage. Here, when the expectation level suggesting performance is started, the two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are moved downward by two steps, but the pattern may be different. That is, there are cases in which only one decorative pattern is moved downward, and there are cases in which the decorative pattern is moved downward by only one step. If there is one decorative pattern that moves downwards and it is one row, it is suggested that the number of decorative patterns that move upwards is 0 or 1, not 2, and the number of decorative patterns that move upwards. When is 1, it is suggested that the amount of movement is one step. In other words, it is suggested that the expected level of jackpot is either no or 20%. In FIG. 55(C), since the two decorative patterns have been moved two levels downward, the expected level of jackpot is either not suggested, or is suggested to be 20%, 30%, 40%, or 50%.

After FIG. 55(C), in FIG. 55(K), two of the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R) that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The two decorative patterns move in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of movement (downward) while maintaining their display. Then, the two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This suggests that the expected degree of winning in this variation is 50% (because the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two steps (lower row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(L), the "3" of the medium decorative pattern 8C that is changing at low speed and the "3" of the two decorative patterns that have moved upward (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) is stopped and displayed at the top of the display screen 7a at the same timing. As a result, the three decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are lined up horizontally in the winning pattern of "333" in the upper row of the display screen 7a and are fixed and stopped.

[Decorative pattern reverse movement effect C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern reverse movement effect C. In the decorative pattern reverse movement effect, two or more of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a temporarily stop, and one or more of them maintains the display. This is an effect in which the robot moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of movement (downward) and then stops at a position different from the position where it initially temporarily stopped. 56(A) to (F) show an example of one variation of the special figure variation, and FIGS. 56(G) to (L) show an example of another one variation.

In the decorative symbol reverse movement performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed fluctuations on the display screen 7a. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at a high speed as shown in FIG. becomes visible. On the other hand, during low-speed fluctuation display, a plurality of numerical symbols are displayed vertically in each pattern array so that they can be visually recognized, like the medium decorative pattern 8C in FIG. It moves downward and frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are simultaneously decelerated and changed from high-speed fluctuation display. The display changes at a low speed, and then the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at "3" on the top of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at "3" on the bottom of the display screen 7a. (Temporary stop display) is displayed. Here, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at one of three positions, the upper, middle, and lower positions of the display screen 7a. In each fluctuating pattern arrangement, when one decorative pattern among "123456789" stops at either the top, middle, or bottom of the display screen 7a, the display of the other decorative patterns disappears. The medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the "3" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R are lined up diagonally, and the middle decorative pattern 8C that is being displayed in a variable manner is different from the other two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and "3" of the right decorative pattern 8R) are not lined up diagonally.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (in this case, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stopped and displayed at the same time, which will lead to the expectation described later. It is suggested that the suggestion effect will be executed. The expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the jackpot expectation level in the fluctuation based on the number and amount of movement of decorative symbols that move in the opposite direction to the fluctuation direction after a temporary stop.

FIG. 56(C) shows an example of an expectation level suggesting effect. In the expectation level suggesting performance, when one or more decorative symbols move in the direction (upward) opposite to the direction of change (downward) while maintaining their display, it is suggested that the expectation of winning is high. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the expected degree of winning varies. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 50%.

When the expectation level suggesting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 56(C), one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the bottom of the display screen 7a continues to be displayed. while moving in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of fluctuation (downward). Then, one decorative pattern (right decorative pattern 8R) is stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expected degree of winning in this variation is 30% (because the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is 2 steps (lower row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 56(D) and 56(E), "3" has entered the frame with the medium decorative symbol 8C during low-speed fluctuation, and the two decorative symbols (temporarily halted) that were displayed in the upper row ( The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward in a state where they are horizontally lined up. Then, as shown in FIG. 56(F), three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the middle of the display screen 7a. As a result, the jackpot of "333" on the horizontal line is confirmed and stopped.

FIGS. 56(G) to (L) show examples of one variation different from those shown in FIGS. 56(A) to (F). In another variation, first, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in high-speed variation on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 56(A). After that, as shown in FIG. 56(G), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) simultaneously decelerate and fluctuate at high speed. The display changes to a low-speed fluctuation display, and then the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at "4" in the middle of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed at "6" in the middle of the display screen 7a. Displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped). The right decorative pattern 8R maintains a state of high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, in the middle row of the display screen 7a, the "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L and the "6" of the middle decorative pattern 8C are lined up in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction), and the right decorative pattern 8R, which is being displayed in a variable manner, is , it is not lined up horizontally with the other two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L "4" and the middle decorative pattern 8C "6").

As shown in FIG. 56(G), two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed at the same time, suggesting the level of expectation. It is suggested that the performance will be executed. The expectation level suggesting performance is a performance that suggests the jackpot expectation level in the fluctuation based on the number and amount of movement of decorative symbols that move in the opposite direction to the fluctuation direction after a temporary stop.

FIG. 56(H) shows an example of an expectation level suggesting effect. In the expectation level suggesting performance, when one or more decorative symbols move in the opposite direction (upward direction) to the direction of change (downward direction) while maintaining their display, it is suggested that the expectation level of winning is high. Depending on the number of decorative symbols that move upward and the amount of movement, the expected degree of winning varies. When the number of decorative symbols moving upward is 0, no expectation of winning is suggested. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 20%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 1 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 30%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (for example, from the bottom to the middle), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 40%. When the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two stages (lower stage → upper stage), it is suggested that the expected degree of winning is 50%.

When the expectation level suggesting effect is started, as shown in FIG. ) moves in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. The two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) are stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expected degree of winning in this variation is 40% (because the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is one step (middle row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(I), "4" has entered the frame with the right decorative pattern 8R that is changing at low speed, and the two decorative patterns that were stopped (temporarily stopped) in the upper row (left decorative pattern ``4'' of 8L and ``6'' of medium decorative pattern 8C move downward in a state that they are horizontally lined up. Then, the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed as "464" in the middle of the display screen 7a. As a result, only the medium decorative pattern 8C has a different number from the other two decorative patterns, so that the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed again.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(J), when the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed again, the second expectation level suggesting performance is started. Specifically, "4" of the two decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at the bottom of the display screen 7a move in the direction of change (downward) while maintaining the display. direction) and move in the opposite direction (upward). The two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R) are stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the display screen 7a. This effect suggests that the expected degree of winning in this variation is 50% (because the number of decorative symbols that move upward is 2 and the amount of movement is two steps (middle row → upper row)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(K), "4" has entered the frame with the medium decorative pattern 8C during low-speed fluctuation, and the two decorative patterns (left decorative pattern The "4" of 8L and the "4" of the medium decorative pattern 8C move downward in a state where they are horizontally lined up. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(L), three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a as "444". As a result, the jackpot is confirmed and displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern reverse movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(B), two decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C) is temporarily stopped at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 54(C), two decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the bottom of the display screen 7a after the first effect. (Left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) One or more of the decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L and middle decorative pattern 8C) move in the opposite direction (upward) to the direction of movement (downward) while maintaining the display After moving to , it is possible to perform a second effect in which the robot stops at a position different from the lower stage of the display screen 7a (the upper stage of the display screen 7a). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 54(E), (I), FIGS. 55(D), (I), (K), and FIGS. 56(C), (H), and (J).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(B), in the first performance, among the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the temporary stop is not made at the lower stage of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R is moving in the direction of variation (downward), and as shown in FIGS. The symbol 8R continues to move in the fluctuation direction (downward) and then temporarily stops. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. Figures 54 (B) (E), (B) (I), Figures 55 (B) to (D), (B) (H) (I), (B) (C) (K), Figure 56 (B) ) (C), (G) (H), (I) (J).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55(B), in the first performance, the decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R) that are temporarily stopped at the upper stage of the display screen 7a are It is in reach mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 56(I) and (J).

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern reverse movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The configurations of decorative pattern reverse movement effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. Furthermore, the configurations of the decorative symbol reverse movement effects A to C are merely examples, and some effects may not be provided.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern reverse movement performances A to C, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at the same number "3". However, in the decorative symbol reverse movement productions A to C, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the left decorative symbol 8L, and the right decorative symbol 8R may temporarily stop at least one different number.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern reverse movement effects A to C, the decorative pattern that moves in the opposite direction to the direction of movement may change the mode of the pattern. For example, a decorative pattern that moves in a direction opposite to the direction of movement may change in color or size.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns that can notify a win,
a first effect in which a plurality of decorative patterns of the set of decorative patterns temporarily stop at a specific position on the display means;
After the first performance, one or more decorative patterns among the plurality of decorative patterns temporarily stopped at the specific position move in a direction opposite to the direction of movement while maintaining the display, and then move to the specific position. A second production that stops at a different position than the
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the first performance, among the set of decorative symbols, the decorative symbols that are not temporarily stopped at the specific position are moving in the fluctuation direction;
In the second performance, the decorative pattern moving in the fluctuating direction in the first performance continues to move in the fluctuating direction and then temporarily stops;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the first production, the decorative pattern stopped at the specific position is in a reach mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Decorative pattern warp effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 57 to 59. This decorative pattern warp effect is executed during the variation presentation of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern warp effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Decorative pattern warp effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern warp effect A. In the decorative pattern warp effect, when the decorative patterns included in the vertical pattern row moving in the direction of fluctuation (downward) reach the first area of the display screen 7a, the display disappears in order from the area that it reached, and the display screen 7a disappears. This is an effect in which parts of the decorative pattern that reach the first area and disappear appear in order from the second area. 57(A) to (I) show an example of one variation of the special figure variation, and FIGS. 57(J) to (L) show an example of another one variation.

In the decorative pattern warp effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), a rectangular upper area UE is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a while the special pattern is changing, and a rectangular upper area UE is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A lower area LE is displayed. Therefore, the upper region UE and the lower region LE have different positions in the horizontal direction (they are shifted from each other). The upper region UE and the lower region LE may have a manner in which the entire region can be distinguished from other parts by color or the like, or a manner in which the outer shape of the region cannot be distinguished. Here, the entire upper region UE and lower region LE can be identified by color and pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(B), the middle decorative pattern 8C of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R moves in the fluctuation direction (downward) from the upper region UE and enters the frame. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is created by changing the display of the set of patterns. It represents a variable display (special pattern variation) and announces the special pattern lottery result by stopping display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from top to bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, a plurality of numerical patterns are vertically lined up and visually recognized in each pattern arrangement, and are framed from the upper side of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a moves downward and frames out from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 57(C), when the number pattern "7" located at the bottom of the pattern row (symbol arrangement) of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, from the reached part The display disappears (becomes difficult to see). Then, the portions that disappear upon reaching the lower region LE (portions that are difficult to see) appear in order from the upper region UE. Here, two portions (portions that are difficult to see) that disappear after reaching the lower region LE appear from the upper region UE. One of the two becomes the left decorative pattern 8L, and the other becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 57(C), the lower half of the "7" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and the display disappears (sequentially becomes difficult to see), and the lower half of the "7" reaches the lower area LE and disappears. The lower half of "7" of the decorative pattern 8C appears in order from the upper region UE. Two parts corresponding to the lower half of "7" of the disappeared medium decorative pattern 8C appear from the upper area UE, one becomes the left decorative pattern 8L and the other becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward in a state where the same numerical patterns are lined up side by side.

In FIG. 57(D), the symbol row of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "4" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE, and the display disappears one after another (sequentially becoming difficult to see). ), the lower half of the "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has reached the lower area LE and disappeared, appears in order from the upper area UE as a left decorative pattern 8L and a right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. As for the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the pattern row continues to move downward, and when the numerical pattern reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (it becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not appear again from the upper area UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward in a state where the same numerical patterns are lined up side by side.

In FIG. 57(E), the symbol row of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "2" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE, and the display disappears one after another (it becomes difficult to see in order). ), the lower half of "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has reached the lower area LE and disappeared, appears in order from the upper area UE as a left decorative pattern 8L and a right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. As for the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the pattern row continues to move downward, and when the numerical pattern reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (it becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not appear again from the upper area UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward in a state where the same numerical patterns are lined up side by side.

In FIG. 57(F), the symbol row of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "1" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE, and the display disappears in sequence (it becomes difficult to see in sequence). ), the lower half of the "1" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, which has reached the lower area LE and disappeared, appears in order from the upper area UE as a left decorative pattern 8L and a right decorative pattern 8R, respectively. As for the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the pattern row continues to move downward, and when the numerical pattern reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (it becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not appear again from the upper area UE. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move downward in a state where the same numerical patterns are lined up side by side.

In FIG. 57(F), the medium decorative patterns 8C are displayed in the order of "76543219", and the numbers following "9" in the medium decorative patterns 8C are not displayed, and "9" is the last number in the pattern row. It has a design. As the symbol row of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, the "9" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and the display disappears (sequentially becomes difficult to see), as shown in FIG. 57(G). Then, the medium decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved and displayed in the order of "76543219". After the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped at "1". Here, as shown in FIG. 57(H), in each symbol array, when one number symbol among "76543219" temporarily stops on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number symbols in the symbol array disappears. This results in a "1 1" reach mode.

Thereafter, in FIG. 57(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again in a reach state of "1" and the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(I), the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped at "1" (temporary stopped display), becomes a jackpot at "111", and is finally stopped.

FIGS. 57(J) to (L) show examples of one variation different from those shown in FIGS. 57(A) to (I). In another variation, first, the above-described FIGS. 57(A) to 57(E) are performed. After FIG. 57(E), FIGS. 57(J) to (L) are executed. In Figure 57 (J), the medium decorative patterns 8C are displayed in the order of "7654321987", and the numbers following "7" in the medium decorative patterns 8C are not displayed, and "7" is the last number in the pattern row. It has a design. As the pattern row of the decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, the "7" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and the display disappears in sequence (sequentially becoming difficult to see), and the medium decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. Become. After the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop at "8". Here, as shown in FIG. 57(K), in each symbol array, when one number symbol among "123456789" temporarily stops on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number symbols in the symbol array disappears. This results in a reach mode of "8 8".

Thereafter, in FIG. 57(K), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed again in the reach state of "8" and the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(L), the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped at "8" (temporary stopped display), becomes a jackpot at "888", and is finally stopped.
[Decorative pattern warp effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern warp effect B. In the decorative pattern warp effect, when the decorative patterns included in the vertical pattern row moving in the direction of fluctuation (downward) reach the first area of the display screen 7a, the display disappears in order from the area that it reached, and the display screen 7a disappears. This is an effect in which parts of the decorative pattern that reach the first area and disappear appear in order from the second area.

In decorative pattern warp effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), a rectangular upper area UE is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a while the special pattern is changing, and a rectangular upper area UE is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. A lower area LE is displayed. Therefore, the upper region UE and the lower region LE have different positions in the horizontal direction (they are shifted from each other). The upper region UE and the lower region LE may have a manner in which the entire region can be distinguished from other parts by color or the like, or a manner in which the outer shape of the region cannot be distinguished. Here, the entire upper region UE and lower region LE can be identified by color and pattern. Although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R moves in the fluctuation direction (downward) from the upper region UE and enters the frame.

Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R. It represents a variable display (special pattern variation) and announces the special pattern lottery result by stopping display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numerical patterns are displayed vertically in line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from top to bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, a plurality of numerical patterns are vertically lined up and visually recognized in each pattern arrangement, and are framed from the upper side of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a moves downward and frames out from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), when the number pattern "7" located at the bottom of the pattern row (symbol arrangement) of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, it starts from the area where it reached. The display disappears (becomes difficult to see). Then, the portions that disappear upon reaching the lower region LE (portions that are difficult to see) appear in order from the upper region UE. Here, one portion (portion that is difficult to see) that disappears after reaching the lower region LE appears from near the center of the upper region UE. This becomes the medium decorative pattern 8C. In FIG. 57(B), the lower half of the "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE and the display disappears (sequentially becomes difficult to see), and the left side reaches the lower area LE and the display disappears. The lower half of "7" of the decorative pattern 8L appears in order from the upper region UE. A portion corresponding to the lower half of the "7" of the disappeared left decorative pattern 8L appears from near the center of the upper area UE and becomes a medium decorative pattern 8C.

In FIG. 58(C), the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE, and the display disappears one after another (sequentially becomes difficult to see). ), the lower half of the "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L, which has reached the lower region LE and disappeared, appears as the middle decorative pattern 8C in order from the upper region UE. When the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward and reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see) starting from the area it reaches. Then, the portions that disappear upon reaching the lower region LE (portions that are difficult to see) appear in order from the upper region UE. Here, a portion that disappears after reaching the lower region LE (a portion that is difficult to see) appears from near the right side of the upper region UE. This becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 58(C), the lower end of "6" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears (sequentially becomes difficult to see), and the medium decorative pattern reaches the lower area LE and disappears. The lower end of "6" of 8C emerges from the upper area UE. A portion corresponding to the lower end of "6" of the disappeared medium decorative pattern 8C appears from near the right side of the upper area UE, and becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R moves downward.

In FIG. 58(D), the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE, and the display disappears one after another (sequentially becomes difficult to see). ), the lower half of "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L, which has reached the lower area LE and disappeared from display, appears as the middle decorative pattern 8C in order from the upper area UE. When the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward and reaches the lower area LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (becomes difficult to see) starting from the area it reaches. Then, the portions that disappear upon reaching the lower region LE (portions that are difficult to see) appear in order from the upper region UE. Here, a portion that disappears after reaching the lower region LE (a portion that is difficult to see) appears from near the right side of the upper region UE. This becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 58(D), the "4" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears (sequentially becomes difficult to see), and the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower area LE and disappears. "4" appears from the upper area UE. One "4" of the disappeared medium decorative pattern 8C appears from near the right side of the upper area UE, and becomes the right decorative pattern 8R. As for the right decorative pattern 8R, the pattern row continues to move downward, and when the numerical pattern reaches the lower region LE at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the display disappears (it becomes difficult to see). The part that has become difficult to see does not appear again from the upper area UE.

In FIG. 58(E), the left decorative patterns 8L are displayed in the order of "76543219", the numbers following "9" in the left decorative patterns 8L are not displayed, and "9" is the last number in the pattern row. It has a design. As the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, the "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower area LE and the display disappears (sequentially becomes difficult to see), as shown in FIG. 58(F). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is not displayed.

After that, in FIG. 58(F), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in the order of "76543219" like the left decorative pattern 8L, and the number following "9" of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed, and the pattern row ``9'' is the last number symbol. As the pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, as shown in FIG. ), as shown in FIG. 58(H), the medium decorative pattern 8C is not displayed.

In Figure 58 (I), the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in the order of "76543219" like the other two decorative patterns 8L and 8C, and the number following "9" in the right decorative pattern 8R is not displayed. , "9" is the last numerical symbol in the symbol row. As the pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, as shown in FIG. ), as shown in FIG. 58(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. As a result, none of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(L), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a new jackpot mode of "888" from the state where they are not displayed.

[Decorative pattern warp effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern warp effect C. In the decorative pattern warp effect, when the decorative patterns included in the vertical pattern row moving in the direction of fluctuation (downward) reach the first area of the display screen 7a, the display disappears in order from the area that it reached, and the display screen 7a disappears. This is an effect in which parts of the decorative pattern that reach the first area and disappear appear in order from the second area. 59(A) to 59(I) show an example of the decorative pattern warp effect C, and FIGS. 59(J) to 59(L) show other examples.

In the decorative pattern warp effect C, unlike the decorative pattern warp effect A (FIG. 57) and the decorative pattern warp effect B (FIG. 58), the visible upper area UE and lower area LE are not displayed. Instead, a lower left region EL1, an upper left region EL2, a lower right region ER1, an upper right region ER2, a lower middle region EC1, and an upper middle region EC2 are set, where the entire region is difficult to distinguish from other parts. Hereinafter, the upper left area EL2, the upper right area ER2, and the upper middle area EC2 are collectively referred to as "upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2", and the lower left area EL1, the lower right area ER1, and the lower middle area EC1 are collectively referred to as "lower area EL1," Also called EC1, ER1. Since background images and the like are displayed in these areas without distinguishing them from other areas of the display screen 7a, the player cannot distinguish between the inside and outside of the area. Although these regions are described here as rectangular, the shape of the region can be any shape. The upper regions EL2, EC2, and ER2 and the lower regions EL1, EC1, and ER1 have different positions in the horizontal direction (they are shifted from each other). As shown in FIG. 59(A), during the special pattern fluctuation, the left decorative symbol 8L of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R moves in the fluctuation direction (downward) from the upper end of the display screen 7a and enters the frame. .

Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and a special pattern is created by changing the display of the set of patterns. It represents a variable display (special pattern variation) and announces the special pattern lottery result by stopping display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and during low-speed variable display, a plurality of numeric patterns are displayed vertically. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in the order of "123456789" from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a during variable display. Therefore, in the three pattern arrays of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, the decorative patterns representing "123456789" are arranged along the fluctuation direction (vertical direction). When the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, a plurality of numerical patterns are vertically lined up and visibly displayed in each pattern arrangement, and are framed from the upper side of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a moves downward and frames out from the lower side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), when the number pattern "7" located at the bottom of the pattern row (symbol arrangement) of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a, from the reached part The display disappears (becomes difficult to see). Then, the portion that disappears upon reaching the lower left region EL1 (the portion that becomes difficult to see) appears in order from the upper left region EL2 and moves downward. The number pattern appearing from the upper left area EL2 is also the left decorative pattern 8L. That is, the left decorative patterns 8L are displayed in two rows. In FIG. 59(B), the lower half of the "7" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 and the display disappears (sequentially becoming difficult to see), and the lower half of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 and disappears. The lower half of "7" of the decorative pattern 8L appears in order from the upper left area EL2. The part corresponding to the lower half of "7" of the disappeared left decorative pattern 8L appears from the upper left area EL2 and becomes the second row of the left decorative pattern 8L.

In FIG. 59(C), the pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1, and the display disappears in order (it becomes difficult to see in order). ), the lower half of the "4" of the left decorative pattern 8L, which has reached the lower left area EL1 and disappeared, appears in order from the upper left area EL2. The right decorative pattern 8R moves in the fluctuation direction (downward) from the upper end of the display screen 7a and enters the frame.

As shown in FIG. 59(D), when the number pattern "7" located at the bottom of the pattern row (symbol arrangement) of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the reached area The display disappears (becomes difficult to see). Then, the portion that disappears upon reaching the lower right region ER1 (the portion that becomes difficult to see) appears in order from the upper right region ER2 and moves downward. The number pattern appearing from the upper right area ER2 is also the right decorative pattern 8R. That is, the right decorative patterns 8R are displayed in two rows. In FIG. 59(D), the lower half of the "7" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1 and the display disappears (sequentially becoming difficult to see), and then reaches the lower right area ER1 and disappears. The lower half of "7" of the right decorative pattern 8R appears sequentially from the upper right region ER2. A portion corresponding to the lower half of the "7" of the disappeared right decorative pattern 8R appears from the upper right area ER2 and becomes the second row of the right decorative pattern 8R. The medium decorative pattern 8C moves in the fluctuation direction (downward) from the upper end of the display screen 7a and enters the frame. The pattern row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, and the lower half of "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1, and the display disappears one after another (sequentially becomes difficult to see) and reaches the lower left area EL1. The lower half of "2" of the left decorative pattern 8L whose display has disappeared appears sequentially from the upper left area EL2.

As shown in FIG. 59(E), when the number pattern "7" located at the bottom of the pattern row (symbol arrangement) of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower middle area EC1 of the lower part of the display screen 7a, the reached part The display disappears (becomes difficult to see). Then, the portion that disappears upon reaching the middle lower region EC1 (the portion that becomes difficult to see) appears in order from the middle upper region EC2 and moves downward. The number pattern appearing from the middle upper area EC2 is also the middle decorative pattern 8C. That is, the medium decorative patterns 8C are displayed in two rows. In FIG. 59(E), the lower half of the "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the lower middle area EC1 and the display disappears (sequentially becoming difficult to see), and then reaches the lower middle area EC1 and disappears. The lower half of "7" of the middle decorative pattern 8C appears sequentially from the middle upper region EC2. A part corresponding to the lower half of the "7" of the disappeared medium decorative pattern 8C appears from the middle upper area EC2 and becomes the second row of the medium decorative pattern 8C. The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, and the lower half of "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1, and the display disappears in sequence (becomes difficult to see), and the lower right area ER1 The lower half of "4" of the right decorative pattern 8R, whose display has disappeared after reaching , appears sequentially from the upper right region ER2. The left decorative patterns 8L are displayed in the order of "76543219", and the numbers following "9" in the left decorative patterns 8L are not displayed, so that "9" is the last numeric pattern in the pattern row. As the symbol row of the left decorative pattern 8L continues to move downward, the "9" of the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 and disappears in sequence (sequentially becomes difficult to see), and then appears in order from the upper left area EL2. Only the left decorative pattern 8L is left.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "1". Here, in the pattern array included in the left decorative pattern 8L, when one number pattern among "76543219" temporarily stops on the display screen 7a, the display of other number patterns in the pattern pattern disappears. Here, as shown in the preceding FIG. 59(E), the lower half of "1" in the left decorative pattern 8L reaches the lower left area EL1 and disappears (it becomes difficult to see), and the upper left area EL2 When the lower half of "1" appears, the display changes and "1" is temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, in this case, the number symbol whose display reaches the lower left area EL1, part of the lower part disappears, and a part of the lower part appears from the upper left area EL2 becomes the number pattern which is stopped and displayed. . The pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continues to move downward, and the lower half of "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1, and the display disappears (sequentially becomes difficult to see), and the lower half of "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1. The lower half of "2" of the right decorative pattern 8R, whose display has disappeared after reaching , appears sequentially from the upper right region ER2. The pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C also continues to move downward, and the lower half of the "4" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the middle lower area EC1, and the display disappears in order (it becomes difficult to see in order), and the lower middle area EC1. The lower half of "4" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, whose display has disappeared after reaching , appears sequentially from the middle upper region EC2.

As shown in FIG. 59(G), the right decorative patterns 8R are displayed in the order of "76543219", and the numbers following "9" in the right decorative patterns 8R are not displayed, and "9" is the highest in the pattern row. It has a number pattern at the end. As the pattern row of the right decorative pattern 8R continued to move downward, the "9" of the right decorative pattern 8R reached the lower right area ER1, the display disappeared one after another (became difficult to see), and appeared in order from the upper right area ER2. Only the later right decorative pattern 8R is left. The pattern row of the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to move downward, and the lower half of "2" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the middle lower area EC1, and the display disappears in order (it becomes difficult to see in order), and the lower half of the "2" of the medium decorative pattern 8C reaches the middle lower area EC1. The lower half of "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C, whose display has disappeared after reaching , appears sequentially from the middle upper region EC2. The left decorative pattern 8L continues to be temporarily stopped at "1".

As shown in FIG. 59(H), the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stops at "9". Here, in the pattern array included in the right decorative pattern 8R, when one number pattern among "76543219" temporarily stops on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number patterns in the pattern arrangement disappears. Here, as shown in the previous figure 59 (G), the lower end of "9" of the right decorative pattern 8R reaches the lower right area ER1 and disappears (it becomes difficult to see), and the upper right area When the lower end of "9" appears from ER2, the display is switched and "9" is temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, here, the number symbol whose display reaches the lower right area ER1, part of the lower part disappears, and a part of the lower part appears from the upper right area ER2 is the number symbol which is stopped and displayed. Become. Thereafter, the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops at "2". Here, in the pattern array included in the medium decorative pattern 8C, when one number pattern among "76543219" temporarily stops on the display screen 7a, the display of the other number patterns in the pattern arrangement disappears. Here, as shown in the previous figure 59 (G), the lower end of "2" of the middle decorative pattern 8C reaches the middle lower area EC1 and the display disappears (it becomes difficult to see in order), and the middle upper When the lower end of "2" appears from area EC2, the display is switched and "2" is temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, here, the number pattern is stopped and displayed when the lower middle area EC1 is reached and a part of the lower side disappears, and the lower part appears from the upper middle area EC2. becomes. As a result, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the "129" deviation mode.

FIG. 59(I) shows another example of the decorative pattern warp effect C. In FIGS. 59(A) to (I), the upper end of the lower left area EL1 is located below the lower end of the upper left area EL2. Similarly, the upper end of the lower right region ER1 is located below the lower end of the upper right region ER2, and the upper end of the middle lower region EC1 is located below the lower end of the upper middle region EC2. However, as shown in FIG. 59(I), the upper end of the lower left area EL1 may be horizontally aligned with the lower end of the upper left area EL2. Similarly, the upper end of the lower right region ER1 may be aligned horizontally with the lower end of the upper right region ER2, and the upper end of the lower middle region EC1 may be aligned horizontally with the lower end of the upper middle region EC2.

59(J) to (L) show other examples of the decorative pattern warp effect C. In FIGS. 59(A) to (I), when the numerical symbols in the symbol rows (design array) of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach the lower regions EL1, EC1, and ER1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a, The display disappears in order, and the disappeared portions appear in order from the upper regions EL2, EC2, and ER2. However, as shown in FIGS. 59(J) to (L), the numerical symbols in the symbol rows (design array) of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R reach the lower areas EL1, EC1, and ER1 at the bottom of the display screen 7a. There may be a time lag before the portion where the display disappears appears from the upper areas EL2, EC2, and ER2. Furthermore, the lower regions EL1, EC1, and ER1 and the upper regions EL2, EC2, and ER2 may have different positions in the vertical direction. Further, the moving speed when reaching the upper regions EL2, EC2, ER2 and the moving speed when emerging from the lower regions EL1, EC1, ER1 and moving downward may be different.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern warp effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57(C), it is possible to perform an effect of displaying a symbol row in which a plurality of medium decorative symbols 8C are lined up along the fluctuation direction on the display screen 7a, When one of the medium decorative symbols 8C included in the symbol row moving in the movement direction reaches the lower area LE of the display screen 7a, a first effect in which the display disappears in order from the area it reaches, and an upper part of the display screen 7a. A second effect can be performed in which the parts of the middle decorative pattern 8C that reach the lower area LE and disappear appear in order from the area UE. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 58(B) and 59(B).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(A), the upper regions EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower regions EL1, EC1, ER1 are shifted from each other in horizontal position. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. Also in the lower area LE and upper area UE in FIGS. 57(A) and 58(A), the part in the lower area LE where the decorative pattern disappears and the part in the upper area UE where the decorative pattern appears are The horizontal positions are shifted from each other. Therefore, if these parts are defined as a lower region LE and an upper region UE, it can be said that the lower region LE and the upper region UE are shifted from each other in horizontal position.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57(A), the lower region LE is located lower than the upper region UE in the vertical direction. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 58(A) and 59(A).

[Modified example]
A modified example of the decorative pattern warp effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern warp effects A and B, the entire upper area UE and lower area LE can be identified by color and pattern. However, the upper region UE and the lower region LE may be in such a manner that the inside and outside of the region cannot be distinguished. Further, in the upper region UE and the lower region LE, only the outlines of the regions may be distinguishable, and the inside of the region may represent the same background image as the outside of the region. The same applies to the upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 of the decorative pattern warp effect C.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern warp effects A and B, the edge of the lower area LE where the decorative pattern disappears and the edge of the upper area UE where the decorative pattern appears extend in the horizontal direction. However, these edges may extend in a direction intersecting the horizontal direction. The same applies to the upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 of the decorative pattern warp effect C.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern warp effects A and B, the lower area LE and the upper area UE have been described as fixed areas that are part of the display screen 7a. However, the positions of the lower region LE and the upper region UE on the display screen 7a may be changed, or the sizes of the regions may be changed. The same applies to the upper areas EL2, EC2, ER2 and the lower areas EL1, EC1, ER1 of the decorative pattern warp effect C.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
It is possible to perform an effect in which the display means displays a pattern row in which a plurality of the decorative patterns are lined up along a fluctuation direction,
a first effect in which, when the decorative pattern included in the pattern row moving in the movement direction reaches a first area of the display means, the display disappears in order from the reached area;
A second effect in which parts of the decorative pattern that reach the first area and disappear appear in order from a second area of the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
The first region and the second region are shifted in horizontal position from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
In the vertical direction, the first region is located lower than the second region,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative symbol movement effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 60 to 62. This decorative pattern moving effect is executed while the decorative pattern is changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern movement effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern movement effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern movement effect A. The decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen 7a moves in a first direction, and a second part moves in a second direction. 60(A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative pattern moving effect A, and FIGS. 60(G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative pattern moving effect A.

In the first example of the decorative symbol movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the left symbol stop effect is executed after the fluctuation start effect. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern becomes slow and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(B), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "8" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. When the "8" symbol stops, a line L passing through the center of the "8" symbol and extending from the upper left to the lower right is displayed. The line L separates a first part B1 and a second part B2 of the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 60(C) to 60(E), a symbol part movement effect is executed. The pattern part movement performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern moves in a first direction, and a second part of the decorative pattern moves in a second direction. Here, the first part B1 moves in the upper right direction (first direction) away from the line L, and the second part B2 moves in the lower left direction (second direction) away from the line L.

FIG. 60(C) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, a display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually increase. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is the same.

FIG. 60(D) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 are maximized. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is the same.

FIG. 60(E) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, a display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually slow down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(F), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update performance is a performance in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the target of the pattern part movement performance. Here, a "4" symbol is displayed instead of the divided "8" symbol. Thereby, a reach mode is formed together with the "4" symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L.

In the second example of the decorative symbol movement performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the left symbol stop performance is executed after the fluctuation start performance. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern becomes slow and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(H), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "8" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. When the "8" symbol stops, a line L passing through the center of the "8" symbol and extending from the upper left to the lower right is displayed. The line L separates a first part B1 and a second part B2 of the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 60(I) to (K), a symbol part movement effect is executed. The pattern part movement performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern moves in a first direction, and a second part of the decorative pattern moves in a second direction. Here, the first part B1 of the right decorative pattern 8R moves in the lower right direction (first direction) along the line L, and the second part B2 of the right decorative pattern 8R moves in the upper left direction (second direction) along the line L. direction).

FIG. 60(I) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, a display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually increase. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is the same.

FIG. 60(J) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 are maximized. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is the same.

FIG. 60(K) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, a display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually slow down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(L), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update performance is a performance in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the target of the pattern part movement performance. Here, a "4" symbol is displayed instead of the divided "8" symbol. Thereby, a reach mode is formed together with the "4" symbol of the left decorative symbol 8L.

[Decorative pattern movement effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining decorative symbol movement effect B. The decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen 7a moves in a first direction, and a second part moves in a second direction. 61(A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative pattern moving effect B, and FIGS. 61(G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative pattern moving effect B.

In the first example of decorative symbol movement performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 61(A), a left symbol stop performance is executed after a fluctuation start performance. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern becomes slow and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. As a result, a reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L that stops at the "4" pattern. With the stop of the "4" pattern as the right decorative pattern 8R, a horizontal line passing through the center of the "4" pattern is applied to each of the "4" pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L and the "4" pattern as the right decorative pattern 8R. A line L is displayed. The line L separates a first part B1 and a second part B2 of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61(C) to (E), a symbol part movement effect is executed. The pattern part movement performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern moves in a first direction, and a second part of the decorative pattern moves in a second direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the first part B1 moves to the right (first direction) along the line L, and the second part B2 moves to the left (first direction) along the line L. second direction).

FIG. 61(C) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, a display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually increase. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is the same.

FIG. 61(D) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 are maximized. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is the same.

FIG. 61(E) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, a display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1 and the second part B2 gradually slow down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of the first portion B1 and the second portion B2 is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(F), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update performance is a performance in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the target of the pattern part movement performance. Here, a "5" symbol is displayed instead of the divided "4" symbol. As a result, the ready-to-reach mode for the "5" symbol is formed instead of the ready-to-reach mode for the "4" symbol.

In the second example of the decorative symbol movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed after the fluctuation start effect. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern becomes slow and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(H), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. As a result, a reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L that stops at the "4" pattern. With the stop of the "4" pattern as the right decorative pattern 8R, a horizontal line passing through the center of the "4" pattern is applied to each of the "4" pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L and the "4" pattern as the right decorative pattern 8R. A vertical line L1 and a vertical line L2 passing through the center of the "4" symbol are displayed. A first part B1, a second part B2, a third part B3, and a fourth part B4 of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are divided by lines L1 and L2.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61(I) to (K), a symbol part movement effect is executed. In the pattern part movement effect, the first part of the decorative pattern moves in the first direction, the second part of the decorative pattern moves in the second direction, the third part of the decorative pattern moves in the third direction, and the decorative pattern moves in the third direction. This is an effect in which the fourth part of the figure moves in the fourth direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the first part B1 moves in the upper left direction (first direction) away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2, and the second part B2 moves away from the line L1, The third part B3 moves in the upper right direction (third direction) away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2, and the fourth part B4 moves in the upper right direction (third direction) away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2. Move toward the lower left (fourth direction) away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2.

FIG. 61(I) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, a display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1, second part B2, third part B3, and fourth part B4 gradually become faster. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3, and the fourth part B4 are the same.

FIG. 61(J) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1, second part B2, third part B3, and fourth part B4 are maximized. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3, and the fourth part B4 are the same.

FIG. 61(K) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, a display is performed such that the moving speeds of the first part B1, second part B2, third part B3, and fourth part B4 gradually slow down. The magnitudes of the accelerations obtained by differentiating the moving speeds of the first part B1, the second part B2, the third part B3, and the fourth part B4 are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(L), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update performance is a performance in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the target of the pattern part movement performance. Here, a "5" symbol is displayed instead of the divided "4" symbol. As a result, the ready-to-reach mode for the "5" symbol is formed instead of the ready-to-reach mode for the "4" symbol.

[Decorative pattern movement effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern movement effect C. The decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen 7a moves in a first direction, and a second part moves in a second direction. 62(A) to (F) show a first example of the decorative symbol moving performance C, and FIGS. 62(G) to (L) show a second example of the decorative symbol moving performance C.

In the first example of the decorative symbol moving performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the left symbol stop performance is executed after the fluctuation start performance. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern becomes slow and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. As a result, a reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L that stops at the "4" pattern. With the stop of the "4" pattern as the right decorative pattern 8R, a horizontal line passing through the center of the "4" pattern is applied to each of the "4" pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L and the "4" pattern as the right decorative pattern 8R. A line L is displayed. The first part P and the second part Q of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are located at symmetrical positions with respect to the line L.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62(C) to 62(E), a symbol part movement effect is executed. The pattern part movement performance is a performance in which a first part of the decorative pattern moves in a first direction, and a second part of the decorative pattern moves in a second direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, point P (first part) moves to the right (first direction) along line L, and point Q (second part) moves along line L. Move to the left (second direction) along.

FIG. 62(C) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, a display is performed such that the moving speeds of points P and Q gradually increase. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of point P and point Q is the same.

FIG. 62(D) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement effect. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of points P and Q become maximum. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of point P and point Q is the same.

FIG. 62(E) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, a display is performed in which the moving speeds of points P and Q gradually slow down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of point P and point Q is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update performance is a performance in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the target of the pattern part movement performance. Here, a "5" symbol is displayed instead of the divided "4" symbol. As a result, the ready-to-reach mode for the "5" symbol is formed instead of the ready-to-reach mode for the "4" symbol.

In the second example of the decorative symbol movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the left symbol stop effect is executed after the fluctuation start effect. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern becomes slow and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that although the hold icon and the fluctuation icon are not displayed, they may be displayed (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "4" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. As a result, a reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L that stops at the "4" pattern. With the stop of the "4" pattern as the right decorative pattern 8R, a horizontal line passing through the center of the "4" pattern is applied to each of the "4" pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L and the "4" pattern as the right decorative pattern 8R. A vertical line L1 and a vertical line L2 passing through the center of the "4" symbol are displayed. Point P (first part), point Q (second part), point R (third part), and point S (fourth part) of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are relative to lines L1 and L2. in a symmetrical position.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 62(I) to 62(K), a symbol part movement effect is executed. In the pattern part movement effect, the first part of the decorative pattern moves in the first direction, the second part of the decorative pattern moves in the second direction, the third part of the decorative pattern moves in the third direction, and the decorative pattern moves in the third direction. This is an effect in which the fourth part of the figure moves in the fourth direction. Here, for each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, point P (first part) moves toward the upper left (first direction) so as to move away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2, and point Q (second part) moves away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2. part) moves in the lower right direction (second direction) away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2, and moves in the upper right direction (third direction) so that point R (third part) moves away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2. The point S (fourth part) moves to the lower left (fourth direction) so as to move away from the intersection of lines L1 and L2.

FIG. 62(I) shows the beginning of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, a display is performed such that the moving speed of point P, point Q, point R, and point S gradually increases. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of point P, point Q, point R, and point S is the same.

FIG. 62(J) shows the middle stage of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, display is performed such that the moving speeds of point P, point Q, point R, and point S are maximized. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of point P, point Q, point R, and point S is the same.

FIG. 62(K) shows the final stage of the symbol part movement performance. At this time, a display is performed in which the moving speeds of point P, point Q, point R, and point S gradually slow down. The magnitude of the acceleration obtained by differentiating the moving speed of point P, point Q, point R, and point S is the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(L), a symbol update effect is executed. The pattern update performance is a performance in which another pattern is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is the target of the pattern part movement performance. Here, a "5" symbol is displayed instead of the divided "4" symbol. As a result, the ready-to-reach mode for the "5" symbol is formed instead of the ready-to-reach mode for the "4" symbol.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a and the second part B1 (point Q) of the decorative pattern other than the first part are different from each other. It is possible to execute a pattern part movement effect (movement effect) that moves in a different direction (Fig. 60 (C) to (E), Fig. 60 (I) to (K), Fig. 61 (C) to (E), 61(I)-(K), FIG. 62(C)-(E), FIG. 62(I)-(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel performance using decorative patterns, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to "performance execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) is on one side of the line L (lines L1, L2) passing through the center of the decorative pattern, and the second part B2 (point Q) is On the other side with respect to line L (lines L1, L2) (Fig. 60 (C) to (E), Fig. 60 (I) to (K), Fig. 61 (C) to (E), Fig. 61 ( I) to (K), Fig. 62 (C) to (E), Fig. 62 (I) to (K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel performance using decorative patterns, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) is moved in the first direction, and the first part B1 (point P) is moved in the opposite direction to the first direction by the same distance as the moving distance of the first part B1 (point P). It is possible to execute a symbol part movement effect (anti-movement effect) that moves the second part B2 (point Q) (Fig. 60(C) to (E), Fig. 60(I) to (K), Fig. 61(C) ) to (E), Fig. 61 (I) to (K), Fig. 62 (C) to (E), Fig. 62 (I) to (K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel performance using decorative patterns, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the magnitude of the acceleration, which is the differential of the movement speed of the first part B1 (point P) and the second part B2 (point Q) in the symbol part movement performance (versus movement performance), is the same. The first part B1 (point P) and the second part B2 (point Q) are moved so that According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel performance using decorative patterns, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the embodiment described above, the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) that is the object of the pattern part movement effect is divided. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 62, a configuration may be adopted in which point P and point Q (point P, point Q, point R, and point S) are moved without dividing the decorative pattern. In order to avoid division, for example, the decorative pattern may be expanded/contracted or enlarged/reduced in accordance with the movement of point P and point Q (point P, point Q, point R, and point S).

[Modification 2]
In the pattern part movement effect of the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) and the second part (point Q) were configured to move in the in-plane direction of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the first part and the second part may be moved in an out-of-plane direction (for example, in a direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a). For example, it is conceivable to enlarge or reduce a part of the decorative pattern according to the movement of point P and point Q (point P, point Q, point R, and point S) back and forth.

[Modification 3]
In the embodiment described above, the line L1 (lines L1, L2) is displayed to show that the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) is divided. On the other hand, the predetermined line may not be displayed. Alternatively, it may be displayed only during a specific period of the symbol part movement effect.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the first part B1 (point P) and the second part B2 (point Q) of the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) move away from each other (FIGS. 60(C) to 60(E), 60 (I) to (K), Figures 61 (C) to (E), Figures 61 (I) to (K), Figures 62 (C) to (E), Figures 62 (I) to (K)), After that, another pattern was displayed in place of the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) that was the target of the pattern part movement effect (Fig. 60 (F), Fig. 60 (L), Fig. 61 (F), Fig. 61(L), FIG. 62(F), FIG. 62(L)). On the other hand, the first part B1 (point P) and the second part B2 (point Q) of the decorative pattern 8R (8L and 8R) move away from each other, then move closer to each other, and then move away from each other. You may also perform effects such as moving away or approaching. For example, in the first example of decorative pattern movement performance A, in Fig. 60 (C) → (D) → (E) → (D) → (C) → (D) → (E) →... You may perform a performance like this. At this time, in addition to the above configuration in which the "4" pattern is displayed after moving away from each other (Fig. 60 (E) → (F)), the divided decorative patterns 8R again form the "8" pattern after they approach each other. It is also possible to adopt a configuration (FIG. 60(C)→(B)) in which the process is terminated. In the latter case, the reach mode may not be formed and the result may be uneven.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means capable of performing a fluctuating performance of decorative symbols on a display screen,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a movement effect in which a first part of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the display screen and a second part of the decorative pattern other than the first part move in different directions. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
The first part is on one side with respect to a line passing through the center of the decorative pattern, and the second part is on the other side with respect to the line.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1 or aspect A4-2,
The performance execution means moves the first part in a first direction and moves the second part in a direction opposite to the first direction by the same distance as the movement distance of the first part. is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
The performance execution means moves the first part and the second part so that the magnitude of acceleration, which is a differential of the moving speed of the first part and the second part in the anti-movement performance, becomes the same.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
The performance execution means targets a plurality of decorative symbols and executes the moving performance in synchronization on the plurality of decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
After the anti-movement performance, the performance execution means moves the first part that has moved in the first direction in the second direction, and moves the first part in the second direction by the same distance as the moving distance of the first part. It is possible to perform a continuous movement effect in which the moved second part is moved in the first direction,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The aspect change variation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 63 to 65. This aspect change variation performance is executed in conjunction with the variation start performance of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the aspect change variation effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Aspect change variation production A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the aspect change variation effect A. In the mode change variation production, all of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a change from the first mode to the second mode, and then the decorative symbols in a predetermined row of the plural rows of decorative symbols change to the second mode. This is an effect that changes from the first mode to the third mode and starts to fluctuate.

In the aspect change variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. Note that it may be a temporary stop instead of a definite stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a character display effect is executed. The character display performance is a performance that displays an ally character on the screen. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The middle decorative pattern 8C is not visible (not visible). The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are partially covered with the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), a mode change effect (first change effect) is executed. The mode change performance is a performance that changes all of the decorative patterns in multiple rows from the first mode to the second mode. Here, the mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right side has changed from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode). The medium decorative pattern 8C is hidden from view by the ally character CRA. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are partially covered with the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a character non-display effect is executed. The character hiding performance is a performance that hides an ally character. Here, the ally character CRA is hidden, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are displayed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a 7-segment display mode (second mode).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(E) and 63(F), a decorative symbol movement effect is executed. The decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in a predetermined row move in the left-right direction. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the right as shown by the arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the left as shown by the arrow Y2.

In FIG. 63(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move in the directions of arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and approach the "7" pattern as the medium decorative pattern 8C. In FIG. 63(F), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move further in the directions of arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and overlap the "7" pattern as the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), a middle symbol change effect (second change effect) is executed. The medium pattern change performance is a performance that changes the mode of the medium decorative pattern. Here, the medium decorative pattern 8C has changed from a 7-segment display mode (second mode) to a simple display mode (third mode). The middle decorative pattern 8C overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and is displayed at the frontmost side.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(H) and 63(I), a decorative symbol movement effect is executed. The decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in a predetermined row move in the left-right direction. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left as shown by the arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right as shown by the arrow Y2.

In FIG. 63(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move in the directions of arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and are separated from the "7" pattern as the medium decorative pattern 8C. In FIG. 63(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move further in the directions of arrows Y1 and Y2, respectively, and move further away from the "7" pattern as the medium decorative pattern 8C to the normal display position (FIG. 63 (D)).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(J) to (L), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows begin to fluctuate.
In FIG. 63(J), the left decorative pattern 8L has started to fluctuate. After the left decorative pattern 8L starts to fluctuate, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In FIG. 63(K), the right decorative pattern 8R has started to fluctuate. After the right decorative pattern 8R starts to fluctuate, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In FIG. 63(L), the medium decorative pattern 8C has started to change. After the medium decorative pattern 8C starts to fluctuate, it becomes transparent or translucent.

In FIGS. 63(J) to (L), the variation is started in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → right decorative pattern 8R → middle decorative pattern 8C, but the variation may be started in any order. For example, the variation may start in the order of left decorative pattern 8L→middle decorative pattern 8C→right decorative pattern 8R. For example, the variation may start in the order of right decorative pattern 8R→middle decorative pattern 8C→left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right may start changing in parallel. The purpose of ``parallel'' is to include cases in which the fluctuations start at the same time as well as cases in which the fluctuations start at a slight lag.

[Aspect change variation production B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the aspect change variation effect B. In the mode change variation production, all of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a change from the first mode to the second mode, and then the decorative symbols in a predetermined row of the plural rows of decorative symbols change to the second mode. This is an effect that changes from the first mode to the third mode and starts to fluctuate.

In the aspect change variation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. Note that it may be a temporary stop instead of a definite stop.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 64(B) and 64(C), a character movement effect is executed. The character movement performance is a performance in which an ally character moves on the screen. It may also be directed using animation. In FIG. 64(B), the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the ally character CRA moves toward the upper right on the display screen 7a as shown by arrow Y, and is gradually enlarged. In FIG. 64(C), the ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The line image SG saying "It's super hot" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA.

In addition, in the character movement effect, all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are hidden. In other words, during the character movement performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a mode change effect (first change effect) is executed. The mode change performance is a performance that changes all of the decorative patterns in multiple rows from the first mode to the second mode. Here, the mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right side has changed from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode). The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed enlarged compared to the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C partially covers the right decorative pattern 8R. The left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed slightly inside the normal display position (FIG. 64(H)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a medium symbol reduction effect is executed. The medium design reduction performance is a performance in which the medium decorative design is gradually reduced and displayed. Here, the "7" symbol is reduced as the medium decorative symbol 8C in the 7-segment display mode (second mode). At this stage, the medium decorative pattern 8C is larger in size than the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a middle symbol change effect (second change effect) is executed. The medium pattern change performance is a performance that changes the mode of the medium decorative pattern. Here, the medium decorative pattern 8C has changed from a 7-segment display mode (second mode) to a simple display mode (third mode). The medium decorative pattern 8C is larger in size than the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), a medium symbol reduction effect is executed. The medium design reduction performance is a performance in which the medium decorative design is gradually reduced and displayed. Here, the "7" symbol is reduced as the medium decorative symbol 8C in the simple display mode (third mode). At this stage, the middle decorative pattern 8C has the same size as the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(H), a decorative symbol movement effect is executed. The decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in a predetermined row move in the left-right direction. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left as shown by the arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right as shown by the arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 64(I) to 64(K), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows begin to fluctuate.
In FIG. 64(I), the left decorative pattern 8L has started to fluctuate. After the left decorative pattern 8L starts to fluctuate, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In FIG. 64(J), the right decorative pattern 8R has started to fluctuate. After the right decorative pattern 8R starts to fluctuate, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In FIG. 64(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C has started to change. After the medium decorative pattern 8C starts to fluctuate, it becomes transparent or translucent.

In FIGS. 64(I) to (K), the variation is started in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → right decorative pattern 8R → middle decorative pattern 8C, but the variation may be started in any order. For example, the variation may start in the order of left decorative pattern 8L→middle decorative pattern 8C→right decorative pattern 8R. For example, the variation may start in the order of right decorative pattern 8R→middle decorative pattern 8C→left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right may start changing in parallel. The purpose of ``parallel'' is to include cases in which the fluctuations start at the same time as well as cases in which the fluctuations start at a slight lag.

[Aspect change variation production C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the aspect change variation effect C. In the mode change variation effect, all of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a change from the first mode to the second mode, and then the decorative symbols in a predetermined row of the plural rows of decorative symbols change to the second mode. This is an effect that changes from the first mode to the third mode and starts to fluctuate.

In the aspect change variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. Note that it may be a temporary stop instead of a definite stop.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 65(B) and 65(C), a character movement effect is executed. The character movement performance is a performance in which an ally character moves on the screen. It may also be directed using animation. In FIG. 65(B), the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the ally character CRA moves toward the upper right on the display screen 7a as shown by arrow Y, and is gradually enlarged. In FIG. 65(C), the ally character CRA is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The line image SG saying "It's super hot" is displayed to the left of the ally character CRA.

In addition, in the character movement effect, all of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are hidden. In other words, during the character movement performance, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), a mode change effect (first change effect) is executed. The mode change performance is a performance that changes all of the decorative patterns in multiple rows from the first mode to the second mode. Here, the mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right side has changed from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode). The middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed enlarged compared to the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C partially covers the right decorative pattern 8R. The left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed slightly inside the normal display position (FIG. 64(H)).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 65(E) and 65(F), a medium symbol reduction effect is executed. The medium design reduction performance is a performance in which the medium decorative design is gradually reduced and displayed. In FIG. 65(E), the "7" symbol is reduced as the medium decorative symbol 8C in the 7-segment display mode (second mode). At this stage, the medium decorative pattern 8C is larger in size than the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R. In FIG. 65(F), the "7" symbol is further reduced as the medium decorative symbol 8C in the 7-segment display mode (second mode). At this stage, the middle decorative pattern 8C has the same size as the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(G), a middle symbol change effect (second change effect) is executed. The medium pattern change performance is a performance that changes the mode of the medium decorative pattern. Here, the medium decorative pattern 8C has changed from a 7-segment display mode (second mode) to a simple display mode (third mode).

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(H), a decorative symbol movement effect is executed. The decorative pattern movement performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in a predetermined row move in the left-right direction. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L moves to the left as shown by the arrow Y1, and the right decorative pattern 8R moves to the right as shown by the arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(I), a medium symbol change effect is executed. The medium pattern change performance is a performance that changes the mode of the medium decorative pattern. Here, the medium decorative pattern 8C has changed from a simple display mode (third mode) to a 7-segment display mode (second mode).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 65(J) to 65(L), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows begin to fluctuate.
In FIG. 65(J), the left decorative pattern 8L has started to fluctuate. After the left decorative pattern 8L starts to fluctuate, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In FIG. 65(K), the right decorative pattern 8R has started to fluctuate. After the right decorative pattern 8R starts to fluctuate, it becomes transparent or semi-transparent. In FIG. 65(L), the middle decorative pattern 8C has started to change. After the medium decorative pattern 8C starts to fluctuate, it becomes transparent or translucent.

In FIGS. 65(J) to (L), the variation is started in the order of left decorative pattern 8L → right decorative pattern 8R → middle decorative pattern 8C, but the variation may be started in any order. For example, the variation may start in the order of left decorative pattern 8L→middle decorative pattern 8C→right decorative pattern 8R. For example, the variation may start in the order of right decorative pattern 8R→middle decorative pattern 8C→left decorative pattern 8L. Furthermore, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right may start changing in parallel. The purpose of ``parallel'' is to include cases in which the fluctuations start at the same time as well as cases in which the fluctuations start at a slight lag.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the aspect change variation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a mode change effect that changes all of the plurality of columns of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed from the normal display mode (first mode) to the 7-segment display mode (second mode) (First variation effect) is executed (Fig. 63(C), Fig. 64(D), Fig. 65(D)), and then the variable effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in multiple rows is started (Fig. 63(C), Fig. 64(D), Fig. 65(D)). (J) to (L), Fig. 64 (I) to (K), Fig. 65 (J) to (L)). According to this configuration, the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbols becomes novel, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to "performance execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the mode change performance (first change performance) is executed, before starting the variable performance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the multiple rows, one of the decorative symbols in the multiple rows is Execute a medium pattern change effect (second change effect) to change the decorative pattern 8C from the 7-segment display mode (second mode) to the simple display mode (third mode) (Fig. 63 (G), Fig. 64 (F)) , FIG. 65(G)). According to this configuration, the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbols becomes novel, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the medium decorative pattern 8C is attached to the decorative patterns 8L and 8R in adjacent rows in at least one of the 7-segment display mode (second mode) and the simple display mode (third mode). Some of them are displayed overlapping (FIG. 63(G), FIG. 64(D), FIG. 65(D)). According to this configuration, the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbols becomes novel, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character display effect (a character display effect) that makes the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R difficult to see in accordance with a change in the appearance of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R accompanying an aspect change effect (first change effect) is provided. 63(B)(C)) and character movement effects (FIGS. 64(B)(C), FIG. 65(B)(C)). According to this configuration, the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbols becomes novel, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the aspect change variation effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the embodiment described above, the dialogue image SG "It's super hot" is displayed in the character movement effect to indicate the level of expectation for a jackpot, but it is not necessary to display information indicating the level of expectation for a jackpot.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the middle decorative pattern 8C has changed (FIG. 63(G), FIG. 64(F), FIG. 65(G)). Instead of the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L or the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed. Furthermore, two or three of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right side may be changed, or three decorative patterns may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the embodiments described above, character display effects (FIGS. 63B and 63C) and character movement effects (FIGS. 64B and 64C, and FIGS. 65B and 6C) are performed. At this time, only one image of the ally character CRA is displayed. On the other hand, an effect such as displaying a plurality of specific images may be used. At this time, an effect may be created in which the number of specific images gradually increases.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means capable of performing a fluctuating performance of decorative symbols on a display screen,
The performance execution means executes a first change performance for changing all of the decorative symbols in the plurality of columns that are stopped and displayed from a first mode to a second mode, and then starts a variation performance of the decorative symbols in the plurality of columns. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
After executing the first change performance and before starting the variable performance of the decorative symbols in the plurality of rows, the performance execution means changes the decorative symbols in a predetermined row from the second mode to the second mode. Executing a second change effect that changes into three modes,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In at least one of the second aspect and the third aspect, the decorative pattern in the predetermined row is displayed so as to partially overlap the decorative pattern in the adjacent column.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a difficult-to-see effect that makes the decorative pattern difficult to see in accordance with a change in the aspect of the decorative pattern accompanying the first change effect or the second change effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern change effect will be explained below using FIGS. 66 to 68. This decorative pattern change performance is executed during the variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern change production A]
FIGS. 66(A) to 66(F) are diagrams for explaining the decorative pattern change effect A. Decorative pattern change performance A is a performance in which the decorative pattern changes, is displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed in a stopped state during a variable performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When performing the decorative pattern change effect A, it is possible to display the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R in three types of display modes. Specifically, there are two modes in which the numbers in the numerical images representing the content of each decorative pattern are expressed in Arabic numerals (hereinafter referred to as Arabic numerals), in Roman numerals (hereinafter referred to as Roman numerals), and in Chinese numerals. It is possible to change to three types of display modes: a mode expressed in large letters (hereinafter referred to as a large letter mode), and a mode expressed in large letters.

Furthermore, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is assumed to inherit the display mode of the decorative pattern that was fixed and displayed after the end of the previously executed variable performance. For example, after the end of the variable performance, if the left decorative pattern 8L is in Arabic mode, the medium decorative pattern 8C is in large character mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in Roman mode, and each is fixed and stopped, the next variable effect to be executed will be The display mode of each decorative pattern at the start is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is an Arabic mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is a large character mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is a Roman mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols can be changed at any timing during the variable presentation. For example, during the deceleration fluctuation display, the display mode can change from the Roman mode to the large character mode from a decorative pattern that is framed into a decorative pattern transition representing a certain number. In this case, in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the pattern arrangement in which the content represented by each decorative pattern is arranged as "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a does not change. For example, in a decorative pattern that was displayed in the Arabic numeral mode, if the display mode of the decorative pattern after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large font mode, the pattern arrangement becomes "123 肆伍国捆捌玖", From the next round onwards, it will be ``Ichi Ni San Go Ri lacquer exchange,'' and so on. Further, for example, when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative pattern can be changed from a large character mode to an Arabic mode. As mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable effect is inherited from the display mode when it was fixed and stopped after the previous variable effect ended, so for example, in a certain decorative pattern, the Arabic pattern representing "7" After the decorative pattern stops temporarily, it changes to the large character mode and finally stops, the pattern arrangement that will be displayed in a variable manner in the next variable performance will continue to be ``Urushi danku'', and from the next round, ``Ichini Sangen 5 Riku lacquer'' will be displayed. ``Hakku''.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern may be configured by combining a character image and a number image representing the content of the decorative pattern. In this case, in addition to or instead of changing the display mode of the numeric image, the display mode of the character image may be changed. For example, as the display mode of the character image, there are a front-facing display mode in which the character image faces the front, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces the right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces the left. In this case, the display mode is arbitrarily changed at the above-mentioned timing.

First, as shown in FIG. 66(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. Furthermore, after the end of the variable effect that was being executed before this variable effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped in the Arabic mode, and the special feature that triggered this variable effect is The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the drawing lottery was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R undergo deceleration fluctuations. Note that the order from high-speed fluctuation to deceleration fluctuation may be set arbitrarily. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are switched from high-speed fluctuation display to deceleration fluctuation display in this order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R among the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R displayed in deceleration variation is as follows. The Arabic style changes to the Roman style. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "7" changes from the Arabic mode to the Roman mode, and all the decorative patterns that are framed thereafter become the Roman mode. In addition, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "4" changes from the Arabic mode to the Roman mode, and all the decorative patterns that are framed thereafter become the Roman mode. In addition, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "7" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern representing "4" in the right decorative pattern 8R may be Roman mode or Arabic mode at the time of frame insertion. The mode may change to the Roman mode after entering the frame. When changing after frame-in, the change may be accompanied by animation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), among the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R displayed in deceleration variation, the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L changes from the Roman mode to the large letter mode. Changes to Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "1" changes from the Roman mode to the large character mode, and all the decorative patterns that are framed thereafter will be in the large character mode. Note that the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "1" in the left decorative pattern 8L may be in a large font mode at the time of frame-in, or may be in a Roman mode and changed to a large font mode after frame-in. When changing after frame-in, the change may be accompanied by animation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were displayed in a deceleration variation manner, are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed to represent "3" in the large character format, "5" in the Arabic format, and "9" in the Roman format, respectively. . Note that the order in which each decorative pattern is displayed as a temporary stop display may be set arbitrarily. For example, the deceleration fluctuation display ends and the temporary stop display is performed in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), among the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are The display mode changes respectively. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "3", which was temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L, changes from the large character mode to the Arabic mode, and represents the "9", which is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern 8R. The display mode of the decorative pattern changes from the Roman mode to the Arabic mode. Note that after this, the variable performance ends and each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R is fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of the decorative pattern change effect A. By configuring the decorative pattern change effect A to be executed, the display mode of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R changes during deceleration fluctuation display or temporary stop display. Thereby, it becomes possible to entertain the player with the display of decorative symbols in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Decorative pattern change production B]
FIGS. 66(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the decorative pattern change effect B. Decorative pattern change performance B is a performance in which the decorative pattern changes, is displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed in a stopped state during a variable performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may also be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When performing the decorative pattern change effect B, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed in three types of display modes. Specifically, each of the three display modes can be changed to the above-mentioned Arabic mode, Roman mode, and large font mode.

Furthermore, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is assumed to inherit the display mode of the decorative pattern that was fixed and displayed after the end of the previously executed variable performance. For example, after the end of the variable performance, if the left decorative pattern 8L is in Arabic mode, the medium decorative pattern 8C is in large character mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in Roman mode, and each is fixed and stopped, the next variable effect to be executed will be The display mode of each decorative pattern at the start is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is an Arabic mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is a large character mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is a Roman mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols can be changed at any timing during the variable performance. For example, during deceleration fluctuation display, the display mode can change from a Roman mode to a large character mode based on a decorative pattern representing a certain number. In this case, in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the pattern arrangement in which the content represented by each decorative pattern is arranged as "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a does not change. For example, in a decorative pattern that was displayed in the Arabic numeral mode, if the display mode of the decorative pattern after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large font mode, the pattern arrangement becomes "123 肆伍国捆捌玖", From the next round onwards, it will be ``Ichi Ni San Go Ri lacquer exchange,'' and so on. Further, for example, when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative pattern can be changed from a large character mode to an Arabic mode. As mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable effect is inherited from the display mode when it was fixed and stopped after the previous variable effect ended, so for example, in a certain decorative pattern, the Arabic pattern representing "7" After the decorative pattern stops temporarily, it changes to the large character mode and finally stops, the pattern arrangement that will be displayed in a variable manner in the next variable performance will continue to be ``Urushi danku'', and from the next round, ``Ichini Sangen 5 Riku lacquer'' will be displayed. ``Hakku''.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern may be configured by combining a character image and a number image representing the content of the decorative pattern. In this case, in addition to or instead of changing the display mode of the numeric image, the display mode of the character image may be changed. For example, as the display mode of the character image, there are a front-facing display mode in which the character image faces the front, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces the right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces the left. In this case, the display mode is arbitrarily changed at the above-mentioned timing.

First, as shown in FIG. 66(G), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. Furthermore, after the end of the variable effect that was being executed before this variable effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped in the Arabic mode, and the special feature that triggered this variable effect is The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the drawing lottery was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(H), among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variably displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, a decorative pattern representing "4" is temporarily stopped and displayed in an Arabic manner to form a reach. Note that the order in which the temporary stop display is displayed may be set arbitrarily. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be switched from a variable display to a temporary stop display in the order, or the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L may be switched from a variable display to a temporary stop display in the order. . Furthermore, this change in display mode may be performed with animation. This also applies to changes in the display mode below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(I), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, which are temporarily stopped and displayed, changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "4" changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. The display mode of the decorative pattern representing "4" in the left decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern representing "4" in the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed with animation. This also applies to changes in the display mode below. Further, the order in which the display modes change may be set arbitrarily. For example, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "4" temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be simultaneously changed to a large character mode, or the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern You may make it change in order of 8R, or you may make it change in order of right decorative pattern 8R and left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(J), the medium decorative pattern 8C that has been displayed in a variable manner is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, in the medium decorative pattern 8C, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed in an Arabic mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(K), the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, all change. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "4" changes from the large character mode to the Roman mode, and in the medium decorative pattern 8C, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "5" The aspect changes from the Roman aspect to the Oaza aspect. The order in which the display mode of each decorative pattern changes may be set arbitrarily. That is, the order in which the display mode changes may be the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The order may be the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the order may be the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, or the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, The order may be the right decorative pattern 8R, or the order may be the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L. Moreover, after two decorative patterns change simultaneously, the remaining one decorative pattern may change, or after one decorative pattern changes, two decorative patterns may change simultaneously. Furthermore, all three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may change simultaneously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(L), among the left decorative symbols 8L, middle decorative symbols 8C, and right decorative symbols 8R, which were temporarily halted and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L , the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R changes again. Here, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "4" which was temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R changes from the Roman mode to the large character mode. Note that the order in which the display modes change may be set arbitrarily. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may change in this order, the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L may change in this order, or the two may change at the same time. Good too. Note that after this, the variable performance ends and each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R is fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of the decorative pattern change effect B. By having a configuration that can execute the decorative pattern change effect B, the display mode of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R changes during the temporary stop display that is a reach. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying decorative symbols in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Decorative pattern change production C]
FIGS. 67A to 67F are diagrams for explaining the decorative pattern change effect C. Decorative pattern change performance C is a performance in which the decorative pattern changes, is displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed in a stopped state during a variable performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When performing the decorative pattern change effect C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed in three types of display modes. Specifically, each of the three display modes can be changed to the above-mentioned Arabic mode, Roman mode, and large font mode.

Furthermore, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is assumed to inherit the display mode of the decorative pattern that was fixed and displayed after the end of the previously executed variable performance. For example, after the end of the variable performance, if the left decorative pattern 8L is in Arabic mode, the medium decorative pattern 8C is in large character mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in Roman mode, and each is fixed and stopped, the next variable effect to be executed will be The display mode of each decorative pattern at the start is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is an Arabic mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is a large character mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is a Roman mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols can be changed at any timing during the variable presentation. For example, during deceleration fluctuation display, the display mode can change from a Roman mode to a large character mode based on a decorative pattern representing a certain number. In this case, in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the pattern arrangement in which the content represented by each decorative pattern is arranged as "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a does not change. For example, in a decorative pattern that was displayed in the Arabic numeral mode, if the display mode of the decorative pattern after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large font mode, the pattern arrangement becomes "123 肆伍国捆捌玖", From the next round onwards, it will be ``Ichi Ni San Go Ri lacquer exchange,'' and so on. Further, for example, when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative pattern can be changed from a large character mode to an Arabic mode. As mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable effect is inherited from the display mode when it was fixed and stopped after the previous variable effect ended, so for example, in a certain decorative pattern, the Arabic pattern representing "7" After the decorative pattern stops temporarily, it changes to the large character mode and finally stops, the pattern arrangement that will be displayed in a variable manner in the next variable performance will continue to be ``Urushi danku'', and from the next round, ``Ichini Sangen 5 Riku lacquer'' will be displayed. ``Hakku''.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern may be configured by combining a character image and a number image representing the content of the decorative pattern. In this case, in addition to or instead of changing the display mode of the numeric image, the display mode of the character image may be changed. For example, as the display mode of the character image, there are a front-facing display mode in which the character image faces the front, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces the right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces the left. In this case, the display mode is arbitrarily changed at the above-mentioned timing.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(A), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern representing "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in an Arabic manner, and the other decorative patterns are displayed in high-speed fluctuations and are difficult to see. This is a state in which only the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed after the fluctuating performance is started and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed and their contents become difficult to see. Although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. Furthermore, after the end of the variable effect that was being executed before this variable effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped in the Arabic mode, and the special feature that triggered this variable effect is The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the drawing lottery was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L that has been temporarily stopped and displayed changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. This change in display mode may be performed with animation. This also applies to changes in the display mode below. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed and remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), in the right decorative pattern 8R that has been displayed in a variable manner, the Arabic decorative pattern representing "8" is temporarily stopped. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing at a high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R that has been temporarily stopped and displayed changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing at a high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), in the medium decorative pattern 8C that has been variably displayed, the Arabic decorative pattern representing "5" is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), the display mode of all the temporarily stopped decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, changes. . Specifically, the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a large font mode to an Arabic mode, and the display mode of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from an Arabic mode to a large font mode. The order in which the display mode of each decorative pattern changes may be set arbitrarily. That is, the order in which the display mode changes may be the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the order of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. The order may be the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, or the order may be the right decorative pattern 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, or the middle decorative pattern 8C, the left decorative pattern 8L, The order may be the right decorative pattern 8R, or the order may be the middle decorative pattern 8C, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the left decorative pattern 8L. Moreover, after two decorative patterns change simultaneously, the remaining one decorative pattern may change, or after one decorative pattern changes, two decorative patterns may change simultaneously. Furthermore, all three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may change simultaneously. Note that after this, the variable performance ends and each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R is fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of the decorative pattern change effect C. By having a configuration that can execute the decorative pattern change effect C, the display mode changes for each of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R during temporary stop display, thereby changing the decoration in the variable effect. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying the symbols, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Decorative pattern change production D]
FIGS. 67(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the decorative pattern change effect D. Decorative pattern change performance D is a performance in which decorative patterns change, are displayed in a variable manner, and are displayed in a stopped manner during a variable performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When performing the decorative pattern change effect D, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed in three types of display modes. Specifically, there is a frameless mode in which the number image included in the decorative pattern is not surrounded by a pattern frame image, a hexagonal frame mode in which the number image included in the decorative pattern is surrounded by a hexagonal pattern frame, and a decorative pattern. The display mode can be changed to three types of display modes: a circular frame mode in which the number images included in the image are surrounded by a circular pattern frame, and a circular frame mode in which the number images included in the image are surrounded by a circular pattern frame. In the following, regarding the notation of decorative patterns, there are cases where the notation is simply based on the content of the decorative pattern, such as "4", and notation that also includes the display mode, such as "4 (none)" and "6 (yen)". Sometimes I do.

Furthermore, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is assumed to inherit the display mode of the decorative pattern that was fixed and displayed after the end of the previously executed variable performance. For example, after the end of the variable performance, if the left decorative pattern 8L is in a no frame mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a hexagonal frame mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in a circular frame mode, and each is fixed and stopped, the next execution will be performed. The display mode of each decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is in a no-frame mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is in a hexagonal frame mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in a circular frame mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols can be changed at any timing during the variable performance. For example, during deceleration fluctuation display, the display mode can change from a hexagonal frame mode to a no-frame mode based on a decorative pattern representing a certain number. In this case, in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the pattern arrangement in which the content represented by each decorative pattern is arranged as "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a does not change. For example, in a decorative pattern that was displayed in a frameless numeric format, if the display format of the decorative symbols after the decorative symbol representing "4" becomes a hexagonal frame format, the pattern arrangement will be "1 (None), 2 (None)" 3 (none) 4 (hexagon) 5 (hexagon) 6 (hexagon) 7 (hexagon) 8 (hexagon) 9 (hexagon)", and from the next round onwards it will be "1 (hexagon) 2 (hexagon) 3 (hexagon) 4 (Hexagon) 5 (Hexagon) 6 (Hexagon) 7 (Hexagon) 8 (Hexagon) 9 (Hexagon)". Further, for example, when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative pattern can be changed from a circular frame mode to a hexagonal frame mode. As mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative symbols at the start of the variable effect is inherited from the display mode when the final variable effect stopped after the end of the previous variable effect, so for example, in a certain decorative pattern, a circular frame representing "7" If the decorative pattern of the mode temporarily stops, then changes to the hexagonal frame mode and finally stops, the pattern arrangement that will be displayed in a variable manner in the next variable performance will be "7 (hexagon), 8 (hexagon), 9 (hexagon)", and so on. From the next round, it becomes "1 (hexagon) 2 (hexagon) 3 (hexagon) 4 (hexagon) 5 (hexagon) 6 (hexagon) 7 (hexagon) 8 (hexagon) 9 (hexagon)".

Furthermore, the decorative pattern may be configured by combining a character image and a number image representing the content of the decorative pattern. In this case, in addition to or instead of changing the display mode of the symbol frame, the display mode of the character image may be changed. For example, as the display mode of the character image, there are a front-facing display mode in which the character image faces the front, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces the right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces the left. In this case, the display mode is arbitrarily changed at the above-mentioned timing.

First, as shown in FIG. 67(G), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the decorative pattern representing "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed without a frame, and the other decorative patterns are displayed in high-speed fluctuations and are difficult to see. This is a state in which only the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed after the fluctuating performance is started and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed and their contents become difficult to see. Although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. Furthermore, after the end of the variable effect that was being executed before this variable effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped displayed in a frameless manner, and furthermore, it is assumed that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a frameless manner. I will continue to explain the result of the special drawing lottery as if it were a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(H), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L that has been temporarily stopped and displayed changes from a frameless mode to a hexagonal frame mode. This change in display mode may be performed with animation. This also applies to changes in the display mode below. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R fluctuate at high speed and remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(I), in the right decorative pattern 8R that has been displayed in a variable manner, the decorative pattern in the frameless mode representing "6" temporarily stops to form a reach. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing at a high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(J), the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R that has been temporarily stopped and displayed changes from a frameless mode to a hexagonal frame mode. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing at a high speed and remains difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(K), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, changes from the hexagonal frame mode to the circular frame mode. The order in which the display modes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change may be set arbitrarily. That is, the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be changed simultaneously, or may be changed in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, or the right decorative pattern 8R, You may make it change in order of left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(L), in the medium decorative pattern 8C that was being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the decorative pattern in the frameless mode representing "7" is temporarily stopped, and the left decorative pattern that was being temporarily displayed is temporarily stopped. 8L and the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R changes. Specifically, the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R changes from a circular frame mode to a hexagonal frame mode. The order of temporarily stopping the middle decorative pattern 8C and changing the display mode of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may be set arbitrarily. That is, the order may be a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, and a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C, or a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, and a change in the display mode of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The order may be a temporary stop of , a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, or a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, and a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C. Alternatively, the order may be a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C, a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, or a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L. The order may be a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, a temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C, a change in the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R, a change in the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L, It may be in this order. Further, the middle decorative pattern 8C may temporarily stop after the display mode of the left and right decorative patterns 8L, 8R changes simultaneously, or the display mode of the left and right decorative patterns 8L, 8R changes simultaneously after the middle decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops. You may. Furthermore, the change in the infant mode of the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R and the temporary stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C may all be performed at the same time. Note that after this, the variable performance ends and each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R is fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of the decorative pattern change effect D. By having a configuration that can execute the decorative pattern change effect D, the display mode changes for each of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R during the temporary stop display that is a reach. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying decorative symbols in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Decorative pattern change production E]
FIGS. 68(A) to 68(L) are diagrams for explaining the decorative pattern change effect E. Decorative pattern change performance E is a performance in which the decorative pattern changes, is displayed in a variable manner, and is displayed in a stopped state during a variable performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

When performing the decorative pattern change effect E, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be displayed in three types of display modes. Specifically, each of the three display modes can be changed to the above-mentioned Arabic mode, Roman mode, and large font mode.

Furthermore, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable performance is assumed to inherit the display mode of the decorative pattern that was fixed and displayed after the end of the previously executed variable performance. For example, after the end of the variable performance, if the left decorative pattern 8L is in Arabic mode, the medium decorative pattern 8C is in large character mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is in Roman mode, and each is fixed and stopped, the next variable effect to be executed will be The display mode of each decorative pattern at the start is such that the left decorative pattern 8L is an Arabic mode, the middle decorative pattern 8C is a large character mode, and the right decorative pattern 8R is a Roman mode.

In addition, the display mode of the decorative symbols can be changed at any timing during the variable performance. For example, during deceleration fluctuation display, the display mode can change from a Roman mode to a large character mode based on a decorative pattern representing a certain number. In this case, in each of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the pattern arrangement in which the content represented by each decorative pattern is arranged as "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a does not change. For example, in a decorative pattern that was displayed in the Arabic numeral mode, if the display mode of the decorative pattern after the decorative pattern representing "4" becomes the large font mode, the pattern arrangement becomes "123 肆伍国捆捌玖", From the next round onwards, it will be ``Ichi Ni San Go Ri lacquer exchange,'' and so on. Further, for example, when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the temporarily stopped and displayed decorative pattern can be changed from a large character mode to an Arabic mode. As mentioned above, the display mode of the decorative pattern at the start of the variable effect is inherited from the display mode when it was fixed and stopped after the previous variable effect ended, so for example, in a certain decorative pattern, the Arabic pattern representing "7" After the decorative pattern stops temporarily, it changes to the large character mode and finally stops, the pattern arrangement that will be displayed in a variable manner in the next variable performance will continue to be ``Urushi danku'', and from the next round, ``Ichini Sangen 5 Riku lacquer'' will be displayed. ``Hakku''.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern may be configured by combining a character image and a number image representing the content of the decorative pattern. In this case, in addition to or instead of changing the display mode of the numeric image, the display mode of the character image may be changed. For example, as the display mode of the character image, there are a front-facing display mode in which the character image faces the front, a right-facing display mode in which the character image faces the right, and a left-facing display mode in which the character image faces the left. In this case, the display mode is arbitrarily changed at the above-mentioned timing.

First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Although the hold icons 9A and 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed here, they may be displayed. Furthermore, after the end of the variable effect that was being executed before this variable effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all fixed and stopped in the Arabic mode, and the special feature that triggered this variable effect is The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the drawing lottery was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(B), among the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were displayed in high-speed variation, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in deceleration variation. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed at a reduced speed so that at least two of the decorative patterns included in the pattern arrangement in the left decorative pattern 8L are visible on the display screen 7a. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain high-speed fluctuation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in deceleration variation changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. Here, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "3" changes from the Arabic mode to the large font mode, and all the decorative patterns that are framed thereafter are in the large font mode. The display mode of the decorative pattern representing "3" in the left decorative pattern 8L may be a large character mode at the time of frame-in, or may be an Arabic mode that changes to a Roman mode after frame-in. When changing after frame-in, the change may be accompanied by animation. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain high-speed fluctuation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(D), in the left decorative pattern 8L that has been displayed as a deceleration variation, the large-sized decorative pattern representing "6" temporarily stops. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain high-speed fluctuation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(E), the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "6" which was temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L changes from the large character mode to the Roman mode. This change may be performed with animation. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain high-speed fluctuation display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the right decorative pattern 8R, which had been displayed in high-speed variation, is displayed in deceleration variation. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at a reduced speed so that at least two of the decorative patterns included in the pattern arrangement in the right decorative pattern 8R are visible on the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the left decorative pattern 8L maintains a temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6", and the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuating display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(G), the display mode of the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in deceleration variation changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. Here, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "7" changes from the Arabic mode to the large font mode, and all the decorative patterns that are framed thereafter are in the large font mode. The display mode of the decorative pattern representing "7" in the left decorative pattern 8L may be a large character mode at the time of frame-in, or may be an Arabic mode that changes to a Roman mode after frame-in. When changing after frame-in, the change may be accompanied by animation. It should be noted that the left decorative pattern 8L maintains a temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6", and the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuating display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), in the right decorative pattern 8R that has been displayed as a deceleration variation, the large-sized decorative pattern representing "9" temporarily stops. It should be noted that the left decorative pattern 8L maintains a temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6", and the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuating display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "9" which has been temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern 8R changes from the large character mode to the Roman mode. This change may be performed with animation. It should be noted that the left decorative pattern 8L maintains a temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6", and the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuating display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(J), the medium decorative pattern 8C that has been displayed in high speed fluctuations is displayed in deceleration fluctuations, and then the Arabic decorative pattern representing "3" is temporarily stopped. In addition, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6" is maintained, and in the right decorative pattern 8R, the temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "9" is maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(K), the display mode of the decorative pattern representing "3" which was temporarily stopped in the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from the Arabic mode to the large font mode. This change may be performed with animation. In addition, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "6" is maintained, and in the right decorative pattern 8R, the temporary stop of the Roman-style decorative pattern representing "9" is maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(L), a decorative pattern representing "6" which was temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L, and a decorative pattern representing "9" which was temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern 8R. The display mode of both changes from the Roman mode to the large character mode. The order in which the display modes change may be set arbitrarily. For example, the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may change at the same time, the display mode may change in the order of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, or the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may change at the same time. , the left decorative pattern 8L may be changed in the order of display mode. Note that after this, the variable performance ends and each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R is fixed and stopped.

The above is a display example of the decorative pattern change effect E. By having a configuration that can execute the decorative pattern change effect E, the display mode changes for each of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R during deceleration fluctuation display or temporary stop display. Thereby, it becomes possible to entertain the player with the display of decorative symbols in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 66 to 68, the number of times the display mode of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R changes depending on the decorative pattern from the start to the end of the variable performance is It is possible to perform different effects. For example, the number of times the display mode changes in the decorative pattern change performance A is 3 times for the left decorative pattern 8L, 0 times for the middle decorative pattern 8C, and 2 times for the right decorative pattern 8R. Further, the number of times the display mode changes in the decorative pattern change effect B is three times for the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and once for the middle decorative pattern 8C. The number of times the display mode changes in the decorative pattern change performance C is twice for the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and once for the middle decorative pattern 8C. The number of times the display mode changes in the decorative pattern change production D is 3 times for the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and 0 times for the middle decorative pattern 8C. The number of times the display mode changes in the decorative pattern change performance E is three times for the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, and once for the middle decorative pattern 8C. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Note that the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to the "display means" in claim 1.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66(G) to 66(K), the first effect in which decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and after the first effect, the left decoration A second effect in which the display mode of the pattern 8L changes from an Arabic mode to a large character mode, a third effect in which, after the second effect, the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L changes from a large letter mode to a Roman mode; After the second effect, the fourth effect is such that the display mode of the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from the Arabic mode to the large character mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66(G) to (K), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed after the first performance and before the second performance. The fifth performance and the sixth performance in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed after the second performance and before the fourth performance are configured to be able to be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66(K) to (L), after the third effect, the seventh effect changes the display mode of the left decorative pattern 8L from the Roman mode to the large character mode. The configuration is such that it can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern change performance, the display mode of each decorative pattern at the time of fixed stop may be changed depending on the degree of expectation that the result of the special symbol lottery that triggered the variation performance will be a hit. For example, the degree of expectation that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered the variable performance will be a win increases as the decorative pattern at the time of the fixed stop is Arabic, Oaza, and Roman.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern change performance, a decorative pattern formed by combining a character image, a number image, and a pattern frame may be used. In this case, as a change in the display mode of the decorative pattern, the positional relationship between the character image, number image, and pattern frame may be changed. Further, in this case, the pose, expression, etc. of the character image may be changed as a change in the display mode. In addition to this, the voice or sound of the character may be output, or the displayed character may change to another character. Furthermore, in this case, the size of the pattern frame may be changed as a change in the display mode of the decorative pattern.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern change production, by changing the display mode of the decorative pattern, the number image representing the content of the decorative pattern may become difficult to see. In addition to this, other character strings may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
When the display mode of the decorative pattern changes in the decorative pattern change performance, it may be further switched to another display mode at the start of the next variable performance. For example, if it is assumed that the display mode is always in Arabic mode at the start of a variable effect, and it is fixed and stopped in Oaza mode after the end of a certain variable effect, the display mode will change to Arabic mode at the start of the next variable effect. .

[Modification 5]
The effects described in the decorative pattern change effects A to E may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a plurality of decorative patterns,
The display mode of the plurality of decorative patterns may change,
The number of times the display mode changes from the start to the end of the variable production varies depending on the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
a first performance in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner;
a second performance in which, after the first performance, the display mode of the first decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode;
a third performance in which, after the second performance, the display mode of the first decorative pattern changes from the second mode to the third mode;
after the second performance, a fourth performance in which the display mode of the second decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
a fifth performance in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the first performance and before the second performance;
A sixth performance in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the second performance and before the fourth performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-2,
After the third performance, a seventh performance can be performed in which the display mode of the first decorative pattern changes from the third mode to the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character pop-up effect 1, character pop-out effect 2, and number symbol change effect will be explained below using FIGS. 69 to 71. These character pop-out effects 1, character pop-out effects 2, and number pattern change effects are executed in the decorative pattern variation effects. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display the image.

[Character pop-out effect 1]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining character pop-out effect 1. In the character pop-out effect 1, the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed inside the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a are displayed in front of the pattern frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW. This is an effect in which the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed in front of the symbol frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW are displayed inside the symbol frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW.

First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed and are in the process of varying the decorative symbols. Here, hold icons 9A and 9C are displayed. Note that the hold icon 9B may be displayed, or all the hold icons may not be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the left decorative pattern 8L stops. Here, the left decorative pattern character 8LK is displayed inside the left decorative pattern frame 8LW. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(C), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the left decorative pattern 8L stopped, the right decorative pattern 8R stops. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the number of the stopped right decorative pattern 8R is the same as the number of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, reach is established. Immediately after the right decorative pattern 8R stops, the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern is displayed inside the frame 8RW of the right decorative pattern. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(D) and (E), the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern changes with animation. The timing to start this animation is immediately after the right decorative symbol 8R stops, that is, immediately after the reach is established. The changed left decorative pattern character 8LK is displayed in front of the left decorative pattern frame 8LW. The head and tail of the fish character 8LK cover a part of the left decorative pattern frame 8LW. The character 8LK of the left decorative pattern is produced so as to jump out of the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R also changes with animation in the same way as the left decorative pattern 8L, and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern after the change is displayed in front of the right decorative pattern frame 8RW, and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern is displayed in front of the right decorative pattern frame 8RW. covers part of. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(F), after the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern change, the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes slow. This low speed is a speed at which the player can understand which decorative pattern is changing. In this embodiment, the timing at which the speed becomes low is after the character 8LK of the left decorative symbol and the character 8RK of the right decorative symbol change with animation, but it may be immediately after the reach is established.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(G), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the reach is established, the medium decorative pattern 8C stops. In this embodiment, the numbers of the stopped medium decorative pattern 8C are different from the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. In other words, the stopped left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R indicate that it has missed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 69(H) and (I), for the left decorative pattern 8L, immediately after the middle decorative pattern 8C stops, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern moves with animation. It is displayed inside frame 8LW. The character 8LK of the left decorative pattern is produced to jump into the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern. The right decorative pattern 8R is also produced in the same manner as the left decorative pattern 8L. Regarding the medium decorative pattern 8C, the character 8CK inside the medium decorative pattern accompanies the animation immediately after the medium decorative pattern 8C stops, in parallel with the change of the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern. Change. The changed medium decorative pattern character 8CK is displayed in front of the medium decorative pattern frame 8CW. The character 8CK of the medium decorative pattern after the change covers a part of the frame 8CW of the medium decorative pattern. The character 8CK of the medium decorative pattern is produced so as to jump out of the frame 8CW of the medium decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(J), after a predetermined period has elapsed since the character 8CK of the medium decorative pattern is displayed in front of the frame 8CW of the medium decorative pattern, the character 8CK in the front of the frame of the medium decorative pattern is It is displayed inside the frame 8CW of the medium decorative pattern with animation. The character 8CK of the medium decorative pattern is produced so as to jump into the frame 8CW of the medium decorative pattern. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not change.

In this embodiment, the timing at which the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern performs the animation is set immediately after the right decorative pattern 8R stops, but the timing at which the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern performs the animation is set at the timing at which the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern performs the animation. It may be done immediately after stopping. In this case, the character 8LK inside the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK inside the right decorative pattern perform animation at different timings.

[Character pop-out production 2]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining character pop-out effect 2. In the character pop-out effect 2, the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed inside the symbol frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a are displayed in front of the symbol frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW. The characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK change their appearance, and then the characters 8LK, 8CK, and 8RK displayed in front of the symbol frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW move to the inside of the symbol frames 8LW, 8CW, and 8RW. This is the performance that will be displayed.

In the character pop-out effect 2, similarly to the character pop-out effect 1, it is performed while the decorative symbols are changing. Although omitted, in character pop-out effect 2, the same actions as in FIGS. 69(A), (B), (C), (D), and (E) are performed, and then the same actions as in FIG. The action shown in FIG. 70(A) is performed.

After the same actions as in FIGS. 69(A), (B), (C), (D), and (E) are performed, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the right decorative After the symbol character 8RK changes, the medium decorative symbol 8C becomes slow. In this embodiment, the timing at which the speed becomes low is after the character 8LK of the left decorative symbol and the character 8RK of the right decorative symbol change with animation, but it may be immediately after the reach is established. Here, hold icons 9A and 9C are displayed. Note that the hold icon 9B may be displayed, or all the hold icons may not be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the reach is established, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern changes with animation. Specifically, the character 8LK with the left decorative pattern representing a fish performs an animation of opening its mouth, changing from a closed mouth state to an open mouth state. Further, the left decorative pattern character 8LK remains displayed in front of the left decorative pattern frame 8LW, and partially covers the left decorative pattern frame 8LW. The character 8RK of the right decorative pattern also changes in the same way as the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern. Here, the medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at a low speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), even after the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern and the character 8RK of the right decorative pattern change, the middle decorative pattern 8C further changes at a low speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the reach is established, the medium decorative pattern 8C stops. In this embodiment, the numbers of the stopped medium decorative pattern 8C are different from the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. In other words, the stopped left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R indicate that it has missed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), for the left decorative pattern 8L, immediately after the middle decorative pattern 8C stops, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern representing a fish is in a state with its mouth open with animation. The mouth becomes closed. The character 8RK of the right decorative pattern also changes in the same way as the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern. Here, the medium decorative pattern does not change.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 70(F) and (G), regarding the left decorative pattern 8L, the character 8LK of the left decorative pattern moves to the left decorative pattern with animation immediately after the action of FIG. 70(E). is displayed inside frame 8LW. The character 8LK of the left decorative pattern is produced to jump into the frame 8LW of the left decorative pattern. The right decorative pattern 8R is also produced in the same manner as the left decorative pattern 8L. Regarding the medium decorative pattern 8C, the character 8CK inside the medium decorative pattern performs an animation immediately after the action shown in FIG. It changes accordingly. The changed medium decorative pattern character 8CK is displayed in front of the medium decorative pattern frame 8CW. The character 8CK of the medium decorative pattern after the change covers a part of the frame 8CW of the medium decorative pattern. The character 8CK of the medium decorative pattern is produced so as to jump out of the frame 8CW of the medium decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(H), after a certain period of time has elapsed since the character 8CK of the medium decorative pattern is displayed in front of the frame 8CW of the medium decorative pattern, the character 8CK of the medium decorative pattern is displayed with animation. It is displayed inside the frame 8CW of the medium decorative pattern. The character 8CK of the medium decorative pattern is produced so as to jump into the frame 8CW of the medium decorative pattern. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not change.

[Number pattern change production]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the numerical symbol change effect. The numerical symbol change performance is a performance in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R representing numbers on the display screen 7a change at the timing when a reach is established, during a reach, and when a middle symbol is stopped.

As shown in FIG. 71(A), the right decorative pattern 8R stops. The left decorative pattern 8L is in a stopped state even before the right decorative pattern 8R stops. The right decorative pattern 8R stops. The left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R at this time are decorative patterns with a planar design. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the number of the stopped right decorative pattern 8R is the same as the number of the left decorative pattern 8L. In other words, reach is established. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. Here, hold icons 9A and 9C are displayed. Note that the hold icon 9B may be displayed, or all the hold icons may not be displayed (the same applies below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), immediately after the reach is established, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change from a two-dimensional design to a three-dimensional design. This change is accompanied by an animation. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), after a certain period of time has passed since the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change, the middle decorative pattern 8C changes at a low speed. In this embodiment, the timing at which the speed becomes low is after the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R change to a three-dimensional decorative pattern with animation, but it may be immediately after the reach is established. The medium decorative pattern 8C at this time is a decorative pattern with a planar design.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 71(D) and (E), after a certain period of time has elapsed since the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change into decorative patterns with a three-dimensional design, the left decorative pattern 8L changes. The pattern changes to a larger one than before. This change is accompanied by an animation.
The right decorative pattern 8R also changes in the same way as the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), even after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change to large patterns, the medium decorative pattern 8C further changes at a low speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the reach is established, the medium decorative pattern 8C stops. In this embodiment, the numbers of the stopped medium decorative pattern 8C are different from the numbers of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. In other words, the stopped left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R indicate that it has missed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(H), immediately after the middle decorative pattern 8C stops, the left decorative pattern 8L changes to a three-dimensional decorative pattern with animation. The right decorative pattern 8R also changes in the same way as the left decorative pattern 8L. Here, the medium decorative pattern does not change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(I), immediately after the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R change to decorative patterns with a three-dimensional design, the left decorative pattern 8L changes to a two-dimensional design with animation. Changes into a decorative pattern. The right decorative pattern 8R also changes in the same way as the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C changes to a three-dimensional decorative pattern accompanied by animation in parallel with the changes in the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(J), after a certain period of time has passed since the medium decorative pattern 8C changes to a three-dimensional decorative pattern, the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from a three-dimensional design to a two-dimensional one with animation. It changes into a decorative pattern for the design. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R do not change.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of character pop-out effect 1, character pop-out effect 2, and number symbol change effect are shown below.

[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a display screen 7a that can display a plurality of types of images, as shown in "Character pop-out effect 1", and one of the plurality of types of images is a left decorative pattern 8L. , the left decorative pattern 8L includes a frame image 8LW representing a frame of the pattern and a character image 8LK representing a character, and an image 8LK representing a part of the character is displayed on the display screen 7a inside the frame image 8LW. After the first effect (FIGS. 69(B) and (C)) in which the left decorative pattern 8L of the first aspect is displayed, a character is displayed on the display screen 7a from inside the frame image 8LW. pops out, the character image 8LK is displayed on the front side of the frame image 8LW, and a second aspect of the decorative pattern in which at least a portion of the frame image 8LW is covered by the character image 8LK is displayed (FIG. 69(D) ), (E)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Character pop-out effect 1", after the second effect (FIGS. 69(D) and (E)), the front side of the frame image 8LW is displayed on the display screen 7a. The displayed character jumps inside the frame represented by the frame image 8LW, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the first aspect in which the image 8LK representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image 8LW is displayed. It is possible to perform the effects (FIGS. 69(H) and (I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Character pop-out effect 1", one of the plurality of types of images is the second middle decorative pattern 8C different from the left decorative pattern 8L, and two The eye decoration pattern 8C includes a frame image 8CW representing the frame of the pattern and a character image 8CK representing the character, and is created after the second effect (FIGS. 69(D) and (E)). , the second aspect of the first aspect in which an image 8CK representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image 8CW on the display screen 7a before the third effect (FIGS. 69(H) and (I)) In parallel with the fourth effect (FIGS. 69(F), (G)) in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed and the third effect (FIGS. 69(H), (I)), , the second interior decoration of the second aspect in which the character pops out from inside the frame image 8CW, the character image 8CK is displayed on the front side of the frame image 8CW, and at least a part of the frame image 8CW is covered by the character image 8CK. It is possible to execute the fifth effect (FIGS. 69(H) and (I)) in which the symbol 8C is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Character pop-out effect 1", the second effect (FIGS. 69(D), (E)) is performed after the reach is established (FIG. 69(C)). . According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of character pop-out effect 1, character pop-out effect 2, and number symbol change effect are shown.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the first effect (FIGS. 69(B), (C)), the second effect (FIGS. 69(D), (E)), and the third effect (FIGS. 69(H), (I) )), the fourth effect (Fig. 69 (F), (G)), and the fifth effect (Fig. 69 (H), (I)), but the first effect (Fig. 69 (B) ), (C)) and the second effect (FIGS. 69(D) and (E)) may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, not only the left decorative pattern 8L but also the right decorative pattern 8R is produced, but it is also possible that only the left decorative pattern 8L is produced. In other words, the above-mentioned first effect (Fig. 69 (B), (C)), second effect (Fig. 69 (D), (E)), and third effect (Fig. 69 (H), (I)) ) may be used alone.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the second performance (FIGS. 69(D) and (E)) is performed after the reach is established, but it may be performed before the reach is established.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
The decorative pattern includes a frame image representing a frame of the pattern and a character image representing a character,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern of a first aspect is displayed on the display means, in which an image representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image;
After the first effect, the character pops out from inside the frame image on the display means, the character image is displayed on the front side of the frame image, and at least a part of the frame image is covered by the character image. a second effect in which the decorative pattern in the second mode is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
After the second effect, the character displayed on the front side of the frame image on the display means jumps into the frame represented by the frame image, and a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image. capable of executing a third effect in which the decorative pattern of the first aspect in which the image is displayed is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern,
The second decorative pattern includes a frame image representing a frame of the pattern and a character image representing a character,
The above two aspects of the first aspect, wherein an image representing a part of the character is displayed inside the frame image on the display means after the second effect and before the third effect. A fourth production in which a decorative pattern of eyes is displayed;
In parallel with the third effect, the character pops out from inside the frame image on the display means, the character image is displayed on the front side of the frame image, and at least a part of the frame image is the character image. a fifth effect in which the second decorative pattern of the second aspect covered by is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-3,
The second performance is performed after the reach is established,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon shielding effect will be explained below using FIGS. 72 to 74. This pending icon shielding performance is executed during the variable performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon shielding effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Pending icon shielding effect A]
FIGS. 72A to 72F are diagrams for explaining the pending icon shielding effect A. Pending icon shielding production A is a production in which a cover image including a character image enters the frame from the bottom of the display screen 7a, covers a part of the pending icon and the decorative pattern, and then frames out during a variable production. This is a performance to suggest a pending change. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 72(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a (lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L). It should be noted that the explanation will be continued assuming that no pending change performance is performed during this fluctuation performance, and that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this fluctuation performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), the cover image CI1 including the character image is moved vertically upward from the bottom of the position where the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed and framed. As a result, a portion of the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and a portion of the variable icon 9C are covered by the cover image CI1. After this, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area becomes difficult to see, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area The hold icons 9A become difficult to visually recognize one by one. That is, the number of pending icons 9A that are difficult to visually recognize gradually increases. Further, the character image included in the cover image CI1 may be displayed while an animation is being executed, the cover image CI1 may be composed only of the character image, or only the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C may be displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L may be of a size that does not make it difficult to see. The same applies to subsequent cases. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the entire cover image CI1 that is framed from the bottom of the position where the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a is stopped and displayed after being framed. , all the displayed pending icons 9A, the relevant fluctuation icons 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to recognize. At this time, it is assumed that the left decorative pattern 8L has undergone a deceleration fluctuation display, and the decorative pattern representing "3" has temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, regarding the left decorative pattern 8L, it may be temporarily stopped at the same time that it becomes difficult to see due to the cover image CI1, it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or it may become difficult to see after it is temporarily stopped. . Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), in the right decorative pattern 8R which has been displayed in a high-speed fluctuation manner, the decorative symbol representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed through a deceleration fluctuation display. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display. In addition, at this time, the cover image CI1 maintains the static display, but as this makes the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, it is unclear whether it is changing again or maintaining the temporary static display. Here, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. Note that a reach may be formed after the left decorative pattern 8L changes again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), the cover image CI1 that had been stopped and displayed is moved and displayed vertically upward of the display screen 7a, and goes out of the frame. In addition, with this, a part of the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and a part of the variable icon 9C, which had been difficult to see, are now visible. becomes. After this, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area becomes visible, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area become visible. The pending icons 9A become visible one by one in this order. That is, the number of visually recognizable pending icons 9A gradually increases. The scene shown in FIG. 72(E) is a display example after all the hold icons 9A become visible. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintains a temporary stop display. Also, at this time, the cover image CI1 maintains the moving display, but the left decorative pattern 8L is still difficult to see, so it is unclear whether it is moving again or maintaining the temporarily stopped display. Now, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. In addition, the pending icon obscuring effect A is a presentation that suggests that the display mode of the pending icon 9A or the variable icon 9C changes to a mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot, but in this case, the pending change does not occur. Assume it never happened.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), the lower end of the cover image CI1 that has been moved and displayed upward on the display screen 7a goes out of frame. Additionally, along with this, the left decorative pattern 8L, which had been difficult to see, becomes visible. After this, the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, the fluctuating performance ends, and each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R finally stops.

The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect A. By configuring the hold icon shielding effect A to be executed, it is possible to make the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C difficult to see, and to make the player expect that a hold change will occur while the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see. It is possible to entertain the player with the performance of the pending icon in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Pending icon shielding effect B]
FIGS. 72(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining pending icon shielding effect B. Pending icon shielding production A is a production in which a cover image including a character image enters the frame from the left side of the display screen 7a, covers a part of the pending icon and the decorative pattern, and then frames out during a variable production. This is a performance meant to suggest a pending change. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 72(G), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a (lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L). It should be noted that the explanation will be continued assuming that no pending change performance is performed during this fluctuation performance, and that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this fluctuation performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(H), the cover image CI2 including the character image is displayed moving horizontally from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right, and enters the frame. As a result, the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are covered by the cover image CI2. Specifically, first, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes difficult to see, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area The pending icon 9A corresponding to the icon 9A and the variable icon 9C become difficult to visually recognize one by one. That is, the number of pending icons that are difficult to visually recognize is gradually increasing. Further, the character image included in the cover image CI2 may be displayed while an animation is being executed, the cover image CI2 may be composed only of the character image, or only the pending icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C may be displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L may be of a size that does not make it difficult to see. The same applies to subsequent cases. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(I), the entire cover image CI2 that has entered the frame from the left end of the display screen 7a has entered the frame and is then stopped and displayed, and all the displayed pending icons 9A and the relevant variable icon 9C and left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to see. At this time, it is assumed that the left decorative pattern 8L has undergone a deceleration fluctuation display, and the decorative pattern representing "3" has temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, regarding the left decorative pattern 8L, it may be temporarily stopped at the same time that it becomes difficult to see due to the cover image CI2, it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or it may become difficult to see after it is temporarily stopped. . Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(J), in the right decorative pattern 8R which has been displayed in high speed fluctuations, the decorative pattern representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed through deceleration fluctuation display. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display. In addition, at this time, the cover image CI2 maintains the stop display, but as this makes the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, it is unclear whether it is changing again or maintaining the temporary stop display. Here, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. Note that a reach may be formed after the left decorative pattern 8L changes again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(K), the cover image CI2 that has been stopped and displayed is moved and displayed horizontally to the right of the display screen 7a, and goes out of the frame. In addition, with this, the reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the variable icons 9C, which have been difficult to see, become visible. Specifically, first, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes visible, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area become visible. The pending icon 9A corresponding to the icon 9A and the variable icon 9C become visible one by one in this order. That is, the number of viewable pending icons gradually increases. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L gradually becomes visible from the left end. Note that the cover image CI2 was displayed in front of the pending icon 9A, the fluctuation icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, making them difficult to see, but the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R were displayed. Since they are displayed on the back side of the circular area, even if the cover image CI2 is moved and displayed, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R do not become difficult to see. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover image CI2 is displayed on the front side of at least one of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and as the cover image CI2 is moved and displayed, the cover image CI2 is displayed on the back side of the cover image CI2. It is also possible to make one of the decorative patterns difficult to see. The scene shown in FIG. 72(K) is a display example after all the hold icons 9A become visible. The middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R maintain a temporary stop display. However, at this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, which had been difficult to see due to the cover image CI2, has become visible again, so this may be used as an opportunity to change the pattern again. For example, when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible with the moving display of the cover image CI2, it has already started to fluctuate again, and thereafter, the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed on the right decorative pattern 8R and Decorative patterns with the same content are displayed temporarily, forming a reach. Furthermore, the pending icon shielding performance B is a performance that suggests that the display mode of the pending icon 9A or the relevant variable icon 9C changes to a mode with a higher expectation of jackpot, but in this case, the pending change does not occur. Assume it never happened.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(L), the left end of the cover image CI2, which was being displayed while moving toward the horizontal right of the display screen 7a, goes out of frame. After this, the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, the fluctuating performance ends, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R finally stop.

The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect B. By configuring the hold icon shielding effect B to be executed, it is possible to make the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C difficult to see, and to make the player expect that a hold change will occur while the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see. It is possible to entertain the player with the performance of the pending icon in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Pending icon shielding effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon shielding effect C. Pending icon shielding production C is a production in which a cover image including a character image enters the frame from the bottom of the display screen 7a, covers a part of the pending icon and the decorative pattern, and then frames out during a variable production. This is a performance to suggest a pending change. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may also be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

In the hold icon shielding effect C, the cover image CI3 enters the frame from the lower part of the display screen 7a, and after the hold icon 9A and the relevant change icon 9C become difficult to see, the cover image CI3 goes out of the frame and the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C become invisible. This is an effect in which the icon 9C becomes visible again. While the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see due to the cover image CI3, the display mode of each pending icon changes from the normal mode to the expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a win. There are cases where a pending change is performed in which the value changes to a relatively high value. In this example, the hold icon is normally a white round icon, and can be changed to either a shaded square icon or a patterned hexagonal icon.

Further, the cover image CI3 may change to a cover image CI4 in which there is a relatively high expectation that either the pending icon 9A or the change icon 9C will execute the pending change. This is called development. In addition, cover image CI3 includes a character string image "Kenkon", and cover image CI4 includes a character string image "Ichikun", which will develop into a four-character idiom "Kenkon Ichigo". It has been completed and is configured to give players a sense of anticipation for changes in reservations.

73(A) to (F) are patterns with no pending change and no development, while FIGS. 73(A) to (E) and (G) are patterns with a pending change and no development, and FIGS. 73(A) to (D ), (H) to (J) are patterns with no pending change and development; Figures 73 (A) to (D), (H) to (I), and (K) are patterns with pending change and development; In FIGS. 73(A) to (D), (H) to (I), and (L), patterns with multiple pending changes and development will be explained, respectively. First, a pattern with no pending change and no development will be explained.

First, as shown in FIG. 73(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a (lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), the cover image CI3 including the character image is moved vertically upward from the bottom of the position where the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. displayed and framed. As a result, a portion of the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and a portion of the variable icon 9C are covered by the cover image CI1. After this, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area becomes difficult to see, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area The hold icons 9A become difficult to visually recognize one by one. That is, the number of pending icons 9A that are difficult to visually recognize gradually increases. Further, the cover image CI3 may be displayed while an animation is being executed, the cover image CI3 may be composed of only a character string image, or only the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C may be made difficult to see. The left decorative pattern 8L may have a size that does not make it difficult to see. The same applies to subsequent cases. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the entire cover image CI3, which has entered the frame from the bottom of the position where the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, is stopped and displayed after entering the frame. , all the displayed pending icons 9A, the relevant fluctuation icons 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to recognize. At this time, it is assumed that the left decorative pattern 8L has undergone a deceleration fluctuation display, and the decorative pattern representing "3" has temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, regarding the left decorative pattern 8L, it may be temporarily stopped at the same time that it becomes difficult to see due to the cover image CI3, it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or it may become difficult to see after it is temporarily stopped. . Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), in the right decorative pattern 8R which has been displayed in high-speed variation, the decorative pattern representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed after deceleration variation display. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display. Also, at this time, the cover image CI3 maintains the stopped display, but as this makes the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, it is unclear whether it is changing again or maintaining the temporarily stopped display. Here, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which a reach is formed after the left decorative pattern 8L changes again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), the cover image CI3 that had been stopped and displayed is moved and displayed vertically downward on the display screen 7a, and goes out of the frame. In addition, with this, the left decorative pattern 8L, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a, and the variable icon 9C, which were difficult to see, are now visible. Become. Specifically, first, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes visible, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area become visible. The hold icons 9A corresponding to the hold icons 9A become visible one by one. That is, the number of visually recognizable pending icons 9A gradually increases. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintains a temporary stop display. At this time, the cover image CI3 is displayed moving, but the left decorative pattern 8L transitions from a state where it is difficult to see to a state where it is visible, but by the time it becomes visible, it has changed again or is temporarily stopped. Although it is unclear whether the temporary stop display is maintained, here it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again, it may be configured to form a reach.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), the lower end of the cover image CI3 that was being displayed moving vertically downward on the display screen 7a goes out of the frame. Further, along with this, the entire pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, which had been difficult to visually recognize, become visible. After this, the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, the fluctuating performance ends, and each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R finally stops. The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect C in the pattern of no pending change and no development.

Next, a pattern with a pending change and no development will be explained. The flow from FIG. 73(A) to FIG. 73(E) is the same as the above-mentioned pattern with no pending change and no development, so the explanation will be omitted.
After the scene shown in FIG. 73(E), when the cover image CI3 completely goes out of frame, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes to a white round icon, as shown in FIG. 73(G). The icon has changed from 1 to 2. This change in the display mode of the pending icon 9A may be performed during a period when the cover image CI3 is difficult to visually recognize, or may be performed after the cover image CI3 moves and becomes visible. Further, when a pending change is made after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, the pending change may be performed on the variation icon 9C. The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect C in a pattern with a pending change and no development.

Next, a pattern with no pending change and development will be explained. The flow in FIGS. 73(A) to 73(D) is the same as the above-described pattern with no pending change and no development, so a description thereof will be omitted.

After the scene shown in FIG. 73(D), the display mode of cover image CI3 changes and becomes cover image CI4, as shown in FIG. 73(E). Although an animation may be performed during this change, it is assumed that the left decorative pattern 8L, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C remain difficult to see due to the cover image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(I), the cover image CI4 that had been stopped and displayed is moved and displayed vertically downward on the display screen 7a, and goes out of the frame. In addition, with this, the left decorative pattern 8L, the holding icon 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a, and the variable icon 9C, which were difficult to see, are now visible. Become. Specifically, first, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes visible, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area become visible. The hold icons 9A corresponding to the hold icons 9A become visible one by one. That is, the number of visually recognizable pending icons 9A gradually increases. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display, and the right decorative pattern 8R maintains a temporary stop display. At this time, the cover image CI4 is displayed moving, but the left decorative pattern 8L transitions from a state where it is difficult to see to a state where it is visible, but by the time it becomes visible, it has changed again or is temporarily stopped. Although it is unclear whether the temporary stop display is maintained, here it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. After the left decorative pattern 8L changes again, it may be configured to form a reach.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(J), the lower end of the cover image CI4 that was being displayed moving vertically downward on the display screen 7a goes out of frame. Further, along with this, the entire pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C, which had been difficult to visually recognize, become visible. After this, the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, the fluctuating performance ends, and each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R finally stops. The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect C in the pattern of no pending change and development.

Next, a pattern with a pending change and a development will be explained. The flows in FIGS. 73(A) to (D) are similar to the above-mentioned pattern with no pending change and no development, and among the subsequent flows, the flows in FIGS. 73(H) to (I) have no pending change and no development. Since this is the same as the pattern with development, the explanation for each will be omitted.

After the scene shown in FIG. 73(I), when the cover image CI4 completely goes out of frame, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area changes to a white round icon, as shown in FIG. 73(K). The icon has changed from 1 to 2 to a shaded square icon. This change in the display mode of the pending icon 9A may be performed during a period when the cover image CI4 is displayed and is difficult to recognize, or may be performed after the cover image CI4 moves and becomes visible. good. Further, when a pending change is made after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, the pending change may be performed on the variation icon 9C. The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect C in the pattern with pending change and development.

Finally, a pattern with multiple pending changes and development will be explained. The flows in FIGS. 73(A) to (D) are similar to the above-mentioned pattern with no pending change and no development, and among the subsequent flows, the flows in FIGS. 73(H) to (I) have no pending change and no development. Since this is the same as the pattern with development, the explanation for each will be omitted.

After the scene shown in FIG. 73(I), when the cover image CI4 completely goes out of frame, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes to a white round icon, as shown in FIG. 73(L). The display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area changes from a white round icon to a shaded square icon. These changes in the display mode of the pending icon 9A may be performed during a period when the cover image CI4 is displayed and difficult to see, or may be performed after the cover image CI4 moves and becomes visible. Good too. Further, when a pending change is made after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, the pending change may be performed on the variation icon 9C. Additionally, the order of pending changes may be set arbitrarily. That is, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area may change to hold at the same time, or the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area may change to hold at the same time. The hold icon 9A may be changed to hold in the order of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area may be changed to hold in the order. The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect C in a pattern with multiple pending changes and development.

The above are display examples of the pending icon shielding effect C in various patterns. By having a configuration that can execute the hold icon shielding effect C, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are made difficult to see, and while the hold icon is difficult to see, a change in hold occurs, and a cover is provided to make the change expected. It is possible to make a player expect a change in reservation by changing the display mode of images, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player with the performance of a reservation icon in a variable performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Pending icon shielding effect D]
FIGS. 74(A) to 74(F) are diagrams for explaining the pending icon shielding effect D. In the pending icon shielding performance D, during a variable performance, a plurality of suggestion images CI5 and a plurality of suggestion images CI6 are continuously framed from the left part of the display screen 7a, and a part of the pending icon and decorative pattern are This is a performance that frames out after being covered up, and is a performance that suggests the re-fluctuation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern and the pending change of the fluctuation icon 9C. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may also be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a (lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L). The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variable performance was a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), the plurality of suggestion images CI5 and the plurality of suggestion images CI6 are displayed moving from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the horizontal right, and are successively displayed in the frame. do. As a result, the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are combined with the plurality of suggestion images CI5 and the plurality of suggestion images. It is covered by image CI6. Specifically, first, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes difficult to see, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area The pending icon 9A corresponding to the icon 9A and the variable icon 9C become difficult to visually recognize one by one. That is, the number of pending icons that are difficult to visually recognize is gradually increasing. Further, the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 may be displayed while an animation is being executed, at least one of the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 may be composed of a character image, or a pending icon The size may be such that only the variable icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see, and the left decorative pattern 8L is not difficult to see. The same applies to subsequent cases. Further, at this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, which has been displayed in a high-speed variable manner, undergoes a deceleration variable display, and then the decorative pattern representing "3" is temporarily stopped and displayed. The timing of the temporary stop display is preferably before the plurality of suggestion images CI5 and the plurality of suggestion images CI6 make it difficult to see, but it may be after it becomes difficult to see. In this case, it is assumed that visibility becomes difficult after the temporary stop. Furthermore, the plurality of images that are moved and displayed to make it difficult to see the left decorative pattern 8L, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C may be only the suggestion image CI5. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R maintain high-speed fluctuation display, and their contents are difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), the plurality of suggestion images CI5 and the plurality of suggestion images CI6 framed from the left end of the display screen 7a remove all the currently displayed pending icons 9A and the corresponding variation. The icon 9C and the left decorative pattern 8L become difficult to see. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the front side of all the suggested images CI5 and suggested images CI6, and even if they overlap with the suggested images CI5 and suggested images CI6, they will not be difficult to see. It is assumed that the configuration is as follows. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover image CI2 is displayed on the front side of at least one of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and as the cover image CI2 is moved and displayed, the cover image CI2 is displayed on the back side of the cover image CI2. It is also possible to make one of the decorative patterns difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), the new suggestion image CI5 and suggestion image CI6 are no longer framed from the left end of the display screen 7a, and the suggestion image CI5 and suggestion image CI6 that have already been framed are Subsequently, it is displayed moving horizontally to the right on the display screen 7a. In addition, along with this, the reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, the variable icons 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L, which were difficult to see, have been changed. It becomes visible. Specifically, first, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes visible, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area become visible. The pending icon 9A corresponding to the icon 9A and the variable icon 9C become visible one by one in this order. That is, the number of viewable pending icons gradually increases. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L gradually becomes visible from the left end. The right decorative pattern 8R, which has been displayed in high-speed fluctuations, is displayed in deceleration fluctuations, and then the decorative symbol representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display.

Furthermore, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, which has become visible, has changed from a white round icon to a square shaded icon. This change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon 9C may be performed during a period in which the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 are difficult to see because the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 are displayed, or the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 are moved and are not visible. It may be executed after it becomes possible. Further, when a pending change is made after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, the pending change may be performed on the pending icon 9A.

In addition, the content of the decorative pattern that was temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern 8L that has become visible has changed from "3" to "6". As a result, the contents of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern 8L and the contents of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern 8R match, and a reach is formed. This change in the content of the decorative pattern may be performed during a period when the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 are displayed, making it difficult to see, or when the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 have moved and become visible. It may be executed after Further, when the content changes after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by animation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6, which were being displayed while moving horizontally to the right on the display screen 7a, sequentially go out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the medium decorative pattern 8C undergoes deceleration fluctuation display, and the decorative pattern representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed. As a result, the contents of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R with no deviation match with "6", suggesting that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this variation effect was a hit. are doing. After this, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R all come to a fixed stop, and the win is confirmed.

The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect D. By configuring the configuration to be able to execute the pending icon shielding effect D, the left decorative pattern 8L, the pending icon 9A, and the fluctuation icon 9C are made difficult to see, and while the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped while being difficult to see. It is possible to make a player expect that a change in content or a change in reservation will occur, it is possible to entertain the player with the performance of a reservation icon in a variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Pending icon shielding effect E]
FIGS. 74(G) to (L) are diagrams for explaining the pending icon shielding effect E. The pending icon shielding effect E is such that during the variable presentation, a plurality of suggestion images CI5 and a plurality of suggestion images CI6 are continuously framed from the left part of the display screen 7a, and part of the pending icon and decorative pattern is This is a performance in which the subject is covered up and then framed out, and is intended to suggest a pending change. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may also be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(G), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a (lower part of the left decorative pattern 8L). It should be noted that the explanation will be continued assuming that no pending change performance is performed during this fluctuation performance, and that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this fluctuation performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 are displayed moving from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the horizontal right, and a plurality of them are successively placed in the frame. As a result, the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure pending storage area 85a, the variable icon 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are covered by the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6. ing. Specifically, first, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area becomes difficult to see, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the first storage area The pending icon 9A corresponding to the icon 9A and the variable icon 9C become difficult to visually recognize one by one. That is, the number of pending icons that are difficult to visually recognize is gradually increasing. Further, the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 may be composed of character images, may be displayed while an animation is being executed, or only the pending icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C may be made difficult to see and the left decoration may be made. The pattern 8L may have a size that does not make it difficult to see. Furthermore, the plurality of images that are moved and displayed to make it difficult to see the left decorative pattern 8L, the pending icon 9A, and the variable icon 9C may be only the suggestion image CI5. The same applies to subsequent cases. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 that have entered the frame from the left end of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed, and the new suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 have entered the frame. It disappears. Due to the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6, all the displayed pending icons 9A, the fluctuation icons 9C, and the left decorative pattern 8L are difficult to see. At this time, it is assumed that the left decorative pattern 8L has undergone a deceleration fluctuation display, and the decorative pattern representing "3" has temporarily stopped. In this case, the time when the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stops and the time when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes difficult to see may be set arbitrarily. That is, regarding the left decorative pattern 8L, it may be temporarily stopped at the same time that it becomes difficult to see due to the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6, it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see, or it may be temporarily stopped after it becomes difficult to see. It's okay to be. Note that the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(J), in the right decorative pattern 8R which has been displayed in high-speed fluctuation, the decorative pattern representing "6" is temporarily stopped and displayed after deceleration and fluctuation is displayed. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display. Also, at this time, the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 maintain the stopped display, but as this makes the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, it is unclear whether it is changing again or maintaining the temporary stop display. However, here, it is assumed that the temporary stop display is maintained. Note that a reach may be formed after the left decorative pattern 8L changes again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(K), the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 that have been stopped and displayed are moved and displayed horizontally to the left of the display screen 7a, and are then moved out of the frame. In addition, with this, the reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the variable icons 9C, which have been difficult to see, become visible. Specifically, first, the fluctuation icon 9C becomes visible, and then the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area, and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area are displayed. , the pending icons 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area become visible one by one. That is, the number of viewable pending icons gradually increases. Moreover, the left decorative pattern 8L gradually becomes visible from the right end. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C maintains a high-speed fluctuation display. However, at this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, which had become difficult to see due to the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6, has become visible again, so this may be used as an opportunity to change the pattern again. For example, with the moving display of the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6, when the left decorative pattern 8L becomes visible, it has already started to change again, and then the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed. A decorative pattern having the same content as the existing decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed to form a reach. Furthermore, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area that has become visible has changed from a white round icon to a shaded square icon. The change in the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area may be performed during a period in which the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 are difficult to be seen, or may be performed during a period in which the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6 are difficult to see. It may be executed after the image CI6 moves and becomes visible. Further, when a pending change is made after becoming visible, the change may be accompanied by an animation. Furthermore, the pending change may be performed on the variation icon 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(L), the suggestion image CI5 and the suggestion image CI6, which were displayed moving horizontally to the right on the display screen 7a, all go out of frame. After this, the medium decorative pattern 8C temporarily stops, the fluctuating performance ends, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R finally stop.

The above is a display example of the pending icon shielding effect E. By configuring the hold icon shielding effect E to be executed, it is possible to make the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C difficult to see, and to make the player expect that a hold change will occur while the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are difficult to see. It is possible to entertain the player with the performance of the pending icon in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, there is a first effect in which the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and after the first effect, the cover images CI1, CI2, CI3, A second effect in which at least one of CI4, CI5, and CI6 is displayed moving; and after the second effect, at least one of the cover images CI1, CI2, CI3, CI4, CI5, and CI6 is displayed as a hold icon. 9A and is stopped and displayed in front of the hold icon 9A, making it difficult to see the hold icon 9A. For example, in the hold icon shielding effect A, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the cover image CI1 makes the hold icon 9A difficult to see. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is defined as a "display screen" in claim 1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are defined as "a plurality of decorative patterns", and the pending icon 9A is defined as a "reserved image". Each cover image corresponds to a "predetermined image".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 72(C) to 72(F), in the third effect, the cover image CI1 overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L and is further away from the left decorative pattern 8L. is also displayed on the front side, making the left decorative pattern 8L difficult to see, and after the third effect, a fourth effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed, and after the fourth effect, the cover image CI1 is moved. The configuration is such that it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the pending icon 9A and the left decorative pattern 8L are displayed and made visible. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the pending icon 9A is displayed as a white round icon with a relatively low expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a win. In some cases, the icon is displayed as a shaded square icon with a relatively high level of expectation.After the second performance, the hold icon 9A changes from a white round icon to a shaded square icon. The structure was such that it was possible to perform the following. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, after the second effect and before the sixth effect, the cover image CI3 changes to the cover image CI4, so that the sixth The configuration is such that it is possible to execute a seventh effect that suggests that the effect shown in FIG. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 72(G) to (L), in the first effect, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed simultaneously, and in the second effect, a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed simultaneously. In this case, as the cover image CI2 moves, the number of pending icons 9A that go from a visible state to a difficult to see state gradually increases, and in the third effect, all the pending icons 9A become difficult to see. It becomes. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon shielding effect, the cover image may be configured so that the left decorative pattern 8L does not become difficult to see due to the cover image. On the other hand, decorative patterns other than the left decorative pattern 8L may also be configured to be difficult to see.

[Modification 2]
In the pending icon shielding effect C, the cover image CI3 may include a character image. In this case, the cover image CI4 may include the same character image with a different display mode from the cover image CI3, and the character image may perform an animation when changing from the cover image CI3 to the cover image CI4. It's okay.

[Modification 3]
In the hold icon shielding effects D and E, the plurality of cover images that make the hold icon 9A etc. difficult to see may be composed of one type of image. In this case, one type of cover image may include a character image, or may be configured such that when the cover image is moved and displayed, the character image performs animation.

[Modification 4]
In the hold icon shielding effects A and B, the hold change may be performed after the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C become difficult to see due to the cover images CI1 and CI2.

[Modification 5]
In the hold icon shielding effect, the cover image may be configured to make only a predetermined number of hold icons 9A and the change icons 9C difficult to see, instead of making all the hold icons 9A and the change icons 9C difficult to see.

[Modification 6]
The effects described in the decorative pattern change effects A to E may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display screen capable of displaying multiple types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a plurality of decorative patterns,
One of the plurality of types of images is a pending image representing pending;
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
a first performance in which the plurality of decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner;
a second effect in which the predetermined image is displayed in a moving manner after the first effect;
After the second effect, it is possible to perform a third effect in which the predetermined image overlaps with the held image and is stopped and displayed in front of the held image, making the held image difficult to see. What?
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the third effect, the predetermined image overlaps the first decorative pattern and is displayed in front of the first decorative pattern, making the first decorative pattern difficult to see;
a fourth performance in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the third performance;
After the fourth performance, the predetermined image is moved and displayed, and the suspended image and the first decorative pattern are made visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The pending image is displayed in a first pending mode in which the expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a jackpot is relatively low, and in a second pending mode in which the expectation is relatively high. There are cases and
After the second performance, a sixth performance can be executed in which the suspended image changes from the first retention mode to the second retention mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
After the second effect and before the sixth effect, the predetermined image changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, thereby indicating that the sixth effect is to be performed. 7 performances can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
In the first performance, a plurality of the reserved images are displayed simultaneously;
In the second effect, as the predetermined image moves, the number of the reserved images that change from a visible state to a difficult to see state gradually increases;
In the third effect, all the reserved images become difficult to see;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Icon image display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 75 to 77. The icon image display effect is executed while the decorative pattern is changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute an icon image display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Icon image display effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining icon image display effect A. In icon image display effect A, first, a stop display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 75(A). The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. Note that it may be a temporary stop instead of a definite stop. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reservation icon 9A corresponds to a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reservation, the second reservation, the third reservation, and the fourth reservation, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. As the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, the pending icon 9A is shifted and displayed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of the second hold is the hold icon 9A of the first hold, and the hold icon 9A of the third hold is the hold icon 9A of the second hold. 9A, and moves the fourth pending icon 9A to become the third pending icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(C) to 75(E), an icon display effect is executed. The icon display performance is a performance that displays an icon image of the same target as the target represented by the pending icon image. Here, an icon image IG having the same hexagonal shape as the hexagonal object represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of pending items. The icon image IG is larger than the image size of the pending icon 9A. The icon image IG enters the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a and exits the frame from the lower end while being gradually enlarged. Therefore, the objects are displayed as if flying from the back side of the display screen toward the front side.

In FIG. 75(C), the icon image IG has just entered the frame on the display screen 7a, and the icon image IG is displayed above the center. In FIG. 75(D), the icon image IG is gradually enlarged and moved downward. In FIG. 75(E), the icon image IG is further enlarged, moved downward, and out of the frame from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which decorative patterns form a predetermined reach mode. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development performance is a performance that suggests development into a battle performance. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a message image MG saying "Development to Battle Reach" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(H) and 75(I), the icon display effect is executed again. The icon display performance is a performance that displays an icon image of the same target as the target represented by the pending icon image. Here, an icon image IG having the same hexagonal shape as the hexagonal object represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of pending items. At this time, the image of the hold icon 9A is hidden. In FIG. 75(H), a plurality of icon images IG are displayed on the display screen 7a. After the icon image IG is displayed, the icon image IG moves downward and frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 75(I).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 75(J) and 75(K), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle. In FIG. 75(J), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 75(K), the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are in a collision. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "3" symbols, and a win is notified. In the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative symbols become "3" symbols, and the middle decorative symbol becomes "4" symbols.

[Icon image display effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining icon image display effect B. In icon image display effect B, first, a stop display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 76(A). The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. Note that it may be a temporary stop instead of a definite stop. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reservation icon 9A corresponds to a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reservation, the second reservation, the third reservation, and the fourth reservation, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. As the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, the pending icon 9A is shifted and displayed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of the second hold is the hold icon 9A of the first hold, and the hold icon 9A of the third hold is the hold icon 9A of the second hold. 9A, and moves the fourth pending icon 9A to become the third pending icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(C) to 76(E), an icon display effect is executed. The icon display performance is a performance that displays an icon image of the same target as the target represented by the pending icon image. Here, an icon image IG having the same hexagonal shape as the hexagonal object represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of pending items. The icon image IG is larger than the image size of the pending icon 9A. It is assumed that the display color of the icon image IG is blue (shown by hatching). The display color of the icon image IG suggests the degree of expectation for winning. The expectation of winning in display colors is set in the order of white → blue → green → red → gold, for example. The icon image IG enters the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a and exits the frame from the lower end while being gradually enlarged. Therefore, the objects are displayed as if flying from the back side of the display screen toward the front side.

In FIG. 76(C), the icon image IG has just entered the frame on the display screen 7a, and the icon image IG is displayed above the center. In FIG. 76(D), the icon image IG is gradually enlarged and moved downward. In FIG. 76(E), the icon image IG is further enlarged, moved downward, and out of the frame from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which decorative patterns form a predetermined reach mode. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development performance is a performance that suggests development into a battle performance. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a message image MG saying "Development to Battle Reach" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(H) and (I), the icon display effect is executed again. The icon display performance is a performance that displays an icon image of the same target as the target represented by the pending icon image. Here, an icon image IG having the same hexagonal shape as the hexagonal object represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of pending items. The icon image IG is larger than the image size of the pending icon 9A. The display color of the icon image IG is green (shown with hatching). This suggests an increase in expectations for winning. At this time, the image of the hold icon 9A is hidden. In FIG. 76(H), a plurality of icon images IG are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. After the icon image IG is displayed, the icon image IG moves downward and frames out from the lower end of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 76(I). Here, the three pending icons 9A are hidden, and the variable icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 76(J) and 76(K), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle. In FIG. 76(J), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 76(K), the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are in a collision. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "3" symbols, and a win is notified. In the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative symbols become "3" symbols, and the middle decorative symbol becomes "4" symbols.

[Icon image display performance C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining icon image display effect C. In icon image display effect C, first, a stop display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 77(A). The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. Note that it may be a temporary stop instead of a definite stop. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reservation icon 9A corresponds to a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reservation, the second reservation, the third reservation, and the fourth reservation, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. As the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, the pending icon 9A is shifted and displayed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of the second hold is the hold icon 9A of the first hold, and the hold icon 9A of the third hold is the hold icon 9A of the second hold. 9A, and moves the fourth pending icon 9A to become the third pending icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(C) to (E), icon display effects are executed. The icon display performance is a performance that displays an icon image of the same target as the target represented by the pending icon image. Here, an icon image IG having the same hexagonal shape as the hexagonal object represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of pending items. The icon image IG is larger than the image size of the pending icon 9A. It is assumed that the display color of the icon image IG is blue (shown by hatching). The display color of the icon image IG suggests the degree of expectation for winning. The expectation of winning in display colors is set in the order of white → blue → green → red → gold, for example. The icon image IG enters the frame from the upper end of the display screen 7a and exits the frame from the lower end while being gradually enlarged. Therefore, the objects are displayed as if flying from the back side of the display screen toward the front side.

In FIG. 77(C), the icon image IG has just entered the frame on the display screen 7a, and the icon image IG is displayed above the center. In FIG. 77(D), the icon image IG is gradually enlarged and moved downward. In FIG. 77(E), the icon image IG is further enlarged, moved downward, and out of the frame from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which decorative patterns form a predetermined reach mode. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development performance is a performance that suggests development into a battle performance. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a message image MG saying "Development to Battle Reach" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(H), the icon display effect is executed again. The icon display performance is a performance that displays an icon image of the same target as the target represented by the pending icon image. Here, an icon image IG having the same hexagonal shape as the hexagonal object represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of pending items. The display color of the icon image IG is green (shown with hatching). This suggests an increase in expectations for winning. At this time, the image of the hold icon 9A is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 77(I) and 77(J), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle. In FIG. 77(I), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are facing each other in the center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 77(J), the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are in a collision. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(K), the third icon display effect is executed. The icon display performance is a performance that displays an icon image of the same target as the target represented by the pending icon image. Here, an icon image IG having the same hexagonal shape as the hexagonal object represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed. A plurality of icon images IG are displayed regardless of the number of pending items. Moreover, the icon image IG is displayed so as to fill the display screen 7a. The display color of the icon image IG is red (shown with hatching). This suggests a further increase in expectations for winning. At this time, the image of the hold icon 9A is hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "3" symbols, and a win is notified. In the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative symbols become "3" symbols, and the middle decorative symbol becomes "4" symbols.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of icon image display effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an icon display effect that displays a predetermined number of icon images IG representing the same regular hexagon (object) as the regular hexagon (object) represented by the reservation icon 9A on the display screen 7a regardless of the number of reservations. is possible. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to "display control means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the icon display effect can be executed multiple times during one change (FIGS. 75(C) to (E)(H)(I), FIG. 76(C) to ( E) (H) (I), Figure 77 (C) to (E) (H) (K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the icon image IG displayed in the icon display effect is changed multiple times during one change (FIGS. 77(C) to (E)(H)(K )). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during execution of the icon display effect, the display state in which the pending icon 9A is displayed is switched to the non-display state in which the pending icon 9A is not displayed (FIGS. 76(H) and (I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, at least one icon image IG out of the predetermined number of icon images IG displayed in the icon display effect is larger than or equal to the image size of the pending icon 9A. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Modified examples of icon image display effects are shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the pending icon 9A is switched from the display state to the non-display state during the execution of the icon display effect (FIGS. 76(H) and 76(I)). On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the pending icon 9A is switched to non-display from the start of the icon display effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the pending icon 9A was switched from the display state to the non-display state while the icon display effect was being executed, and the variable icon 9C was displayed (FIGS. 76(H) and 76(I)). The variable icon 9C may also be switched from a display state to a non-display state together with the pending icon 9A.

[Modification 3]
In the embodiment described above, an icon image representing the same object as the object represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed, but an icon image representing the same object as the object represented by the hold icon 9B may be displayed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display control means capable of displaying a pending icon image indicating a pending number on a display screen,
The display control means is capable of performing an icon display effect of displaying a predetermined number of icon images representing the same object as the object represented by the held icon image on the display screen, regardless of the number of held icons.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The display control means is capable of executing the icon display effect multiple times during one change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The display control means changes the display color of the icon image displayed in the icon display effect multiple times during one change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The display control means switches from a display state in which the pending icon image is displayed to a non-display state in which the pending icon image is not displayed during execution of the icon display effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4,
The display control means is configured such that at least one of the predetermined number of icon images displayed in the icon display effect has an image size equal to or larger than the pending icon image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The icon shape area productions A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 78 to 80. The icon shape area rendering is executed while the decorative pattern is changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to perform icon shape area rendering, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Icon shape area production A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining icon shape area rendering A. In the icon shape area effect A, first, a stop display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 78(A). The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. Note that it may be a temporary stop instead of a definite stop. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reservation icon 9A corresponds to a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reservation, the second reservation, the third reservation, and the fourth reservation, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. As the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, the pending icon 9A is shifted and displayed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of the second hold is the hold icon 9A of the first hold, and the hold icon 9A of the third hold is the hold icon 9A of the second hold. 9A, and moves the fourth pending icon 9A to become the third pending icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(C) to 78(E), specific area effects are executed. The specific area effect is an effect in which a specific display is performed within a specific area having the same outline as the pending icon image. In FIG. 78(C), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed from the upper end of the display screen 7a. While expanding, the specific area TA moves to the center of the display screen 7a and stops, as shown in FIG. 78(D). At this time, the variation icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the specific area TA. The fluctuation icon 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific area TA. In FIG. 78(E), a message image MG that says "Evolves into a battle?" is displayed inside the specific area TA. The message image MG suggests an effect to be performed after the message image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which decorative patterns form a predetermined reach mode. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Three pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development performance is a performance that suggests development into a battle performance. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a message image MG saying "Development to Battle Reach" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 78(H) to 78(J), the specific area effect is executed again. The specific area effect is an effect in which a specific display is performed within a specific area having the same outline as the pending icon image. In FIG. 78(H), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed from the upper end of the display screen 7a. While expanding, the specific area TA moves to the center of the display screen 7a and stops, as shown in FIG. 78(I). The specific area TA is enlarged more than the specific area TA shown in FIGS. 78(D) and (E). At this time, the variable icon 9C and the first pending hold icon 9A are displayed overlappingly in a part of the specific area TA. The fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed on the front side of the specific area TA. In FIG. 78(J), a battle effect is being performed within the specific area TA. Here, a battle between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB is displayed as an animation inside the specific area TA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(K), the specific area TA is hidden, and the final battle effect is performed on the entire display screen 7a. The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are in a collision. A win is confirmed when the friendly character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "3" symbols, and a win is notified. In the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative symbols become "3" symbols, and the middle decorative symbol becomes "4" symbols.

[Icon shape area production B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining icon shape area rendering B. In icon shape area rendering B, first, a stop display rendering is executed as shown in FIG. 79(A). The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. Note that it may be a temporary stop instead of a definite stop. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reservation icon 9A corresponds to a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reservation, the second reservation, the third reservation, and the fourth reservation, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. As the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, the pending icon 9A is shifted and displayed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of the second hold is the hold icon 9A of the first hold, and the hold icon 9A of the third hold is the hold icon 9A of the second hold. 9A, and moves the fourth pending icon 9A to become the third pending icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(C) to 79(E), a specific area effect is executed. The specific area effect is an effect in which a specific display is performed within a specific area having the same outline as the pending icon image. In FIG. 79(C), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed from the upper end of the display screen 7a. While expanding, the specific area TA moves to the center of the display screen 7a and stops, as shown in FIG. 79(D). At this time, the variation icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the specific area TA. The fluctuation icon 9C is hidden on the back side of the specific area TA. By displaying the variable icon 9C on the back side of the specific area TA, it is possible to surprise the player. The fluctuation icon 9C may be hidden. The specific area TA may be displayed instead of the variable icon 9C. In FIG. 79(E), the inside of the specific area TA is filled in red. This suggests the level of expectation for winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which decorative patterns form a predetermined reach mode. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development performance is a performance that suggests development into a battle performance. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a message image MG saying "Development to Battle Reach" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 79(H) to (J), the specific area effect is executed again. The specific area effect is an effect in which a specific display is performed within a specific area having the same outline as the pending icon image. The specific area TA is larger than the specific area TA shown in FIGS. 79(D) and 79(E). Further, the specific area TA partially overlaps the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. The fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed on the front side of the specific area TA. In FIG. 79(H), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and a battle effect is being executed inside the specific area TA. Here, the friendly character CRA is pushed to the right side of the display screen 7a by the enemy character CRB, and an animation is displayed in which the friendly character CRA is in an inferior position. In FIG. 79(I), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and a battle effect is being performed inside the specific area TA. Here, the friendly character is pushing the enemy character CRB to the left side of the display screen 7a, and an animation is displayed in which the friendly character CRA has the upper hand. In FIG. 79(J), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a battle effect is being performed inside the specific area TA. Here, an animation is displayed in which the battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB is balanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(K), the specific area TA is hidden, and the final battle effect is performed on the entire display screen 7a. The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are in a collision. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "3" symbols, and a win is notified. In the case of a loss, although not shown, for example, the left and right decorative symbols become "3" symbols, and the middle decorative symbol becomes "4" symbols.

[Icon shape area production C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the icon shape area rendering C. In the icon shape area effect C, first, a stop display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80(A). The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed and stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed and stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed and stopped at the "9" pattern. Note that it may be a temporary stop instead of a definite stop. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are regular hexagonal images. The reservation icon 9A corresponds to a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a in order from the right side (closer to the center). These are also called the first reservation, the second reservation, the third reservation, and the fourth reservation, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. As the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, the pending icon 9A is shifted and displayed. Specifically, the hold icon 9A of the first hold is the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A of the second hold is the hold icon 9A of the first hold, and the hold icon 9A of the third hold is the hold icon 9A of the second hold. 9A, and moves the fourth pending icon 9A to become the third pending icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(C) to (E), specific area effects are executed. The specific area effect is an effect in which a specific display is performed within a specific area having the same outline as the pending icon image. In FIG. 80(C), a regular hexagonal specific area TA is framed from the upper end of the display screen 7a. While expanding, the specific area TA moves to the center of the display screen 7a and stops, as shown in FIG. 80(D). At this time, the variation icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the specific area TA. The fluctuation icon 9C is hidden on the back side of the specific area TA. By displaying the variable icon 9C on the back side of the specific area TA, it is possible to surprise the player. The fluctuation icon 9C may be hidden. The specific area TA may be displayed instead of the variable icon 9C. In FIG. 80(E), a message image MG "Very Hot" is displayed inside the specific area TA. The message image MG suggests the degree of expectation for winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which decorative patterns form a predetermined reach mode. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "3" symbol to form a reach mode. The medium decorative pattern 8C continues to fluctuate at high speed. Three pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(G), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development performance is a performance that suggests development into a battle performance. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a message image MG saying "Development to Battle Reach" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(H) and (I), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle. In FIG. 80(H), the friendly character CRA is pushed to the right side of the display screen 7a by the enemy character CRB, and an animation is displayed in which the friendly character CRA is in an inferior position. In FIG. 80(I), an animation is displayed in which the ally character is pushing the enemy character CRB to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA has the upper hand.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(J), the final battle effect is executed on the entire display screen 7a. The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are in a collision. A win is confirmed when the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(K), the specific area effect is executed again. The specific area effect is an effect in which a specific display is performed within a specific area having the same outline as the pending icon image. Here, a specific area TA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and an ally character CRA is displayed inside the specific area TA. Furthermore, a message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed inside the specific area TA. The specific area TA is larger than the specific area TA shown in FIGS. 80(D) and (E). Further, the specific area TA partially overlaps the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A. The fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are displayed on the front side of the specific area TA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are all "3" symbols, and a win is reported.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of icon-shaped area rendering is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a specific display is performed inside the specific area TA having the same outline as the pending icon image 9A (FIGS. 87(E)(J), FIGS. 79(E)(H) to ()). J), Figure 80(E)(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to "display control means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an image suggesting the degree of expectation of winning may be displayed as a specific display (FIG. 79(E), FIG. 80(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an image suggesting an effect to be executed after the specific display is sometimes displayed as the specific display (FIG. 78(E), FIG. 80(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the pending icon image 9A overlapping at least part of the specific area TA (FIGS. 78(I)(J), FIGS. 79(H) to (J)). , FIG. 80(K)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the icon shape area presentation will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the specific area effect is executed twice during one change. On the other hand, the number of executions of the specific area effect is not particularly limited, and may be configured to be executed only once, or may be configured to be executed three or more times.

[Modification 2]
Regarding the anteroposterior relationship between the specific area TA and the pending icon 9A (the variable icon 9C) in the above embodiment, the specific area TA may be on the front side or the back side of the pending icon 9A (the variable icon 9C). It's okay.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the specific display may include displaying an image that suggests the degree of expectation for winning, displaying an image suggesting a performance that will be performed after the specific display is performed, or displaying an animation. Was. On the other hand, two or more of these may be displayed as specific displays.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display control means capable of displaying a pending icon image indicating a pending number on a display screen,
The display control means performs a specific display within a specific area having a similar outline to the pending icon image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The display control means may display an image suggesting the degree of expectation of winning as the specific display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The display control means may display, as the specific display, an image suggesting an effect to be performed after the specific display is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3,
The display control means is capable of displaying the pending icon image overlappingly on at least a portion of the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The hold icon continuous change effect will be explained below using FIGS. 81 to 83. This pending icon continuous change performance is executed during the fluctuation performance. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and contains an instruction to execute a continuous change effect of the pending icon, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Pending icon continuous change effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon continuous change effect A. The pending icon continuous change effect A executes a pending change in which, during the variable effect, the display mode of the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A changes to a mode with higher expectation of success in the order in which the variable effect is consumed. This is a preview performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

The icons displayed in the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a plurality of shapes and shapes, each having a different degree of expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a hit when executing the pending icon continuous change effect A. It is assumed that the display mode is determined by a combination of a plurality of colors (in the example of FIG. 81, the difference in color is expressed by a pattern. The patterns may actually be different). In addition, for each pending icon (including the relevant variable icon 9C), one of multiple types of characters is assigned depending on the degree of expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a hit, and the character image is It may be displayed as each hold icon. In the hold icon continuous change production A, there are four types of shapes: circle, square, six-pointed star, and five-pointed star, and the colors (patterns) are white (outlined), green (diagonal lines), and red (shaded). It is assumed that there are three types. The degree of expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a win increases in the order of circle, square, hexagram, and pentagram, and increases in the order of white (outlined), green (diagonal lines), and red (shaded). shall become.

Here, for each pending icon (including the variable icon 9C), the difference in the expected hit level when the shape is different and the difference in the expected hit level when the color is different may be set arbitrarily. . For example, white circular icon, green circular icon, red circular icon, white square icon, green square icon, red square icon, white six-pointed star icon, green six-pointed star icon, red six-pointed star icon, white five-pointed star icon, green five-pointed star icon, The expectation level of winning may increase in the order of the red five-pointed star icon. Also, for example, white circular icon, green circular icon, white square icon, green square icon, white six-pointed star icon, green six-pointed star icon, white five-pointed star icon, green five-pointed star icon, red circular icon, red square icon, red six-pointed star The expectation level of winning may increase in the order of the icon and the red pentagram icon. Also, for example, white circle icon, white square icon, white six-pointed star icon, white five-pointed star icon, green circle icon, green square icon, green six-pointed star icon, green five-pointed star icon, red circle icon, red square icon, red six-pointed star The expectation level of winning may increase in the order of the icon and the red pentagram icon. Also, for example, white circular icon, white square icon, white six-pointed star icon, white five-pointed star icon, green circular icon, red circular icon, green square icon, red square icon, green six-pointed star icon, red six-pointed star icon, green five-pointed star icon , the expectation of winning may increase in the order of the red five-pointed star icon. Orders other than these may also be used.

Furthermore, when the final display form becomes a green six-pointed star icon, there are two cases in which the icon is a green six-pointed star icon from the time the display of the pending icon starts, and a case in which the icon is a white six-pointed star icon when the display of the pending icon starts, and The expected winning degree may be the same or different depending on the case where the icon changes to a green six-pointed star icon during the execution of icon continuous change effect A. That is, depending on the change path leading to the final display form, the expected winning degree may be made different or may be made to have no difference.
Note that in the following example, each color will be replaced with each pattern associated with the color.

First, as shown in FIG. 81(A), after the fluctuation effect is started and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, and the contents of each become difficult to see, the display mode of the fluctuation icon 9C changes. An effect image EG is displayed that suggests that. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or may be an image that is itself animated. Also, at this time, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure hold storage area 85a are displayed, and until the end of this variable performance, the first starting port 20 and the second It is assumed that no ball entered the starting port 21. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R). In addition, the display mode of each hold icon when the ball enters is that the variable icon 9C is an outline six-pointed star icon, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is an outline square icon, and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area. Assume that the icon is an outline five-pointed star icon, and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is an outline circular icon. Here, for example, the display mode of each pending icon at the time of ball entry may be a white circular icon with the lowest probability of winning. The explanation will continue assuming that the result of the special drawing lottery that triggered this fluctuating performance was a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), the display mode of the fluctuation icon 9C changes from the white six-pointed star icon to the diagonal line six-pointed star icon. This change in display mode may be performed with animation. In this case, the shape of the variable icon 9C does not change, but only the pattern changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern and shape may be changed, such as changing to a diagonal pentagram icon, for example. Alternatively, only the shape may change, such as changing to a white five-pointed star icon. Further, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to view and the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, after the effect image EG becomes difficult to view, the display mode of the variable icon 9C may be changed. Further, for example, after the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes, the effect image EG may become difficult to see. Furthermore, for example, the display mode of the variable icon 9C may change at the same time as the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), the effect image EG suggesting that the display mode of the variation icon 9C changes is displayed again. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or may be an image that is itself animated. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), the effect image EG becomes difficult to see, and the display mode of the variation icon 9C changes from a diagonal lined six-pointed star icon to a hatched six-pointed star icon. In other words, the display mode of the hold icon 9C has changed twice. This change in display mode may be performed with animation, or the second change in display mode may be performed without displaying the effect image EG. Further, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to view and the timing at which the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, after the effect image EG becomes difficult to view, the display mode of the variable icon 9C may be changed. Further, for example, after the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes, the effect image EG may become difficult to see. Furthermore, for example, the display mode of the variable icon 9C may change at the same time as the effect image EG becomes difficult to see. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Here, regarding the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation icon changes from the white six-pointed star icon to the diagonal six-pointed star icon in FIGS. 81(A) to (B), and from the diagonal six-pointed star icon to The icon has changed to a hanging six-pointed star. That is, both the first change and the second change were changes in which the expectation of winning increased by one level. On the other hand, a change that increases the expectation of winning by multiple levels may be performed in a single change, such as changing from a white six-pointed star icon to a shaded six-pointed star icon in the first change. . In addition, as a general performance pattern in which the change of the variable icon 9C is executed after the effect image EG is displayed, there is a special production pattern in which the variable icon 9C suddenly changes without the effect image EG being displayed. A performance pattern may be provided. It is assumed that these can be executed in the same way regardless of the changes in the hold icon 9A that will be explained below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), an effect image EG suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes is displayed. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or may be an image that is itself animated. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes from an outlined square icon to a diagonal square icon. This change in display mode may be performed with animation. In this case, the shape of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area does not change, but only the pattern changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern and shape may be changed, such as changing to a diagonal hexagram icon, for example. Alternatively, only the shape may change, such as changing to a white five-pointed star icon, for example. Further, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to view and the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, after the effect image EG becomes difficult to view, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area may be changed. Furthermore, for example, after the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes, the effect image EG may become difficult to view. Furthermore, for example, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area may change at the same time as the effect image EG becomes difficult to view. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(G), an effect image EG suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is changed is displayed. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or may be an image that is itself animated. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(H), the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes from the white pentagram icon to the diagonal pentagram icon. This change in display mode may be performed with animation. In this case, the shape of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area does not change, but only the pattern changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern and shape may be changed, such as changing to a diagonal hexagram icon, for example. Alternatively, only the shape may change, such as changing to a white six-pointed star icon. Further, the timing at which the effect image EG becomes difficult to view and the timing at which the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes may be set arbitrarily. For example, after the effect image EG becomes difficult to view, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area may be changed. Furthermore, for example, after the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes, the effect image EG may become difficult to view. Furthermore, for example, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area may change at the same time as the effect image EG becomes difficult to view. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(I), an effect image EG suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area changes is displayed. The effect image EG may be displayed with animation, or may be an image that is itself animated. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(J), although the effect image EG suggesting that the display mode changes is displayed, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area does not change. In other words, even though an effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area changes was executed, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area did not change. That means. In this case, a suggestive effect may be performed in which the display mode changes with animation. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed, and their contents remain difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in high-speed fluctuations are displayed in deceleration fluctuations, and the decorative symbols representing "3", "2", and "6" respectively are displayed. A temporary stop is displayed. After this, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next variable performance is started as shown in FIG. 81(L).

The above is a display example of the pending icon continuous change effect A. By configuring the hold icon continuous change effect A to be executed, it is possible to make the player expect that not only the change icon 9C but also the hold icon 9A will change during one change effect. Become. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the performance of the hold icon in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Hold icon continuous change effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon continuous change effect B. The pending icon continuous change performance B executes a pending change in which the display mode of the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A changes to a mode with higher expectation of success in the order in which the variable display is completed during the variable display. This is a preview performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to visually recognize. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

The icons displayed in the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have multiple types of shapes and shapes, each having a different degree of expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a hit when executing the pending icon continuous change effect B. It is assumed that the display mode is determined by a combination of a plurality of colors (in the example of FIG. 82, the difference in color is expressed by a pattern. The patterns may actually be different). In addition, for each pending icon (including the relevant variable icon 9C), one of multiple types of characters is assigned depending on the degree of expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a hit, and the character image is It may be displayed as each hold icon. In the hold icon continuous change production B, there are four types of shapes: circle, square, six-pointed star, and five-pointed star, and the colors (patterns) are white (outlined), green (diagonal line), and red (shading). , gold (honeycomb). The expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a win increases in the order of circle, square, hexagram, and pentagram, followed by white (outlined), green (diagonal lines), red (shaded), and gold ( honeycomb).

Here, for each pending icon (including the variable icon 9C), the difference in the expected hit level when the shape is different and the difference in the expected hit level when the color is different may be set arbitrarily. . For example, white circular icon, green circular icon, red circular icon, gold circular icon, white square icon, green square icon, red square icon, gold square icon, white six-pointed star icon, green six-pointed star icon, red six-pointed star icon, gold six-pointed star icon, The expectation level of winning may be increased in the order of white pentagram icon, green pentagram icon, red pentagram icon, and gold pentagram icon. Also, for example, white circular icon, green circular icon, white square icon, green square icon, white six-pointed star icon, green six-pointed star icon, white five-pointed star icon, green five-pointed star icon, red circular icon, gold circular icon, red square The expectation level of winning may be increased in the following order: icon, gold square icon, red six-pointed star icon, gold six-pointed star icon, red five-pointed star icon, and gold five-pointed star icon. Also, for example, white circle icon, white square icon, white six-pointed star icon, white five-pointed star icon, green circle icon, green square icon, green six-pointed star icon, green five-pointed star icon, red circle icon, red square icon, red six-pointed star The expectation level of winning may be increased in the following order: icon, red pentagram icon, gold circle icon, gold square icon, gold hexagram icon, and gold pentagram icon. Also, for example, white circular icon, white square icon, white six-pointed star icon, white five-pointed star icon, green circular icon, red circular icon, green square icon, red square icon, green six-pointed star icon, red six-pointed star icon, green five-pointed star icon , the red five-pointed star icon, the golden circular icon, the golden square icon, the golden six-pointed star icon, and the golden five-pointed star icon. A sequence other than these may be used.

Furthermore, when the final display form of a certain hold icon becomes a green six-pointed star icon, there are two cases in which the hold icon is a green six-point star icon from the time the hold icon starts displaying, and a white six-point star icon when the hold icon starts displaying. , and the winning expectation level may be the same or different depending on the case where the icon changes to a green six-pointed star icon during execution of the pending icon continuous change effect A. That is, depending on the change path leading to the final display form, the expected winning degree may be made different or may be made to have no difference.
In the following example, each color (white, green, red, gold) will be replaced with each pattern (white outline, diagonal line, hatching, honeycomb) associated with the color.

First, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. At this time, the reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a are displayed, and until the end of this variable production, the first starting port 20 and the second starting port are newly displayed. It is assumed that the ball did not enter 21. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R). It is assumed that the display mode of each hold icon at the time of ball entry is an outlined circular icon. Here, the display mode of each hold icon at the time of ball entry may be different from each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes is executed. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK1 after the display mode of the variable icon 9C has changed collides with the enlarged icon 9CK, which is the enlarged variable icon 9C. At this time, instead of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C that were displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a in FIG. 82(A), a mini hold icon 9AM and a mini The fluctuation icon 9CM is displayed. This display shall continue until the pending icon continuous change effect B ends. Here, the candidate icon HK1 is a shaded six-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the outline circular icon changes to a hatched six-pointed star icon, and in this change, both the shape and pattern of the variable icon 9C change. However, the invention is not limited to this. For example, only the shape may change, such as changing to a white five-pointed star icon, or only the pattern may change, for example, changing to a shaded circular icon. It may be changed. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but continue to fluctuate. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), an enlarged icon 9CK of the variable icon 9C whose display mode has been changed is displayed. In other words, the display mode of the variable icon 9C has changed from an outlined circular icon to a shaded six-pointed star icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the candidate icon HK2 in the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 82(D), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. In this case, the display mode of the variable icon 9C has changed both in shape and pattern. Further, the display of the enlarged icon 9CK may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but continue to fluctuate. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes is executed. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK2 after the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed collides with the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the hold icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged and displayed first storage area. has been done. The candidate icon HK2 is an outline five-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the outline circular icon changes to an outline five-pointed star icon, and in this change, the shape of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes. However, the invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and pattern may change, such as changing to a diagonal pentagram icon, or changing to a shaded circular icon, for example. Only the pattern may be changed. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but continue to fluctuate. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), an enlarged icon 9AK of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed from an outlined circular icon to an outlined five-pointed star icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed to a different display form from the candidate icon HK2 in the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 82(D), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. Further, the display of the enlarged icon 9AK may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but continue to fluctuate. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), an effect indicating that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area will change is performed again. Similar to FIG. 82(D), the candidate icon after the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed to the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the hold icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged and displayed first storage area. An effect of HK3 colliding is displayed. In FIGS. 82(D) to (E), since the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area has already changed once, the enlarged icon 9AK is an outline five-pointed star icon. Candidate icon HK3 is a honeycomb pentagram icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the white five-pointed star icon changes to the honeycomb five-pointed star icon, and in this change, only the pattern of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes. However, the invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and pattern may change, for example, the icon changes to a diagonal six-pointed star icon, or only the shape changes, for example, the icon changes to a white six-pointed star icon. may be changed. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but continue to fluctuate. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), an enlarged icon 9AK of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area after the second display mode change is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area has changed from the white five-pointed star icon to the honeycomb five-pointed star icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the candidate icon HK3 in the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 82(F), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. Further, the display of the enlarged icon 9AK may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but continue to fluctuate. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(H), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes is executed. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK4 after the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area has changed collides with the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the hold icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged and displayed second storage area. has been done. The candidate icon HK4 is a white five-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the outline circular icon changes to an outline five-pointed star icon, and in this change, the shape of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes. However, the invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and pattern may change, such as changing to a diagonal pentagram icon, or changing to a shaded circular icon, for example. Only the pattern may be changed. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but continue to fluctuate. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(I), an enlarged icon 9AK of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area whose display mode has not changed is displayed. That is, even though the suggestion effect was executed in FIG. 82(H), the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area remains the display mode of the outlined circular icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the candidate icon HK2 in the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 82(H), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. Further, the display of the enlarged icon 9AK may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but continue to fluctuate. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(J), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area changes is executed. Here, an effect is displayed in which the candidate icon HK5 after the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area has changed collides with the enlarged icon 9AK, which is the hold icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged third storage area. has been done. The candidate icon HK5 is an outline square icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the icon changes from an outlined circular icon to an outlined square icon, and in this change, the shape of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes. However, the invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and pattern may change, such as changing to a diagonal pentagram icon, or changing to a shaded circular icon, for example. Only the pattern may be changed. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but continue to fluctuate. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(K), an enlarged icon 9AK of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area has changed from an outlined circular icon to an outlined square icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the candidate icon HK5 in the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 82(J), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. Further, the display of the enlarged icon 9AK may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily not displayed on the display screen 7a, but continue to fluctuate. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. It is assumed that the pending icon continuous change effect B ends with this scene.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(L), with the completion of the pending icon continuous change effect B, the display mode returns to the normal variable effect similar to that shown in FIG. 82(A). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change at high speed, making it difficult to visually recognize the contents of each. Further, the fluctuation icon 9C and pending icons 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed. Each hold icon is displayed in a display mode after the display mode has been changed in FIGS. 82(B) to (K). Thereafter, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R display a deceleration variation display and a temporary stop display, respectively, and then come to a final stop, thereby completing this variation effect.

The above is a display example of the pending icon continuous change effect B. By configuring the configuration to be able to execute the pending icon continuous change performance B, it is possible to make the player expect that not only the variable icon 9C but also a plurality of pending icons 9A will undergo a pending change during one variable performance. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the performance of the hold icon in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Hold icon continuous change effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon continuous change effect C. The pending icon continuous change performance C executes a pending change in which, during the variable performance, the display mode of the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A changes to a mode with a higher probability of success in the order in which the variable display is consumed. This is a preview performance. In this example, the image is displayed on the display screen 7a, but it may be displayed on the sub-display screen 64.

The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are each displayed from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and at the time of deceleration fluctuation, two or more patterns become visible on the display screen 7a at the same time. They are displayed moving vertically. Furthermore, during high-speed fluctuations, the contents of the symbols are displayed in such a way that they are difficult to see. Moreover, at the time of stop display, one symbol is displayed so as to be visible on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of symbols may be made visible at the same time. Further, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the system stops so that a set of three symbols lined up in a straight line becomes a win. Note that the three symbols arranged in a straight line include those arranged almost in a straight line. Here, the pattern arrangement of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R is arranged in the order of "123456789" from the bottom to the top of the display screen 7a.

The icons displayed in the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a plurality of shapes and shapes, each having a different degree of expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a hit when executing the pending icon continuous change effect C. It is assumed that the display mode is determined by a combination of a plurality of colors (in the example of FIG. 83, the difference in color is expressed by a pattern. The patterns may actually be different). In addition, for each pending icon (including the relevant variable icon 9C), one of multiple types of characters is assigned depending on the degree of expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a hit, and the character image is It may be displayed as each hold icon. In the hold icon continuous change production C, there are five shapes: circle, square, six-pointed star, five-pointed star, and eight-pointed star, and the colors (patterns) are white (outlined), green (diagonal line), and red. Assume that there are four types: (shaded) and gold (honeycomb). The degree of expectation that the result of the associated special drawing lottery will be a win increases in the order of circle, square, six-pointed star, five-pointed star, and eight-pointed star, white (outlined), green (hatched), red (shaded) ), then gold (honeycomb).

Here, for each pending icon (including the variable icon 9C), the difference in the expected hit level when the shape is different and the difference in the expected hit level when the color is different may be set arbitrarily. . For example, white circular icon, green circular icon, red circular icon, gold circular icon, white square icon, green square icon, red square icon, gold square icon, white six-pointed star icon, green six-pointed star icon, red six-pointed star icon, gold six-pointed star icon, White five-pointed star icon, green five-pointed star icon, red five-pointed star icon, gold five-pointed star icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green eight-pointed star icon, red eight-pointed star icon, gold eight-pointed star icon. The level of expectation may be increased. Also, for example, white circular icon, green circular icon, white square icon, green square icon, white six-pointed star icon, green six-pointed star icon, white five-pointed star icon, green five-pointed star icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green eight-pointed star icons, red circle icons, gold circle icons, red square icons, gold square icons, red six-pointed star icons, gold six-pointed star icons, red five-pointed star icons, gold five-pointed star icons, red eight-pointed star icons, gold eight-pointed star icons The expectation level of winning may increase in order. Also, for example, white circular icon, white square icon, white six-pointed star icon, white five-pointed star icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green circular icon, green square icon, green six-pointed star icon, green five-pointed star icon, green eight-pointed star icon, red circle icon, red square icon, red six-pointed star icon, red five-pointed star icon, red eight-pointed star icon, gold circle icon, gold square icon, gold six-pointed star icon, gold five-pointed star icon, gold eight-pointed star icon The expectation level of winning may increase in order. Also, for example, white circle icon, white square icon, white six-pointed star icon, white five-pointed star icon, white eight-pointed star icon, green circle icon, red circle icon, green square icon, red square icon, green six-pointed star icon, red six-pointed star icon , green five-pointed star icon, red five-pointed star icon, green eight-pointed star icon, red eight-pointed star icon, gold circle icon, gold square icon, gold six-pointed star icon, gold five-pointed star icon, gold eight-pointed star icon. The expectation level may be set to be high. Orders other than these may also be used.

Furthermore, when the final display form of a certain hold icon becomes a green six-pointed star icon, there are two cases in which the hold icon is a green six-point star icon from the time the hold icon starts displaying, and a white six-point star icon when the hold icon starts displaying. , and the winning expectation level may be the same or different depending on the case where the icon changes to a green six-pointed star icon during execution of the pending icon continuous change effect A. That is, depending on the change path leading to the final display form, the expected winning degree may be made different or may be made to have no difference.
In the following example, each color (white, green, red, gold) will be replaced with each pattern (white outline, diagonal line, hatching, honeycomb) associated with the color.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a fluctuating effect is started, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed, making it difficult to see the contents of each. At this time, the reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a are displayed, and until the end of this variable production, the first starting port 20 and the second starting port are newly displayed. It is assumed that the ball did not enter 21. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R). In addition, the display mode of each hold icon at the time of ball entry is that the variable icon 9C is an outline square, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is an outline eight-pointed star icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second storage area is an open square. It is assumed that 9A is an outline six-pointed star icon, the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is an outline circular icon, and the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area is an outline five-pointed star icon. Here, regarding the display mode of each hold icon at the time of ball entry, all the shapes are different, but the patterns are the same. On the other hand, the shapes may all be the same, or the shapes and patterns may all be different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes is executed. Here, the character represented by the character image CRX attacks the enlarged icon 9CB, which is the enlarged variable icon 9C, and after the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes, the candidate icon is enlarged and is about to break. An effect appearing from inside the icon 9CB is displayed. Further, at this time, in a predetermined area of the display screen 7a, an area for storing each pending icon (including the variable icon 9C) and an area for displaying the decorative pattern in a reduced size are provided, respectively. Here, the candidate icon is a shaded square icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the icon changes from a white square icon to a shaded square icon, and in this change, the pattern of the variable icon 9C changes. However, the invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and pattern may change, for example, the icon changes to a shaded pentagram, or the icon changes to a white circular icon, for example. , only the shape may change. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. Further, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The present invention is not limited to this, and the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. Regarding the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the pending icons other than the pending icon (including the variable icon 9C) whose pending change is just being executed, the display method and position shown in FIG. 83(B) are as follows: It is assumed that this is maintained until the performance C ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), an enlarged icon 9CB of the variable icon 9C whose display mode has been changed is displayed. In other words, the display mode of the variable icon 9C has changed from a white square icon to a shaded square icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may change to a different display mode from the candidate icon in the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 83(B), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. Further, the display of the enlarged icon 9CB may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. Further, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The present invention is not limited to this, and the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes is executed. Here, the character represented by the character image CRX attacks the enlarged icon 9AB, which is the hold icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged first storage area, and the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes. An effect is displayed in which the next candidate icon appears from inside the enlarged icon 9AB, which is about to break down. Here, the candidate icon is a shaded eight-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the white eight-pointed star icon changes to a shaded eight-pointed star icon, and in this change, the pattern of the variable icon 9C changes. However, the invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and pattern may change, for example, the icon changes to a shaded five-pointed star, or the icon changes to a white circular icon, for example. , only the shape may change. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. Furthermore, the pending icons 9A and the variable icons 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), an enlarged icon 9AB of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area whose display mode has not changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area remains as the white eight-pointed star icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the candidate icon in the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 83(F), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. Further, the display of the enlarged icon 9AB may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. Furthermore, the pending icons 9A and the variable icons 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes is executed. Here, the character representing the character image CRY uses an enlarged icon 9AB, which is the hold icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged and displayed second storage area, as an icon that is a candidate when the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes. A production that envelops you with an aura similar to the pattern is displayed. That is, the candidate icon is a shaded eight-pointed star icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the white eight-pointed star icon changes to the shaded eight-pointed star icon, and in this change, the pattern of the variable icon 9C changes. However, the invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and pattern may change, for example, the icon changes to a shaded pentagram, or the icon changes to a white circular icon, for example. , only the shape may change. Furthermore, this suggestion effect using the character image CRY has a higher probability that the display mode of the target pending icon changes than the suggestion effect using the character image CRX shown in FIGS. 83(B) and (D). shall be taken as a thing. That is, in the pending icon continuous change production C, as a production that suggests the display mode of the pending icon, there is a suggestion production using the character image CRX, which has a relatively low expectation for a change in the display format, and a suggestion production that has a relatively high expectation for a change in the display format. The configuration is such that either one of the effects using the character image CRY is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which one of three or more types of suggestion effects, each of which has a different degree of expectation of change in display mode, can be executed. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. Furthermore, the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pending icon 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), an enlarged icon 9AB of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area has changed from a white eight-pointed star icon to a shaded eight-pointed star icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the candidate icon in the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 83(F), such as changing to a shaded pentagram icon. The display of the image representing the aura in the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 83(F) remains unchanged. Further, the display of the enlarged icon 9AB may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. Further, the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in the area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The present invention is not limited to this, and the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first, third, and fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

After this, it is assumed that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is not changed, and furthermore, the suggestion that the display mode is changed is not executed. That is, if the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area will not change, it is configured such that it can select not to perform the effect suggesting that the display mode will change. This means that it has been done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(H), an effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area changes is executed. Here, the character represented by the character image CRX attacks the enlarged icon 9AB, which is the pending icon 9A corresponding to the enlarged fourth storage area, and the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes. An effect is displayed in which the next candidate icon appears from inside the broken enlarged icon 9AB. Further, at this time, in a predetermined area of the display screen 7a, an area for storing each pending icon (including the variable icon 9C) and an area for displaying the decorative pattern in a reduced size are provided, respectively. Here, the candidate icon is a diagonal pentagram icon. Therefore, if the change is successful, the white five-pointed star icon changes to the diagonal five-pointed star icon, and in this change, the pattern of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area changes. However, the invention is not limited to this, and both the shape and pattern may change, for example, the icon changes to a hatched six-pointed star icon, or the shape and pattern change, for example, the icon changes to a white circular icon. It may also be possible to change only the It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. Further, the variable icon 9C and the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first, second, and fourth storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first, second, and fourth storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(I), an enlarged icon 9AB of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area whose display mode has changed is displayed. That is, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area has changed from the white pentagram icon to the diagonal pentagram icon. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may change to a different display mode from the candidate icon in the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 83(H), for example, change to a shaded pentagram icon. Further, the display of the enlarged icon 9AB may be performed with animation. It is assumed that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed in the lower left area of the display screen 7a and continue to fluctuate. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be displayed on the sub display screen 64. Further, the variable icon 9C and the hold icons 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas are displayed one by one in an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas may be displayed on the sub display screen 64.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(J), regarding the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area whose display mode has changed in FIGS. 83(H) to (I), an area provided at the bottom of the display screen 7a is displayed. After being stored in , the display mode changes again. Here, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area has changed from a diagonal pentagram icon to a honeycomb pentagram icon. In addition, in the upper area of the display screen 7a (the area where the enlarged icon 9AB of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area whose suggestive effect or display mode has been changed), the hold corresponding to the fourth storage area is displayed. A honeycomb pattern image is displayed as an effect suggesting that the display mode of the icon 9A changes from a diagonal pentagram icon to a honeycomb pentagram icon. The timing at which this honeycomb pattern image is displayed and the timing at which the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area changes from the diagonal pentagram icon to the honeycomb pentagram icon may be set arbitrarily. shall be taken as a thing. In other words, an image with a honeycomb pattern is displayed. At the same time as this honeycomb pattern image is displayed, the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area may change from a diagonal pentagram icon to a honeycomb pentagram icon, or the honeycomb pattern image may be After being displayed, the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area may change from the diagonal pentagram icon to the honeycomb pentagram icon, or the display of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area may change. After the aspect changes from the diagonal pentagram icon to the honeycomb pentagram icon, an image of the honeycomb pattern may be displayed. Further, the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area may change to a shaded pentagram icon or change its shape even though a honeycomb pattern image is displayed in the suggestion effect, for example. You may also make a change that is different from the change suggested by the suggestive performance. In this way, when the suggestive effect using the character images CRX and CRY is not executed, or when the display mode has changed once, the display mode of the pending icon may be suddenly changed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(K), since the effect related to the change in the display mode of the pending icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area has ended, that is, since the pending icon continuous change effect C has ended, the display of the variable effect The mode returns to the same mode as in FIG. 83(A). Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, and furthermore, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a (at the bottom of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R). . Note that the display mode of each pending icon (including the variable icon 9C) is the display mode after changing in FIGS. 83(B) to (J). Specifically, the fluctuation icon 9C is a shaded square icon, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is a white eight-pointed star icon, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is a honeycomb six-pointed star icon, and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is a honeycomb six-pointed star icon. The hold icon 9A corresponding to the storage area is displayed as a white circular icon, and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area is displayed as a honeycomb five-pointed star icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were displayed in a variable manner in FIGS. 83(A) to (K) are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L represents "5", the middle decorative design 8C represents "5", and the right decorative design 8R represents "9", and these are displayed in a stopped state. After this, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped, and the next variable performance is started.

The above is a display example of the pending icon continuous change effect C. By configuring the system to be able to execute the holding icon continuous change effect C, it is possible to make the player expect that not only the change icon 9C but also a plurality of hold icons 9A will change hold during one change effect. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the player with the performance of the hold icon in the variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, according to FIGS. 81 to 83, after the variable effect is started, the first effect changes the display mode of the variable icon 9C, and after the first effect, the first effect is changed. A second effect in which the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the storage area changes, and a third effect in which the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area changes after the second effect. The configuration was executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Note that the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponds to a "display screen", the variable icon 9C corresponds to a "variable icon", and the hold icon 9A corresponds to a "hold icon".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, each of the first performance, second performance, and third performance may be executed multiple times. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, before the first effect, a fourth effect, which is a effect suggesting that the display mode of the variable icon 9C changes, Before the second effect, there is a fifth effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area changes, and before the third effect, a fifth effect that corresponds to the second memory area is performed. The configuration is such that it is possible to execute a sixth effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold icon 9A changes. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 83, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A are configured such that their shapes at the start of display may be different. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modification of this embodiment is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the reservation icon continuous change effect, a character image associated with each reservation may be displayed together with each reservation icon, and the display mode of each character image may be configured to change. In this case, for example, when the character associated with each pending icon wins a battle, the display mode of the character image may change to a mode with higher jackpot expectation. Further, in this case, the type of character may be determined by the expected winning of the associated special drawing lottery, and the display mode of each character image may be changed by a continuous change effect of the pending icon. good. Furthermore, for example, when the character image associated with each hold icon is displayed, the hold icon may be difficult to see or may be temporarily hidden.

[Modification 2]
In the pending icon continuous change effects A and C, when the display mode of each pending icon is being changed, the changes in the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may not be visible. . Furthermore, in the pending icon continuous change effect B, it may be possible to visually recognize how the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing.

[Modification 3]
In the hold icon continuous change effects A and B, as shown in the hold icon continuous change effect C, which suggests that the display form of the hold icon will change, the degree of expectation for the change in the display form of the hold icon is different. One of a plurality of types of effects may be selected and executed.

[Modification 4]
In the pending icon continuous change performance, before the change in the display mode of each pending icon is executed, specific numerical values such as the ranking of jackpot expectation level or the probability of a jackpot for the pending icon after the change in display mode are executed. May be presented.

[Modification 5]
In the pending icon continuous change effect B, as shown in FIG. 81(A) and FIG. 83(A), the display mode of each pending icon before the display mode changes may be made to be different.

[Modification 6]
The effects described in the decorative pattern change effects A to E may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display screen capable of displaying multiple types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific icon associated with a special drawing lottery that triggered the variable performance that is being executed;
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined icon associated with a special drawing lottery that will be the trigger for a variable production to be executed from the next time onwards,
a first performance in which the display mode of the specific icon changes after the variable performance is started;
After the first performance, a second performance in which a display mode of the first predetermined icon associated with a special lottery to be consumed in the next variable performance changes;
After the second performance, it is possible to perform a third performance in which a display mode of the second predetermined icon associated with a special lottery to be consumed in successive variable performances changes;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The first performance, the second performance, and the third performance may each be executed multiple times,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
a fourth performance that is a performance that suggests that the display mode of the specific icon changes before the first performance;
a fifth performance that is a performance that suggests that the display mode of the first predetermined icon changes before the second performance;
Before the third performance, it is possible to execute a sixth performance that is a performance that suggests that the display mode of the second predetermined icon changes.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-3,
The specific icon and the plurality of predetermined icons may all have different display formats;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The symbol variation update effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 84 to 86. This symbol variation update performance is executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a symbol variation update effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Symbol variation update effect A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the symbol variation update effect A. 84(A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol fluctuation update performance A, and FIGS. 84(G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol fluctuation update performance A.

In the first example of symbol fluctuation update effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is a vertical scroll display within the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 84(B) to 84(D), a symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation performance is a performance in which a predetermined row of decorative symbols among a plurality of rows of decorative symbols is varied again. Here, a button image BG is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image imitating the production button 63. The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. The explanation will continue assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 84(B), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to move downward. As a result, the "7" image and the "9" image are moved downward, and the "8" image and the "0" image are in the frame.
In FIG. 84(C), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have moved further downward. As a result, the "7" image and the "9" image move out of the frame, and the "8" image and the "0" image move to a position close to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 84(D), among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed.

It should be noted that the structure may be such that the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 84(B) to (D) are executed by one operation of the effect button 63. Furthermore, the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 84(B) to 84(D) may be executed by repeatedly hitting or holding down the effect button 63. Although it is assumed here that the production button 63 has been operated, the symbol variation production shown in FIGS. 84(B) to 84(D) may be executed without operating the production button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern stops in a predetermined reach mode. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R stops at the "2" pattern and forms a reach mode together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. At this time as well, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern regardless of the operation of the production button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium pattern stop performance is a performance in which the medium decorative pattern stops as the final stop pattern. Here, the medium decorative symbol 8C has stopped at the "3" symbol, and is in a state where the player has lost the reach. At this time as well, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. It may be configured such that the medium decorative pattern 8C stops at the "3" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. Alternatively, the medium decoration pattern 8C may be configured to stop at the "3" pattern regardless of the operation of the production button 63.

In the second example of symbol fluctuation update effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is a vertical scroll display within the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 84(H) to (K), a symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation performance is a performance in which a predetermined row of decorative symbols among a plurality of rows of decorative symbols is varied again. Here, a button image BG is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image imitating the production button 63. The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. The explanation will continue assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 84(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have started to move downward. As a result, the "7" image and the "9" image are moved downward, and the "8" image and the "0" image are in the frame.
In FIG. 84(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have moved further downward. As a result, the "7" image and the "9" image move out of the frame, and the "8" image and the "0" image move to a position close to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 84(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have moved further downward. As a result, the "8" image and the "0" image have moved to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 84(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R have moved further downward. As a result, the "9" image and the "1" image have moved to the center of the frame image WG.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 84(H) to (K) are executed by one operation of the effect button 63. Furthermore, the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 84(H) to 84(K) may be executed by repeatedly hitting or holding down the effect button 63. Although it is assumed here that the production button 63 has been operated, the symbol variation production shown in FIGS. 84(H) to (K) may be executed without operating the production button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(L), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern stops in a predetermined reach mode. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R stops at the "2" pattern and forms a reach mode together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C has started to fluctuate at high speed. At this time as well, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern regardless of the operation of the production button 63.

[Symbol change update effect B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining symbol variation update effect B. 85(A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol fluctuation update performance B, and FIGS. 85(G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol fluctuation update performance B.

In the first example of symbol fluctuation update effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a scrolling manner in the vertical direction within the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 85(B) to 85(D), a symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation performance is a performance in which a predetermined row of decorative symbols among a plurality of rows of decorative symbols is varied again. Here, a button image BG is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image imitating the production button 63. The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. The explanation will continue assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 85(B), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has started moving downward. As a result, the "9" image moves downward, and the "0" image enters the frame.
In FIG. 85(C), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "9" image moves out of the frame, and the "0" image moves to a position close to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 85(D), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is fluctuating at high speed.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 85(B) to (D) are executed by one operation of the effect button 63. Furthermore, the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 85(B) to 85(D) may be executed by repeatedly hitting or holding down the effect button 63. Although it is assumed here that the production button 63 has been operated, the symbol variation production shown in FIGS. 85(B) to 85(D) may be executed without operating the production button 63.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 85(E) and 85(F), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the decorative pattern stops in a predetermined reach mode. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R stops at the "2" pattern and forms a reach mode together with the left decorative pattern 8L. In FIG. 85(E), the "2" symbol is enlarged as the "2" symbol stops. The "2" pattern is temporarily enlarged and then returns to its original size. In FIG. 85(F), the medium decorative pattern 8C has started to fluctuate at high speed.

At this time as well, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern regardless of the operation of the production button 63.

In the second example of symbol fluctuation update effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 85(G), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a scrolling manner in the vertical direction within the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 85(H) to 85(K), a symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation performance is a performance in which a predetermined row of decorative symbols among a plurality of rows of decorative symbols is varied again. Here, a button image BG is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image imitating the production button 63. The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. The explanation will continue assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 85(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has started to move downward. As a result, the "9" image moves downward, and the "0" image enters the frame.
In FIG. 85(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "9" image moves out of the frame, and the "0" image moves to a position close to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 85(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "0" image has moved to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 85(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "1" image has moved to the center of the frame image WG.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 85(H) to (K) are executed by one operation of the effect button 63. Furthermore, the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 85(H) to 85(K) may be executed by repeatedly hitting or holding down the effect button 63. Although it is assumed here that the production button 63 has been operated, the symbol variation production shown in FIGS. 85(H) to (K) may be executed without operating the production button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(L), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium pattern stop performance is a performance in which the medium decorative pattern stops as the final stop pattern. Here, the medium decorative pattern 8C has stopped at the "2" pattern, which is a win mode. At this time as well, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. It may be configured such that the medium decorative pattern 8C stops at the "2" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. Alternatively, the medium decoration pattern 8C may be configured to stop at the "2" pattern regardless of the operation of the production button 63.

[Symbol variation update production C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the symbol variation update effect C. 86(A) to (F) show a first example of the symbol fluctuation update performance C, and FIGS. 86(G) to (L) show a second example of the symbol fluctuation update performance C.

In the first example of symbol fluctuation update effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 86(A), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "7" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is a vertical scroll display within the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to 86(D), a symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation performance is a performance in which a predetermined row of decorative symbols among a plurality of rows of decorative symbols is varied again. Here, a button image BG is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image imitating the production button 63. The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. The explanation will be continued assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 86(B), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has started to move downward. As a result, the "9" image moves downward, and the "0" image enters the frame.
In FIG. 86(C), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "9" image moves out of the frame, and the "0" image moves to a position close to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 86(D), the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is fluctuating at high speed. The right decorative pattern 8R is fluctuating at high speed in a reduced state. The right decorative pattern 8R is sufficiently reduced and then hidden.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (D) are executed by one operation of the effect button 63. Further, the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 86(B) to 86(D) may be executed by repeatedly hitting or holding down the effect button 63. Although it is assumed here that the production button 63 has been operated, the symbol variation production shown in FIGS. 86(B) to 86(D) may be executed without operating the production button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(E), a specific symbol stop effect is executed. The specific symbol stop performance is a performance in which a specific symbol stops in a predetermined row of decorative symbols. Here, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped at the "NEXT" symbol as a specific symbol. As the "NEXT" symbol stops, the "NEXT" symbol is enlarged. The "NEXT" pattern is temporarily enlarged and then returns to its original size. The "NEXT" symbol is a specific symbol that suggests a pseudo-continuous performance. At this time as well, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "NEXT" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "NEXT" pattern regardless of the operation of the production button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(F), a re-variation effect accompanying the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. At this time as well, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. A configuration may be adopted in which the re-variation effect is executed in accordance with the operation timing of the effect button 63. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the re-fluctuation effect is executed regardless of the operation of the effect button 63.

In the second example of symbol fluctuation update effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 86(G), a stop display effect is executed. The stop display performance is a performance in which decorative patterns in multiple rows are stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the "9" pattern, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped at the "2" pattern. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is a vertical scroll display within the frame image WG (the same applies hereinafter).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 86(H) to 86(K), a symbol variation effect is executed. The symbol variation performance is a performance in which a predetermined row of decorative symbols among a plurality of rows of decorative symbols is varied again. Here, a button image BG is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image imitating the production button 63. The button image BG is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63. The same applies below. The explanation will continue assuming that the production button 63 has been operated.

In FIG. 86(H), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has started to move downward. As a result, the "9" image moves downward, and the "0" image enters the frame.
In FIG. 86(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "9" image moves out of the frame, and the "0" image moves to a position close to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 86(J), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "0" image has moved to the center of the frame image WG.
In FIG. 86(K), the middle decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R has moved further downward. As a result, the "1" image has moved to the center of the frame image WG.

It should be noted that the structure may be such that the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 86(H) to (K) are executed by one operation of the effect button 63. Further, the symbol variation effects shown in FIGS. 86(H) to (K) may be executed by repeatedly hitting or holding down the effect button 63. Although it is assumed here that the production button 63 has been operated, the symbol variation production shown in FIGS. 86(H) to (K) may be executed without operating the production button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(L), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium pattern stop performance is a performance in which the medium decorative pattern stops as the final stop pattern. Here, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped at the "NEXT" pattern. The "NEXT" symbol is a specific symbol that suggests a pseudo-continuous performance. At this time as well, the button image BG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. The right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "NEXT" pattern in accordance with the operation timing of the production button 63. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R may be configured to stop at the "NEXT" pattern regardless of the operation of the production button 63.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the symbol change update performance is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in accordance with the operation of the production button 63, a symbol variation effect (FIG. 84 ( B) to (E), Figures 84 (H) to (K), Figures 85 (B) to (D), Figures 85 (H) to (K), Figures 86 (B) to (D), Figure 86 ( H) to (K)), and after the symbol fluctuation performance, a symbol update performance (figure 84(E)(F), FIG. 84(L), FIG. 85(E), FIG. 85(L), FIG. 86(E), and FIG. 86(L)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented effect of re-variation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the production button 63 corresponds to the "operation means", and the production control microcomputer 91 corresponds to the "production execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as a symbol update effect, the decorative symbols in a specific row are stopped at the "NEXT" symbol to suggest that a pseudo continuous effect is executed (FIG. 86(E), FIG. 86(L) )). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented effect of re-variation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an enlargement/reduction effect of the decorative symbols in a specific row is executed in conjunction with the pattern update effect (FIGS. 85(E) and 86(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented effect of re-variation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a non-display effect is executed in which the decorative symbols in a specific row are hidden during the enlargement/reduction effect (FIG. 86(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide an unprecedented effect of re-variation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the symbol change update performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol is exemplified as the specific symbol, but the specific symbol is not limited to this. For example, if a symbol suggesting a specific effect (such as a pseudo continuous effect) is predetermined as a "3" symbol, the "3" symbol may be used as the specific symbol.

[Modification 2]
In the embodiment described above, the button image BG is displayed continuously, but the display/non-display of the button image BG may be switched in accordance with the timing when the effect button 63 becomes effective.

[Modification 3]
In the embodiment described above, the decorative patterns in a predetermined row are scroll-displayed in the vertical direction inside the frame image. On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the symbols are switched without scrolling. Specifically, after FIG. 84(J), the symbol does not move in the vertical direction and is displayed as shown in FIG. 84(K).

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A8-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means capable of executing a performance triggered by the operation of the operation means,
The performance execution means, in accordance with the operation of the operation means,
A pattern variation effect that re-varies a decorative pattern in a predetermined row of decorative patterns in a plurality of rows in a stopped state;
After the symbol variation performance, it is possible to perform a symbol update performance in which a decorative symbol in a specific row of the decorative symbols in the predetermined row is stopped at a symbol different from the symbol stopped before the re-variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-1,
The performance execution means stops the decorative symbols in the specific row at a specific symbol as the symbol update performance, and suggests that a specific production will be executed after the specific symbol is stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
Stopping the decorative patterns in the specific row at a specific pattern to suggest the execution of a pseudo continuous effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A8-1 to A8-3,
The performance execution means executes an enlargement/reduction performance including at least one of enlarging and reducing the decorative symbols in the specific row, in conjunction with at least one of the symbol variation performance and the symbol update performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-4,
executing a non-display effect that hides the decorative pattern in the specific row during the enlargement/reduction effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The hit expectation degree suggestion effects 1 to 3 will be explained below using FIGS. 87 to 89. These hit expectation degree suggestion performances 1 to 3 are executed in the variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display the image.

[Suggestion of winning expectation level 1]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the hit expectation degree suggestion effect 1. In the winning expectation level suggestion production 1, four pending special drawing drawings are accumulated during a change on the display screen 7a, and the expectation level of winning of the special drawing drawing of the change and the expectation level of winning of the reserved special drawing drawing are shown. This is a performance in which a performance is performed to suggest each one one by one, and then a performance is performed to notify the results of the judgment one by one.

First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are in the process of changing are displayed. Also, there are four second special symbols on hold. In other words, the reservation icon 9C (the fluctuation icon corresponding to the fluctuation) and the reservation icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special symbol reservation, respectively. is displayed. Here, pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, 9B4, and 9C are displayed. Note that the hold icon 9A may be displayed, the hold icon 9C may not be displayed, or all hold icons may not be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a fortune telling performance is performed. This fortune telling performance is performed when four second special drawings are accumulated. When this performance is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the fortune-telling cylinder OMK is displayed on the display screen 7a in order to mainly show the player the fortune-telling performance. This fortune-telling effect changes the appearance of the hold icon 9C and the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, 9B4, and suggests the degree of expectation of winning based on the changed appearance. 9B4 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, the special drawing drawings for the change and the reserved special drawing drawings are presented one by one, and are displayed in a row with the same size in order to make it appear that there are five chances. Here, the first fortune is drawn, and "Daikichi" is displayed as the result of the fortune.

Here, the Omikuji result OKA includes "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", "Kokichi", and "Sueyoshi", and represents the degree of expectation of winning the special drawing lottery, and "Daikichi" has the highest expectation. The expectation level is 50, "Nakayoshi" has the second highest expectation level of 30, then "Kokichi" has the third highest expectation level of 20, and "Sueyoshi" has the lowest (fourth highest expectation level). ) The expectation level is 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), "large" representing "great luck" which is the result is displayed on the pending icon 9C of the change corresponding to the first fortune. At this time, the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 do not display the results of the fortune telling.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(D), the second fortune telling is performed, and "Kokichi" is displayed as the fortune telling result OKA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(E), the result "small" representing "small fortune" is displayed on the first holding icon 9B1 of the second special drawing holding corresponding to the second fortune. At this time, the pending icon 9C continues to display "large" representing "great luck" which is the result of the first fortune, and the pending icons 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 do not display the result of the fortune.

As described above, for all the reserved special drawing drawings, an Omikuji performance is performed and the Omikuji results are displayed on all the pending icons. This omikuji performance is performed with the same fluctuation.

FIG. 87(F) shows a state in which an Omikuji performance is performed for all the reserved special drawing drawings, and the Omikuji results are displayed on all the pending icons. The pending icon 9C displays "large" representing "big luck" which is the result of the fortune of the change in question, and the pending icon 9B1 displays "small luck" which is the result of the first fortune of the second special lottery. "Small" representing "Great Fortune" which is the result of the second Omikuji of the second special drawing reservation is displayed on the hold icon 9B2, and "Large" representing "Great Fortune" which is the result of the second Omikuji of the second special drawing hold is displayed, and the hold icon 9B3 displays the second Omikuji. Displays "Suue", which represents "Sueyoshi", which is the result of the third Omikuji of the special drawing pending, and "Nakayoshi", which is the result of the fourth Omikuji of the second special drawing, is displayed on the pending icon 9B4. "Medium" is displayed. The hold icon 9C and the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are displayed in a line with similar sizes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), the results of the first special drawing lottery are displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as "9", indicating that the special drawing lottery is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(H), the result of the special lottery in which the fortune was drawn first is displayed, and the hold is shifted. That is, the hold icon 9B1 becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9B2 becomes the hold icon 9B1, the hold icon 9B3 becomes the hold icon 9B2, and the hold icon 9B4 becomes the hold icon 9B3. After this, the results of the second special drawing lottery will be displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as "3", indicating that the special drawing lottery is a loss.

The shift movement of pending items and the display of the result of the special drawing lottery in which the Omikuji was performed are repeated. This process is repeated until all the results of the special lottery drawings that are pending when the fortune telling performance is performed are displayed. In other words, after the Omikuji performance ends, the results of the 5 special lottery drawings are displayed. Note that the case where the result of the special drawing lottery is a win will be described later in "Win Expectancy Suggestion Performance 2".

FIG. 87(I) shows a state in which the results of the fifth special drawing lottery are displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as "4", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as "6", indicating that the special drawing lottery is a loss.

[Suggestion of hit expectation level 2]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the hit expectation level suggestion production 2. In the winning expectation level suggestion production 2, four pending special drawing drawings are accumulated during a change on the display screen 7a, and the expectation level of winning of the special drawing drawing of the change and the expectation level of winning of the reserved special drawing drawing are shown. This is a performance in which a performance is performed to suggest each one one by one, and then a performance is performed to notify the results of the judgment one by one. If the result of the judgment is a win, the win is announced and then a winning game is played. After playing a winning game, after the reservations have been accumulated, a performance is performed again that suggests one each the expectation level of winning of the special drawing lottery of the change and the expectation degree of winning of the reserved special symbol lottery. .

This hit expectation level suggesting performance 2 is similar to the winning expectation level suggesting performances 1 to 5 (FIG. 87(B) to (F)) in the winning expectation level suggesting performance 1. FIG. 88(A) is the same effect as FIG. 87(F).

Here too, the Omikuji result OKA includes "Daikichi", "Nakayoshi", "Kokichi", and "Sueyoshi", and it represents the degree of expectation of winning the special drawing lottery, and "Daikichi" has the highest expectation. The expectation level is 50, "Nakayoshi" has the second highest expectation level of 30, then "Kokichi" has the third highest expectation level of 20, and "Sueyoshi" has the lowest (fourth highest expectation level). ) The expectation level is 10.

In FIG. 88(A), an Omikuji performance is performed, the pending icon 9C displays "Great" representing "Daikichi" which is the result of the Omikuji of the change, and the pending icon 9B1 displays the second special lottery result. "Small" representing "Kokichi" which is the result of the first Omikuji of the second special drawing is displayed, and "Dai" representing "Daikichi" which is the result of the second Omikuji of the second special drawing is displayed on the pending icon 9B2. '' is displayed on the hold icon 9B3, and ``Suue'' representing ``Sueyoshi'', which is the result of the third fortune of the second special drawing hold, is displayed on the hold icon 9B4, and the hold icon 9B4 displays the result of the second special drawing hold. ``Naka'', which represents ``Nakayoshi'', which is the result of the fourth fortune, is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the results of the first special drawing lottery are displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as "9", indicating that the special drawing lottery is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the result of the special lottery in which the fortune was drawn first is displayed, and the hold is shifted. That is, the hold icon 9B1 becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9B2 becomes the hold icon 9B1, the hold icon 9B3 becomes the hold icon 9B2, and the hold icon 9B4 becomes the hold icon 9B3. After this, the results of the second special drawing lottery will be displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as "3", indicating that the special drawing lottery is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(D), the hold is shifted and the result of the special lottery for which the third Omikuji was drawn is displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L is "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is "7", the right decorative pattern 8R is "7", and a double is displayed, indicating that the special drawing lottery is a win.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(E), the ``Jackpot'' telop TATR indicating that the jackpot game is to be started is displayed, and the jackpot game is played. Here, the winning game is a jackpot winning game, but it may also be a small winning winning game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(F), after the jackpot game, fluctuations start. This is where reservations accumulate.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 88(G) to (I), as the reservations have accumulated, a fortune presentation is performed. This fortune telling is the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 88(B) to (F), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

[Suggestion of hit expectation level 3]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the hit expectation level suggestion effect 3. In the winning expectation level suggestion production 3, four pending special drawing drawings are accumulated during a change on the display screen 7a, and the expectation level of winning of the special drawing drawing of the change and the expectation level of winning of the reserved special drawing drawing are shown. Each time, even in the hold display, a performance suggesting the expectation level of winning of the special drawing drawings is performed one by one, suggesting the expectation level of winning of those special drawing drawings. This is a performance in which a performance is performed in which the results of the success/failure judgment are announced one by one after the performance is performed.

First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are in the process of changing are displayed. Also, there are four second special symbols on hold. In other words, the holding icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 corresponding to the holding icon 9C and the first, second, third, and fourth of the second special figure holding, respectively, are displayed. Here, pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, 9B4, and 9C are displayed. Note that the hold icon 9A may be displayed, the hold icon 9C may not be displayed, or all hold icons may not be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a fortune telling performance is performed. This Omikuji performance is performed when four second special drawings have been accumulated. When this performance is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the fortune-telling cylinder OMK is displayed on the display screen 7a in order to mainly show the player the fortune-telling performance. This fortune-telling effect changes the appearance of the hold icon 9C and the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, 9B4, and suggests the degree of expectation of winning based on the changed appearance. 9B4 is enlarged and displayed. In addition, the special drawing drawings for the change and the reserved special drawing drawings are presented one by one, and are displayed in a row with the same size in order to make it appear that there are five chances. Here, the first fortune is drawn, and "Daikichi" is displayed as the result of the fortune.

Here, the Omikuji result OKA is the same as the type and reliability order described above in "Win Expectancy Level Suggestion Performance 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), the change pending icon 9C changes from "white" (no hatching) to "red" (hatching 1). The color represented by hatching will be described later. This change in color of the pending icon does not represent the result of the fortune-telling, but rather represents the expectation level of winning the special drawing lottery, separate from the fortune-telling. At this time, there is no change in color of the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4.

As shown in FIG. 89(J), in FIG. 89, "white" is represented without hatching, "red" is represented by hatching 1, "green" is represented by hatching 2, and "blue" is represented by hatching 3.

Here, the colors of the pending icon are "red", "green", and "blue", which represent the expectation level of winning the special drawing lottery, and "red" is the highest and the expectation level is 50. ``Green'' has the second highest expectation level of 30, and then ``Blue'' has the lowest (third highest) expectation level of 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), the second fortune telling is performed, and "Kokichi" is displayed as the fortune telling result OKA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), the first reservation icon 9B1 of the second special symbol reservation changes from the "white" display to the "blue" display (hatching 3). At this time, the hold icon 9C remains displayed in "red" (hatching 1), and the hold icons 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 do not change in color.

As mentioned above, an Omikuji effect is performed for all reserved special drawing drawings, and a color change display is performed for all pending icons.This Omikuji effect and the color change of the pending icons are performed in the same fluctuation. It will be done.

FIG. 89(F) shows a state in which the Omikuji performance has been performed for all the reserved special drawing drawings, and the color change performance has been performed for all the reserved icons. The hold icon 9C is displayed in "red", the hold icon 9B1 is displayed in "blue",
The hold icon 9B2 is displayed in "green," the hold icon 9B3 is displayed in "blue," and the hold icon 9B4 is displayed in "green." The hold icon 9C and the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are displayed in a line with similar sizes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), the results of the first special drawing lottery are displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as "9", indicating that the special drawing lottery is a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(H), the result of the special drawing lottery in which the fortune was drawn first is displayed, and the hold is shifted. That is, the hold icon 9B1 becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9B2 becomes the hold icon 9B1, the hold icon 9B3 becomes the hold icon 9B2, and the hold icon 9B4 becomes the hold icon 9B3. After this, the results of the second special drawing lottery will be displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as "3", indicating that the special drawing lottery is a loss.

The shift movement and the display of the result of the special drawing lottery in which the fortune is drawn are repeated. This process is repeated until all the results of the special lottery drawings that are pending when the fortune telling performance is performed are displayed. In other words, after the Omikuji performance ends, the results of the 5 special lottery drawings are displayed.

FIG. 89(I) shows a state in which the results of the fifth special drawing lottery are displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L is displayed as "4", the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as "6", indicating that the special drawing lottery is a loss. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a win, the win game will be played after displaying the win, and then the win game will be played again as described above in "Win expectation level suggestion performance 2". Omikuji performances will be performed for all reservations.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of effects 1 to 3 that suggest the degree of winning are shown.

[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in "Winning Expectation Level Suggestion Performance 1", and uses the display screen 7a to display the pending results during the same fluctuation. It is possible to execute the first effect (FIGS. 87(D) to (F)) that each suggests the expected degree of winning in all the special drawing lots. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the results of a plurality of pending special lottery drawings, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Win Expectation Suggestion Performance 1", before the first performance (FIGS. 87(D) to (F)), there is a possibility of winning in the special drawing drawing of the fluctuation. A second effect (FIGS. 87B and 87C) that suggests the degree of expectation can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the results of a plurality of pending special lottery drawings, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Winning Expectation Level Suggestion Production 1", one of the plurality of types of images is the hold icon 9C corresponding to the fluctuation; One of them is the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4, and in the second effect (FIGS. 87(B) and (C)), the aspect of the hold icon 9C changes, and the hold icon 9C after the change In the first effect (FIGS. 87(D) to (F)), the appearance of the pending icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 changes. , respectively, indicate the expected degree of winning in all pending special lottery drawings after the change. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the results of a plurality of pending special lottery drawings, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Win Expectation Level Suggestion Performance 1", after the first performance (FIGS. 87(D) to (F)), the success/failure determination in the special drawing lottery of the variation is performed. It is possible to perform a third performance (FIGS. 87(G) to (I)) that notifies the results and then notifies the results of the success/failure judgments in all pending special drawing lots. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the results of a plurality of pending special lottery drawings, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Win Expectation Suggestion Performance 1", in the first performance (FIGS. 87(D) to (F)), the hold icon 9C and the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3 , 9B4 are displayed in a row. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the results of a plurality of pending special lottery drawings, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of effects 1 to 3 that suggest the degree of winning are shown.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the first effect (FIGS. 87(D) to (F)), the second effect (FIGS. 87(B) and (C)), and the third effect (FIGS. 87(G) to (I) )) suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the special drawing lottery and announces the results of the judgment of the success or failure of the special drawing lottery, but it also suggests the degree of expectation of winning of the general drawing lottery and informs the judgment of the success or failure of the general drawing drawing. The results may be announced.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the first effects (FIGS. 87(D) to (F), FIGS. 88(D) to (F)) and the second effects (FIGS. 87(B), (C), FIG. 88(B) ), (C)), it is assumed that the type, presence or absence, and color of the characters of the hold icon 9C and the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 change, but the size and shape may also change.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the first effect (FIGS. 87(D) to (F), FIG. 89(D) to (F)), the hold icon 9C and the hold icons 9B1, 9B2, 9B3, and 9B4 are arranged in a horizontal line. Although they are displayed side by side, they may be displayed in a single vertical line.

[Modification 4]
In the above-mentioned embodiment, for the lottery of the second special symbol, the performance suggesting the degree of winning and the performance notifying the result of the success/failure determination are performed, but it may be performed for the lottery of the first special symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the fortune-telling performance suggests the level of expectation of winning the special drawing lottery for all pending drawings, and announces the result of the success/failure determination of the special drawing drawing. It is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning in the figure lottery and to notify the result of the success/failure determination of the special figure lottery. The period up to a specific pending lottery is, for example, up to the first to third pending lottery. In addition, in the performance that suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the special drawing lottery, it is up to the time when the performance that confirms the win is held.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Using the display means, it is possible to perform a first effect that each indicates the expected degree of winning in all the reserved special lottery drawings or general lottery drawings during the same fluctuation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
Before the first performance, it is possible to execute a second performance that suggests the expected degree of winning in the special lottery or general lottery of the fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is the variation icon corresponding to the variation,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the second performance, the mode of the variable icon changes, and the mode of the variable icon after the change suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the special lottery or general lottery of the variation,
In the first performance, the mode of the pending icon changes, and each indicates the expected degree of winning in all the pending special lottery drawings or general lottery drawings after the change.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-3,
After the first performance, the results of the judgment on the special drawings or general drawings of the fluctuation are announced, and then the results of the judgment on all the pending special drawings or general drawings are announced. , each of which can execute the third performance to notify the user.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
In the first presentation, the variable icon and the pending icon are displayed in a line.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 90 to 92. The pending icon change effect is executed while the decorative pattern is changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pending icon change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Pending icon change effect A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon change effect A. In the hold icon change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, a reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparent or semi-transparent. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 90(D) to 90(G), an image movement effect is executed. The image movement effect is a effect in which a specific image moves within the display screen. Here, the circular character image CG enters the frame from the right end of the display screen 7a, then moves toward the left and exits the frame from the left end of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 90(D), the first character image CG enters the frame from the right end of the display screen 7a. The character image CG placed in the frame moves to the left. In FIG. 90(E), the "7" symbol as the right decorative symbol 8R is difficult to see. In FIG. 90(F), the character image CG has further moved, and the entire display screen 7a is covered with the character image CG. This makes it difficult to see the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right. Further, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 90(G), the last character image CG is out of frame from the left end of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right have started to fluctuate. Further, the display color of the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C has changed from white to red (shown by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which decorative patterns form a predetermined reach mode. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "7" symbol to form a reach mode. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 90(B) and 90(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped in this order to form a reach mode, or the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may be stopped almost simultaneously. You may form a reach mode by doing so. Also here, the red pending icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(I), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development performance is a performance that suggests development into a battle performance. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a message image MG saying "Development into Battle Reach" is displayed.

Next, after a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character, a final battle performance is performed on the entire display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 90(J). The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are in a collision. Note that the win is confirmed when the friendly character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation performance is a performance that definitively notifies that the game has won. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "7" symbols, and a win is notified. If the above-mentioned winning effect is executed, there will be no loss. If the above-mentioned hit confirmation performance is not executed and the game ends in a loss, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at the "7" symbol, and the middle decorative symbol stops at the "8" symbol.

[Pending icon change effect B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon change effect B. In the pending icon change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, a reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparent or semi-transparent. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 91(D) to 91(F), an image increase effect is executed. The image increase effect is a effect in which the number of specific images increases within the display screen. Here, circular character images CG are displayed one after another at various positions on the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 91(D), three character images CG are displayed on the display screen 7a. This makes the variable icon 9C difficult to visually recognize. A part of the "8" pattern as the medium decorative pattern 8C is also covered by the character image CG. In FIG. 91(E), a plurality of character images CG are further displayed. This makes it difficult to see the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right. Further, the fluctuation icon 9C is difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 92(F) and FIG. 91(E), a plurality of character images CG are further displayed. As a result, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the character image CG. This makes it difficult to see the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right. Further, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are difficult to visually recognize.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), an image non-display effect is executed. The image hiding performance is a performance that hides a specific image. Here, the character image CG that covered the entire display screen 7a is not displayed. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right have started to change. Further, the display color of the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C has changed from white to red (shown by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(H), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which decorative patterns form a predetermined reach mode. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "7" symbol to form a reach mode. The aspects of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Specifically, the normal display mode (FIG. 91(C)) is changed to a 7-segment display mode. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 91(B) and 91(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped in this order to form a reach mode, or the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may be stopped almost simultaneously. A reach mode may also be formed. Also here, the red pending icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(I), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development performance is a performance that suggests development into a battle performance. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a message image MG saying "Development into Battle Reach" is displayed.

Next, after a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character, a final battle performance is performed on the entire display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 91(J). The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are in a collision. Note that the win is confirmed when the friendly character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation performance is a performance that definitively notifies that the game has won. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "7" symbols, and a win is notified. The "7" symbol has a 7-segment display mode. If the above-mentioned winning effect is executed, there will be no loss. If the above-mentioned hit confirmation effect is not executed and the game ends in a loss, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at the "7" symbol, and the middle decorative symbol stops at the "8" symbol. The "8" symbol may also be displayed in a 7-segment display mode.

[Hold icon change effect C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon change effect C. In the pending icon change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), a left symbol stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern slows down and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, a reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparent or semi-transparent. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(D), a middle symbol stop effect is executed. The medium pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (variation speed) of the medium decorative pattern becomes slow and the medium decorative pattern stops. Here, the "8" symbol is stopped as the medium decorative symbol 8C. This creates a reach loss mode. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 92(E) and 92(F), image display effects are performed. The image display performance is a performance that displays a specific image on the display screen.

In FIG. 92(E), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are covered by the ally character CRA, making them difficult to see. Specifically, the ally character CRA covers up the entire middle decorative pattern 8C and partially covers the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R. Further, the fluctuation icon 9C is covered. In FIG. 92(F), the display of the ally character CRA is maintained, and the decorative pattern, the hold icon, and the variable icon are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(G), an image non-display effect is executed. The image hiding performance is a performance that hides a specific image. Here, the ally character CRA, which covered the entire display screen 7a, is not displayed. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right have started to change. Further, the display color of the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C has changed from white to red (shown by hatching). The aspect of the background image is also changing. The display color of the background image changes from white to green (indicated by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(H), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which decorative patterns form a predetermined reach mode. Here, the left and right decorative symbols 8L and 8R both stop at the "7" symbol to form a reach mode. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 92(B) and 92(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be stopped in this order to form a reach mode, or the left and right decorative patterns 8L and 8R may be stopped almost simultaneously. You may form a reach mode by doing so. Also here, the red pending icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed. Additionally, the display color of the background image is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(I), a battle reach development effect is executed. The battle reach development performance is a performance that suggests development into a battle performance. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. On the right side of the display screen 7a, a message image MG saying "Development to Battle Reach" is displayed.

Next, after a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character is performed, a final battle performance is performed on the entire display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 92(J). The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are in a collision. Note that the win is confirmed when the friendly character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation performance is a performance that definitively notifies that the game has won. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "7" symbols, and a win is notified. Here, too, the display color of the background image is green. Although the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are not displayed, they may be displayed. In that case, it may be displayed in red or white. If the above-mentioned winning effect is executed, there will be no loss. If the above-mentioned hit confirmation performance is not executed and the game ends in a loss, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at the "7" symbol, and the middle decorative symbol stops at the "8" symbol.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character image CG that overlaps a plurality of pending icons 9A is displayed so that at least a part of the pending icons 9A is difficult to see (FIGS. 90(F) and 91(F)), Thereafter, the specific image is hidden, and along with the hiding of the specific image, all of the plurality of pending icon images 9A are changed to another mode (FIG. 90(G), FIG. 91(G)). According to this configuration, the unprecedented change in the hold icon can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game. The performance control microcomputer 91 corresponds to "performance execution means". Furthermore, the image movement effects shown in FIGS. 90(D) to (G) correspond to both the "image display effect" and the "image non-display effect." Further, the image increasing effect shown in FIGS. 91(D) to 91(F) corresponds to the "image display effect", and the image non-display effect shown in FIG. 91(G) corresponds to the "image non-display effect". Further, the effect of changing the display color of the hold icon 91 in FIGS. 90(G) and 91(G) corresponds to the "hold changing effect".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect is performed in which the display area of the character image CG occupying the display screen is expanded (FIGS. 90(D) to (F), FIGS. 91(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, the unprecedented change in the hold icon can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game. The effects shown in FIGS. 90(D) to (F) and FIGS. 91(D) to (F) correspond to "enlarged area effects."

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of character images CG displayed on the display screen is increased over time (FIGS. 90(D) to (F), FIGS. 91(D) to (F)). According to this configuration, the unprecedented change in the hold icon can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the background image on the back side of the hold icon 9A, which is displayed superimposed on the hold icon 9A, is changed in accordance with the change in the hold icon 9A (FIG. 92(G)). According to this configuration, the unprecedented change in the hold icon can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the mode of the decorative pattern is changed from the normal display mode to the 7-segment display mode in accordance with the change of the hold icon 9A (FIG. 91(H)). According to this configuration, the unprecedented change in the hold icon can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the hold icon change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the embodiment described above, the character image CG overlaps with the plurality of pending icons 9A. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 92(E) and 92(F), the hold icon 9A may be hidden to make it difficult to see.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the change in the aspect of the decorative pattern (FIG. 91) and the change in the display color of the background image (FIG. 92) are configured separately, but the change in the aspect of the decorative pattern and the change in the display color of the background image are It is also possible to adopt a configuration that performs both changes.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the display color of the background image is changed (FIG. 92). On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the object depicted in the background image is changed.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, the display color of the hold icon is changed (FIGS. 90 to 92). On the other hand, the configuration may be such that the shape of the hold icon or the like is changed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means capable of executing a hold display effect that displays a hold icon image indicating a hold count on a display screen,
The performance execution means is
an image display effect that displays a specific image that overlaps a plurality of the pending icon images so that at least a part of the pending icon images is difficult to see;
After the image display effect, an image non-display effect that hides the specific image;
It is possible to perform a hold change effect in which all of the plurality of hold icon images are changed to another mode in conjunction with the image non-display effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1,
In the image display performance, the effect execution means executes an enlarged area effect of enlarging a display area of the specific image that occupies a display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-2,
The effect execution means increases the number of the specific images displayed on the display screen as the enlarged area effect over time.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-3,
The effect executing means changes at least one of an aspect of an image on the back side of the pending icon image and a mode of a decorative pattern, which are displayed superimposed on the pending icon image, in accordance with the pending change effect. is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The effect button operation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 93 to 95. In FIGS. 93 to 95, various movable accessories, various decorative members, background images, etc. arranged around the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the performance button operation performance A, FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the performance button operation performance B, and FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the performance button operation performance C. .

In this production button operation production, when the variation production (fluctuating display) of production symbols is started, an image that promotes the pressing operation of the production button 63 is displayed at a predetermined timing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a production button operation production is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image display device. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

In addition, when the second movable accessory 15 is activated during the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design, the fluctuation performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design is different from when the second movable accessory 15 is not activated. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high expectation of a win in that a hit will occur after the game ends (that is, after the performance symbols have stopped being displayed), and it can also be used to indicate to the player that there is a high probability of a win occurring after the performance symbols have stopped displaying. When the second movable accessory 15 is activated during the temporary stop display, there is a higher expectation that the second movable accessory 15 will be a hit that will give more profit to the player among the multiple types of wins than when the second movable accessory 15 is not activated. It is also possible to suggest this to the player. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation (movement) of the second movable accessory 15.

Here, first, the performance symbols, hold icons, etc. will be briefly explained, and then the performance button operation performance A, the performance button operation performance B, and the performance button operation performance C will be explained in order.

[Production pattern]
First, I will briefly explain the production design. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, showing a left effect pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle effect pattern 8C of a three-dimensional image, and a right effect pattern 8R of a three-dimensional image. A fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. In the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance design, each performance design is a numeric design: number "1" → number "2" → number "3" → number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → A variable effect (fluctuating display) is performed in a display mode in which the reels rotate in the order of number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" →...

When the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the performance symbols that are stopped and displayed at the stop position all at once (at the same time) move downwards (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "fluctuation direction"). The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a rapidly changing display mode. Thereby, the background image placed behind the performance pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent performance pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the production pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the production pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, at the stop position, the reflected light reflected by the production pattern rotates clockwise along the outline of the production pattern, and then rotates clockwise. The reflected light stops and disappears, resulting in a stopped display.

When the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are aligned and stop displayed in the same pattern, a hit is confirmed, and the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are the same pattern. If the display stops without being aligned, the loss is confirmed. In this way, the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R are images that can notify the result of the determination of whether it is a hit or a loss.

[Hold icon, etc.]
Next, to explain the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special figure reservation is as follows: It is displayed (placed) at a variable display position (above the white rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the area to the left of the variable display position, a first holding display area is provided as a first special figure holding, and in the area to the right of the variable display position, a second holding display area is provided as a second special figure holding. It is being In the first reservation display area, four reservation icons 9A can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9A can be stocked. The pending icon 9A closest to the variable icon 9C is called the first pending icon 9A, the second pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the second pending icon 9A, and the third pending icon 9A to the variable icon 9C is called the third pending icon. 9A, and the pending icon 9A that is farthest from the variable icon 9C is called the fourth pending icon 9A. In the second reservation display area, four reservation icons 9B can be displayed in a straight line, and a maximum of four reservation icons 9B can be stocked. The hold icon 9B closest to the fluctuation icon 9C is called the first hold icon 9B, the hold icon 9B second to the change icon 9C is called the second hold icon 9B, and the hold icon 9B third to the change icon 9C is called the third hold icon. 9B, and the hold icon 9B that is farthest from the variable icon 9C is called a fourth hold icon 9B. In the present embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B can indicate the degree of expectation of winning depending on the color, and the degree of expectation of winning increases in the order of white → red → yellow (gold). Therefore, players are highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B.

Note that when the fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols starts, the fluctuating performance music is output from the speaker 67 (flow starts), and at the timing when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, the fluctuating performance music is output from the speaker 67. is now suspended. In other words, each time the variable presentation (variable display) of the presentation symbols is started, it is started from the beginning of the variable presentation song.

[Production button operation production A]
Next, the effect button operation effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 93. Here, the effect button operation effect is executed when the player rotates the handle 60 and fires the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, playing a game by hitting left. A will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the current volume level is displayed in the upper row from 1st volume level (minimum (not muted)) to 5th volume level (maximum). A volume level image SL showing the level is displayed, and a brightness level image LL showing the current brightness level among five levels from the first brightness level (minimum (not pitch black)) to the fifth brightness level (maximum) is displayed at the bottom. has been done. Note that the volume level is the volume of sound output from the speaker 67. The brightness level includes the brightness of the display screen 7a, the brightness of the various lamps arranged on the board lamp 5 and the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66. Warning sounds (for example, when the upper excess ball tray (lower tray) 62 is full of game balls, front frame 53 is open, etc.), operation abnormality notification sounds (for example, when various movable accessories are in the retreat position) , or if there is a problem with the payout operation to pay out game balls), an alarm sound when fraud is confirmed (for example, if abnormal vibration is detected, abnormal magnetism is detected, or abnormal game balls are placed in various winning slots) (e.g., when an incoming ball is detected), the volume level is always at the maximum level, regardless of the volume level being changed. Furthermore, the warning light emission mode corresponding to the warning sound, the operation abnormality alarm light emission mode corresponding to the operation abnormality alarm sound, and the fraud confirmation alarm light emission mode corresponding to the fraud confirmation alarm sound are completely dependent on the brightness level that is changed. The brightness is always at maximum brightness level.

When the volume level is the fifth volume level (maximum), five volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed arranged horizontally, and when the volume level is the fourth volume level, the volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed. Four rectangular volume level images SL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the volume level is the third volume level, three volume level images SL each having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the volume level is the second volume level, , two volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the first volume level (minimum (not muted)) is reached, one volume level image SL having a rectangular shape is displayed. placed and displayed. Note that the volume level image SL is an image having a rectangular shape painted solid in light blue.

When the fifth brightness level (maximum) is reached, five brightness level images LL having a square shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the brightness level is the fourth brightness level, brightness level images LL having a square shape are displayed. Four brightness level images LL having a square shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the brightness level is the third brightness level, three brightness level images LL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the brightness level is the second brightness level, the brightness level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. , two brightness level images LL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the first brightness level is the minimum (not pitch black), there is one brightness level image LL having a rectangular shape. placed and displayed. Note that the brightness level image LL is an image having a rectangular shape solidly painted in green, which is a different color from the volume level image SL.

Here, the current volume level is set to the fifth volume level, five rectangular volume level images SL are arranged and displayed horizontally, and the current brightness level is set to the fifth brightness level. , and five rectangular brightness level images LL are arranged and displayed in a row in the horizontal direction.

Note that the volume level image SL indicating the volume level as the upper stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level as the lower stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are always arranged and displayed. It becomes.

Further, changes in the volume level and brightness level can be made only after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and the system has completed booting, and the volume level image SL and brightness level image LL are displayed at respective predetermined positions on the display screen 7a. You can do it from the moment you start. In other words, when the game machine 1 is in a standby state without starting a game (hereinafter, this includes when a demonstration performance for waiting for a customer is being performed), the setting mode is displayed, and from among the setting items It does not change the volume level or the brightness level, but after the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the system has completed booting, the player can change the volume level or brightness level at the timing that the player wants to change. changes can now be made.

The player performs a left-handed game by rotating the handle 60 and firing the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and the game ball that flows down hits the first starting port 20. When the ball enters the ball, the white pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20.

After that, first, the left performance symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1", the right performance symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle performance symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and then, As shown in FIG. 93(A), the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are the same when aligned in a line on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. The symbols are not aligned and the display stops, confirming the loss. Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and becomes a white holding icon 9A, and the white holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes a white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 93(B). As such, a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20.

During this variation, the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 several times to lower the volume level to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the volume down button and the volume up button are pressed. A volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume level image SL) are respectively displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and when the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, the volume down button image is displayed. The display mode is such that only SDG blinks (the volume up button image SUG is lit). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the player's pressing of the volume down button of the volume button 55, and a sound dedicated to changing the volume level called "Pong" is played from the speaker 67, and a sound related to the production of variable production music, sound effects, etc. Various performance sounds are also adjusted to the changed volume level and are played from the speaker 67. Furthermore, each time the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, the rectangular volume level images SL are hidden in order from the rightmost one (disappeared from the display screen 7a).

Here, the player has lowered the volume level from the fifth volume level to the third volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 and the volume level decreases to the first volume level (minimum), the number of times the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 is determined. However, the first volume level (minimum) volume level is maintained, and only one rectangular volume level image SL is displayed.

Thereafter, during this variation, the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 several times to lower the brightness level to the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, as shown in FIG. The brightness down button image LDG (simulated) and the brightness up button image LUG are respectively displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, and when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the brightness down button image LDG is displayed. (the brightness up button image LUG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the various lamps arranged on the board lamp 5 and the game board 2 is adjusted. The size of the frame lamp 66 and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Furthermore, each time the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the rectangular brightness level images LL are hidden in order from the rightmost one (disappeared from the display screen 7a).

Here, the player lowers the brightness level from the fifth brightness level to the third brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level decreases to the first brightness level (minimum), the number of times the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 will change. However, the first brightness level (minimum) brightness level is maintained, and only one square brightness level image LL is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(E), first, the left presentation pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right presentation pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the center of the left side of the display screen 7a and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2". While they are aligned in a line on the lateral center line passing through the center of the right side, the medium effect symbols 8C continue to fluctuate, forming a reach.

After the reach is formed, the white variation icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the battle production that is super reach (SP reach) is displayed from the display pattern variation production (variation display) screen. The screen switches to a battle scene. In addition, by switching from the screen of the variation production (variation display) of production symbols to the battle production screen which is Super Reach (SP Reach), the white variation icon 9C is hidden from the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). ), the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are also hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, a volume level image SL indicating the volume level as an upper stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and a brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level as a lower stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are arranged and displayed. The condition is maintained.

In this battle production, as shown in FIG. 93(F), an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and an ally character CRA and an enemy character appear in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a performance in which the character CRB fights, and it is a super reach (SP reach) performance in which the expectation of winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it is a win.

When a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the battle performance, as shown in FIG. , In the center of the display screen 7a, in front of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, there is a performance button image (imitating the performance button 63) corresponding to the performance button 63 for promoting the pressing operation of the performance button 63. BG is displayed in a large size, and a gauge image TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the effective remaining time of the pressing operation is arranged and displayed so as to cover a part of the lower side of the production button image BG.

The production button image BG is engraved with the English word "PUSH". Note that the production button image BG is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner, indicating to the player the expectation that the ally character CRA will win and the enemy character CRB will lose in the battle production. . For example, the "predetermined light emitting mode" is set to have a high expectation that the friendly character CRA will win and the enemy character CRB will lose in the order of white blinking → red blinking → yellow blinking (gold blinking). Here, since the white fluctuation icon 9C is not displayed (because it has disappeared from the display screen 7a), the production button image BG is in a lighting mode in which it flashes in white, which is the same color as the fluctuation icon 9C. (The production button image BG has a flashing white light emission mode). In addition, the lighting mode of the effect button image BG is changed from blinking white to blinking red instead of the hidden white (disappeared from the display screen 7a) to create an effect that increases the expectation of winning. You can.

The gauge image TB is an image that informs the player of the effective remaining time of the pressing operation of the production button 63 by changing to an image in which the gauge length becomes shorter. Here, the length of the gauge from the inner left end to the inner right end of the horizontally long rectangular gauge image TB is defined as the maximum gauge length, and the maximum remaining effective time is the maximum gauge length and is set to 15 seconds. ing. As the right end of the gauge moves toward the left end as time passes, the passage of time is shown as an image in which the gauge length becomes shorter, and when 15 seconds have elapsed, the gauge length becomes zero. Note that if 15 seconds pass without the effect button 63 being operated and the gauge length becomes zero, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are then hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a).

In the battle performance, when two seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 to increase the volume level, and presses the volume up button to increase the volume level. Raise the volume up to the volume level. When the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, as shown in FIG. A volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume level) are displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and when the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, the volume up button image is displayed. The display mode is such that only SUG blinks (the volume down button image SDG is lit). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the player's pressing of the volume up button of the volume button 55, and a sound dedicated to changing the volume level called "Pong" is played from the speaker 67, and a sound related to the production of variable production music, sound effects, etc. Various performance sounds are also adjusted to the changed volume level and are played from the speaker 67. Furthermore, each time the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, a rectangular volume level image SL is added and displayed in order to the right of the rightmost image.

Here, the player has raised the volume level from the third volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 and the volume level increases to the fifth volume level (maximum), the number of times the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 from now on. However, the fifth volume level (maximum) is maintained, and five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed.

Note that in FIG. 93(H), even if the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 to increase the volume level, if the production button 63 is pressed, the production button image BG and the gauge image TB is never hidden (does not disappear from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 to lower the volume level, the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB will not be displayed even if the performance button 63 is pressed. (It never disappears from the display screen 7a).

Thereafter, in the battle performance, when 7 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and gauge image TB are displayed, the player subsequently presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 several times in order to increase the brightness level. Press the button to increase the brightness level to your preference. When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, as shown in FIG. A brightness down button image LDG (simulated) and a brightness up button image LUG are displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, and when the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, the brightness up button image LUG is displayed. (the brightness down button image LDG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamps 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2 is adjusted. The size of the frame lamp 66 and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Furthermore, each time the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, a rectangular brightness level image LL is added and displayed in order to the right of the rightmost image.

Here, the player increases the brightness level from the third brightness level to the fifth brightness level (maximum). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level increases to the fifth brightness level (maximum), the number of times the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 will change. Even if the brightness level is the fifth brightness level (maximum), the fifth brightness level (maximum) is maintained, and five square brightness level images LL are displayed.

Note that in FIG. 93(I), even if the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 to increase the brightness level, the effect button image BG and gauge image TB will change even if the effect button 63 is pressed. is never hidden (does not disappear from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to lower the brightness level, the performance button image BG and gauge image TB will not be displayed even if the performance button 63 is pressed. (It never disappears from the display screen 7a).

Thereafter, in the battle performance, when 12 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the performance button 63, and as shown in FIG. 93(J), the battle performance is activated. The result is displayed, the friendly character CRA is hidden (disappears from the display screen a), the enemy character CRB remains displayed on the left center of the display screen 7a, and the message "Defeat" is displayed to the right of the enemy character CRB. The image MS is displayed in a large size to notify the player that the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won.

When the battle performance ends, the battle performance screen switches again to the screen for fluctuating performance symbols (fluctuating display), and the white fluctuation icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left performance symbol 8L is displayed with the number "2". The middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1," the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2," and the horizontal center passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a is displayed. They will be lined up in a line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(K), the left effect symbol 8L, middle effect symbol 8C, and right effect symbol 8R are the same symbol (in this case, the number "2") and are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed. . Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Even in this state, a volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed as an upper level on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and a brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level is displayed as a lower level on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The situation is as follows.

After that, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and becomes the hold icon 9A, and when the hold icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the variable icon 9C, the variable effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbols is started. . Of course, a state in which a volume level image SL indicating a volume level as an upper stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and a brightness level image LL indicating a brightness level as a lower stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are arranged and displayed. It has become. If the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are the same and are not aligned and are displayed in a stopped state, a loss is confirmed, whereas the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern are When the 8Rs are stopped and displayed in the same pattern, a win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started. Furthermore, even if the jackpot opening is started, and furthermore, even if the jackpot game is started, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed as the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level is displayed as the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The state in which the brightness level images LL and , respectively, are arranged and displayed continues.

As described above, although the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, and the performance button 63 are important buttons related to the performance that can be pressed and operated by the player, the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed in the battle performance. The player presses the volume up button or the volume down button of the volume button 55, or the brightness up button or the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, until 15 seconds have elapsed. Even if the performance button 63 is pressed, the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a), and the result of the battle performance is not displayed as a result of the validity judgment. On the other hand, when the player presses the effect button 63, the result of the battle effect is displayed as a result of the judgment.

[Production button operation production B]
Next, the effect button operation effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 94. Here, the effect button operation effect is executed when the player rotates the handle 60 and fires the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, playing a game by hitting left. B will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 94(A), on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the current volume level is displayed in the upper row from 1st volume level (minimum (not muted)) to 5th volume level (maximum). A volume level image SL showing the level is displayed, and a brightness level image LL showing the current brightness level among five levels from the first brightness level (minimum (not pitch black)) to the fifth brightness level (maximum) is displayed at the bottom. has been done. Note that the volume level is the volume of sound output from the speaker 67. The brightness level includes the brightness of the display screen 7a, the brightness of the various lamps arranged on the board lamp 5 and the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66. Warning sounds (for example, when the upper excess ball tray (lower tray) 62 is full of game balls, front frame 53 is open, etc.), operation abnormality notification sounds (for example, when various movable accessories are in the retreat position) , or if there is a problem with the payout operation to pay out game balls), an alarm sound when fraud is confirmed (for example, if abnormal vibration is detected, abnormal magnetism is detected, or abnormal game balls are placed in various winning slots) (e.g., when an incoming ball is detected), the volume level is always at the maximum level, regardless of the volume level being changed. Furthermore, the warning light emission mode corresponding to the warning sound, the operation abnormality alarm light emission mode corresponding to the operation abnormality alarm sound, and the fraud confirmation alarm light emission mode corresponding to the fraud confirmation alarm sound are completely dependent on the brightness level that is changed. The brightness is always at maximum brightness level.

When the volume level is the fifth volume level (maximum), five volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed arranged horizontally, and when the volume level is the fourth volume level, the volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed. Four volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the volume level is the third volume level, three volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the volume level is the second volume level, , two volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the first volume level is the minimum (not muted), there is one volume level image SL having a rectangular shape. placed and displayed. Note that the volume level image SL is an image having a rectangular shape painted solid in light blue.

When the fifth brightness level (maximum) is reached, five brightness level images LL having a square shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the brightness level is the fourth brightness level, brightness level images LL having a square shape are displayed. Four brightness level images LL having a square shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the brightness level is the third brightness level, three brightness level images LL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the brightness level is the second brightness level, the brightness level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. , two brightness level images LL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the first brightness level is the minimum (not pitch black), there is one brightness level image LL having a rectangular shape. placed and displayed. Note that the brightness level image LL is an image having a rectangular shape solidly painted in green, which is a different color from the volume level image SL.

Here, the current volume level is set to the fifth volume level, five rectangular volume level images SL are arranged and displayed horizontally, and the current brightness level is set to the fifth brightness level. , and five rectangular brightness level images LL are arranged and displayed in a row in the horizontal direction.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a production mode selection display area SEL is arranged and displayed, in which production modes consisting of spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode, and winter mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated. A select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (imitating the select button 68) is arranged and displayed on the left side of the production mode selection display area SEL. At the center of the production mode selection display area SEL, a selection mode section TR indicating the selected (changed) production mode is arranged.

Every time the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reel in the production mode selection display area SEL rotates from the bottom to the top, and the production mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed. The reel in the production mode selection display area SEL is displayed larger than the production mode, and is displayed in reverse (the background color and text color are swapped). The production mode that rotates downward from the top to the bottom and rotates to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes and is also displayed inverted (the background color and text color are replaced). The performance mode that has been rotated and moved to the selection mode section TR becomes the performance mode to be selected (changed), and the performance corresponding to the selected (changed) performance mode will be performed. Here, a production mode called summer mode is placed in the selection mode section TR, and a production corresponding to the summer mode is being performed.

Note that the volume level image SL indicating the volume level as the upper stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level as the lower stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are always arranged and displayed. It becomes. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a production mode selection display area SEL and a selection mode section TR are always arranged and displayed, and a select button 68 is placed to the left of the production mode selection display area SEL. A select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to the select button image SBG is always arranged and displayed.

In addition, changes to the volume level, brightness level, and performance mode can be made after the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the system has completed startup, and the volume level image SL, brightness level image LL, and performance mode selection display area SEL are changed. and selection mode section TR are displayed at respective predetermined positions on the display screen 7a. In other words, when the game machine 1 is in a standby state without starting a game (hereinafter, this includes when a demonstration performance for waiting for a customer is being performed), the setting mode is displayed, and from among the setting items It does not change the volume level, the brightness level, or the production mode, but after the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the system has completed booting, the volume level can be changed at the timing the player wants to change. It is now possible to change the brightness level, change the production mode, and change the brightness level.

The player performs a left-handed game by rotating the handle 60 and firing the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and the game ball that flows down hits the first starting port 20. When the ball enters the ball, the white pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes the white variable icon 9C, and the variable performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20.

After that, first, the left effect pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "1," the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "3," the middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2," and then, As shown in FIG. 94(A), the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are the same when aligned in a line on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. The symbols are not aligned and the display stops, confirming the loss. Accordingly, the white fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

After that, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and becomes a white holding icon 9A, and the white holding icon 9A moves to the variable display position and becomes a white variable icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 94(B). As such, a fluctuating performance (fluctuating display) of the performance symbols is started. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20.

During this variation, the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 in order to change the performance mode, and selects the desired performance mode. When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68, a display mode in which only the lower button image blinks among the upper button image, right button image, lower button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG. (The upper button image, right button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed in a lighting mode).

Here, the player changes the production mode from summer mode to autumn mode, and the autumn mode that has been rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes and is displayed in reverse (background color). and the font color are swapped). By changing this production mode, when this variation (that is, the variation) ends and the next production pattern variation production (variation display) starts, the summer mode switches to autumn mode, and the next production pattern variation production In (variable display), a state is entered in which a production corresponding to the autumn mode is being performed. When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the display mode in which the lower button image flashes is canceled and the upper button image of the select button SBG is The display returns to the same display mode (lit display mode) as the button image, right button image, and left button image.

Thereafter, during this variation, the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 several times to lower the volume level to the desired volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the volume down button and the volume up button are pressed. A volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume level image SL) are respectively displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and when the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, the volume down button image is displayed. Only the SDG blinks (the volume up button image SUG lights up). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the player's pressing of the volume down button of the volume button 55, and a sound dedicated to changing the volume level called "Pong" is played from the speaker 67, and a sound related to the production of variable production music, sound effects, etc. Various performance sounds are also adjusted to the changed volume level and are played from the speaker 67. Furthermore, each time the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, the rectangular volume level images SL are hidden in order from the rightmost one (disappeared from the display screen 7a).

Here, the player has lowered the volume level from the fifth volume level to the third volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 and the volume level decreases to the first volume level (minimum), the number of times the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 from now on. However, the first volume level (minimum) volume level is maintained, and only one rectangular volume level image SL is displayed.

Thereafter, during this variation, the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 several times to lower the brightness level to the desired brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, as shown in FIG. A brightness down button image LDG (simulated) and a brightness up button image LUG are respectively displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, and when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the brightness down button image LDG is displayed. (the brightness up button image LUG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the various lamps arranged on the board lamp 5 and the game board 2 is adjusted. The size of the frame lamp 66 and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Furthermore, each time the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the rectangular brightness level images LL are hidden in order from the rightmost one (disappeared from the display screen 7a).

Here, the player lowers the brightness level from the fifth brightness level to the third brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level decreases to the first brightness level (minimum), the number of times the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 will change. However, the first brightness level (minimum) brightness level is maintained, and only one square brightness level image LL is displayed.

When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 many times to lower the brightness level, the white change icon 9C changes to the red change icon 9C, and the expectation level of winning for the change changes. This indicates to the player that the price has increased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(E), first, the left presentation pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right presentation pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the center of the left side of the display screen 7a is displayed. While they are aligned in a line on the lateral center line passing through the center of the right side, the medium effect symbols 8C continue to fluctuate, forming a reach.

After the reach is formed, the red variable icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the battle effect that is super reach (SP reach) is displayed on the screen of the variable effect (variable display) of the effect symbol. The screen switches to a battle scene. In addition, by switching from the screen of the variation production (variation display) of production symbols to the battle production screen which is Super Reach (SP Reach), the red variation icon 9C is hidden from the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a). ), the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are also hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, a volume level image SL indicating the volume level as an upper stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and a brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level as a lower stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are arranged and displayed. The condition is maintained. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a production mode selection display area SEL and a selection mode section TR are arranged and maintained, and a select button 68 is placed to the left of the production mode selection display area SEL. A select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to the select button image SBG remains arranged and displayed.

In this battle production, as shown in FIG. 94(F), an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and an ally character CRA and an enemy character appear in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a performance in which the character CRB fights, and it is a super reach (SP reach) performance in which the expectation of winning is set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it is a win.

When a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the battle performance, as shown in FIG. , In the center of the display screen 7a, in front of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, there is a performance button image (imitating the performance button 63) corresponding to the performance button 63 for promoting the pressing operation of the performance button 63. BG is displayed in a large size, and a gauge image TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the effective remaining time of the pressing operation is arranged and displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower side of the production button image BG.

The production button image BG is engraved with the English word "PUSH". Note that the production button image BG is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner, and is designed to indicate to the player the expectation that the ally character CRA will win and the enemy character CRB will lose in the battle production. . For example, the "predetermined light emitting mode" is set to have a high expectation that the friendly character CRA will win and the enemy character CRB will lose in the order of white blinking → red blinking → yellow blinking (gold blinking). Here, since the red variation icon 9C is not displayed (because it has disappeared from the display screen 7a), the production button image BG is in a light emitting mode that flashes in red, which is the same color as the variation icon 9C. (The production button image BG has a flashing red light emission mode). In addition, the lighting mode of the effect button image BG is changed from blinking red to blinking yellow (blinking gold) instead of the hidden red (disappeared from the display screen 7a), so that the expectation of winning is increased. You may also do this.

The gauge image TB is an image that informs the player of the effective remaining time of the pressing operation of the production button 63 by changing to an image in which the gauge length becomes shorter. Here, the length of the gauge from the inner left end to the inner right end of the horizontally long rectangular gauge image TB is defined as the maximum gauge length, and the maximum remaining effective time is the maximum gauge length and is set to 15 seconds. ing. As the right end of the gauge moves toward the left end as time passes, the passage of time is shown as an image in which the gauge length becomes shorter, and when 15 seconds have elapsed, the gauge length becomes zero. Note that if 15 seconds pass without the effect button 63 being operated and the gauge length becomes zero, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are then hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a).

In the battle performance, when two seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 to increase the volume level, and presses the volume up button to increase the volume level. Raise the volume up to the volume level. When the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, as shown in FIG. A volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume level) are displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and when the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, the volume up button image is displayed. The display mode is such that only SUG blinks (the volume down button image SDG is lit). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the player's pressing of the volume up button of the volume button 55, and a sound dedicated to changing the volume level called "Pong" is played from the speaker 67, and a sound related to the production of variable production music, sound effects, etc. Various performance sounds are also adjusted to the changed volume level and are played from the speaker 67. Furthermore, each time the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, a rectangular volume level image SL is added and displayed in order to the right of the rightmost image.

Here, the player has raised the volume level from the third volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 and the volume level increases to the fifth volume level (maximum), the number of times the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 from now on. However, the fifth volume level (maximum) is maintained, and five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed.

Note that in FIG. 94(H), even if the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 to increase the volume level, if the production button 63 is pressed, the production button image BG and the gauge image TB is never hidden (does not disappear from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 to lower the volume level, the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB will not be displayed even if the performance button 63 is pressed. (It never disappears from the display screen 7a).

Thereafter, in the battle performance, when 7 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and gauge image TB are displayed, the player subsequently presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 several times in order to increase the brightness level. Press the button to increase the brightness level to your preference. When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, the brightness up button corresponding to the brightness down button and the brightness up button is pressed as shown in FIG. 94(I). A brightness down button image LDG (simulated) and a brightness up button image LUG are displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, and when the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, the brightness up button image LUG is displayed. (the brightness down button image LDG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamps 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2 is adjusted. The size of the frame lamp 66 and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Furthermore, each time the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, a rectangular brightness level image LL is added and displayed in order to the right of the rightmost image.

Here, the player increases the brightness level from the third brightness level to the fifth brightness level (maximum). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level increases to the fifth brightness level (maximum), the number of times the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 will change. Even if the brightness level is the fifth brightness level (maximum), the fifth brightness level (maximum) is maintained, and five square brightness level images LL are displayed.

Note that in FIG. 94(I), even if the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 to increase the brightness level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB will change even if the effect button 63 is pressed. is never hidden (does not disappear from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to lower the brightness level, the performance button image BG and gauge image TB will not be displayed even if the performance button 63 is pressed. (It never disappears from the display screen 7a).

Thereafter, in the battle performance, when 10 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player next presses the upper button of the select button 68 in order to change the performance mode. and select the desired production mode. When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68, the upper button image, right button image, lower button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG are changed accordingly, as shown in FIG. 94(J). Among them, only the upper button image is displayed in a blinking manner (the right button image, the lower button image, and the left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed in a displayed manner in which they are lit).

Here, the player operates the select button 68 to return the production mode to the summer mode before the change, changes (returns) from the autumn mode to the summer mode, and rotates to the selection mode section TR. The summer mode is displayed larger than the other production modes, and is also displayed inverted (the background color and text color are swapped). By changing this production mode, even if this variation (that is, the variation) ends and the next production pattern's variation production (variation display) starts, the summer mode will not switch to the autumn mode, and the next production pattern will change. The current summer mode will continue even in the variable presentation (variable display). When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the display mode in which the upper button image blinks is canceled, and the display mode in which the upper button image blinks is canceled, and the display mode in which the upper button image blinks is canceled. The display returns to the same display mode (lit display mode) as the button image, lower button image, and left button image.

In addition, in FIG. 94(J), even if the player presses any of the upper button, right button, lower button, or left button of the select button 68 to change the production mode, or by mistake, Even if the performance button 63 is pressed, the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB will not be hidden (they will not disappear from the display screen 7a).

Thereafter, in the battle performance, when 13 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are displayed, the player presses the performance button 63, and as shown in FIG. The second movable accessory 15, which has a rectangular decorative part written as "", moves downward from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in the center of the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, , 1.5 seconds). Furthermore, when the player presses the production button 63, the result of the battle production is displayed, the enemy character CRB is hidden (disappears from the display screen a), and the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the center of the display screen 7a. The message image MS "Victory" is displayed in a large size at the upper left of the ally character CRA, which is not covered by the second movable accessory 15 that stops at the advanced position, and the ally character CRA wins. The player is informed that the enemy character CRB has been defeated.

In the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 displays a volume level image SL indicating the volume level displayed as an upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and a volume level image SL displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level displayed as a lower row on the lower left side does not overlap with each other, and the visibility of the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL is not obstructed at all.

Furthermore, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 is connected to the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, The visibility of the production mode selection display area SEL, the selection mode section TR, and the selection button image SBG is improved without covering the selection button image SBG displayed on the left side of the production mode selection display area SEL. It doesn't hinder it at all.

When the second movable accessory 15 moves from the advance position to the retreat position (home position) again and disappears from the display screen 7a, the battle performance ends, and the screen changes from the battle performance screen to the screen for fluctuating performance symbols (fluctuating display). Switching again, the left production pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle production pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right production pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the display screen 7a They are aligned in a line on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(L), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed as the same symbol (in this case, the number "2"), and the hit is confirmed. . Even in this state, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed as the upper level on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level is displayed as the lower level on the left side of the display screen 7a. It is in a state of being Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a production mode selection display area SEL and a selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed, and a select button 68 is placed on the left side of the production mode selection display area SEL. A corresponding select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) is arranged and displayed.

Once the win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started. Furthermore, even if the jackpot opening is started, and furthermore, even if the jackpot game is started, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed as the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level is displayed as the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The state in which the brightness level images LL and , respectively, are arranged and displayed continues. Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the state in which the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed continues, and a select button is placed on the left side of the production mode selection display area SEL. The state in which the select button image SBG corresponding to 68 (imitating the select button 68) is arranged and displayed continues.

In this way, the volume button 55, brightness button 56, select button 68, and production button 63 are important buttons related to production that can be pressed by the player, but in battle production, production button image BG and gauge image TB is displayed and until 15 seconds have passed, the player presses the volume up button or volume down button of the volume button 55, or the player presses the brightness up button or brightness down button of the brightness button 56. Even if the player presses any of the upper, right, lower, and left buttons of the select button 68, the effect button image BG is assumed to have been pressed on the effect button 63. and the gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a), and the result of the battle performance is not displayed as a result of the success/failure determination, but when the player presses the performance button 63, the success/failure determination is performed. As a result, the results of the battle performance are displayed.

[Production button operation production C]
Next, the effect button operation effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 95. Here, the effect button operation effect is executed when the player rotates the handle 60 and fires the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, playing a game by hitting left. C will be explained. Here, as shown in FIG. 95(A), the left performance symbols 8L are stopped and displayed at the number "1" while being aligned in a line on the horizontal center line passing through the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. The middle effect pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2," and the right effect pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "3." At this point, the player has not rotated the handle 60 and has not fired the game ball, so there is no hold icon, and the game machine 1 is in a standby state. .

On the display screen 7a, on the lower left side, a volume level image SL showing the current volume level among five levels, ie, the first volume level (minimum (not muted)) to the fifth volume level (maximum), is displayed in the upper row. , a brightness level image LL showing the current brightness level out of five brightness levels from the first brightness level (minimum (not pitch black)) to the fifth brightness level (maximum) is displayed in the lower row. Note that the volume level is the volume of sound output from the speaker 67. The brightness level includes the brightness of the display screen 7a, the brightness of the various lamps arranged on the board lamp 5 and the game board 2, and the brightness of the frame lamp 66. Warning sounds (for example, when the upper excess ball tray (lower tray) 62 is full of game balls, front frame 53 is open, etc.), operation abnormality notification sounds (for example, when various movable accessories are in the retreat position) , or if there is a problem with the payout operation to pay out game balls), an alarm sound when fraud is confirmed (for example, if abnormal vibration is detected, abnormal magnetism is detected, or abnormal game balls are placed in various winning slots) (e.g., when an incoming ball is detected), the volume level is always at the maximum level, regardless of the volume level being changed. Furthermore, the warning light emission mode corresponding to the warning sound, the operation abnormality alarm light emission mode corresponding to the operation abnormality alarm sound, and the fraud confirmation alarm light emission mode corresponding to the fraud confirmation alarm sound are completely dependent on the brightness level that is changed. The brightness is always at maximum brightness level.

When the volume level is the fifth volume level (maximum), five volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed arranged horizontally, and when the volume level is the fourth volume level, the volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed. Four volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the volume level is the third volume level, three volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the volume level is the second volume level, , two volume level images SL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the first volume level is the minimum (not muted), there is one volume level image SL having a rectangular shape. placed and displayed. Note that the volume level image SL is an image having a rectangular shape painted solid in light blue.

When the fifth brightness level (maximum) is reached, five brightness level images LL having a square shape are arranged and displayed in the horizontal direction, and when the brightness level is the fourth brightness level, brightness level images LL having a square shape are displayed. Four brightness level images LL having a square shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the brightness level is the third brightness level, three brightness level images LL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the brightness level is the second brightness level, the brightness level images LL are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. , two brightness level images LL having a rectangular shape are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and when the first brightness level is the minimum (not pitch black), there is one brightness level image LL having a rectangular shape. placed and displayed. Note that the brightness level image LL is an image having a rectangular shape solidly painted in green, which is a different color from the volume level image SL.

Here, the current volume level is set to the fifth volume level, five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed arranged in a row in the horizontal direction, and the current brightness level is set to the fifth brightness level. , and five rectangular brightness level images LL are arranged and displayed in a row in the horizontal direction.

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a production mode selection display area SEL is arranged and displayed, in which production modes consisting of spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode, and winter mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated. A select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (imitating the select button 68) is arranged and displayed on the left side of the production mode selection display area SEL. At the center of the production mode selection display area SEL, a selection mode section TR indicating the selected (changed) production mode is arranged.

Every time the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed, the reel in the production mode selection display area SEL rotates upward from the bottom to the top, and the production mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed. The reel in the production mode selection display area SEL is displayed larger than the production mode, and is displayed in reverse (the background color and text color are swapped). The production mode that rotates downward from the top to the bottom and rotates to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes and is also displayed inverted (the background color and text color are replaced). The performance mode that has been rotated and moved to the selection mode section TR becomes the performance mode to be selected (changed), and the performance corresponding to the selected (changed) performance mode will be proceeded. Here, a production mode called summer mode is placed in the selection mode section TR, and a production corresponding to the summer mode is being performed.

Note that a volume level image SL indicating the volume level as an upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and a brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level as a lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are always arranged and displayed. It becomes. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a production mode selection display area SEL and a selection mode section TR are always arranged and displayed, and a select button 68 is placed to the left of the production mode selection display area SEL. A select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to the select button image SBG is always arranged and displayed.

In addition, changes to the volume level, brightness level, and performance mode can be made after the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the system has completed startup, and the volume level image SL, brightness level image LL, and performance mode selection display area SEL are changed. and selection mode section TR are displayed at respective predetermined positions on the display screen 7a. In other words, when the game machine 1 is in a standby state without starting a game (hereinafter, this includes when a demonstration performance for waiting for a customer is being performed), the setting mode is displayed, and from among the setting items It does not change the volume level, the brightness level, or the production mode, but after the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the system has completed booting, the volume level can be changed at the timing when the player wants to change it. It is now possible to change the brightness level, change the production mode, and change the brightness level.

When the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state), the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 to change the performance mode, and selects the desired effect. The production mode is set to . When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68, a display mode in which only the lower button image blinks among the upper button image, right button image, lower button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG. (The upper button image, right button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed in a lighting mode).

Here, the player changes the production mode from summer mode to autumn mode, and the autumn mode that has been rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes and is displayed in reverse (background color). and the font color are swapped). By changing this production mode, when the next variation production (variation display) of production symbols starts, the current summer mode will be switched to autumn mode, and the next production pattern variation production (variation display) will be switched to autumn mode. The corresponding performance is now in progress. When the player presses the lower button of the select button 68 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the display mode in which the lower button image flashes is canceled and the upper button image of the select button SBG is The display returns to the same display mode (lit display mode) as the button image, right button image, and left button image.

Thereafter, while the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (while the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state), the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 several times in order to lower the volume level. to lower the volume to your desired level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, as shown in FIG. 95(B), the volume down button and the volume up button are pressed. A volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume level image SL) are respectively displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and when the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, the volume down button image is displayed. Only the SDG blinks (the volume up button image SUG lights up). The volume is adjusted to a volume level corresponding to the player pressing the volume down button of the volume button 55, and a sound exclusively for changing the volume level, called "Pong", is output from the speaker 67. Furthermore, each time the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55, the rectangular volume level images SL are hidden in order from the rightmost one (disappeared from the display screen 7a).

Here, the player has lowered the volume level from the fifth volume level to the third volume level. When the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 and the volume level decreases to the first volume level (minimum), the number of times the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 from now on. However, the first volume level (minimum) volume level is maintained, and only one rectangular volume level image SL is displayed.

Thereafter, when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (when the gaming machine 1 is in a standby state), the player subsequently presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to lower the brightness level. Press the button to lower the brightness to your desired level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, as shown in FIG. The brightness down button image LDG (simulated) and the brightness up button image LUG are respectively displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, and when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the brightness down button image LDG is displayed. (the brightness up button image LUG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the various lamps arranged on the board lamp 5 and the game board 2 is adjusted. The size of the frame lamp 66 and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Furthermore, each time the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56, the rectangular brightness level images LL are hidden in order from the rightmost one (disappeared from the display screen 7a).

Here, the player lowers the brightness level from the fifth brightness level to the third brightness level. When the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level decreases to the first brightness level (minimum), the number of times the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 will change. However, the first brightness level (minimum) brightness level is maintained, and only one square brightness level image LL is displayed.

After that, the player rotates the handle 60 and plays a left-handed game by firing the game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A, and the game ball that flows down enters the first starting port 20. When the ball enters and the white pending icon 9A moves to the variable display position, it becomes a yellow (gold color) variable icon 9C as shown in FIG. Ru. Although the player continues to operate the handle 60, the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(E), first, the left presentation pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", the right presentation pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the center of the left side of the display screen 7a and the right presentation pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2". While they are aligned in a line on the lateral center line passing through the center of the right side, the medium effect symbols 8C continue to fluctuate, forming a reach.

After the reach is formed, the yellow (gold color) fluctuation icon 9C is hidden from the display screen 7a (disappears from the display screen 7a), and the super reach (SP reach) is displayed from the screen of the fluctuation effect (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol. The screen switches to a battle production screen, which progresses to a battle production. In addition, by switching from the screen of the variation production (variation display) of production symbols to the battle production screen which is Super Reach (SP reach), the yellow (gold color) variation icon 9C is hidden on the display screen 7a (display At the same time, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are also hidden (disappear from the display screen 7a). On the other hand, a volume level image SL indicating the volume level as an upper stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and a brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level as a lower stage on the lower left side of the display screen 7a are arranged and displayed. The current state is maintained. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a production mode selection display area SEL and a selection mode section TR are arranged and maintained, and a select button 68 is placed to the left of the production mode selection display area SEL. A select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) corresponding to the select button image SBG remains arranged and displayed.

In this battle production, an ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, an enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. This is a Super Reach (SP Reach) performance where expectations are set high in advance. If the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, it is a loss, whereas if the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, it is a win.

In the battle production, the ally character CRA fell down and was defeated once, and the enemy character CRB was victorious, but the ally character CRA stood up and revived, fought against the enemy character CRB again, and in the end, the ally character CRA won. Then, the enemy character CRB is defeated and the battle effect ends, and the battle effect screen switches again to the screen for the variation effect (fluctuating display) of the effect symbols, and as shown in FIG. 95(F), the left effect symbol 8L is a number. It is temporarily stopped and displayed at "2", the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "2", passing between the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are aligned in a line on the horizontal center line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(G), the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R start to fluctuate again with the same patterns aligned on the horizontal line, and the display screen 7a In the center, in front of the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R, there is a effect button image BG corresponding to the effect button 63 (imitating the effect button 63) for promoting the pressing operation of the effect button 63. is displayed in a large size, and a gauge image TB having a horizontally long rectangular shape indicating the effective remaining time of the pressing operation is arranged and displayed so as to cover a portion of the lower side of the production button image BG.

The production button image BG is engraved with the English word "PUSH". In addition, the production button image BG is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner to indicate to the player the expectation that the winning type will be promoted to 16 rounds (R) and the V-passing jackpot due to re-variation. It has become. For example, as the "predetermined light emitting mode", the expectation level is set to be high for promotion to the 16th round (R) and V passing planned jackpot in the order of white blinking → red blinking → yellow blinking (gold blinking). Here, since the yellow (gold color) variation icon 9C is hidden (because it has disappeared from the display screen 7a), the production button image BG is yellow (gold color), which is the same color as the variation icon 9C. It is in a blinking light emission mode (the effect button image BG is in a yellow blinking (gold color blinking) light emission mode). Furthermore, if the color of the variable icon 9C is red, the lighting mode of the production button image BG is changed to a lighting mode that flashes in red, which is the same color as the hidden red (disappeared from the display screen 7a). Alternatively, instead of the red flashing, the red flashing may change to the yellow flashing (gold flashing) to create an effect that increases the expectation of being promoted to the jackpot scheduled to pass through the 16th round (R) and V. .

The gauge image TB is an image that informs the player of the effective remaining time of the pressing operation of the production button 63 by changing to an image in which the gauge length becomes shorter. Here, the length of the gauge from the inner left end to the inner right end of the horizontally long rectangular gauge image TB is defined as the maximum gauge length, and the maximum remaining effective time is the maximum gauge length and is set to 15 seconds. ing. As the right end of the gauge moves toward the left end as time passes, the passage of time is shown as an image in which the gauge length becomes shorter, and when 15 seconds have elapsed, the gauge length becomes zero. Note that if 15 seconds pass without the effect button 63 being operated and the gauge length becomes zero, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB are then hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a).

When two seconds have elapsed since the re-variation was started and the performance button image BG and gauge image TB were displayed, the player pressed the volume up button of the volume button 55 several times in order to increase the volume level. , raise the volume to your desired volume level. When the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, in response, as shown in FIG. A volume down button image SDG and a volume up button image SUG (simulating the volume level) are displayed on the right side of the volume level image SL, and when the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, the volume up button image is displayed. The display mode is such that only SUG blinks (the volume down button image SDG is lit). The volume level is adjusted to correspond to the player's pressing of the volume up button of the volume button 55, and a sound dedicated to changing the volume level called "Pong" is played from the speaker 67, and a sound related to the production of variable production music, sound effects, etc. Various performance sounds are also adjusted to the changed volume level and are played from the speaker 67. Furthermore, each time the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55, a rectangular volume level image SL is added and displayed in order to the right of the rightmost image.

Here, the player has raised the volume level from the third volume level to the fifth volume level (maximum). When the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 and the volume level increases to the fifth volume level (maximum), the number of times the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 from now on. However, the fifth volume level (maximum) is maintained, and five rectangular volume level images SL are displayed.

Note that in FIG. 95(H), even if the player presses the volume up button of the volume button 55 to increase the volume level, if the production button 63 is pressed, the production button image BG and the gauge image TB is never hidden (does not disappear from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the volume down button of the volume button 55 to lower the volume level, the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB will not be displayed even if the performance button 63 is pressed. (It never disappears from the display screen 7a).

Thereafter, during re-variation, when 7 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player subsequently presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 several times in order to increase the brightness level. Press the button to increase the brightness to your desired level. When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, as shown in FIG. A brightness down button image LDG (simulated) and a brightness up button image LUG are displayed on the right side of the brightness level image LL, and when the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, the brightness up button image LUG is displayed. (the brightness down button image LDG is lit). The brightness of the display screen 7a is adjusted to the brightness level corresponding to the player pressing the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, and the brightness of the board lamps 5 and various lamps arranged on the game board 2 is adjusted. The size of the frame lamp 66 and the brightness of the frame lamp 66 are also adjusted to the changed brightness level. Furthermore, each time the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56, a rectangular brightness level image LL is added and displayed in order to the right of the rightmost image.

Here, the player increases the brightness level from the third brightness level to the fifth brightness level (maximum). When the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the brightness down button image LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden. (It disappears from the display screen 7a). Note that when the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 and the brightness level increases to the fifth brightness level (maximum), the number of times the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 will change. Even if the brightness level is the fifth brightness level (maximum), the fifth brightness level (maximum) is maintained, and five square brightness level images LL are displayed.

Note that in FIG. 95(I), even if the player presses the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 to increase the brightness level, the effect button image BG and the gauge image TB will change even if the effect button 63 is pressed. is never hidden (does not disappear from the display screen 7a). Further, even if the player presses the brightness down button of the brightness button 56 to lower the brightness level, the performance button image BG and gauge image TB will not be displayed even if the performance button 63 is pressed. (It never disappears from the display screen 7a).

Thereafter, during re-variation, when 10 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and gauge image TB were displayed, the player subsequently presses the upper button of the select button 68 in order to change the performance mode. Operate to set the desired production mode. When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68, the upper button image, right button image, lower button image, and left button image of the select button image SBG are changed accordingly, as shown in FIG. 95(J). Among them, only the upper button image is displayed in a blinking manner (the right button image, the lower button image, and the left button image of the select button image SBG are displayed in a displayed manner in which they are lit).

Here, the player presses the select button 68 to return the performance mode to the summer mode that was set when the performance symbols were stopped and displayed (when the gaming machine 1 was in a standby state). The operation changes from autumn mode to summer mode again (back), and summer mode, which has been rotated and moved to the selection mode section TR, is displayed larger than other production modes and is displayed in reverse (the background color and text are The colors are swapped). By changing this production mode, when the next production pattern fluctuating production (fluctuating display) starts, the current summer mode will be switched to autumn mode, and the next production pattern variation production (variation display) will switch to autumn mode. The corresponding performance is now in progress. When the player presses the upper button of the select button 68 and a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the display mode in which the upper button image blinks is canceled, and the display mode in which the upper button image blinks is canceled, and the display mode to the right of the select button image SBG This will return to the same display mode as the button image, lower button image, and left button image.

In addition, in FIG. 95(J), even if the player presses any of the upper button, right button, lower button, or left button of the select button 68 to change the production mode, or by mistake, Even if the performance button 63 is pressed, the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB will not be hidden (they will not disappear from the display screen 7a).

Thereafter, during the re-variation, when 13 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB were displayed, the player presses the performance button 63, and as shown in FIG. 95(K), " The second movable accessory 15, which includes a rectangular decorative part labeled "OARO", moves downward from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in the center of the display screen 7a for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment). In this case, the state is stopped for 1.5 seconds).

In the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 displays a volume level image SL indicating the volume level displayed as an upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and a volume level image SL displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level displayed as a lower row on the lower left side does not overlap with each other, and the visibility of the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL is not obstructed at all.

Furthermore, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 is connected to the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, The visibility of the production mode selection display area SEL, the selection mode section TR, and the selection button image SBG is improved without covering the selection button image SBG displayed on the left side of the production mode selection display area SEL. It doesn't hinder it at all.

When the second movable accessory 15 moves from the advance position to the retreat position (home position) again and disappears from the display screen 7a, the re-variation is completed, the result of the re-variation is displayed, and the left production pattern 8L is the number "7" The middle effect pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7," and the right effect pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed at the number "7." They will be aligned in a line on the center line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95(L), the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed as the same symbol (in this case, the number "7"), and the hit is confirmed. . Here, as the winning type was a win due to battle revival, it was a jackpot that was scheduled to pass 16 rounds (R) (actually 15 rounds (R)) and pass V, but due to re-fluctuation, it was a jackpot that was scheduled to pass 16 rounds (R) and pass V. It has been promoted to a planned jackpot. Even in this state, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed as the upper level on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level image LL indicating the brightness level is displayed as the lower level on the left side of the display screen 7a. It is in a state of being Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, a production mode selection display area SEL and a selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed, and a select button 68 is placed on the left side of the production mode selection display area SEL. A corresponding select button image SBG (simulating the select button 68) is arranged and displayed.

Once the win is confirmed, a jackpot opening is started, and then a jackpot game in which a profit is given to the player is started. Furthermore, even if the jackpot opening is started, and furthermore, even if the jackpot game is started, the volume level image SL indicating the volume level is displayed as the upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the brightness level is displayed as the lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The state in which the brightness level images LL and , respectively, are arranged and displayed continues. Furthermore, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the state in which the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged and displayed continues, and a select button is placed on the left side of the production mode selection display area SEL. The state in which the select button image SBG corresponding to 68 (imitating the select button 68) is arranged and displayed continues.

In this way, although the volume button 55, brightness button 56, select button 68, and production button 63 are important buttons related to production that can be pressed by the player, during re-variation, the production button image BG and the gauge Before 15 seconds have passed since image TB is displayed, the player presses the volume up button or the volume down button of the volume button 55, or the player presses the brightness up button or the brightness down button of the brightness button 56. Even if the player presses any of the upper, right, lower, and left buttons of the select button 68, the effect button image will be displayed even if the effect button 63 is pressed. The BG and the gauge image TB are not hidden (they do not disappear from the display screen 7a), and the result of the re-variation is not displayed as a result of the success/failure determination, but when the player presses the production button 63, the result of the re-variation is not displayed. As a result of the judgment, the result of re-variation is displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the performance button operation performance is shown.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes operating means such as a volume button 55, a brightness button 56, a production button 63, and a select button 68 that can be operated by the player, and an image display device 7 (display) that can display a plurality of types of images. means) and a performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) of a sub-control board 90 capable of executing various performances using images on the image display device 7 (display means), and the operation means include a volume button. 55, a brightness button 56, a select button 68, and other first operating means, and a second operating means, such as a production button 63, which is different from the first operating means, and one of the plurality of types of images has a volume level A first image such as image SL, brightness level image LL, production mode selection display area SEL, selection mode section TR, volume down button image SDG, volume up button image SUG, brightness down button LDG, brightness up button image LUG, One of the plurality of types of images is a second image such as a performance button image BG and a gauge image TB that are different from the first image, and the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) is operated by the first operation means. (When the volume up button of the volume button 55 is pressed, the number of volume level images SL is increased, and when the brightness up button of the brightness button 56 is pressed, the number of brightness level images SL is increased.) increases, or when the select button 68 is pressed, the production mode that has rotated to the selection mode section TR is displayed larger than the other production modes), indicating that the second operating means has been operated. Based on this, the second image can be hidden (when the performance button 63 is pressed, the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB are hidden). ) to (J), Figures 94 (G) to (K) for production button operation production B, and Figures 95 (G) to (K) for production button operation production C). According to this configuration, the operation means that can be operated by the player include the first operation means on which the first image is displayed and the second operation means on which the second image is hidden. This allows the image to be displayed and the image to be hidden. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance button operation performance A shown in FIGS. 93 (G) to (J), the performance button operation performance B shown in FIGS. 94 (G) to (K), and the performance button operation performance B shown in FIGS. 95 (G) to (K) In the production button operation production C, one of the multiple types of images is a set of productions such as a left production pattern 8L, a middle production pattern 8C, and a right production pattern 8R, which can notify the result of the judgment of success or loss. The effect control microcomputer 91 (effect execution means) controls the volume level image SL, brightness level image LL, effect mode selection display area SEL, regardless of whether or not the variable display based on a set of effect symbols has started. , the first image of the selection mode section TR, etc. can be displayed at a predetermined timing (a predetermined time after the start of the battle effect (in this embodiment, 8 seconds) after starting the variable display of a set of effect symbols. )) can display second images such as the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB. According to this configuration, the state in which the first image and the second image are always displayed does not continue, but regardless of whether or not the first image starts to be displayed in a variable manner based on a set of performance symbols. However, since the second image is displayed at a predetermined timing after the fluctuating display of a set of performance symbols starts, the first image and the second image are displayed together. It is possible to limit the period during which the

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance button operation performance A shown in FIGS. 93 (G) to (J), the performance button operation performance B shown in FIGS. 94 (G) to (K), and the performance button operation performance B shown in FIGS. 95 (G) to (K) In the performance button operation performance C, the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) presses the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, and the select button while displaying the second images such as the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB. Regardless of whether or not the first operating means such as the button 68 has been operated, the result of the judgment can be displayed based on the operation of the second operating means such as the production button 63. . According to this configuration, even if the player operates the first operation means at the timing when he/she wants to obtain the result of the judgment, the player cannot obtain the result of the judgment. This can contribute to preventing the player from erroneously operating the first operating means.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance button operation performance A shown in FIGS. 93 (G) to (J), the performance button operation performance B shown in FIGS. 94 (G) to (K), and the performance button operation performance B shown in FIGS. 95 (G) to (K) In the production button operation production C, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are images representing the first operation means such as the volume button 55, and the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image A first image such as LUG is an image representing a first operation means such as the brightness button 56, and a second image such as the effect button image BG is an image representing a second operation means such as the effect button 63. The control microcomputer 91 (effect execution means) controls the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button even if the first operation means such as the volume button 55 is operated while the first image and the second image are being displayed. The first image such as the image SUG is not hidden but remains displayed, and even if the first operation means such as the brightness button 56 is operated, the first image such as the brightness down button LDG or the brightness up button image LUG is not displayed. While maintaining the display, the second images such as the performance button image BG and the gauge image TB can be hidden based on the operation of the second operation means such as the performance button 63. . According to this configuration, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG, the volume up button image SUG, the brightness down button LDG, and the brightness up button image LUG, and the second images such as the production button image BG and the gauge image TB, is displayed, even if the first operation means such as the volume button 55 or the brightness button 56 is operated, the first image will not be hidden, whereas the second image such as the production button 63 will not be hidden. When the operating means is operated, the second image is hidden. In this way, changes in the first image and the second image caused by operations on the first operation means such as the volume button 55 and the brightness button 56 and the second operation means such as the production button 63 include maintaining the display of the first image and changing the second image. It is possible to have variations in effects such as hiding images.

Furthermore, in the performance button operation performance B of FIGS. 94(G) to (K) and the performance button operation performance C of FIGS. 95(G) to (K), the first volume down button image SDG, volume up button image SUG, etc. The image is an image representing a first operating means such as the volume button 55, and the first image such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG is an image representing the first operating means such as the brightness button 56. A first image such as the select button image SBG is an image representing a first operating means such as the select button 68, and a second image such as the effect button image BG or a gauge image TB is an image representing a second operating means such as the effect button 63. The production control microcomputer 91 (production execution means) does not turn down the volume even if the first operation means such as the volume button 55 is operated while the first image and the second image are displayed. The first images such as the button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are not hidden but remain displayed, and even if the first operation means such as the brightness button 56 is operated, the brightness down button LDG, the brightness up button image LUG, etc. The display of the first image is maintained without being hidden, and even if the first operation means such as the select button 68 is operated, the first image such as the select button image SBG is not hidden and maintained displayed, and the production button 63 It is possible to hide the second images such as the production button image BG and the gauge image TB based on the operation of the second operation means such as. According to this configuration, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG, the volume up button image SUG, the brightness down button LDG, the brightness up button image LUG, and the select button image SBG, the effect button image BG, the gauge image TB, etc. While the second image is displayed, even if the first operation means such as the volume button 55, brightness button 56, or select button 68 is operated, the first image is not hidden. When the second operation means such as the effect button 63 is operated, the second image is hidden. In this way, changes in the first image and the second image due to operations on the first operation means such as the volume button 55, the brightness button 56, and the select button image SBG, and the second operation means such as the production button 63, It is possible to have variations in effects such as maintaining the display and not displaying the second image.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance button operation performance A shown in FIGS. 93 (G) to (J), the performance button operation performance B shown in FIGS. 94 (G) to (K), and the performance button operation performance B shown in FIGS. 95 (G) to (K) In the production button operation production C, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are images representing the first operation means such as the volume button 55, and the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image A first image such as LUG is an image representing a first operation means such as the brightness button 56, and a second image such as the effect button image BG is an image representing a second operation means such as the effect button 63. The control microcomputer 91 (effect execution means) controls the first image in the effect button operation effect A of FIG. 93(G), the effect button operation effect B of FIG. 94(G), and the effect button operation effect C of FIG. 95(G). is hidden and the second image is displayed, the effect button operation effect A in FIGS. 93(H) and (I), the effect button operation effect B in FIGS. 94(H) and (I), and the effect button operation effect B in FIG. 95( In the performance button operation performance C of H) and (I), a first image such as a volume down button image SDG or a volume up button image SUG is displayed based on the operation of the first operation means such as the volume button 55. , the first images such as the brightness down button LDG and the brightness up button image LUG are displayed based on the operation of the first operating means such as the brightness button 56, while the effect button operation effect A of FIG. 93(J), In the performance button operation performance B of FIG. 94(K) and the performance button operation performance C of FIG. 95(K), the second operation button image BG etc. Images can now be hidden. According to this configuration, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG, the volume up button image SUG, the brightness down button LDG, and the brightness up button image LUG are hidden, and the second images such as the production button image BG are displayed. When the first operation means such as the volume button 55 is operated in the state where the first operation means such as the brightness button 56 is operated, the first images such as the volume down button image SDG and the volume up button image SUG are displayed, and the first operation means such as the brightness button 56 is When operated, the first image such as the brightness down button LDG and brightness up button image LUG is displayed, whereas when the second operation means such as the production button 63 is operated, the second image is not displayed. It is becoming more and more popular. In this way, as changes in the first image and the second image due to operations on the first operation means such as the volume button 55 and the brightness button 56 and the second operation means such as the production button 63, the display of the first image and the second image are changed. It is possible to have a variation of the effect of hiding the .

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the performance button operation performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the battle performance in the performance button operation performance B of FIG. 94, when the player presses the performance button 63 after 13 seconds have passed since the performance button image BG and gauge image TB are displayed, FIG. As shown in (L), after the second movable accessory 15 suddenly appears, the left effect pattern 8L, the middle effect pattern 8C, and the right effect pattern 8R have the same pattern (here, the number "2") temporarily. It appeared stopped and then became a hit. However, even if the production button 63 is pressed, the second movable accessory 15 does not appear at all, and the left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C, and right production pattern 8R have the same pattern (here, the number "2"). ) may be temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the winning may occur. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of performances in the battle production, and furthermore, the relationship and rules between the press operation of the production button 63 and the appearance of the second movable accessory 15 in the battle production can be freely determined by the player. You can have fun with new ideas.

[Modification 2]
When the player presses the performance button 63 13 seconds after the performance button image BG and gauge image TB are displayed during re-variation in the performance button operation performance C in FIG. 95, the image shown in FIG. 95(K) As shown in ~(L), after the second movable accessory 15 suddenly appears, the left effect pattern 8L, middle effect pattern 8C, and right effect pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, the number "7"). A temporary stop was displayed, and then it became a hit. However, even if the production button 63 is pressed, the second movable accessory 15 does not appear at all, and the left production pattern 8L, middle production pattern 8C, and right production pattern 8R have the same pattern (here, the number "7"). ) may be temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the winning may occur. In this way, it is possible to increase the variations in the performance in the re-variation, and furthermore, the player can freely determine the relationship and rules between the pressing operation of the performance button 63 in the re-variation and the appearance of the second movable accessory 15. You can have fun with new ideas.

[Modification 3]
In the performance button operation performance A shown in FIG. 93, the performance button operation performance B shown in FIG. 94, and the performance button operation performance C shown in FIG. It was displayed (placed) at the position (above the white rectangular image (pedestal image)). However, instead of the variable display position, for example, a volume level image SL indicating the volume level displayed as an upper row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and a brightness level displayed as a lower row on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The brightness level image LL and the brightness level image LL shown in FIG. The volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL may be arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a and used as images indicating one variable display position. In this case, the fluctuation icon 9C will be displayed (placed) on the volume level image SL indicating the volume level displayed in the upper row. Of course, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 does not cover the volume level image SL and the brightness level image LL, respectively, and the volume level image SL and the brightness level image Does not hinder visibility with LL at all.

[Modification 4]
In the performance button operation performance B in FIG. 94 and the performance button operation performance C in FIG. ) above). However, instead of the variable display position, for example, the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a may be moved to the left toward the position where the variable display position was displayed. In other words, the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR are displayed in one variable display. It may also be used as an image to indicate the position. In this case, the variable icon 9C will be displayed (placed) on the production mode selection display area SEL. Of course, when the second movable accessory 15 is stopped at the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 does not cover the production mode selection display area SEL and the selection mode section TR, respectively, and the production mode selection display area SEL and The visibility of the selection mode section TR is not obstructed at all.

[Modification 5]
In the effect button operation effect B in FIG. 94 and the effect button operation effect C in FIG. 95, a select button image SBG corresponding to the select button 68 (imitating the select button 68) was displayed. At this time, the upper and lower buttons of the select button 68 are displayed as active, the left and right buttons are displayed as inactive, indicating that the upper and lower buttons are valid buttons for pressing, and the left and right buttons are displayed as inactive. It may be arranged to indicate that the button and the right button are buttons whose pressing operations are invalid. In this way, it is possible to tell the player which of the upper, right, lower, and left buttons of the select button 68 is used to increase or decrease the brightness level. (can be made intuitive and easy to understand).

[Modification 6]
The performance button operation performance A in FIG. 93, the performance button operation performance B in FIG. 94, and the performance button operation performance C in FIG. 95 may not include some of the effects described, or other effects may be added. It's okay. Furthermore, a combined effect may be executed using the effect button operation effect A in FIG. 93 and the effect button operation effect C in FIG. 95, or the effect button operation effect B in FIG. 94 and the effect button operation effect C in FIG. 95 may be executed. A combination effect may also be performed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C1-1]
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising: performance execution means capable of executing various performances using images on the display means,
The operating means includes a first operating means and a second operating means different from the first operating means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image different from the first image,
The performance execution means is
displaying the first image based on the operation of the first operating means;
hiding the second image based on the operation of the second operation means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of performance symbols that can notify the result of the judgment of winning or losing,
The performance execution means is
The first image can be displayed regardless of whether or not variable display based on the set of performance symbols has started;
The second image can be displayed at a predetermined timing after starting the variable display based on the set of performance symbols;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2,
The performance execution means is
Displaying the result of the validity determination based on the operation of the second operation means, regardless of whether or not the first operation means has been operated, while the second image is being displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3, wherein the first image is an image representing the first operating means,
The second image is an image representing the second operating means,
The performance execution means is
In a state where the first image and the second image are displayed, even if the first operating means is operated, the first image is not hidden and remains displayed, while the second operating means is operated. hiding the second image based on the
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-3,
The first image is an image representing the first operating means,
The second image is an image representing the second operating means,
The performance execution means is
In a state where the first image is hidden and the second image is displayed, the first image is displayed based on the operation of the first operation means, while the second image is displayed when the second operation means is operated. hiding the second image based on
A gaming machine characterized by:

The battle character selection effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 96 to 98. The battle character selection performance is executed while the decorative patterns are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a battle character selection effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a and the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U).

[Battle character selection production A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining battle character selection effect A. In battle character selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern becomes slow and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, a reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparent or semi-transparent. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a message image MG "Choose an ally character for Battle Reach" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 96(E) to (I), an ally character selection effect is executed. The ally character selection performance is a performance for selecting an ally character that appears in the battle performance.

In FIGS. 96(E) to (G), a button image BG is displayed at the lower right part of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image simulating the effect button 63, and is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 (the same applies below). A message image MG saying "Select" is displayed above the button image BG.

In FIGS. 96(E) to (G), a thumbnail image S1 of the first ally character MCR1 is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. A thumbnail image S2 of the second ally character MCR2 is displayed below the thumbnail image S1. A thumbnail image S3 of the third ally character MCR3 is displayed below the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 96(E), the thumbnail image S1 of the first ally character MCR1 is surrounded by a thick frame, indicating that the first ally character MCR1 is being selected. An image of the selected first ally character MCR1 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the first ally character MCR1 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S1.

In FIG. 96(F), the thumbnail image S2 of the second ally character MCR2 is surrounded by a thick frame, indicating that the second ally character MCR2 is being selected. An image of the selected second ally character MCR2 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the second ally character MCR2 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 96(G), the thumbnail image S3 of the third ally character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame, indicating that the third ally character MCR3 is being selected. An image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the third ally character MCR3 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S3.

The selected ally character is switched each time the production button 63 is pressed. That is, each time the effect button 63 is pressed, the selection target is switched in the order of (E) → (F) → (G) → (E) → . . . in FIG. 96.

When the predetermined selection period ends, the button image BG is hidden, as shown in FIG. 96(H). Here, too, the message image MG saying "Select!" is displayed. Further, the thumbnail image S3 of the selected third ally character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame. Further, an image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 96(I), the image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the entire area of the display screen 7a. The image here is an enlarged version of the image of the third ally character MCR3 in FIG. 96(H).

Next, after a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character is performed, a final battle performance is performed on the entire display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 96(J). The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the third ally character MCR3 and the enemy character TCR are in a collision. Note that the win is confirmed when the third ally character MCR3 defeats the enemy character TCR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation performance is a performance that definitively notifies that the game has won. Here, the third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Congratulations" is displayed on the left side of the third ally character MCR3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "7" symbols, and a win is notified. If the above-mentioned winning effect is executed, there will be no loss. If the above-mentioned hit confirmation performance is not executed and the game ends in a loss, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at the "7" symbol, and the middle decorative symbol stops at the "8" symbol.

[Battle character selection production B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining battle character selection effect B. In battle character selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern becomes slow and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), a right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, a reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparent or semi-transparent. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), a message image MG "Choose an ally character for Battle Reach" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 97(E) to (I), an ally character selection effect is executed. The ally character selection performance is a performance for selecting an ally character that appears in the battle performance.

In FIGS. 97(E) to (G), a button image BG is displayed at the lower right part of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image simulating the effect button 63, and is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 (the same applies below). A message image MG saying "Select" is displayed above the button image BG.

In FIGS. 97(E) to (G), a thumbnail image S1 of the first ally character MCR1 is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. A thumbnail image S2 of the second ally character MCR2 is displayed below the thumbnail image S1. A thumbnail image S3 of the third ally character MCR3 is displayed below the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 97(E), the thumbnail image S1 of the first ally character MCR1 is displayed brightly (brightness is high), indicating that the first ally character MCR1 is being selected. The other thumbnail images S2 and S3 are displayed darkly (low brightness). An image of the selected first ally character MCR1 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the first ally character MCR1 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S1.

In FIG. 97(F), the thumbnail image S2 of the second ally character MCR2 is displayed brightly (brightness is high), indicating that the second ally character MCR2 is being selected. The other thumbnail images S1 and S3 are displayed darkly (low brightness). An image of the selected second ally character MCR2 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the second ally character MCR2 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 97(G), the thumbnail image S3 of the third ally character MCR3 is displayed brightly (brightness is high), indicating that the third ally character MCR3 is being selected. The other thumbnail images S1 and S2 are displayed darkly (low brightness). An image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the third ally character MCR3 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S3.

The selected ally character is switched each time the production button 63 is pressed. That is, each time the effect button 63 is pressed, the selection target is switched in the order of (E) → (F) → (G) → (E) → . . . in FIG. 97.

When the predetermined selection period ends, the button image BG is hidden, as shown in FIG. 97(H). Here, too, the message image MG saying "Select!" is displayed. Further, the thumbnail image S3 of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed brightly. Other thumbnail images S1 and S2 are hidden. Further, an image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 97(I), the image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The image here is an enlarged version of the image of the third ally character MCR3 in FIG. 97(H).

Next, after a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character is performed, a final battle performance is performed on the entire display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 97(J). The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the third ally character MCR3 and the enemy character TCR are in a collision. Note that the win is confirmed when the third ally character MCR3 defeats the enemy character TCR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation performance is a performance that definitively notifies that the game has won. Here, the third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Victory" is displayed on the left side of the third ally character MCR3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "7" symbols, and a win is notified. If the above-mentioned winning effect is executed, there will be no loss. If the above-mentioned hit confirmation performance is not executed and the game ends in a loss, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at the "7" symbol, and the middle decorative symbol stops at the "8" symbol.

[Battle character selection production C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the battle character selection effect C. In the battle character selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a variation start effect is executed. The variation start performance is a performance in which decorative symbols in multiple rows start to fluctuate. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left-center right are fluctuating at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, four pending icons 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left decorative pattern becomes slow and the left decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol 8L. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are fluctuating at high speed. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed transparently or semi-transparently. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the right symbol stop effect is executed. The right pattern stop performance is a performance in which the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right decorative pattern becomes slow and the right decorative pattern stops. Here, the "7" symbol is stopped as the right decorative symbol 8R. Thereby, a reach mode is formed together with the left decorative pattern 8L. The medium decorative pattern 8C is fluctuating at high speed. The medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed transparent or semi-transparent. Note that a hold icon 9A and a fluctuation icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a message image MG "Choose an ally character for Battle Reach" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 98(E) to (I), an ally character selection effect is executed. The ally character selection performance is a performance for selecting an ally character that appears in the battle performance.

In FIGS. 98(E) to (G), a button image BG is displayed at the lower right part of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which a downward arrow image is added to an image simulating the effect button 63, and is an image for promoting pressing of the effect button 63 (the same applies below). A message image MG saying "Select" is displayed above the button image BG.

In FIGS. 98(E) to (G), a thumbnail image S1 of the first ally character MCR1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. To the right of the thumbnail image S1, a thumbnail image S2 of the second ally character MCR2 is displayed. To the right of the thumbnail image S2, a thumbnail image S3 of the third ally character MCR3 is displayed. Further, above the thumbnail image S1, an image OG having the same size as the thumbnail images S1 to S3 and written with "Automatic" is displayed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed, the thick frame moves in the order of image OG→thumbnail image S1→thumbnail image S2→thumbnail image S3→image OG→... When the image OG "Automatic" is selected, thick frames with different display colors (indicated by hatching) are automatically displayed in the order of thumbnail image S1 → thumbnail image S2 → thumbnail image S3 → thumbnail image S1 →... It switches to In accordance with this, the images of the ally characters MCR1 to MCR3 displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a also change.

In FIGS. 98(E) to 98(G), the image OG is surrounded by a thick frame.
In FIG. 98(E), the thumbnail image S1 of the first ally character MCR1 is surrounded by a thick frame (indicated by hatching) in a different display color, indicating that the first ally character MCR1 is being selected. An image of the selected first ally character MCR1 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the first ally character MCR1 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S1.

In FIG. 98(F), the thumbnail image S2 of the second ally character MCR2 is surrounded by a thick frame (indicated by hatching) in a different display color, indicating that the second ally character MCR2 is being selected. An image of the selected second ally character MCR2 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the second ally character MCR2 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S2.

In FIG. 98(G), the thumbnail image S3 of the third ally character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame (indicated by hatching) in a different display color, indicating that the third ally character MCR3 is being selected. An image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the central area of the display screen 7a. The image of the third ally character MCR3 is an enlarged version of the thumbnail image S3.

Here, since image OG is selected, the selection target is automatically switched in the order of (E) → (F) → (G) → (E) →... in FIG. 98 without pressing the production button 63. It will be done.

When the predetermined selection period ends, the button image BG is hidden, as shown in FIG. 98(H). Here, too, the message image MG saying "Select!" is displayed. Further, the thumbnail image S3 of the selected third ally character MCR3 is surrounded by a thick frame. Other thumbnail images S1 and S2 are hidden. Further, an image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 98(I), the image of the selected third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the entire area of the display screen 7a. The image here is an enlarged version of the image of the third ally character MCR3 in FIG. 98(H).

Next, after a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character is performed, a final battle performance is performed on the entire display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 98(J). The final battle performance is a performance that decides the outcome of the battle. Here, the third ally character MCR3 and the enemy character TCR are in a collision. Note that the win is confirmed when the third ally character MCR3 defeats the enemy character TCR.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(K), a winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation performance is a performance that definitively notifies that the game has won. Here, the third ally character MCR3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A message image MG saying "Victory" is displayed on the left side of the third ally character MCR3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(L), a winning/losing notification effect is executed. The win/loss notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not the game is a win. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the left center right are all "7" symbols, and a win is notified. If the above-mentioned winning effect is executed, there will be no loss. If the above-mentioned hit confirmation performance is not executed and the game ends in a loss, for example, the left and right decorative symbols stop at the "7" symbol, and the middle decorative symbol stops at the "8" symbol.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of battle character selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when one of the first to third ally characters MCR1 to MCR3 is selected by pressing the production button 63, an image (first image) indicating the selected ally character is displayed. A thumbnail image (second image) representing the same object as the image representing the ally character is displayed in the central area (first area) of the display screen 7a, and a thumbnail image (second image) representing the same object as the image representing the ally character is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, which is smaller than the first area. area (second area). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that the production button 63 corresponds to the "operation means", and the first to third ally characters MCR1 to MCR3 correspond to the "selection targets". The ally character selection effects shown in (I) and FIGS. 98(E) to (I) correspond to "selection effects", and the effect control microcomputer 91 corresponds to "effect execution means".

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character selection performance, after an ally character is selected by pressing the performance button 63, the display screen is replaced with an image (first image) and a thumbnail image (second image) of the ally character. An image (third image) of an ally character is displayed in the entire area (third area) 7a (FIG. 96(I), FIG. 97(I), FIG. 98(I)). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character selection performance, after an ally character is selected by pressing the performance button 63, the ally character's image (first image) and thumbnail image (second image) are replaced with the ally character's image (first image) and thumbnail image (second image). A standby effect is executed in which the image (first image) and thumbnail image (second image) of the ally character are continued to be displayed until the image (third image) is displayed (FIG. 96(H), FIG. 97(H), FIG. 98(H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the character selection performance, an image (fourth image) showing an ally character that is not currently selected is displayed on the left or lower part (fourth area) of the display screen 7a (FIG. 96(E) ~(G), Figures 97(E)~(G), Figures 98(E)~(G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize a novel performance that has not been seen before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the battle character selection effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the embodiment described above, the character selection performance while the decorative pattern is changing has been taken as an example. On the other hand, the present invention may be applied to a character selection performance during a jackpot.

[Modification 2]
In the embodiments described above, the thumbnail images are displayed brightly (increasing the brightness) or darkly (reducing the brightness). On the other hand, a configuration may be adopted in which the selected thumbnail image is displayed in color and the thumbnail images other than the selected one are displayed in monochrome.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image of the ally character (first image) is an enlarged thumbnail image (second image). On the other hand, if the images show the same object, the first image may be a different image from the second image. Similarly, the third image may be a different image from the first image and the second image.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a performance execution means capable of executing a selection performance of selecting one from a plurality of selection targets by operating the operation means,
In the selection performance, the effect execution means displays a first image representing the selected object being selected in the first area, and displays a second image representing the same object as the object represented by the first image from the first area. is also displayed in a small second area,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
The effect executing means displays a third image in a third area in place of the first image and the second image after a selection target is selected by operating the operating means in the selection effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2,
The effect executing means is configured to execute the effect execution means, in the selection effect, during a period after a selection target is selected by operation of the operation means until the third image is displayed in place of the first image and the second image. executing a standby effect that continues displaying the first image and the second image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3,
The effect execution means displays, in the selection effect, a fourth image indicating a selection target that is not currently selected in a fourth area.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The display performance of information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired will be described below using FIGS. 99 to 101. This information display performance related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired is executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to display information related to the expected number of pitches acquired, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 and the sub display screen 64.

[Information display related to planned number of pitches acquired]
FIG. 99 is a first diagram illustrating a display performance of information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. FIG. 100 is a second diagram for explaining the display performance of information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. An example of an information display performance related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired will be described using FIGS. 99(A) to 99(L) and FIGS. 100(A) to 100(H). FIGS. 100(I) to 100(L) show other examples of information display effects related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. FIG. 101 shows yet another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired.

The information display performance related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired is a performance that displays information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired for a hit included in the hold on the display screen 7a by pre-reading. The information related to the expected number of balls to be acquired per hit included in the hold is the number of balls normally obtained by winning when the special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a hit. It means a display that expresses a number quantitatively or qualitatively. Quantitatively expressed display means, for example, if the stored special drawing reservation includes multiple wins, it will include the total number of balls acquired for each hit as well as the total number of balls acquired for each hit. It will be done. Quantitative expressions include expressions such as ``a lot'' and ``few,'' as well as expressions such as ``very lucky'' and ``fairly lucky.''

In the scheduled pitch acquisition related information display performance, first, as shown in FIG. 99(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in rapid fluctuation on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, four pending icons 9A and a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of patterns including a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and the variable display of the special pattern ( The result of the special drawing lottery is announced by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol here may be either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the gaming state is the normal state and the special figure 1 variation is being executed. During the fluctuation, a look-ahead performance suggesting the number of pitches to be acquired is performed with a predetermined probability.

When the pre-read scheduled number of pitches to be acquired suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a character image "Start of pre-read expected number of pitches to be acquired suggestion effect" is displayed. Here, in order to clarify the explanation of this performance, it is assumed that in the jackpot determination table T5 of the gaming machine 1, only two types of jackpots are set for the special figure 1. Further, the description will be made on the assumption that 100 balls can be acquired per 1R during a jackpot game. The jackpots of special map 1 are the "10R jackpot" and the "5R jackpot", and the "10R jackpot" allows you to get 1000 balls, and the "5R jackpot" lets you get 500 balls.

When the pre-read expected number of acquired pitches suggestion performance is executed, a pre-read is performed to determine whether or not the special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) includes a hit. Here, the first reservation of special drawing 1, that is, the rightmost reservation icon 9A (adjacent to the left of the fluctuation icon 9C) of the display screen 7a, is "10R jackpot", and the second reservation of special drawing 1 ( The second pending icon 9A from the right side of the display screen 7a) is the "5R jackpot", and the third pending icon 9A of the special drawing 1 (the third pending icon 9A from the right side of the display screen 7a) is the "10R jackpot". , it is assumed that the fourth hold (the leftmost hold icon 9A on the display screen 7a) of the special drawing 1 is "missing". In other words, in the first pending lottery of special drawing 1, it becomes a "10R jackpot", the jackpot game is executed and 1000 balls are obtained, and then in the second pending drawing of special drawing 1, it becomes a "5R jackpot", and it is a jackpot. The game is executed and you can get 500 balls, then the third pending lottery of special drawing 1 becomes a "10R jackpot", the jackpot game is executed and you can obtain 1000 balls, and then the fourth pending lottery of special drawing 1 becomes a "10R jackpot". He was "lost" in the lottery.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(C), as a pre-reading effect suggesting the number of pitches to be acquired, a text image of "Scheduled to acquire 2,500 balls after this" and a text image of "10R jackpot," "5R jackpot," and "10R jackpot" are displayed. Is displayed. The character image "Scheduled to acquire 2,500 balls after this" is read in advance, and after this, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "10R jackpot" will be executed in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special drawing 1, and the total will be It suggests that 2500 balls (1000+500+1000) can be obtained. In addition, the character images of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are read in advance, and then in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special drawing 1, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are displayed. This indicates that the game will be executed, that is, the type of win. However, the player must be aware of whether the display of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", or "10R jackpot" is a jackpot from the 1st to 3rd pending drawing of special drawing 1 or a jackpot from the 2nd to 4th drawing. , it is not clear whether it is the 3rd or 4th jackpot or the 1st, 2nd, or 4th jackpot.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the "326" off state, the fluctuation icon 9C is digested, and the first pending icon 9A is changed by the shift movement. The icon becomes 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 99(E), the next variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the jackpot mode of "777". At this time, a character image of "10R jackpot" indicating the type of jackpot to be executed thereafter is also displayed. After the variable icon 9C is consumed, a jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 99(G), the display screen 7a displays a character image that reads "Jackpot game has started!! 1000 balls will be acquired this time" and "1500 balls will be acquired in the next jackpot game" on the display screen 7a during the opening performance. An image of the text "Scheduled to acquire a ball" is displayed. The text image "Jackpot game starts!! 1000 balls are expected to be acquired this time" indicates that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 10R jackpot game and is a game in which 1000 balls can be acquired. The text image "Scheduled to acquire 1,500 balls in the next jackpot game" indicates that it is possible to obtain 1,500 balls in the new jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) that will be started after the 10R jackpot game that will start from now on. Suggests. In other words, it is a look-ahead performance that suggests the number of pitches to be acquired during a jackpot game, and by look-ahead, "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are executed in the reserved special lottery drawings that were second and third in Figure 99 (B). It suggests that. However, the player must check whether the display "Scheduled to obtain 1,500 balls in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the 2nd and 3rd reserved drawings of special drawing 1 in Figure 99(B), or whether it is the jackpot of the 3rd or 4th drawing. It is not clear whether it is the first jackpot or the second or fourth jackpot.

When the round game of 1R to 10R is started, as shown in FIG. 99(H), the display screen 7a displays a character image saying "Currently 523 balls acquired!!" and "1500 balls acquired in the next jackpot game". An image of the text "Schedule" is displayed. The character image "Currently 523 balls acquired!!" indicates the number of balls currently acquired in the 10R jackpot game currently being executed. The character image "Scheduled to acquire 1500 balls in the next jackpot game" continues to be displayed from FIG. This suggests that it is possible to obtain 1500 balls by playing the jackpot game + 10R jackpot game. In other words, it is a look-ahead performance that suggests the number of pitches to be acquired during a jackpot game, and by look-ahead, "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are executed in the reserved special lottery drawings that were second and third in Figure 99 (B). It suggests that. However, the player must check whether the display "Scheduled to obtain 1,500 balls in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the 2nd and 3rd reserved drawings of special drawing 1 in Figure 99(B), or whether it is the jackpot of the 3rd or 4th drawing. It is not clear whether it is the first jackpot or the second or fourth jackpot.

When the round game of 1R to 10R is completed, as shown in FIG. 99 (I), the text image "Jackpot game ended, this time you got 1000 balls!!" appears on the display screen 7a during the ending performance, and "In the next jackpot game" An image of the text "Scheduled to acquire 1,500 balls" is displayed. The character image "Jackpot game ended, 1000 balls acquired this time!!" indicates the number of balls obtained in the executed 10R jackpot game. The character image "Scheduled to acquire 1,500 balls in the next jackpot game" continues to be displayed from FIG. This suggests that it is possible to obtain 1,500 balls by playing a jackpot game. In other words, it is a look-ahead performance that suggests the number of pitches to be acquired during a jackpot game, and by look-ahead, "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are executed in the reserved special lottery drawings that were second and third in Figure 99 (B). It suggests that. However, the player must check whether the display "Scheduled to obtain 1,500 balls in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the 2nd and 3rd reserved drawings of special drawing 1 in Figure 99(B), or whether it is the jackpot of the 3rd or 4th drawing. It is not clear whether it is the first jackpot or the second or fourth jackpot.

When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 99(J), due to shift movement, the second pending icon 9A in FIG. 99(B) becomes a variable icon 9C, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change. Begins.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in a jackpot mode of "666". At this time, a character image of "5R jackpot" indicating the type of jackpot to be executed thereafter is also displayed. After the variable icon 9C is consumed, a jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 99(L), the display screen 7a displays a character image that reads "Jackpot game has started!! 500 balls will be acquired this time" and "1000 balls will be acquired in the next jackpot game and thereafter" on the display screen 7a during the opening performance. An image of the text "Scheduled to acquire a ball" is displayed. The character image "Jackpot game starts!! 500 balls are expected to be acquired this time" indicates that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 5R jackpot game, and is a game in which 500 balls can be acquired. The text image "Scheduled to obtain 1000 balls in the next jackpot game" suggests that it is possible to obtain 1000 balls in the new jackpot game (10R jackpot game) that will be started after the 5R jackpot game that will start from now on. There is. In other words, it is an effect that suggests the number of pitches to be acquired during a jackpot game, and the prereading suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the pending special drawing lottery that was the third in Figure 99 (B). . However, the player must be aware of whether the display "Scheduled to get 1000 balls in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the third pending lottery of special drawing 1 in Figure 99(B) or the jackpot of the fourth lottery. I don't know clearly.

When a round game of 1R to 5R is started, as shown in FIG. 100(A), the display screen 7a displays a character image that reads "Currently 132 balls acquired!!" and "1000 balls acquired in the next jackpot game". An image of the text "Schedule" is displayed. The character image "Currently 132 balls acquired!!" indicates the number of balls currently acquired in the 5R jackpot game currently being executed. The character image "Scheduled to acquire 1000 balls in the next jackpot game" continues to be displayed from FIG. This suggests that it is possible to obtain 1000 balls by playing a jackpot game. In other words, it is an effect that suggests the number of pitches to be acquired during a jackpot game, and the prereading suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the pending special drawing lottery that was the third in Figure 99 (B). . However, the player must be aware of whether the display "Scheduled to get 1000 balls in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the third pending lottery of special drawing 1 in Figure 99(B) or the jackpot of the fourth lottery. I don't know clearly.

When the round game of 1R to 5R is completed, as shown in FIG. 100(B), the text image "Jackpot game ended, this time you got 500 balls!!" appears on the display screen 7a during the ending performance, and "In the next jackpot game" An image of the text "Scheduled to acquire 1,000 balls" is displayed. The character image "Jackpot game ended, 500 balls acquired this time!!" indicates the number of balls obtained in the executed 5R jackpot game. The text image "Scheduled to acquire 1000 balls in the next jackpot game" continues to be displayed from FIG. ) suggests that it is possible to get 1000 balls. In other words, it is an effect that suggests the number of pitches to be acquired during a jackpot game, and the prereading suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the pending special drawing lottery that was the third in Figure 99 (B). . However, the player must be aware of whether the display "Scheduled to get 1000 balls in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the third pending lottery of special drawing 1 in Figure 99(B) or the jackpot of the fourth lottery. I don't know clearly.

When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 100(C), due to shift movement, the pending icon 9A, which was the third in FIG. Begins.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the jackpot mode of "777". At this time, a character image of "10R jackpot" indicating the type of jackpot to be executed thereafter is also displayed. After the variable icon 9C is consumed, a jackpot game is started.

When the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a character image "Jackpot game starts!! 1000 balls expected to be acquired this time" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening performance. The text image "Jackpot game starts!! 1000 balls are expected to be acquired this time" indicates that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 10R jackpot game and is a game in which 1000 balls can be acquired. This time, the text image "Scheduled to get XX balls in the next jackpot game" will not be displayed. This suggests that a new jackpot game will not be started after the 10R jackpot game that will be started from now on based on the suspension at the time of FIG. 99(B) by looking ahead.

When the round game of 1R to 10R is started, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a character image "Currently 689 balls acquired!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The character image "Currently 689 balls acquired!!" indicates the number of balls currently acquired in the 10R jackpot game currently being executed. The text image ``Scheduled to get 〇〇〇 balls in the next jackpot game'' is not displayed. This suggests that a new jackpot game will not be started after the 10R jackpot game that will be started from now on based on the suspension at the time of FIG. 99(B) by looking ahead.

When the round game of 1R to 10R is completed, as shown in FIG. 100(G), a character image "Jackpot game ended, 1000 balls acquired this time!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the ending effect. The character image "Jackpot game ended, 1000 balls acquired this time!!" indicates the number of balls obtained in the executed 10R jackpot game. The text image ``Scheduled to get 〇〇〇 balls in the next jackpot game'' is not displayed.

When the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 100(H), due to shift movement, the pending icon 9A, which was the fourth in FIG. Begins.

FIG. 100(I) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the scheduled number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired as shown in FIG. 99(C), the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired in advance may be performed as shown in FIG. 100(I). In FIG. 100(I), a text image of "10R jackpot...1000 balls", a text image of "5R jackpot...500 balls", and a text image of "10R jackpot...1000 balls" are displayed. be done. These character images are read in advance, and then "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special drawing 1. This suggests that he can get 500 pitches. In other words, it indicates the expected number of pitches to be acquired and the type of hit. However, the player must be aware of whether the display of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", or "10R jackpot" is a jackpot from the 1st to 3rd pending drawing of special drawing 1 or a jackpot from the 2nd to 4th drawing. , it is not clear whether it is the 3rd or 4th jackpot or the 1st, 2nd, or 4th jackpot.

FIG. 100(J) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the planned number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the look-ahead performance to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired as shown in FIG. 100(J), the performance to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired in advance may be executed. In FIG. 100 (J), a character image of "1. Lots of balls rolled out", a character image of "2. Fair balls rolled out", and a character image of "3. Lots of balls rolled out" are displayed. These character images are read in advance, and after this, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special drawing 1, and a lot of balls (1000 This suggests that a decent number of balls (500 balls) can be obtained by hitting the 5R jackpot. However, the player must be aware of whether the display of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", or "10R jackpot" is a jackpot from the 1st to 3rd pending drawing of special drawing 1 or a jackpot from the 2nd to 4th drawing. , it is not clear whether it is the 3rd or 4th jackpot or the 1st, 2nd, or 4th jackpot.

FIG. 100(K) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the scheduled number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the look-ahead performance to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired as shown in FIG. 100(K), the performance to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired in advance may be executed. In FIG. 100(K), an image of "1.★★★★★", an image of "2.★★★", and an image of "3.★★★★★" are displayed. These images are read in advance, and then "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special drawing 1, and 5 stars (1000 This suggests that a 5R jackpot will result in 3 balls (500 balls). However, the player must be aware of whether the display of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", or "10R jackpot" is a jackpot from the 1st to 3rd pending drawing of special drawing 1 or a jackpot from the 2nd to 4th drawing. , it is not clear whether it is the 3rd or 4th jackpot or the 1st, 2nd, or 4th jackpot.

FIG. 100(L) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the scheduled number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the look-ahead performance to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired as shown in FIG. 100(L), the performance to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired in advance may be executed. In FIG. 100(L), an image of "★★★★★", an image of "★★★", and an image of "★★★★★" are displayed. These images are read in advance, and then "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special drawing 1, and 5 stars (1000 This suggests that a 5R jackpot will result in 3 balls (500 balls). Moreover, in FIG. 100(L), the colors of the first, second, and third reservation icons 9A of the special figure 1 are changing. This suggests that you will win in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special drawing 1.

FIG. 101(A) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the planned number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the performance to suggest the expected number of pitches to be acquired during the jackpot game in FIG. 99(G), the performance to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired in advance as shown in FIG. 101(A) may be executed. . In FIG. 101(A), when a jackpot game starts, a text image saying "Jackpot game starts!! Earn 10R this time" and "Scheduled to get a total of 15R in next jackpot games" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening performance. A text image is displayed. The character image ``Start jackpot game!! Get 10R this time'' suggests that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 10R jackpot game, and is a game in which you can get 1000 balls. The text image "Scheduled to earn a total of 15R in the next jackpot game" means that a total of 15R (1500 balls) can be earned in a new jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) that will be started after the 10R jackpot game that will start from now on. This suggests that In other words, the pre-reading suggests that a "5R jackpot" and a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the second and third pending special lottery drawings in FIG. 99(B). However, the player should be aware of whether the display "Scheduled to earn a total of 15R in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the second and third pending drawings of special drawing 1 in Figure 99(B), or whether it is the jackpot of the 3rd and 4th drawings. It is not clear whether it is the first jackpot or the second or fourth jackpot.

FIG. 101(B) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the information display performance related to the planned number of pitches to be acquired, instead of the performance suggesting the number of pitches to be acquired in advance during the jackpot game in FIG. 99(H), the performance suggesting the number of pitches to be acquired in advance in FIG. 101(B) may be executed. . In FIG. 101(B), the display screen 7a displays a text image that reads "Currently used 3Rs, remaining 7Rs" and a text image that reads "Scheduled to earn a total of 15Rs in next jackpot games." The character image "Currently 3R completed, 7R remaining" indicates the number of rounds completed at the present moment in the 10R jackpot game currently being executed. This will give you an idea of how many pitches you currently have. The character image "Planned to earn a total of 15R in the next jackpot game" continues to be displayed from FIG. This suggests that it is possible to obtain a total of 15R (1500 balls) by the jackpot game + 10R jackpot game). In other words, the pre-reading suggests that "5R jackpot" and "10R jackpot" will be executed in the second and third pending special lottery drawings in FIG. 99(B). However, the player should be aware of whether the display "Scheduled to earn a total of 15R in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the second and third pending drawings of special drawing 1 in Figure 99(B), or whether it is the jackpot of the 3rd and 4th drawings. It is not clear whether it is the first jackpot or the second or fourth jackpot.

FIG. 101(C) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the planned number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired during the jackpot game in FIG. 99(L), the performance to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired in advance as shown in FIG. 101(C) may be executed. . In FIG. 101(C), when the jackpot game starts, the display screen 7a displays a character image that says "Jackpot game has started!! Earn 5R this time" and "Scheduled to get a total of 15R in next jackpot games" on the display screen 7a during the opening performance. A text image is displayed. The character image "Jackpot game starts!! 5R won this time" indicates that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 5R jackpot game, and is a game in which 500 balls can be won. The text image "Scheduled to earn a total of 15R in the next jackpot game" means that it is possible to earn a total of 10R (1000 balls) in a new jackpot game (10R jackpot game) that will be started after the 5R jackpot game that will start from now on. It suggests. In other words, the pre-reading suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the third pending special drawing lottery in FIG. 99(B). However, the player must be aware of whether the display of "A total of 10R is expected to be earned in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the third pending lottery of special drawing 1 in Figure 99(B) or the jackpot of the fourth lottery. I don't know clearly.

FIG. 101(D) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the information display performance related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired, instead of the performance suggesting the number of pitches to be acquired in advance during the jackpot game in FIG. 100(A), the performance suggesting the number of pitches to be acquired in advance in FIG. 101(D) may be executed. . In FIG. 101(D), the display screen 7a displays a text image that reads "Currently used 2R, remaining 3R" and a text image that reads "Scheduled to earn a total of 10R in next jackpot games." The character image "Currently 2R completed, 3R remaining" indicates the number of rounds completed at the present time in the 5R jackpot game currently being executed. This will give you an idea of how many pitches you currently have. The character image "Planned to earn a total of 10R in the next jackpot game" continues to be displayed from FIG. This suggests that it is possible to obtain a total of 10R (1000 balls) by playing a jackpot game. In other words, the pre-reading suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the third pending special drawing lottery in FIG. 99(B). However, the player must be aware of whether the display of "A total of 10R is expected to be earned in the next jackpot game" is the jackpot of the third pending lottery of special drawing 1 in Figure 99(B) or the jackpot of the fourth lottery. I don't know clearly.

FIG. 101(E) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the planned number of acquired pitches related information display effect, the effect shown in FIG. 101(E) may be executed instead of the effect shown in FIG. 100(E). In FIG. 101(E), when the jackpot game is started, a character image "Jackpot game starts!! Get 10R this time" is displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening performance. The character image ``Start jackpot game!! Get 10R this time'' suggests that the jackpot game that is about to start is a 10R jackpot game, and is a game in which you can get 1000 balls. This time, the text image "Scheduled to get XX balls in the next jackpot game" will not be displayed. This suggests that a new jackpot game will not be started after the 10R jackpot game that will be started from now on based on the suspension at the time of FIG. 99(B) by looking ahead.

FIG. 101(F) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the planned number of acquired pitches related information display effect, the effect shown in FIG. 101(F) may be executed instead of the effect shown in FIG. 100(F). In FIG. 101(F), the display screen 7a displays a character image "Currently used 7R, remaining 3R". The character image "Currently 7R played, 3R remaining" indicates the number of rounds played at the present time in the 10R jackpot game currently being executed. This will give you an idea of how many pitches you currently have. The text image ``Scheduled to get 〇〇〇 balls in the next jackpot game'' is not displayed. This suggests that a new jackpot game will not be started after the 10R jackpot game that will be started from now on based on the suspension at the time of FIG. 99(B) by looking ahead.

FIG. 101(G) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the information display performance related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired, instead of the performance suggesting the number of pitches to be acquired in advance during the jackpot game in FIG. 99(G), the performance suggesting the number of pitches to be acquired in advance as shown in FIG. . In FIG. 101 (G), when the jackpot game starts, the image "This time★★★★★★★★★★" and "Next time★★★★★★★★★" are displayed on the display screen 7a during the opening performance. ★★★★★★' image is displayed. The image "This time ★★★★★★★★★★" (10 ★) suggests that the jackpot game that will start now is a 10R jackpot game, and that it is a game where you can get 1000 balls. There is. The "next time ★★★★★★★★★★★★★★★" image (15 ★) is the new jackpot game (5R jackpot game + 10R jackpot game) that will start after the 10R jackpot game that will start from now. This suggests that it is possible to obtain a total of 15R (1500 balls) by playing the game. In other words, the pre-reading suggests that a "5R jackpot" and a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the second and third pending special lottery drawings in FIG. 99(B).

FIG. 101(H) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the scheduled number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired as shown in FIG. 99(C), the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired may be performed in FIG. 101(H). In FIG. 101(H), the colors of the first, second, and third reservation icons 9A of the special figure 1 are changing. This suggests that the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special map 1 will be won by reading in advance. Then, "1000 balls" is displayed in a speech bubble on the first pending icon 9A, "500 balls" is displayed in a speech bubble on the second pending icon 9A, and "1000 balls" is displayed in a speech bubble on the third pending icon 9A. Displayed. As a result, "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" will be executed in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special drawing 1 by reading ahead, and 1000 balls will be acquired by 10R jackpot and 500 balls will be obtained by 5R jackpot. It suggests that it is possible. In other words, it indicates the expected number of pitches to be acquired and the type of hit.

FIG. 101(I) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the scheduled number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired as shown in FIG. 99(C), the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired may be performed as shown in FIG. 101(I). In FIG. 101(I), the colors of the first, second, and third reservation icons 9A of the special figure 1 are changing. This suggests that the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special map 1 will be won by reading in advance. In addition, character images of "10R jackpot," "5R jackpot," and "10R jackpot" are displayed. The character images of "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are read in advance, and then "10R jackpot", "5R jackpot", and "10R jackpot" are executed in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd drawings of special drawing 1. This suggests that you can get 1,000 balls by winning the 10R jackpot and 500 balls by winning the 5R jackpot. In other words, it indicates the expected number of pitches to be acquired and the type of hit.

FIG. 101(J) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the scheduled number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired as shown in FIG. 99(C), the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired in advance may be performed as shown in FIG. 101(J). In FIG. 101(J), "1000 balls" is displayed in a speech bubble on the first hold icon 9A. This suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first lottery of special drawing 1 by reading ahead, and that 1000 balls can be obtained by the 10R jackpot. On the other hand, the second and third pending icons 9A do not have speech bubbles despite being a jackpot (no jackpot is suggested). In this way, by pre-reading, information regarding the expected number of pitches to be acquired is suggested to only a portion of the special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) that will become a hit. Despite this, there may be cases where there is a hold that does not suggest information regarding the expected number of pitches to be acquired.

FIG. 101(K) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the scheduled number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired as shown in FIG. 99(C), the pre-reading to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired in advance may be performed as shown in FIG. 101(K). In FIG. 101(K), a character image of "10R jackpot" is displayed. The character image "10R jackpot" suggests that by reading ahead, a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first lottery of special drawing 1, and that 1000 balls can be obtained by the 10R jackpot. On the other hand, the second and third pending icons 9A do not indicate a jackpot even though they are a jackpot. In this way, by pre-reading, information regarding the expected number of pitches to be acquired is suggested to only a portion of the special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) that will become a hit. Despite this, there may be cases where there is a hold that does not suggest information regarding the expected number of pitches to be acquired. However, the player does not clearly know which of the first to fourth pending lottery jackpots the display of "10R jackpot" corresponds to.

FIG. 101(L) is another example of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired. In the scheduled number of pitches to be acquired related information display performance, instead of the look-ahead performance to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired as shown in FIG. 101(L), the performance to suggest the number of pitches to be acquired in advance may be executed. In FIG. 101(L), a character image of "1000 balls" is displayed. The character image "1000 balls" suggests that a "10R jackpot" will be executed in the first lottery of special drawing 1 by reading ahead, and that 1000 balls can be obtained by the 10R jackpot. On the other hand, the second and third pending icons 9A do not indicate a jackpot even though they are a jackpot. In this way, by pre-reading, information regarding the expected number of pitches to be acquired is suggested to only a portion of the special figure reservations stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5) that will become a hit. Despite this, there may be cases where there is a hold that does not suggest information regarding the expected number of pitches to be acquired. However, the player does not clearly know which of the first to fourth pending lottery jackpots the display of "1000 balls" represents. Therefore, it is not known whether the ``1000 balls'' is obtained by one ``10R jackpot'' or the total of two ``5R jackpots''.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of displaying information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99(C), during fluctuation, "2500 balls expected to be acquired after this", which is information related to the expected number of balls acquired per hit included in the hold, is read in advance. A first performance in which a character image or a character image of "10R jackpot,""5Rjackpot," and "10R jackpot" are displayed on the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 100(I) to (L) and FIGS. 101(H) to (L).
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99(G) to (I), after the first performance, during the jackpot game, information related to the expected number of winning balls included in the hold is displayed. A second effect that displays a certain message "1500 balls will be acquired in the next jackpot game" on the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 99(L), FIGS. 100(A) to (B), and FIGS. 101(A) to (D) and (G).
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 100(I) and FIGS. 101(H) to (K).

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the display performance of information related to the number of pitches to be acquired is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, an example of displaying information related to the number of pitches to be acquired will be explained using FIGS. 99(A) to (L) and FIGS. 100(A) to (H), and FIGS. ) shows an example of another effect, and FIG. 101 shows an example of still another effect. These effects may be executed in random combinations as appropriate. For example, the gaming machine 1 randomly selects the case where the effect shown in FIG. 99(C) is executed and the effect shown in FIGS. 100(H) to (L) at the timing when the effect shown in FIG. Either one may be executed. In addition, after FIG. 99(C) is executed, any one or more of the effects shown in FIGS. 100(H) to 100(L) may be further executed. For example, the gaming machine 1 randomly executes the effects shown in FIGS. 99(G) and (H) at the timing when the effects shown in FIGS. )(B) may be performed.

[Modification 2]
In the above information display performance related to the expected number of balls to be acquired, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner or in contrast. However, in the information display performance related to the expected number of balls to be acquired, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may not be displayed. Further, in the above-mentioned scheduled pitch count related information display performance, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed. However, in the planned number of acquired pitches related information display performance, at least one of the pending icon 9A and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C does not need to be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In FIG. 101 (G), during the opening performance, the display screen 7a displays an image of "This time★★★★★★★★★★" and "Next time★★★★★★★★★★★★★★★" The image was assumed to be displayed. These images may be continuously displayed during the round game. In this case, during the round game, the number of stars in "This time ★★★★★★★★★★" may disappear one by one with each round. This can indicate the current number of lands and the number of remaining rounds.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
capable of executing a first effect of displaying on the display means information related to the expected number of pitches to be acquired per hit included in the hold by pre-reading during the fluctuation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
After the first performance, during a jackpot game, a second performance can be executed that displays information related to the expected number of winning balls included in the hold on the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
In the first performance, information related to the winning type included in the hold is displayed on the display means by pre-reading.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Expectation level increasing item performances 1 to 3 will be explained below using FIGS. 102 to 104. These expectation level increasing item presentations 1 to 3 are executed in the variation presentation of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display the image.

[Expectation level increasing item performance 1]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level increasing item performance 1. In the expectation level increasing item production 1, a plurality of bomb images representing bombs are displayed when the special drawing lottery is on hold while changing on the display screen 7a. Here, two bomb images are displayed. This bomb is an item that increases expectations. One of the bombs is simulated to explode, and the displayed pending color changes to a color with high expectations. In addition, when the telop notice that appeared due to the subsequent change is being displayed, the remaining bomb is shown to explode, and the display content of the telop notice is changed to one with high expectations.

First, as shown in FIG. 102(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are in the process of changing are displayed. In addition, there are four reservations for the first special drawing. In other words, with the reservation icon 9C (the fluctuation icon corresponding to the fluctuation) and the reservation icons 9A corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th special symbol reserved, respectively, displayed. be. The reservation icon 9A4 corresponding to the fourth one of the first special figure reservations has changed to blue (hatching 1). Note that hatching will be described later.

Here, the colors in which the hold changes are ``blue,'' ``green,'' ``red,'' and ``gold,'' which represent the expectation level of winning the special drawing lottery, with ``gold'' being the highest. , "Red" is the second highest, "Green" is the third highest, and then "Blue" is the fourth highest. In the figure, it is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 102(J). Unchanged white holds are represented by no hatching, blue holds are represented by hatching 1, green holds are represented by hatching 2, red holds are represented by hatching 3, and gold holds are represented by hatching. It is represented by 4. In FIGS. 102 to 104, colors are represented by hatching shown in FIG. 102(J).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), two bomb images, which are items that increase the expectation level, are displayed. A first bomb image IT1 and a second bomb image IT2 are displayed. These bomb images IT1 and IT2 are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the expectation level increasing performance will be performed twice. It is digested from the first bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), one of the bombs, which is an item that performs an effect of increasing expectations, performs an explosion IT11. An explosion IT 11 is produced in the reservation display area to cover up the reservation icon 9C and the first special figure reservation 9A. The bomb extinguished here is the first bomb. After this bomb IT1 is extinguished, the bomb image IT2 is moved and displayed at the position of the bomb image IT1, and the bomb image IT2 becomes the bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the explosion ends and the hold icon 9A4 changes from blue (hatching 1) with an expectation level of 5 to green (hatching 2) with an expectation level of 10. As a result, the expectation level of winning the special drawing lottery is higher than when the color is blue. That is, the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 has been extinguished, and the mode of the pending icon 9A4 has changed to a mode where the expectation level of winning the special drawing lottery is higher.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(E), the green (hatched 2) reservation repeats the shift movement, and the reservation icon 9A1 (the reservation corresponding to the first special figure reservation) changes to the reservation icon 9C (the corresponding This is where the change icon corresponding to the change becomes. After the movement, only the green (hatched 2) pending icon 9C is displayed in the pending display area. Here, it is the time when the fluctuation starts, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a telop notice is given. Here, the caption YK1 "Is it reach?" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1, which is an item that performs an effect of increasing expectations, performs an explosion IT11. Explosion IT11 is performed in front of the telop YK1, covering the telop YK1. After the bomb represented by this bomb image IT1 is extinguished, the bomb image IT1 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), after the explosion ends, the caption YK1 changes from "Is it a reach?" with an expectation level of 3 to "It's extremely hot!" with an expectation level of 30. ``It's intense!'' has a higher chance of winning in the special lottery than ``Is it a reach?'' In other words, the bomb image IT1 has been digested, and the mode of the telop YK1 has changed to one in which the expectation level of winning the special drawing lottery is higher.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(I), the telop YK1 of the telop notice is erased, and the telop notice ends.

[Expectation level increasing item performance 2]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level increasing item presentation 2. The expectation level increasing item performance 2 is a performance in which one bomb, which is an expectation level increasing item, explodes and is extinguished during fluctuation on the display screen 7a, and then additional bombs are displayed during the subsequent fluctuation.

This expectation level increasing item performance 2 is similar to the performance of the expectation level increasing item performance 1 shown in FIGS. 102(A) to 102(E). Here, a description of the effects shown in FIGS. 102(A) to (D) of the expectation level increasing item effect 1 will be omitted. A description will be given starting from FIG. 103(A), which is a presentation similar to FIG. 102(E) of expectation level increasing item presentation 1.

As shown in FIG. 103(A), the green (hatched 2) hold is repeatedly shifted, and the hold icon 9A1 (the hold corresponding to the first special figure hold) changes to the hold icon 9C (the hold corresponding to the change). The corresponding fluctuation icon). After the movement, only the green (hatched 2) pending icon 9C is displayed in the pending display area.
Here, it is the time when the fluctuation starts, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate. After that, a bomb image IT2 representing a second bomb, which is an item for increasing expectations, is additionally displayed. With this, the number of bombs, which is an item that increases expectations, will go from one to two. This indicates that the expectation level increasing performance will be performed twice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a telop notice is given, and the telop YK1 displays "Is it reachable?".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the bomb, which is the first expectation-increasing item, is extinguished and explodes IT11 in front of the telop YK1, covering the telop YK1. After this bomb IT1 is extinguished, the bomb image IT2 is moved and displayed at the position of the bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), after the explosion ends, the caption YK1 changes from "Is it a reach?" with an expectation level of 3 to "It's extremely hot!" with an expectation level of 30. ``It's intense!'' has a higher chance of winning in the special lottery than ``Is it a reach?'' In other words, the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 has been extinguished, and the mode of the subtitle YK1 has changed to one in which the expectation level of winning the special drawing lottery is higher.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), the telop notice ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), the bomb, which is the expectation level increasing item, is extinguished and an explosion IT11 is performed. After this bomb is extinguished, the bomb image IT1 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), when the explosion ends and a reach effect develops, a character CRA with an expectation level of 50 is displayed. When this character CRA is displayed, if it develops into a ready-to-win presentation, it will be an advantageous situation in the subsequent ready-to-win presentation, and the expectation level of winning the special drawing lottery will increase.

[Expectation level increasing item performance 3]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level increasing item performance 3. In the expectation level increasing item production 3, a plurality of bombs that are expectation level increasing items are displayed while the display screen 7a is changing, and one of the bombs is displayed in a manner different from a normal bomb, and a mode different from this normal bomb. This is a performance in which the bomb is extinguished. The hold that changes due to the explosion of a bomb is a change due to the explosion of a bomb in a normal manner, which increases the expectation of a hit, compared to a change due to the explosion of a bomb in a manner different from a normal bomb, which increases the expectation of a hit. The degree to which it becomes higher increases.

First, as shown in FIG. 104(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are in the process of changing are displayed. In addition, there are four reservations for the first special drawing. In other words, with the reservation icon 9C (the fluctuation icon corresponding to the fluctuation) and the reservation icons 9A corresponding to the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th special symbol reserved, respectively, displayed. be. The reservation icon 9A4 corresponding to the fourth one of the first special symbols reserved is blue (hatched 1). Note that the expectation level of winning in the special drawing lottery based on the reserved color here is the same as the expectation level of winning in the special drawing lottery based on the pending color in the above-mentioned "Expectation Level Up Item Performance 1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), two bombs, which are items that increase the expectation level, are displayed. A bomb image IT1 representing the first bomb and a bomb image IT2 representing the second bomb are displayed. These bomb images IT1 and IT2 are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the expectation level increasing performance will be performed twice. It is digested from the first bomb image IT1. In the bomb image IT1, the word "danger" is displayed, and when this bomb is extinguished, the mode of the bomb's explosion will be different than when a bomb without the word "danger" is extinguished. It is highly likely that the degree to which the expectation of winning increases due to the change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), one reservation has been exhausted and three reservations of the first special symbol have been accumulated. That is, it is a state in which the reservation icon 9C (the fluctuation icon corresponding to the fluctuation) and the reservation icons 9A corresponding to the first, second, and third of the first special symbol reservation are displayed. The blue (hatching 1) reservation is the reservation icon 9A3 corresponding to the third of the first special symbol reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), an effect is performed in which the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 on which the word "danger" is displayed explodes IT11. Explosion IT11 is performed in the hold display area to cover up the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. The bomb to be extinguished here is the first bomb, and after this bomb image IT1 is extinguished, the bomb image IT2 is moved and displayed at the position of the bomb image IT1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), the explosion ends and the hold icon 9A3 changes from blue (hatching 1) with an expectation level of 5 to red (hatching 3) with an expectation level of 50. As a result, the expectation level of winning the special drawing lottery is higher than when the color is blue. Also, as shown in Figure 102 (D), when a bomb without the word "danger" was used for extinguishing, it turned green (hatching 2), but in Figure 104 (D), it turned green (hatching 2). The bomb with the characters displayed has been extinguished and changed to red (hatching 3). In other words, the bomb in which the word "danger" is displayed and the bomb in normal mode differ in the manner in which the bomb is extinguished and changes in retention, and the degree to which the expectation of winning is increased is different.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104(F), the red (hatched 3) reservation repeats the shift movement, and the reservation icon 9A1 (the reservation corresponding to the first special figure reservation) changes to the reservation icon 9C (the corresponding This is where the change icon corresponding to the change becomes. After the movement, only the red (hatched 3) pending icon 9C is displayed in the pending display area. Here, it is the time when the fluctuation starts, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R begin to fluctuate.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), the bomb represented by the bomb image IT1 performs an explosion IT11. Explosion IT11 is performed in the hold display area to cover up the hold icon 9C. After this bomb IT1 is extinguished, the bomb image IT1 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(I), the explosion ends and the hold icon 9C changes from red (hatching 3) with an expectation level of 50 to gold (hatching 4) with an expectation level of 100. As a result, the expectation level of winning the special drawing lottery is higher than when the color is red. Note that the special drawing lottery of the variation corresponding to the golden pending icon 9C has an expectation level of 100, which indicates that the winning is confirmed.

[Effect example]
Below are examples of the effects of expectation level increasing item effects 1 to 3.

[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a display screen 7a capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in "Expectation level increasing item performance 1" and "Expectation level increasing item performance 3". One of the images is a bomb image IT1, and one of the multiple types of images is a pending icon 9A4 that indicates the expectation of winning in a special lottery or a general lottery. , a hold icon 9A4 are displayed (FIG. 102(B)), and after the first presentation (FIG. 102(B)), a bomb image that is one of the bomb images IT1 and IT2 is displayed. A second effect (FIGS. 102(C) and (D)) that changes the mode of the displayed hold icon 9A4 to a mode with higher expectation of winning after IT1 is consumed, and a second effect (FIG. 102) After (C) and (D)), one of the remaining displayed bomb images IT1 is digested, and the pending icon whose appearance has changed in the second effect (FIGS. 104 (D) and (E)) 9C or the third effect that changes the aspect of the telop YK1 of the telop preview to an aspect where the expectation of winning is higher ((Fig. 104 (H), (I)), (Fig. 102 (G), (H)))) and is executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that an effect that changes the expectation of winning to a mode with a higher degree of winning will be performed, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the bomb image IT1 is displayed after the first effect (FIG. 102(B)), as shown in "Expectation level increasing item performance 1" and "Expectation level increasing item performance 2". In this state, it is possible to perform a fourth effect (FIG. 103(B)) in which a new bomb image IT2 is additionally displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that an effect that changes the expectation of winning to a mode with a higher degree of winning will be performed, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Expectation level increasing item performance 3", the second performance (FIGS. 104(D), (E)) is different from the first performance (FIG. 104(B)). is executed during different fluctuations. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that an effect that changes the expectation of winning to a mode with a higher degree of winning will be performed, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Expectation Level Up Item Performance 1", in the second performance (FIGS. 102(C) and (D)), the state of the hold icon 9A4 changes. The color of the icon 9A4 changes. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify in advance that an effect that changes the expectation of winning to a mode with a higher degree of winning will be performed, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Expectation level increasing item performance 1" and "Expectation level increasing item performance 3", in the first performance (FIG. 104(B)), the bomb image IT1 and the bomb image IT2 may be displayed in different modes, and in the second effect (FIGS. 104(D) and (E)), the mode of the hold icon 9A3 changes (from blue to blue) depending on the mode of the bomb image IT1 to be digested. The degree to which the expectation level of winning increases differs depending on the change in the mode of the pending icon 9A4 (from blue to green) of the "Expectation Level Up Item Performance 1" (red) and the change in the state of the pending icon 9A4 (from blue to green).

[Modified example]
Modifications of the expectation level increasing item presentations 1 to 3 are shown below.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, two bomb images representing bombs are displayed, and the effect of changing the game to a mode with higher expectation of winning is performed twice, but the number of bomb images does not have to be two. For example, there may be one, three or more.

[Modification 2]
In the embodiment described above, the expectation of winning is the expectation of winning in the special drawing lottery, but it may also be the expectation of winning in the regular drawing lottery.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the reservation is the reservation of the first special figure, but it may be the reservation of the second special figure.

[Modification 4]
In the embodiment described above, the effect that changes the expectation level of winning after the bomb is additionally displayed is different from the effect that would occur if no additional bomb was displayed, but it is different from the effect after the bomb is additionally displayed. If no additional display is made, the same effect may be performed.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, when a bomb is extinguished, the second bomb moves to the position of the first bomb, but the second bomb does not move to the position of the first bomb, and the second bomb moves to the position of the first bomb. You can wait for it to be digested at the second position.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the variation in which the bomb image is additionally displayed and the variation in which the bomb image is consumed are different variations, but they may be the same variation.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the bomb is displayed without any trigger, but it may be displayed when a specific decorative pattern stops.

[Modification 8]
In the above embodiment, the bomb is assumed to explode when it is displayed, but it may also be possible that the bomb disappears without exploding even if it is displayed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a suggestive image that suggests the degree of expectation of winning in a special lottery or a general lottery,
a first effect in which the plurality of predetermined images and the suggestion image are displayed;
After the first effect, one of the plurality of predetermined images is digested, and a second effect changes the mode of the displayed suggestion image to a mode with a higher expectation of winning;
After the second performance, one of the predetermined images remaining and displayed is digested, and a suggestion image whose aspect has been changed in the second performance or a suggestion image whose aspect has been changed is different from the suggestion image. A third effect that changes the aspect of the game to a manner where the expectation of winning is higher.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1,
After the first effect, a fourth effect can be performed in which a new predetermined image is additionally displayed while the predetermined image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2,
The second performance is executed during a variation different from the first performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-3,
In the second effect, changing the aspect of the suggestion image means changing the color of the suggestion image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-4,
In the first effect, the plurality of predetermined images may be displayed in mutually different manners;
In the second effect and the third effect, the extent to which the expectation of winning increases due to a change in the form of the suggestion image differs depending on the form of the predetermined image to be digested.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Numerical total effects 1 to 5 will be explained below using FIGS. 105 to 107. These numerical total effects 1 to 5 are executed in the variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display the image.

[Numerical total performance 1]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining numerical total effect 1. Numerical total performance 1 is a performance that suggests the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game that starts after the fluctuation during a fluctuation in which it is decided that a winning game will be played on the display screen 7a. Each time the button is pressed, a numerical value is displayed, and when the last button is pressed, a numerical value greater than the sum of the displayed numerical values is displayed, suggesting the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game that starts after the change.

First, as shown in FIG. 105(A), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped at "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is "7" during fluctuation. In other words, it is a win, and it is decided that a winning game will be played after the variation ends. Further, a hold icon 9A for holding the first special symbol and a hold icon 9C for the change (also referred to as the change icon) are displayed. The status is on hold 4. The status does not have to be on hold 4. A hold icon 9B may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a telop TR1 saying "How many balls can you get!" is displayed, indicating that an effect to display the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game that will be performed after the end of the variation is started. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced in size and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), an image BTN1 prompting the user to repeatedly press the effect button 63 and an image TM1 representing a time limit for repeatedly pressing the effect button 63 are displayed. The image BTN1 that urges the user to repeatedly press the production button 63 has the words "repeatedly hit" attached thereto to encourage the user to repeatedly press the effect button 63. Immediately after the image TM1 representing the time limit is displayed, the bar is displayed to the full right end, but as time passes, the number of bars decreases as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed. This numerical value "5" ST1 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63. In the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit. It should be noted that the period during which this continuous press can be performed may include a period immediately after the effect button 63 is pressed, in which even if the effect button 63 is pressed, the press is invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), the numerical value "5" ST1, the numerical value "8" ST2, the numerical value "5" ST3, the numerical value "12" ST4, and the numerical value "10" ST5 are displayed. This is a state in which the effect button 63 has been pressed five times, and the numerical values ST1 to ST5 are images displayed each time the effect button 63 is pressed. Note that these numerical values may all be different or may be all the same. Furthermore, two or more numerical images may be displayed by pressing the effect button 63 once. Furthermore, in the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the production button 63 is continued to be pressed, and the numerical value "8" ST6, the numerical value "5" ST7, and the numerical value "8" ST8 are displayed each time the button is pressed. . Further, in the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has disappeared, indicating that the time limit has expired and no numerical value will be displayed even if the production button 63 is pressed thereafter.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), since the period during which the effect button 63 can be repeatedly pressed has ended, the image BTN1 that prompts the user to repeatedly press the effect button 63 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), an image BTN2 urging the user to press the production button 63 and an image TM2 representing a time limit for pressing the button are displayed. The image BTN2 that urges the user to press the production button 63 has the words "Press!" attached thereto to urge the user to press the effect button 63. Immediately after the image TM2 representing the time limit is displayed, the bar is displayed to the full right end, but as time passes, the number of bars decreases as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(I), each time the button is pressed, the displayed numerical values ST1 to ST8 are erased, and the numerical value "800" ST100 is displayed. Note that the numerical values ST1 to ST8 may remain displayed. This numerical value "800" ST100 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63. The numerical value "800" in this image represents the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game that starts after the fluctuation ends. Note that the numerical value ST100 (800) displayed here is greater than the total value of the numerical values ST1 to ST8 (5, 8, 5, 12, 10, 8, 5, 8) displayed during the consecutive hits. In addition, if there is a win in the hold, a numerical value including the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game based on the win in the hold is displayed. Note that it is not necessary to include the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game based on a hit in the hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (J), the fluctuation is completed and the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed at "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed at "7". . This indicates that the fluctuation has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(K), the game shifts to a winning game, the telop "Jackpot!" TR2 is displayed, and the jackpot game starts.

[Numerical total performance 2]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining numerical total effects 2, 3, and 4. The effects shown in FIGS. 106(A) to (H) are numerical total effects 2, in which the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game that starts after the change is calculated during the change in which it is decided that a winning game will be played on the display screen 7a. It is a suggestive performance. Numerical values are displayed one after another, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a numerical value greater than or equal to the sum of the displayed numerical values is displayed to suggest the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game that starts after the change.

Numerical total effect 2 is currently changing, as shown in Figure 106(A), and the left decorative pattern 8L is "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is "7". It's stopped. In other words, it is a win, and it is decided that a winning game will be played after the variation ends. Further, a hold icon 9A for holding the first special symbol and a hold icon 9C for the change (also referred to as the change icon) are displayed. The status is on hold 4. The status does not have to be on hold 4. A hold icon 9B may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a telop TR1 saying "How many balls can you get!" is displayed, indicating that the effect of displaying the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game that will be performed after the end of the variation is started. Note that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are reduced in size and displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), the telop TR1 "See how many you can get!" is erased and the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), the numerical value "5" ST1, the numerical value "8" ST2, the numerical value "5" ST3, the numerical value "12" ST4, and the numerical value "10" ST5 are displayed. Images of these numbers are displayed in sequence. Note that two or more numerical values may be displayed at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the numerical value "8" ST6, the numerical value "5" ST7, and the numerical value "8" ST8 are displayed thereafter.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), each time the button is pressed, the displayed numerical values ST1 to ST8 are erased, and the numerical value "800" ST100 is displayed. Note that the numerical values ST1 to ST8 may remain displayed. The numerical value "800" in this image represents the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game that starts after the fluctuation ends. Note that the numerical value ST100 (800) displayed here is greater than or equal to the total value of the displayed numerical values ST1 to ST8 (5, 8, 5, 12, 10, 8, 5, 8). In addition, if there is a win in the hold, a numerical value including the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game based on the win in the hold is displayed. Note that it is not necessary to include the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game based on a hit in the hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), the fluctuation is completed, and the left decorative pattern 8L is fixed at "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed at "7". . This indicates that the fluctuation has ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), the game shifts to a winning game, the telop "Jackpot!" TR2 is displayed, and the jackpot game starts.

[Numerical total performance 3]
The effect shown in FIG. 106(I) is a numerical total effect 3, and as another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 106(A) to (H), two numerical values are displayed one by one, and after a predetermined time elapses, they are displayed. This is a performance that displays a value that is greater than the sum of all the values.

Numerical total effect 3 is another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(H) described above, in which two numerical values are displayed one by one, and after a predetermined period of time, the displayed numerical values are totaled. This is a performance that displays a numerical value that is greater than the numerical value. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 106(I).

In this embodiment, the effects shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(C) are the same as the above-mentioned numerical total effect 2, and after FIG. 106(C), the effect becomes FIG. 106(I). Description of FIGS. 106(A) to 106(C) will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 106(I), the numerical value "5" ST1 and the numerical value "8" ST2 are displayed. Two numbers are displayed. Images of these numbers are displayed in order.

After that, the displayed numerical value "5" ST1 and the numerical value "8" ST2 are erased, and the numerical value "800" ST100 is displayed. Since this is common to , the explanation will be omitted.

[Numerical total performance 4]
The effects shown in FIGS. 106(J) to (L) are numerical total effects 4, and as another example of the above-mentioned “numeric total effects 1”, two numerical values are displayed, one each, each time the button is pressed. This is an effect that displays a value greater than the sum of the displayed values when the last button is pressed.

Numerical total effect 4 is another example of the ``numeric total effect 1'' mentioned above, in which two numerical values are displayed, one each, each time a button is pressed, and when the button is pressed after that, they are displayed. This is a performance that displays a number that is greater than the sum of the numbers. This will be explained with reference to FIGS. 106(J) to (L).

In this embodiment, the effects shown in FIGS. 105(A) and 105(B) are common to the above-mentioned "Numerical total effect 1", and after FIG. 105(B), the effect becomes FIG. 106(J). Description of FIGS. 105(A) and 105(B) will be omitted.

After FIG. 105(B), as shown in FIG. 106(J), an image BTN1 prompting the user to repeatedly press the effect button 63 and an image TM1 representing a time limit for repeatedly pressing the effect button 63 are displayed. The image BTN1 that urges the user to repeatedly press the production button 63 has the words "repeatedly hit" attached thereto to encourage the user to repeatedly press the effect button 63. Immediately after the image TM1 representing the time limit is displayed, the bar is displayed to the full right end, but as time passes, the number of bars decreases as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(K), the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed. This numerical value "5" ST1 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63. In the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(L), a numerical value "5" ST1 and a numerical value "8" ST2 are displayed. This numerical value "8" ST2 is an image displayed by further pressing the effect button 63 after the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed. In the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has disappeared, indicating that the time limit has expired.

After that, an image BTN2 urging the user to press the effect button 63 and an image TM2 representing a time limit for pressing the button are displayed. The image BTN2 that urges the user to press the production button 63 has the words "Press!" attached thereto to urge the user to press the effect button 63. Immediately after the image TM2 representing the time limit is displayed, the bar is displayed to the full right end, but as time passes, the number of bars decreases as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(I), each time the button is pressed, the displayed numerical values ST1 and ST2 are erased, and the numerical value "800" ST100 is displayed. Note that the numerical values ST1 and ST2 may remain displayed. This numerical value "800" ST100 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63. The numerical value "800" in this image represents the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game that starts after the fluctuation ends. Note that the numerical value ST100 (800) displayed here is greater than or equal to the sum of the numerical values ST1 and ST2 (5, 8) displayed during consecutive hits. In addition, if there is a win in the hold, a numerical value including the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game based on the win in the hold is displayed. Note that it is not necessary to include the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game based on a hit in the hold.

The subsequent steps are the same as those in FIGS. 105 (J) and (H) of the above-mentioned "Numerical total effect 1", so the explanation will be omitted.

[Numerical total effect 5]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining numerical total effect 5. Numerical total performance 5 is a performance that suggests before the end of the winning game the number of fluctuations in the time saving state that starts after the end of the winning game. Each time the button is pressed, a numerical value is displayed, and when the last button is pressed, the total of the displayed numerical values is displayed, indicating the number of changes in the time saving state that will start after the winning ends.

First, as shown in FIG. 107(A), the end interval of the winning game is in progress, and the telop "Jackpot End" TR3 is displayed, indicating that the winning game is ending.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B), the telop TR4 "Get Time Savings!" is displayed, indicating the start of an effect displaying the number of changes in the time saving state that will be performed after the winning game ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), an image BTN1 prompting the user to repeatedly press the effect button 63 and an image TM1 representing a time limit for repeatedly pressing the effect button 63 are displayed. The image BTN1 that urges the user to repeatedly press the production button 63 has the words "repeatedly hit" attached thereto to encourage the user to repeatedly press the effect button 63. Immediately after the image TM1 representing the time limit is displayed, the bar is displayed to the full right end, but as time passes, the number of bars decreases as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(D), the numerical value "1" ST1 is displayed. This numerical value "1" ST1 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63. In the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit. It should be noted that the period during which this continuous press can be performed may include a period immediately after the effect button 63 is pressed, in which even if the effect button 63 is pressed, the press is invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), the numerical value "1" ST1, the numerical value "1" ST2, the numerical value "2" ST3, the numerical value "1" ST4, and the numerical value "3" ST5 are displayed. This is a state in which the effect button 63 has been pressed five times, and the numerical values ST1 to ST5 are images displayed each time the effect button 63 is pressed. Note that these numerical values may all be different or may be all the same. Furthermore, two or more numerical images may be displayed by pressing the effect button 63 once. Furthermore, in the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has not disappeared, indicating that there is still a time limit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), the production button 63 is continued to be pressed, and the numerical value "5" ST6, the numerical value "1" ST7, and the numerical value "2" ST8 are displayed each time the button is pressed. . Further, in the image TM1 representing the time limit for repeated hits, the bar has disappeared, indicating that the time limit has expired and no numerical value will be displayed even if the production button 63 is pressed thereafter.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), since the period during which the effect button 63 can be repeatedly pressed has ended, the image BTN1 that prompts the user to repeatedly press the effect button 63 disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), an image BTN2 urging the user to press the production button 63 and an image TM2 representing a time limit for pressing the button are displayed. The image BTN2 that urges the user to press the production button 63 has the words "Press!" attached thereto to urge the user to press the effect button 63. Immediately after the image TM2 representing the time limit is displayed, the bar is displayed to the full right end, but as time passes, the number of bars decreases as the time limit decreases.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(I), each time the button is pressed, the displayed numerical values ST1 to ST8 are erased, and the numerical value "50" ST200 is displayed. Note that the numerical values ST1 to ST8 may remain displayed. This numerical value "50" ST200 is an image displayed by pressing the effect button 63. The numerical value "50" in this image represents the number of changes in the time saving state that starts after the winning ends. Note that the numerical value ST200 (50) displayed here is greater than the total value of the numerical values ST1 to ST8 (1, 1, 2, 1, 3, 5, 1, 2) displayed during the consecutive hits.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(J),
The telop TR5 "50 Time Savings" is displayed, indicating that the number of times the time saving state changes after the winning game ends is 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(K), the winning game shifts to the time saving state, and fluctuations begin in the time saving state. This time saving state is continued 50 times. Note that this may be continued 50 times or more.

[Effect example]
Examples of the effects of numerical total effects 1 to 5 are shown below.

[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a display screen 7a capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in "Numerical total effect 1", and one of the plurality of types of images is a numerical value "5" ST1. One of the multiple types of images is the numerical value "8" ST2, one of the multiple types of images is the numerical value "800" ST100, and the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed. After the first effect (Fig. 105 (D)) and the first effect (Fig. 105 (D)), the numerical value "5" ST1 is displayed, and the numerical value "8" ST2 is additionally displayed. The second effect (Fig. 105 (E)) and the third effect (Fig. 105 (I)) in which the numerical value "800" ST100 is displayed after the second effect (Fig. 105 (E)). It is executable, and the numerical value of the numerical value "800" ST100 is a numerical value greater than or equal to the sum of the numerical value of the numerical value "5" ST1 and the numerical value of the numerical value "8" ST2. According to this configuration, the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game can be notified in advance, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is further provided with a performance button 63 that can be operated by the player, as shown in "Numerical total performance 1", and one of the plural types of images is an appearance of the performance button 63. One of the multiple types of images is an image BTN2 that represents the appearance of the effect button 63 and urges to press it repeatedly, and one of the images is an image BTN2 that represents the appearance of the effect button 63 and urges to press it repeatedly. ) and the second effect (FIG. 105(E)) are performed when the effect button 63 is operated with the image BTN1 prompting the user to press the effect button 63 repeatedly, and the third effect ( FIG. 105(I)) is performed when the effect button 63 is operated while the image BTN2 prompting the user to press the effect button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game can be notified in advance, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Numerical total performance 1", the numerical value "8" ST2 is different from the numerical value "5" ST1. According to this configuration, the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game can be notified in advance, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Numerical total performance 1", the numerical value "800" ST100 is the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game when the special drawing lottery of the fluctuation is a winning. 105 (I)). According to this configuration, the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game can be notified in advance, and the interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of numerical total effects 1 to 5 are shown.

[Modification 1]
In the embodiment described above, the image BTN1 that prompts to press the effect button 63 repeatedly and the image BTN2 that urges to press the effect button 63 are different images, but they may be the same image.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, when the effect button 63 is pressed while the image BTN1 prompting the user to press the effect button 63 repeatedly, a numerical image is displayed each time the effect button 63 is pressed, but there may be cases where the numerical image is not displayed. There may be.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the numerical value "800" of the image representing the number of game balls that can be obtained in the winning game that starts after the end of the fluctuation is displayed, even if a numerical image representing a numerical value greater than or equal to the displayed numerical value is displayed once. good.

[Modification 4]
In the above-mentioned embodiment, "numerical total performances 1 to 4" are performed during fluctuations before the winning game, but they may also be performed during the winning game.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the "numerical total performance 5" is performed during the winning game before the time saving state, but it may be performed during the fluctuation after shifting to the time saving state after the winning game.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first numerical image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second numerical image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third numerical image,
a first effect in which the first numerical image is displayed;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the second numerical image is additionally displayed while the first numerical image is displayed;
After the second performance, a third performance in which the third numerical image is displayed can be performed,
The numerical value of the third numerical image is a numerical value that is greater than or equal to the sum of the numerical value of the first numerical image and the numerical value of the second numerical image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 further includes:
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operating means image representing an appearance of the operating means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operating means image representing an appearance of the operating means,
The first effect and the second effect are performed when the operating means is operated while the first operating means image is displayed,
The third effect is performed when the operating means is operated while the second operating means image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2,
The numerical value of the second numerical image is different from the numerical value of the first numerical image,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-3,
The numerical value of the third numerical image is the number of game balls that can be obtained in a winning game when the special drawing drawing of the fluctuation is a win, and the winning game when the reserved special drawing drawing is a winning one. A numerical value representing the total number of game balls that can be obtained in
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending lookahead effects 1 to 3 will be explained below using FIGS. 108 to 110. These pending look-ahead performances 1 to 3 are executed during the winning game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display the image.

[Pending look-ahead performance 1]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the pending look-ahead effect 1. In the pending look-ahead effect 1, when a jackpot game is being performed on the display screen 7a, the game ball is placed in a big winning hole (one or both of the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35, FIG. 108 ~Similarly in Figure 110) Each time a ball is entered, an image representing that the ball has been entered is displayed on the display screen 7a, the image indicates the expectation of winning the special drawing lottery, and then the image disappears. It is. In addition, an image different from the image representing that a ball has entered the ball is displayed in the same color as the image representing that the ball has entered, and this image also suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the special drawing lottery. In addition, when there are two big winning holes, both big winning holes may be used, or either big winning hole may be used (the same applies in FIGS. 108 to 110).

During this jackpot game, the character CRA and the character CRB compete against each other, and depending on whether the character CRA wins or loses, the pending special drawing lottery is announced during the jackpot. If the character CRA wins, it is determined that there is a hit in the reserved special drawing lottery, and if the character CRA loses, it is not determined that the reserved special symbol lottery has a win. In this embodiment, in the first round, a performance is performed in which the character CRA and the character CRB face each other, and in the second round, a performance is performed in which the result of the confrontation between the character CRA and the character CRB is displayed. Note that the number of rounds in which these effects are performed may be different.

First, as shown in FIG. 108(A), the "Jackpot!" telop TR1 is displayed at the jackpot start interval to notify that the jackpot game will begin. A hold icon 9A is displayed. Note that the hold icon 9B may be displayed, or all the hold icons may not be displayed (the same applies in FIGS. 108 to 110).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B), a round number display TRR of "1R" representing the number of rounds is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and one round begins. In other words, the big prize opening will be opened. With the opening of the grand prize opening, a game ball can enter the grand prize opening. Furthermore, in the center of the display screen 7a, a character CRA and a character CRB are displayed and are facing each other. The tip of the character CRA's sword has an effect KSG indicating the strength of the sword. At this point, the effect KSG on the tip of the character CRA's sword is white (no hatching). Note that the color of this effect KSG suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Details will be described later.

In the effect KSG on the tip of the character CRA's sword, red is the strongest, green is the second strongest, blue is the third strongest, and white is the fourth strongest (weakest). As shown in FIG. 108(L), white is represented by no hatching, blue by hatching 1, green by hatching 2, and red by hatching 3. Furthermore, the expectation level (also referred to as confidence level) of a jackpot is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. The same applies to FIGS. 108 to 110.

Next, in FIG. 108(C), a game ball has entered the grand prize opening. As the ball enters, an image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed. This image NGZ is displayed at a position close to the big prize opening on the display screen 7a. This image NGZ is displayed in blue (hatching 1). Note that the position does not have to be close to the big prize opening. At this point, the effect KSG on the tip of the character CRA's sword is white (no hatching). Note that the color of the image NGZ indicating that the ball has landed suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Details will be described later.

In the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball, the red color is the strongest, the green color the second strongest, the blue color the third strongest, and the white color the fourth strongest (weakest). As shown in FIG. 108(L), white is represented by no hatching, blue by hatching 1, green by hatching 2, and red by hatching 3. Furthermore, the expectation level (also referred to as confidence level) of a jackpot is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. The same applies to FIGS. 108 to 110.

Next, in FIG. 108(D), an image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. That is, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1). It may be gradually expanded and displayed in the entire area, or it may be displayed in the entire area in an instant.

Next, in FIG. 108(E), the blue (hatching 1) image NGZ displayed on the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the blue (hatching 1) becomes lighter. The effect KSG on the tip of the character CRA's sword has already changed from white (no hatching) to blue (hatching 1). In this embodiment, when the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed on the entire display screen 7a, the color of the effect KSG of the tip of the character CRA's sword changes to the same color as the image NGZ. However, when the image NGZ indicating that the ball has entered the ball is displayed, the color of the effect KSG on the tip of the character CRA's sword may change to the same color as the image NGZ.

Next, in FIG. 108(F), the fade-out of the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball has been completed. The color of the effect KSG at the tip of the character CRA's sword remains blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 108(G), a game ball has newly entered the grand prize opening. As the ball enters, a new image NGZ representing that the ball has entered is displayed. This image NGZ is displayed in green (hatching 2). At this point, the effect KSG on the tip of the character CRA's sword is blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 108(H), an image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed on the entire display screen 7a. That is, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in green (hatching 2).

Next, in FIG. 108(I), the green (hatching 2) image NGZ displayed on the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the green (hatching 2) becomes lighter. The effect KSG at the tip of the character CRA's sword has already changed from blue (hatching 1) to green (hatching 2).

Next, in FIG. 108(J), the fade-out of the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball has been completed. The color of the effect KSG at the tip of the character CRA's sword remains green (hatching 2).

Even after this, each time a new game ball enters the grand prize opening, an image NGZ representing that the ball has entered is displayed, and the image NGZ disappears by fading out. The image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball may be displayed in a different color (for example, red). Furthermore, as the image NGZ representing the ball entering the ball is displayed in a different color, the effect KSG on the tip of the character CRA's sword may be displayed in a different color.
After repeating this, one round ends.

Next, in FIG. 108(K), the process moves to the second round. At the upper right of the display screen 7a, a round number display TRR of "2R" representing the number of rounds is displayed, indicating that the second round has started. After the performance of a confrontation between the character CRA and the character CRB is performed, the telop TR2 of "Victory" is displayed, indicating that the character CRA has won. As a result, it is confirmed that there will be a hit in the reserved special drawing lottery.

[Pending look-ahead performance 2]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the pending look-ahead effect 2. The pending pre-reading performance 2 displays an image representing that the ball has entered the jackpot on the display screen 7a every time a game ball enters the jackpot while performing a jackpot game on the display screen 7a. This is an effect when a new game ball enters the grand prize opening while an image indicating that the ball has entered the ball is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 109(A), a round number display TRR of "1R" representing the number of rounds is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and one round begins. In other words, the big prize opening will be opened. With the opening of the grand prize opening, a game ball can enter the grand prize opening. Furthermore, in the center of the display screen 7a, a character CRA and a character CRB are displayed and are facing each other. The tip of the character CRA's sword has an effect KSG indicating the strength of the sword. At this point, the effect KSG on the tip of the character CRA's sword is white (no hatching).

Next, in FIG. 109(B), a game ball has entered the grand prize opening. As the ball enters, an image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed. This image NGZ is displayed at a position close to the big prize opening on the display screen 7a. This image NGZ is displayed in blue (hatching 1). At this point, the effect KSG on the tip of the character CRA's sword is white (no hatching).

Next, in FIG. 109(C), an image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed spread over the entire display screen 7a. In other words, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1). Note that the entire image may be displayed in an instant.

Next, in FIG. 109(D), an image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed spread over the entire display screen 7a. That is, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 109E, the blue (hatching 1) image NGZ displayed on the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the blue (hatching 1) becomes lighter. The effect KSG on the tip of the character CRA's sword has already changed from white (no hatching) to blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 109(F), while the blue (hatching 1) image NGZ displayed on the entire display screen 7a is fading out, a game ball newly enters the big prize opening. be. As the ball enters, an image NGZA representing that the ball has entered is newly displayed. In other words, a new image NGZA is newly displayed overlapping the faded-out image NGZ. This image NGZA is displayed in blue (hatching 1). In this embodiment, image NGZ and image NGZA have the same color, but may have different colors.

Next, in FIG. 109(G), the blue (hatching 1) image NGZ displayed on the entire display screen 7a is fading out, but the image NGZA representing a newly entered ball is displayed. The image is displayed spread over the entire screen 7a. In other words, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1). Note that the entire image may be displayed in an instant.

Next, in FIG. 109(H), the image NGZ has completed fading out, and the image NGZA representing the newly entered ball is displayed spread over the entire display screen 7a. That is, the entire display screen 7a is displayed in blue (hatching 1).

Next, in FIG. 109(I), the blue (hatching 1) image NGZA displayed on the entire display screen 7a fades out, and the blue (hatching 1) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 109(J), the fade-out of the image NGZA representing that the ball has entered the ball has been completed. Note that the color of the effect KSG at the tip of the character CRA's sword is blue (hatching 1).

[Pending look-ahead performance 3]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the pending look-ahead effect 3. The pending look-ahead performance 3 displays an image representing that the ball has entered the jackpot on the display screen 7a every time a game ball enters the jackpot while performing a jackpot game on the display screen 7a, The image indicates the expectation of winning the special drawing lottery, and then the image disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a round number display TRR of "1R" representing the number of rounds is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and one round begins. In other words, the big prize opening will be opened. With the opening of the grand prize opening, a game ball can enter the grand prize opening.

Next, in FIG. 110(B), a game ball has entered the grand prize opening. As the ball enters, an image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed. This image NGZ is displayed at a position close to the big prize opening on the display screen 7a. This image NGZ is displayed in blue (hatching 1). Note that the position does not have to be close to the big prize opening.

Next, in FIG. 110C, the image NGZ, which is displayed in blue (hatching 1) and indicating that the ball has entered the ball, fades out, and the blue (hatching 1) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 110(D), the fade-out of the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball has been completed.

Next, in FIG. 110(E), a game ball has newly entered the grand prize opening. As the ball enters, a new image NGZ representing that the ball has entered is displayed. This image NGZ is displayed in green (hatching 2).

Next, in FIG. 110(F), the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered, which is displayed in green (hatching 2), fades out, and the green (hatching 2) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 110(G), the fade-out of the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball has been completed.

Next, in FIG. 110(H), a game ball has newly entered the grand prize opening. As the ball enters, a new image NGZ representing that the ball has entered is displayed. This image NGZ is displayed in green (hatching 2).

Next, in FIG. 110(I), the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered, which is displayed in green (hatching 2), fades out, and the green (hatching 2) becomes lighter.

Next, in FIG. 110 (J), while the image NGZ, which is displayed in green (hatching 2) and represents that the ball has entered, is fading out, a game ball has newly entered the big prize opening. It is. As the ball enters, an image NGZA representing that the ball has entered is newly displayed. In other words, a new image NGZA is newly displayed overlapping the faded-out image NGZ. This image NGZA is displayed in red (hatching 3). In this embodiment, image NGZ and image NGZA are different colors, but may be the same color.

Next, in FIG. 110(K), the green (hatching 2) image NGZ has completed fading out, the red (hatching 3) image NGZA representing the ball entering has faded out, and the red (hatching 3) image NGZ has faded out. 3) becomes thinner.

Next, in FIG. 110(L), the fade-out of the image NGZA representing that the ball has entered the ball has been completed.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of pending look-ahead effects 1 to 3 are shown.

[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Pending look-ahead effect 1", there is a big prize opening into which a game ball can enter during a winning game, and a display screen 7a which can display a plurality of types of images. In preparation, one of the multiple types of images is the image NGZ that represents that the ball has entered the ball, and during the winning game, the image NGZ is displayed every time the game ball enters the big winning hole, and then the image NGZ is displayed. The first effect (FIGS. 108(C) to (E), (G) to (I)) in which the image NGZ disappears can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to create an effect as if a lottery is being drawn each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a winning game, and based on the result, it is possible to read ahead of the reservation, which increases the interest. You can improve your performance.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered is displayed in the first effect (FIGS. 109(B) to (H)), as shown in "Holding look-ahead effect 2," The image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball begins to fade out, and when a new game ball enters the grand prize opening, it fades out.A new image that overlaps the image NGZ that represents the ball entering the ball and shows that a new ball has entered the game ball. The second effect (FIGS. 109(F) to (H)) in which NGZA is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to create an effect as if a lottery is being drawn each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a winning game, and based on the result, it is possible to read ahead of the reservation, which increases the interest. You can improve your performance.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Pending look-ahead effect 1", a specific game is in progress during a jackpot game, and the image NGZ representing that a ball has been entered is a special feature that is pending by color. The figure indicates the expectation level of winning in the lottery (Figure 108(L)). According to this configuration, it is possible to create an effect as if a lottery is being drawn each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a winning game, and based on the result, it is possible to read ahead of the reservation, which increases the interest. You can improve your performance.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Pending look-ahead effect 1", one of the plurality of types of images is a character CRA whose color indicates the expected degree of winning in the reserved special drawing lottery. The effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA is displayed during the jackpot game, and the effect KSG of the tip of the sword of the character CRA is displayed during the jackpot game, and the first effect (FIGS. 108 (C) to (E), (G) to (I) ), when the image NGZ representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed, a third effect (Fig. 108 (C ) ~ (E), (G) ~ (I)), and the image NGZ representing the ball entering in the first effect (Fig. 108 (C) ~ (E), (G) ~ (I)) disappears. At this time, it is possible to execute the fourth effect (FIGS. 108(F) and (J)) in which the effect KSG of the tip of the character CRA's sword does not disappear and remains displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to create an effect as if a lottery is being drawn each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a winning game, and based on the result, it is possible to read ahead of the reservation, which increases the interest. You can improve your performance.

[Modified example]
Modifications of the pending look-ahead effects 1 to 3 are shown below.

[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the reservations that indicate the expectation level of winning in the special drawing lottery by color are targeted at all reservations, but may be targeted at specific reservations. For example, the first reservation to be used after a jackpot game may be targeted.

[Modification 2]
In the embodiment described above, the performance to notify that there is a hit in the reserved special drawing lottery is performed during the round, but it may be performed at the jackpot end interval.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect G2-1]
a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter during a specific game;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
During the specific game, each time a game ball enters the ball entry hole, the predetermined image is displayed, and then the displayed predetermined image disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect G2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1,
After the predetermined image is displayed in the first effect, the predetermined image starts to fade out, and when a new game ball enters the ball entry hole, a new predetermined image is displayed overlapping the faded out predetermined image. A second effect in which the image is displayed can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect G2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1 or aspect G2-2,
The specific game is during a winning game,
The predetermined image indicates the expected degree of winning in the reserved special drawing lottery based on the color.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect G2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a suggestion image that uses color to suggest the degree of expectation of winning in the reserved special drawing lottery;
The suggestion image is displayed during the winning game,
a third effect in which, when the predetermined image is displayed in the first effect, the suggested image is displayed in the same color as the displayed predetermined image;
a fourth effect in which when the predetermined image disappears in the first effect, the suggestion image remains displayed without disappearing;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The wiring visibility suppression effect of the gaming machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right part of the center decorative part 10, FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram of the first movable accessory 14, and FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram of the fixed winning device 19. .

Note that FIG. 111(A) is a front upper left perspective view of the decorative portion 10a placed at the lower right of the center decorative portion 10 when viewed from the front upper left, and FIG. 111(B) is a front left perspective view of the decorative portion 10a placed at the lower right of the center decorative portion 10. FIG. 111(C) is a front upper right perspective view of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10, seen from the rear upper left. , FIG. 111(D) is a rear upper right perspective view of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right part of the center decorative part 10, viewed from the rear upper right, and FIG. FIG. 111(F) is a front view of the decorative board mounted inside the decorative part 10a located at the lower right part of the center decorative part 10, seen from the front. .

Moreover, FIG. 112(A) is a front upper left perspective view of the first movable accessory 14 seen from the front upper left, and FIG. 112(B) is a rear upper left perspective view of the first movable accessory 14 seen from the rear upper left. 112(C) is a partially enlarged view of a part of the light emitting part of the first movable accessory 14, and FIG. 112(D) is a partially enlarged view of a part of the light emitting part of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 7 is an enlarged view of the wiring connection section with the cover body removed.

113(A) is a front upper left perspective view of the fixed winning device 19 seen from the front upper left, and FIG. 113(B) is a front upper right perspective view of the fixed winning device 19 seen from the front upper right. (C) is a rear upper left perspective view of the fixed winning device 19 viewed from the rear upper left, FIG. 113(D) is a rear upper right perspective view of the fixed winning device 19 viewed from the rear upper right, and FIG. 113(E) is a rear upper right perspective view of the fixed winning device 19 viewed from the rear upper left. 113(F) is a front view of the fixed winning device 19 seen from the front, and FIG. 113(F) is a front view of the decorative board attached to the rear of the fixed winning device 19.

Here, first, the structure of the decoration part 10a arranged at the lower right part of the center decoration part 10 will be explained, and then the structure of the first movable accessory 14 and the structure of the fixed winning device 19 will be explained in order. Next, as a wiring visibility suppression effect of the gaming machine, a wiring visibility suppression effect of the decoration part 10a arranged at the lower right part of the center decoration part 10 will be explained, and then, a wiring visibility suppression effect of the first movable accessory 14 will be explained. The suppression performance and the wiring visibility suppression performance of the fixed prize winning device 19 will be explained in order.

[Structure of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right part of the center decorative part 10]
First, the structure of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right part of the center decorative part 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 111. A decorative portion 10a is arranged at the lower right portion of the center decorative portion 10. Since the decorative portion 10a is capable of emitting light in multiple colors, the game device is capable of emitting light in multiple colors.

As shown in FIGS. 111(A) and 111(B), the decorative portion 10a includes a base body 10ab formed of a plate-shaped colorless and transparent synthetic resin material to which a decorative substrate 10aa is attached on the front side (surface side); The cover body 10ac is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material and covers the entire front surface of the base body 10ab.

As shown in FIG. 111(F), a plurality of top-view type lamps 10aaa, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are mounted on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 10aa. , a plurality of connectors 10aab to which electrical wiring is connected are mounted. On the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 10aa, which is the LED mounting surface, two lamps 10aaa are arranged substantially horizontally as a first stage, which is the lowest stage, and spaced apart by a predetermined distance. Three lamps 10aaa are arranged substantially horizontally as a second stage arranged above, separated by a predetermined distance, and four lamps 10aaa are arranged as a third stage arranged above the second stage. are arranged substantially horizontally and spaced apart by a predetermined distance, and two lamps 10aaa are arranged substantially horizontally and spaced apart by a predetermined distance as a fourth stage which is the uppermost stage above the third stage. . Note that the top-view type lamp 10aaa, which is a full-color LED that can emit color, has a light-emitting surface parallel to the front side (front side) of the decorative substrate 10aa, and here, the lamp 10aaa emits light. The emitted light is directed perpendicularly to the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 10aa (that is, toward the player), and brightly illuminates the cover body 10ac. Hereinafter, the light emitting mode that illuminates the cover body 10ac may be simply referred to as "the light emitting mode of the decorative portion 10a."

The two lamps 10aaa in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are managed as a first lamp group, the three lamps 10aaa in the second stage are managed as a second lamp group, and the four lamps in the third stage are managed as a first lamp group. The two lamps 10aaa are managed as a third lamp group, and the two lamps 10aaa in the fourth stage, which is the top stage, are managed as a fourth lamp group.

Further, on the LED mounting surface which is the front side (front side) of the decorative board 10aa, a lower connector 10aab is arranged on the left side of the first stage which is the lowest stage and along the left side of the decorative board 10aa. The upper connector 10aab is arranged on the left side of the second stage and above the lower connector 10aab along the left side of the decorative board 10aa.

In this way, a total of 11 lamps 10aaa, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 10aa, and two connectors 10aab are arranged. has been done.

As shown in FIGS. 111(C) and (D), the front side (front side) of the decorative board 10aa is on the non-LED mounting surface, which is the rear side opposite to the front side (front side) of the decorative board 10aa. An LED control IC 10aac capable of lighting a total of 11 lamps 10aaa in gradations arranged on the LED mounting surface is arranged. The LED control IC 10aac has an identification ID attached to it by a plurality of resistors (not shown), and serial data from the outside is input based on a clock signal, and the input serial data includes an identification ID for identifying itself. Sometimes, it is possible to control the gradation of a total of 11 lamps 10aaa by capturing input serial data and adjusting the current output from multiple channels based on the captured serial data. .

Specifically, the first channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to the two lamps 10aaa in the first stage, which is the lowest stage. The two lamps 10aaa in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group and the light emission mode is managed by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 10aac. . The second channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to the three lamps 10aaa in the second stage. The three lamps 10aaa in the second stage are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed. The third channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to the four lamps 10aaa in the third stage. The four lamps 10aaa in the third stage are gradation controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed. The fourth channel of the LED control IC 10aac is electrically connected to the two lamps 10aaa on the fourth stage, which is the top stage. The two lamps 10aaa in the fourth stage are gradation-controlled as a fourth lamp group and their light emission mode is managed by adjusting the current output from the fourth channel of the LED control IC 10aac.

In addition to control signals (serial data, clock signals) from the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, a ground (GND) line and a power supply line are input to the upper connector 10aab via the lamp control board 107. The upper electrical wiring 10aad is electrically connected. The lower connector 10aab is electrically connected to a lower electrical wiring 10aad that is electrically connected to a decorative board (not shown) that lights the stage section 11 at the lower part of the center decorative section 10 in gradations.

The lower connector 10aab connects the control signal (serial data, clock signal), ground (GND) line, and power supply line inputted from the upper connector 10aab via the upper electrical wiring 10aad to the lower electrical wiring 10aad. It serves as a connector for transmitting data from the stage part 11 at the lower part of the center decoration part 10 to a decoration board (not shown) that lights in gradations.

The upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad are composed of four electrical wirings, the first electrical wiring has a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wirings have a white color. . For the first to fourth electrical wiring, each electrical wiring has a product number or name that is a different color from its own color (for example, the first electrical wiring is gray, which is close to white, so it is black, and the second to fourth electrical wiring is white, so it is printed in black, for example. Note that, since the first electrical wiring is gray, which is close to white, the color of the first electrical wiring, which is gray, which is close to white, is the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wiring.

The first electric wiring having a gray color close to white is a ground (GND) line, the second electric wiring having a white color is a line for transmitting serial data among control signals, and the third electric wiring having a white color is a ground (GND) line. , the fourth electric wire, which is a line for transmitting a clock signal among control signals and has a white color, is a power supply line.

The upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab are both white connectors, and have the same color as the second to fourth electrical wirings. Note that the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab may be made of ivory. Since ivory is a color close to white, it is the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electric wirings.

In this embodiment, a green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa, respectively. Solder resist is a protective film having insulating properties, and protects circuit patterns from dust, moisture, heat, and the like. The green solder resist applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative board 10aa is inexpensive, and is suitable for the main control board 80, relay board 88, payout control board 110 shown in FIG. It is also coated on the front side (front side) and rear side of various boards such as the sub-control board 90, image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and relay board 108 shown in FIG. However, instead of the green solder resist, a solder resist having the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wirings is applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative board 10aa. Good too. Note that through holes are formed in the decorative substrate 10aa at positions corresponding to the projections and attachment bosses formed on the front side of the base body 10ab.

Here, to briefly explain how to assemble the decorative part 10a, first, the protrusions and mounting bosses formed on the front side of the base body 10ab are passed through the through holes of the decorative board 10aa, and then the decorative board 10aa The decorative substrate 10aa is fixed to the base body 10ab by screwing screws (not shown) from the front side (surface side) into the screw holes formed in the mounting boss. The mounting boss has a diameter that is about twice smaller than the diameter of the base of the mounting boss, and a stepped surface is formed at a position a predetermined distance away from the front side of the base body 10ab toward the front. . When the decorative substrate 10aa is fixed to the base body 10ab, the stepped surface is in surface contact with the rear surface side of the decorative substrate 10aa. Due to this stepped surface, a space is formed between the rear surface (the surface on which the manufacturer, product number, etc. are printed) of the LED control IC 10aac arranged on the rear surface side of the decorative board 10aa and the surface of the base body 10ab. There is. In other words, the rear surface (the surface on which the manufacturer, product number, etc. are printed) of the LED control IC 10aac arranged on the rear surface side of the decorative board 10aa does not come into contact with the surface of the base body 10ab, and the LED control IC 10aac The shape of the base body 10ab is prevented from deforming due to the heat emitted from the base body 10ab.

The upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad are electrically connected to the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab of the decorative board 10aa, and the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad are connected to the decorative board 10aa. The front side (front side) of the base body 10ab is bent 180 degrees from the front side (front side) of the substrate 10aa toward the rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa, and the cover body 10ac is placed so as to cover the front side (front side) of the base body 10ab. surface). As a result, a plurality of claws (not shown) formed on the rear surface side of the cover body 10ac (a plurality of hook-shaped claws) are respectively caught on the rear surface side of the outer periphery of the base body 10ab, thereby fixing the cover body 10ac to the base body 10ab. do. A notch 10aba serving as a wiring opening is formed in the base body 10ab, and an upper electrical wiring 10aad and a lower electrical wiring 10aad are drawn out through the notch 10aba. Although the heat generated by the LED control IC 10aac is radiated into the internal space formed by the base body 10ab and the cover body 10ac, the heat in the internal space is radiated to the outside due to the notch 10aba. .

As shown in FIGS. 111(A), (B), and (E), the decorative portion 10a assembled in this manner is viewed from the front through the cover body 10ac formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the lamp 10aaa is turned off. In this state, the upper electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) and the lower electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white) , the second to fourth electric wirings having white color) can be easily recognized, the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab can be easily recognized, and the decorative board 10aa can be easily recognized. In addition, a total of 11 lamps 10aaa, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, can be easily recognized.

In the decorative portion 10a, two attachment bosses 10abb formed on the back side of the base body 10ab are fitted into holes (not shown) formed on the rear side of the center decorative portion 10. Subsequently, the decorative part 10a is fixed to the center decorative part 10 by screwing a screw (not shown) from the rear side of the center decorative part 10 into the screw hole formed in the mounting boss.

In this embodiment, the cover body 10ac is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, a part of the front surface and a part of the side surface of the cover body 10ac may be configured to have a plating layer with metallic luster, or a three-dimensional design may be applied and painted with colored paint. It may be configured as follows. Even with this configuration, when the lamp 10aaa is off through the transparent area of the cover body 10ac, the upper electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) electrical wiring) and the lower electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) can be easily recognized.

Further, in this embodiment, the cover body 10ac is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the cover body 10ac may be formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colored colors include red, blue, and green. Even with this configuration, when the lamp 10aaa is off, the upper electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) can be seen through the colored transparent region when the lamp 10aaa is turned off. And the lower electrical wiring 10aad (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) are made visible.

[Structure of the first movable accessory 14]
Next, the structure of the first movable accessory 14 will be explained with reference to FIG. 112. First, like the second movable accessory 15, when the first movable accessory 14 is activated during the fluctuating presentation (fluctuating display) of the performance symbol, the performance will be lower than when the first movable accessory 14 is not activated. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high expectation of winning that a win will occur after the fluctuating effect (fluctuating display) of the symbols is finished (that is, after the effect symbols are stopped and displayed), and multiple If the performance symbols are aligned in the same pattern and activated during the temporary stop display, the player will receive more profit from among the multiple winning types than when the first movable accessory 14 is not activated. It is also possible to suggest to the player that he or she has a high expectation of winning. Therefore, the player has a high interest in the operation (movement) of the first movable accessory 14.

The first movable accessory 14 has a retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7, is stationary at the retracted position, and moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for display. The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and can stand still at any advanced position in front of the screen 7a. Since a part of the image display device 7 can be emitted from the top to the bottom to emit multicolor light, the gaming machine is capable of emitting multicolor light.

As shown in FIGS. 112(A) and 112(B), the movable accessory 14 includes a base body 14a formed by suitably bending a metal flat plate long in the left-right direction, a stepping motor 14b for left-right movement, and a left-right movement stepping motor 14b. It is composed of a moving mechanism unit 14c, a cable accommodation gutter unit 14d, and a decorative light emitting part 14e. The base body 14a is attached with a left-right moving mechanism unit 14c and a cable accommodation gutter unit 14d, and is arranged above the image display device 7 so as not to interfere with the various units of the second movable accessory 15. .

The left and right moving mechanism unit 14c includes a left side support member 14ca made of a colored opaque synthetic resin material, a right side support member 14cb made of a colored opaque synthetic resin material, and a left and right side support member 14c made of a colored opaque synthetic resin material. It is composed of a moving body 14cc, a driven moving body 14cd made of a colored opaque synthetic resin material, a toothed belt 14ce, and a metal tension spring 14cf. The left side support member 14ca supports one end (left end) of two metal guide shafts, a front guide shaft 14cg and a back guide shaft 14cg, so that they are parallel to each other. The right side support member 14cb supports the other ends (right ends) of the two metal guide shafts, a front guide shaft 14cg and a back guide shaft 14cg, so that they are parallel to each other. With both ends of the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the rear guide shaft 14cg, supported in parallel by the left support member 14ca and the right support member 14cb, the left support The member 14ca and the right side support member 14cb are fixed to the metal base body 14a. A left and right moving body 14cc and a driven moving body 14cd are inserted into the two metal guide shafts, a front guide shaft 14cg and a back guide shaft 14cg.

The left support member 14ca is further attached with a stepping motor 14b for left and right movement, and a cantilever shaft 14caa is attached so as to be parallel to the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left and right movement. A drive gear 14cab is attached to the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left and right movement, and a transmission gear 14cad integrally formed with a toothed drive pulley 14cac is inserted through the cantilever shaft 14caa, thereby connecting the transmission gear 14cad and the stepping motor for left and right movement. The drive gear 14cab attached to the output shaft of the drive gear 14b meshes with the drive gear 14cab. A toothed drive pulley 14cac, around which a toothed belt 14ce is wound, is formed in front of the transmission gear 14cad.

When the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left and right movement rotates, this rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear 14cad that meshes with the drive gear 14cab attached to the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left and right movement, thereby transmitting the rotation to the toothed drive pulley 14cac. Since the gear 14cad is integrally formed, the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad rotate about the cantilever shaft 14caa. As the toothed drive pulley 14cac rotates, the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac rotates.

The driven moving body 14cd inserted through the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, moves left and right (guided) along the two metal guide shafts. It is possible to move (slide) smoothly in the direction, and a cantilever shaft 14 cda is attached. A toothed driven pulley 14cdb is inserted through the cantilever shaft 14cda, and a toothed belt 14ce is wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac. Further, a shaft 14cdc with a locking hole through which one end of the tension spring 14cf is inserted and locked is also attached to the driven moving body 14cd. The other end of the tension spring 14cf is inserted into a locking hole provided on the right end side of the base body 14a, which is formed by appropriately bending a horizontally long iron flat plate.

As a result, the driven moving body 14cd inserted through the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the rear guide shaft 14cg, is connected to the right end side of the base body 14a and the tension spring 14cf. The restoring force of the tension spring 14cf allows the base body 14a to be pulled in the left-right direction along (guided by) the two metal guide shafts toward the right end side of the base body 14a. Due to the restoring force of the tension spring 14cf, the toothed belt 14ce, which is wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the toothed driven pulley 14cdb, is pulled with an appropriate force, thereby suppressing the slack of the toothed belt 14ce. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive load from being applied to the toothed belt 14ce, and to prevent the toothed belt 14ce from loosening and coming off the toothed drive pulley 14cac or the toothed driven pulley 14cdb. be able to.

The left and right moving body 14cc inserted through the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14cg, moves left and right along (guided by) the two metal guide shafts. It is now possible to move (slide) smoothly (smoothly) in the direction. A belt fixing member 14cca is attached to the lower side of the left-right moving body 14cc with a toothed belt 14ce sandwiched therebetween, and the toothed belt 14ce is sandwiched and fixed between the lower side of the left-right moving body 14cc and the belt fixing member 14cca. The situation is as follows. As a result, when the toothed belt 14ce rotates clockwise, the left-right moving body 14cc smoothly (smoothly) moves (slides) to the left along (guided by) the two metal guide shafts. When the toothed belt 14ce rotates counterclockwise, it smoothly (slides) to the right along the two metal guide shafts. )be able to.

As shown in FIG. 112(C), a decorative board 14ccb is arranged on the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc, and a cover body 14ccc formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material covers the decorative board 14ccb. attached. The cover body 14ccc is formed with a notch 14ccca that serves as a wiring opening for passing a flexible flat cable 14ccbe (described later) and a flexible flat cable 14ccbf (described later).

A plate-shaped protrusion 14ccd that protrudes rearward is formed at the center of the rear side of the left and right moving body 14cc. The protruding piece 14ccd is capable of blocking the optical axis of the optical left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az. The optical left and right moving object position detection sensors 14az are arranged in three pieces on the back side of a base body 14a, which is formed by suitably bending a metal flat plate long in the left and right direction, on the left side, in the center, and on the right side, separated by a predetermined distance. It is arranged as follows. When the protruding piece 14ccd of the left and right moving body 14cc blocks the optical axis of the left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az, the left left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az is a decorative light emitting device attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc. This occurs when the current position of the portion 14e is at the retracted position on the left side of the image display device 7. When the protruding piece 14ccd of the left and right moving body 14cc blocks the optical axis of the center left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az, the central left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az uses a decorative light emitting device attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc. This occurs when the current position of the portion 14e is at the center position of the image display device 7 (a position on a straight line passing through the center of the upper side and the center of the lower side of the image display device 7). When the protrusion 14ccd of the right left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az blocks the optical axis of the right left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az, the right side left and right moving body position detection sensor 14az is a decorative light emitting device attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc. This occurs when the current position of the portion 14e is at the retracted position on the right side of the image display device 7. The signals output from the three optical left and right moving body position detection sensors 14az are input to the sub-control board 90, and the production control microcomputer 91 detects the input three optical left and right moving body position detection sensors. Based on the signal from 14az, it is possible to specify the current position of the decorative light emitting section 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc.

As shown in FIG. 112(D), a plurality of lamps 14ccba, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are mounted on the LED mounting surface that is the upper surface side (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb, and electrical wiring is mounted thereon. A plurality of connectors 14ccbb to be connected are mounted. On the LED mounting surface that is the upper surface side (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb, four side-view type lamps 14ccba are arranged as a first stage on the front side, approximately horizontally spaced apart by a predetermined distance, and On the side, as a second stage, four top-view type lamps 14ccba are arranged approximately horizontally at a predetermined distance apart.

The four side-view type lamps 14ccba in the first stage are managed as a first lamp group, and the four top-view type lamps 14ccba in the second stage are managed as a second lamp group. Note that a decorative light emitting section 14e is attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc, as will be described later. In the decorative light emitting section 14e, ten top-view type lamps 14eca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are mounted as a third stage. The ten top-view type lamps 14eca in the third stage of the decorative light emitting section 14e are managed as a third lamp group.

Further, on the left side of the LED mounting surface which is the top side (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb, an upper connector 14ccbb is arranged along the left side of the decorative board 14ccb, and a lower connector 14ccbb is arranged at the center of the lower side of the decorative board 14ccb. is located.

In this way, a total of eight lamps 14ccba, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are arranged on the LED mounting surface that is the upper surface side (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb, and two connectors 14ccbb are arranged. has been done.

On the front side (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb, which is the LED mounting surface, there are eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the front side (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb, which is the LED mounting surface, and a decorative light emitting section 14e, which will be described later. An LED control IC 14ccbc capable of lighting ten lamps 14eca in gradations is arranged. The LED control IC 14ccbc has an identification ID attached to it by a plurality of resistors (not shown), and serial data from the outside is input based on a clock signal, and the input serial data includes an identification ID for identifying itself. Sometimes, it is possible to control the gradation of a total of 18 lamps by capturing input serial data and adjusting the current output from multiple channels based on the captured serial data.

Specifically, the first channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc is electrically connected to the four lamps 14ccba in the first stage. The four lamps 14ccba in the first stage are gradation controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. The second channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc is electrically connected to the four lamps 14ccba in the second stage. The four lamps 14ccba in the second stage are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group and their light emission mode is managed by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc. The third channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc is electrically connected to ten lamps 14eca in the third stage of the decorative light emitting section 14e, which will be described later. The ten lamps 14eca in the third stage of the decorative light emitting section 14e, which will be described later, are gradation controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. has been done.

In addition to control signals (serial data, clock signals) from the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, a ground (GND) line and a power line are input to the upper connector 14ccbb via the lamp control board 107. A flexible and lightweight flexible flat cable 14ccbe is electrically connected. A flexible and lightweight flexible flat cable 14ccbf is electrically connected to the lower connector 14ccbb, which is electrically connected to a decorative board 14ec, which will be described later, of the decorative light emitting section 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc. Ru.

The lower connector 14ccbb is a connector for transmitting, via the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, a control signal for 10 lamps 14eca of a decorative light emitting section 14e, which will be described later, whose gradation is controlled by the LED control IC 14ccbc. .

The flexible flat cable 14ccbe was placed in a gutter section 14da of a cable accommodation gutter unit 14d formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material, which was attached to the front side of a bent metal base body 14a. It is in a state. In the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d, a gutter portion 14da is integrally formed on the front surface of a casing having a truss structure. The gutter portion 14da has a U-shaped cross section with an open top surface.

A connector 14ccbb above the decorative board 14ccb disposed on the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc is arranged above (directly above) corresponding to the gutter portion 14da of the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d. As a result, one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe placed in the gutter part 14da of the cable storage gutter unit 14d is lifted upward and electrically connected to the connector 14ccbb on the upper side of the decorative board 14ccb in an arc shape. Therefore, when the left-right moving body 14cc moves rightward, the arc portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe moves rightward. At this time, the arc does not vary significantly in the vertical direction. Furthermore, when the left-right moving body 14cc moves leftward, the arc portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe moves leftward. At this time, the arc does not vary significantly in the vertical direction. Note that the portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe that is lifted upward in an arc shape protrudes from the gutter portion 14da of the cable storage gutter unit 14d (a portion of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is exposed).

The flexible flat cable 14ccbe is flexible and lightweight, and consists of four electrical wires in one wide package, and although it is white overall, one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe It has a gray color that is close to white along the edges. A first electrical wiring is arranged along one end of a flexible flat cable 14ccbe having a gray color close to white, and a second electrical wiring is arranged at a predetermined distance from the first electrical wiring. A third electrical wiring is disposed at a predetermined distance from the third electrical wiring, and a fourth electrical wiring is disposed at a predetermined distance from the third electrical wiring. The product number and name are printed on the flexible flat cable 14ccbe in a color different from its own color (for example, black because the entire flexible flat cable 14ccbe is white). In addition, since the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is gray close to white, the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe, gray close to white, is a flexible flat cable. The color is the same as the overall white color of 14ccBE. Further, the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is gray close to white, and the first electrical wiring is arranged along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe. It can be said that it has a gray color close to white, and that the second to fourth electrical wirings have a white color.

The first electrical wiring is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring is a line that transmits serial data among control signals, and the third electrical wiring is a line that transmits a clock signal among control signals. Yes, the fourth electrical wiring is a power supply line.

The flexible flat cable 14ccbf, like the flexible flat cable 14ccbe, is flexible and lightweight, and is composed of five electrical wires as one wide package, and although it is white overall, it is flexible and lightweight. The flat cable 14ccbf has an almost white gray color along one end. A first electrical wiring is arranged along one end of a flexible flat cable 14ccbf having a gray color close to white, and a second electrical wiring is arranged at a predetermined distance from the first electrical wiring. A third electrical wiring is disposed at a distance of a predetermined distance from the third electrical wiring, a fourth electrical wiring is disposed a predetermined distance from the third electrical wiring, and a fifth electrical wiring is disposed a predetermined distance from the fourth electrical wiring. Note that the flexible flat cable 14ccbf has a shorter overall width than the flexible flat cable 14ccbe, and the predetermined distance dimension, which is the distance dimension from each electrical wiring in the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, is shorter than that of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe. It is shorter than the predetermined distance dimension, which is the distance dimension from the wiring.

The flexible flat cable 14ccbf has its product number and name printed in a color different from its own color (eg, black because the entire flexible flat cable 14ccbf is white). In addition, since the color marked along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is gray, which is close to white, the color marked along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, which is close to white, is the color marked along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. The color is the same as the overall white color of 14ccbf. Further, the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is gray close to white, and the first electrical wiring is arranged along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. It can be said that it has a gray color close to white, and that the second to fifth electric wirings have a white color.

The first electrical wiring is a ground (GND) line, the second electrical wiring is a line that transmits the first control signal (red brightness control signal), and the third electrical wiring is a line that transmits the second control signal (red brightness control signal). The fourth electrical wiring is a line that transmits a third control signal (a control signal for blue luminance), and the fifth electrical wiring is a power supply line.

Although the flexible flat cable 14ccbf was constructed as one package, it may be constructed as individual electrical wiring. In this case, the first electrical wiring has a gray color close to white, and the second to fifth electrical wiring have a white color. The first to fifth electrical wirings each have a product number or name that is a different color from its own color (the first electrical wiring is gray close to white, so for example, black, the second to fifth electrical wiring is white, so it is printed in black, for example. Note that, since the first electrical wiring is gray, which is close to white, the color of the first electrical wiring, which is gray, which is close to white, is the same color as the white of the second to fifth electrical wiring. Further, the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white is a ground (GND) line, and the second electric wiring having a white color is a line for transmitting a first control signal (red brightness control signal), The third electric wiring having a white color is a line that transmits the second control signal (a control signal for green brightness), and the fourth electric wiring having a white color is a line for transmitting a third control signal (a control signal for blue brightness). The fifth electrical wiring, which is a transmission line and has a white color, is a power supply line.

The upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb are both white connectors, and have the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the color of the second to fourth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe). It has the same color as white, which is the entire color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the white color of the second to fifth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). . Note that the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb may be made of ivory. Ivory is a color close to white, so it is the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccBE (the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe). The color is the same as the overall white color of the flat cable 14ccbf (the white color of the second to fifth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf).

In this embodiment, a green solder resist is applied to the upper surface side (front side) and rear surface side of the decorative board 14ccb, respectively. Solder resist is a protective film having insulating properties, and protects circuit patterns from dust, moisture, heat, and the like. The green solder resist applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative board 10aa is inexpensive, and is suitable for the main control board 80, relay board 88, payout control board 110 shown in FIG. It is also coated on the front side (front side) and rear side of various boards such as the sub-control board 90, image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and relay board 108 shown in FIG. However, instead of the green solder resist on the upper surface side (front side) and rear surface side of the decorative board 14ccb, a solder resist having the same color as the entire white of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the entire white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is used. may be applied respectively.

The top-view type lamp 14ccba, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light, has a light-emitting surface parallel to the upper surface side (front side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb. The light emitted by the lamp 14ccba goes in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface side (front side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb, that is, goes upward, and brightly illuminates the cover body 14ccc. On the other hand, in the side-view type lamp 14ccba, which is a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light, the light-emitting surface is not parallel to the upper surface side (front side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb, but on the upper surface side (front side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb. ) and 90 degrees (right angle), and here, the light emitted by the side-view type lamp 14ccba is parallel to the upper surface side (front side) of the decorative substrate 14ccb and is directed forward. When the light is reflected downward by the downward reflection section formed on the inside of the front side of the cover body 14cc, it is incident on the upper part of the decorative light emitting section 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc. There is.

The decorative light emitting part 14e includes a T-shaped base body 14ea formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material having a shape of a plate-like alphabet T stretched vertically in the vertical direction, and a T-shaped base body 14ea that is vertically long in the vertical direction among the T-shaped base bodies 14ea. The cover body 14eb is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material and covers the entire front surface of the extended shape portion.

A decorative substrate 14ec is attached to the front surface of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea. As shown in FIGS. 112(A), (C), and (D), on the LED mounting surface that is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec, there is a top-view type lamp that is a full-color LED that can emit multicolor light. 14eca are mounted, and a connector 14ecb to which the above-described flexible flat cable 14ccbf is electrically connected is also mounted. On the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec, which is the LED mounting surface, ten lamps 14eca are arranged as a third stage in a vertical line and spaced apart by a predetermined distance. Note that the top-view type lamp 14eca, which is a full-color LED that can emit color, has a light-emitting surface parallel to the front side (front side) of the decorative board 14ec, and here, the lamp 14eca emits light. The emitted light is directed perpendicularly to the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec (that is, toward the player), and brightly illuminates the cover body 14eb.

The ten lamps 14eca in the third stage are managed as a third lamp group. Further, a connector 14ecb is arranged on the upper side of the LED mounting surface which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec.

A light guide portion 14eaa having a sawtooth shape in the vertical direction is formed on the front surface of the upper, horizontally elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea. As described above, the light emitted by the side view type lamp 14ccba of the decorative board 14ccb attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc is directed downward by the downward reflection section formed on the inside of the front side of the cover body 14ccc. When the light is reflected, the light is incident on the upper part of the decorative light emitting section 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc. This incident light brightly illuminates the entire light guide portion 14eaa and emits light forward, that is, toward the player. Hereinafter, the light emission mode that illuminates the cover body 14ccc, the light emission mode that illuminates the cover body 14eb, and the light emission mode that illuminates the light guide portion 14eaa may be simply referred to as "light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14."

The connector 14ccbb is attached to the lower side of the decorative board 14ccb attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc, and the connector 14ccbb is attached to the front surface of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea in the decorative light emitting section 14e. The above-mentioned flexible flat cable 14ccbf, which electrically connects the connector 14ecb of the decorative board 14ec, is placed in front of the light guide section 14eaa, so it is in a state where it straddles the light guide section 14eaa. Due to the forward light emission, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is brightly illuminated from the rear by the light guide section 14eaa.

Here, to briefly explain how to assemble the first movable accessory 14, the cantilever shaft 14caa is attached to the left side support member 14ca, and the transmission gear 14cad formed integrally with the toothed drive pulley 14cac is attached to the cantilever shaft 14caa. Insert. Subsequently, a stepping motor 14b for left-right movement is attached to the left support member 14ca, and a drive gear 14cab is attached to the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left-right movement so as to mesh with the transmission gear 14cad. Subsequently, the left support member 14ca is attached to the base body 14a. Subsequently, the cantilever shaft 14cda is attached to the driven moving body 14cd, and the toothed driven pulley 14cdb is inserted into the cantilever shaft 14cda. Subsequently, the shaft 14cdc with a locking hole is attached to the driven moving body 14cd.

Next, one end of the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the rear guide shaft 14cg, are pushed into the left support member 14ca attached to the base body 14a, and the two metal guide shafts are fitted. After first inserting the left and right moving body 14cc into the guide shaft, insert the driven moving body 14cd, and then insert the right side to the other end of the two metal guide shafts, the front guide shaft 14cg and the back guide shaft 14c. The support member 14cb is pushed in and fitted to attach the right support member 14cb to the base body 14a.

Subsequently, the toothed belt 14ce is wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac of the left side support member 14ca, and then the toothed belt 14ce is wound around the toothed driven pulley 14cdb of the right side support member 14cb. Next, one end of the tension spring 14cf is inserted and locked into the shaft 14cdc with a locking hole of the right side support member 14cb, and the other end of the tension spring 14cf is attached to the shaft 14cdc provided on the right end side of the base body 14a. Insert it into the locking hole and lock it. Thereby, appropriate tension can be applied to the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the toothed driven pulley 14cdb.

Next, the belt fixing member 14cca is attached to the left and right moving body 14cc with the toothed belt 14ce sandwiched between the lower side of the left and right moving body 14cc, and the toothed belt 14ce is attached to the lower side of the left and right moving body 14cc and the belt fixing member 14cca. It is clamped and fixed.

Subsequently, the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d is attached to the front side of the bent metal base body 14a. Subsequently, three optical left and right moving body position detection sensors 14az, one on the left side, one in the center, and one on the right side, are attached to the rear side of the base body 14a.

Next, the decorative board 14ccb is attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left and right moving body 14cc, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is placed on the gutter part 14da of the cable storage gutter unit 14d, and one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is lifted upward to form a circular arc. It is electrically connected to the connector 14ccbb on the upper side of the decorative board 14ccb as shown in FIG.

Next, the decorative board 14ec is attached to the front surface of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea of the decorative light emitting part 14e, so as to cover the decorative board 14ec, that is, the upper and lower parts of the T-shaped base body 14ea. The cover body 14eb is attached to the front side of the portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea that is vertically long in the vertical direction so as to cover the entire front surface of the portion of the T-shaped base 14ea that is vertically long in the vertical direction. Next, the upper back surface of the T-shaped base body 14ea is aligned so that the upper surface of the T-shaped base body 14ea is flush with the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc to which the decorative board 14ccb is attached. Attach to the front side of the 14cc left/right moving body.

Subsequently, one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is electrically connected to the connector 14ccbb on the lower side of the decorative board 14ccb, and the other end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is electrically connected to the connector 14ecb of the decorative board 14ec. Subsequently, the cover body 14ccc is attached to the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc so as to cover the decorative board 14ccb.

When the first movable accessory 14 assembled in this way is viewed from the front and the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left and right movement rotates clockwise, this clockwise rotation will cause the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left and right movement to rotate clockwise. Since the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad are integrally formed, the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad are cantilevered. It rotates counterclockwise around the shaft 14caa. When the toothed drive pulley 14cac rotates counterclockwise, the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac also rotates counterclockwise. As a result, since the toothed belt 14ce is fixed to the lower side of the left and right moving body 14cc by the belt fixing member 14cca, the toothed belt 14ce rotates counterclockwise, and the two metal guide shafts The left and right moving body 14cc inserted through a certain front guide shaft 14cg and a rear guide shaft 14cg moves smoothly (smoothly) horizontally to the right along (guided by) the two metal guide shafts. The decorative light emitting section 14e attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc moves to the right (slides).

Further, when the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left and right movement rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, this counterclockwise rotation is transmitted to mesh with the drive gear 14cab attached to the output shaft of the stepping motor 14b for left and right movement. Since the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad are integrally formed, the toothed drive pulley 14cac and the transmission gear 14cad rotate clockwise around the cantilever shaft 14caa. I will do it. When the toothed drive pulley 14cac rotates clockwise, the toothed belt 14ce wound around the toothed drive pulley 14cac also rotates clockwise. As a result, since the toothed belt 14ce is fixed to the lower side of the left and right moving body 14cc by the belt fixing member 14cca, when the toothed belt 14ce rotates clockwise, the two metal guide shafts The left and right moving body 14cc inserted through the front guide shaft 14cg and the rear guide shaft 14cg is smoothly (smoothly) horizontally moved to the left along (guided by) the two metal guide shafts. The decorative light emitting section 14e attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc moves (slides) to the left side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 112(A), (C), and (D), from the front, there is a cable accommodation gutter unit 14d formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a left and right moving body formed of a transparent synthetic resin material. Through the cover body 14cc of the 14cc, when the lamp 14ccba is off, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (although the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is white as a whole, the color is gray close to white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe) can be easily recognized. , the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb can be easily seen, the decorative board 14ccb of the left-right moving body 14cc can be easily seen, and the decorative board 14ccb can emit multicolor light. A total of eight 14ccba full-color LED lamps can be easily seen. In addition, when the lamp 14eca is turned off, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (although the flexible flat cable 14ccbf has an overall white color, it is a gray color close to white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). Further, when the lamp 14eca is off, the decorative substrate 14ec of the decorative light emitting section 14e can be easily seen through the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting section 14e formed of a transparent synthetic resin material. A total of 10 lamps 14eca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, can be easily recognized.

Further, as described above, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is in a state in which the upwardly lifted arcuate portion protrudes from the gutter portion 14da of the cable accommodation gutter unit 14d (a state in which a part of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is exposed). Therefore, it can be visually recognized. Further, as described above, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is in a state where it straddles the light guide section 14eaa formed on the front surface of the vertically elongated portion of the T-shaped base body 14ea of the decorative light emitting section 14e. It can be visually recognized.

The movable accessory 14 is placed above the image display device 7 on a predetermined member provided on the rear side of the game board 2 so as not to interfere with the various units of the second movable accessory 15. . Next, the movable accessory 14 is attached to the game board by inserting a screw (not shown) into the mounting hole of the base body 14a and screwing it into a screw hole formed in a predetermined member provided on the rear side of the game board 2. Fix it to the rear side of 2. After the movable accessory 14 is fixed to a predetermined member provided on the rear side of the game board 2, the image display device 7 is attached to this predetermined member.

In this embodiment, the cover body 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting part 14e are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, a plating layer with metallic luster may be provided on a part of the front surface and a part of the side surface of the cover body 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting part 14e. , it may be configured to have a three-dimensional design and be painted with colored paint. Even with this configuration, when the lamp 14ccba and the lamp 14eca are turned off, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is easily visible.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting part 14e are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the cover body 14ccc of the left-right moving body 14cc and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting part 14e may be formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colored colors include red, blue, and green. Even with this configuration, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf are made visible through the colored transparent area when the lamp 14ccba and the lamp 14eca are turned off.

[Structure of fixed prize winning device 19]
Next, the structure of the fixed prize winning device 19 will be explained with reference to FIG. 113. A fixed winning device 19 is disposed below the image display device 7, and is provided with a first starting port 20 that allows ease of entry of game balls at all times. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 triggers the lottery of the first special symbol (jackpot lottery), and serves as the trigger for the acquisition of jackpot random numbers and jackpot determination, etc. in the gaming device. There is. Furthermore, the fixed prize winning device 19 is capable of emitting light in multiple colors, making it a gaming device capable of emitting light in multiple colors.

As shown in FIGS. 113(A) to 113(D), the fixed winning device 19 includes a plate-shaped base body 19a formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material attached to the front (surface) of the game board 2, and a base. A bulging part 19b is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic material attached to the front surface (surface) of the base body 19a, bulges forward and has an open upper part, and the first starting port 20 is disposed therein; ), the ball enters the first starting port 20 attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the base body 19a, and is arranged above the bulge 19b, and falls into the inside of the bulge 19b. and a ball gutter section 19d made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material that guides the played game balls backward.

A rectangular through hole (not shown) is formed in the upper part of the rear side (back surface) of the base body 19a at a position corresponding to the first starting port 20 arranged at the upper part of the bulging part 19b. A pair of guide pieces 19aa made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material are provided in the left-right direction. A first starting port sensor 20a for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20 is installed on the inside of the upper part of the rear side (back surface) of the base body 19a and on the pair of guide pieces 19aa. Guide grooves (not shown) are respectively formed for insertion and guidance from the rear toward the bulging portion 19b.

When the first starting port sensor 20a is pushed into the guide groove on the inner surface of the bulging portion 19b along this guide groove, a hook piece 19ab having a hook shape formed on the upper part of the rear surface (back surface) of the base body 19a is released. The first starting port sensor 20a can be fixed by being automatically locked to the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a. As a result, the game ball that has entered the first starting port 20 passes through the first starting port sensor 20a, so that the first starting port sensor 20a can detect the gaming ball that has entered the first starting port 20. can. Note that the first starting port sensor 20a is formed of a colored and opaque member.

In addition, at a position corresponding to the ball gutter section 19d attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the base body 19a, the ball enters the first starting port 20 disposed at the upper part of the bulge section 19b and enters the inside of the bulge section 19b. An opening 19ac having a rectangular shape is formed to communicate the space inside the ball gutter section 19d with the space inside the gutter section 19d.

The bulging portion 19b has a box shape with an open top and rear surface, and a first starting port 20 disposed at the top of the bulging portion 19b is inserted into the lower part of the inside of the bulging portion 19b. An inclined portion 19ba is formed to guide the fallen game ball backward. Although the bulging portion 19b is closed by attaching the front surface (surface) of the base body 19a to the rear surface of the bulging portion 19b, the internal space of the bulging portion 19b is in communication with the opening 19ac.

Wiring processing pieces 19da for processing electrical wiring to the decorative board 19c are formed on both outer walls of the ball gutter portion 19d, respectively. The left wiring processing piece 19da and the right wiring processing piece 19da are also formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material.

As shown in FIG. 113(F), a plurality of top-view type lamps 19ca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are mounted on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c. On the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c, which is the LED mounting surface, two lamps 19ca are arranged as a first stage, which is the lowest stage, approximately horizontally and spaced apart by a first predetermined distance. As a second stage arranged above the stage, four lamps 19ca are arranged approximately horizontally at a second predetermined distance dimension (the second predetermined distance dimension is a shorter distance dimension than the first predetermined distance dimension). ), and the four lamps 19ca are arranged substantially horizontally as the third stage which is the uppermost stage above the second stage. The distance dimension is shorter than the predetermined distance dimension. Note that the top-view type lamp 19ca, which is a full-color LED that can emit color, has a light-emitting surface parallel to the front side (front side) of the decorative board 19c. The light is directed perpendicularly to the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c (that is, toward the player), and brightly illuminates the base body 19a and the bulge portion 19b. Hereinafter, the light emitting mode that illuminates the base body 19a and the bulging portion 19b may be simply referred to as "the light emitting mode of the fixed prize winning device 19."

The two lamps 19ca on the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are managed as a first lamp group, the four lamps 19ca, on the second stage, are managed as a second lamp group, and the third lamp, which is the top stage, is managed as a first lamp group. The four lamps 19ca in the tier are managed as a third lamp group.

In this way, a total of ten lamps 19ca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are arranged on the LED mounting surface on the front side (front side) of the decorative board 19c.

As shown in FIGS. 113(C) and 113(D), a plurality of connectors 19cb to which electrical wiring is connected are provided on the back side of the decorative board 19c, which is the rear side opposite to the front side (front side). In addition, an LED control IC 19cc is disposed that can light up a total of 10 lamps 19ca in gradations, which are arranged on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c.

On the non-LED mounting surface, which is the rear side opposite to the front side (front side) of the decorative board 19c, a left connector 19cb is arranged on the lower left side, and a right connector 19cb is arranged on the lower right side. .

The LED control IC 19cc has an identification ID attached to it by a plurality of resistors (not shown), and serial data from the outside is input based on a clock signal, and the input serial data includes an identification ID for identifying itself. Sometimes, it is possible to control the gradation of a total of 10 lamps 19ca by capturing input serial data and adjusting the current output from multiple channels based on the captured serial data. .

Specifically, the first channel of the LED control IC 19cc is electrically connected to the two lamps 19ca in the first stage, which is the lowest stage. The two lamps 19ca in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group and their light emission mode is managed by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 19cc. . The second channel of the LED control IC 19cc is electrically connected to the four lamps 19ca in the second stage. The four lamps 19ca in the second stage are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and the light emission mode is managed. The third channel of the LED control IC 19cc is electrically connected to the four lamps 19ca in the third stage, which is the top stage. The four lamps 19ca in the third stage are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group and the light emission mode is managed by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 19cc.

In addition to control signals (serial data, clock signals) from the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, a ground (GND) line and a power supply line are input to the right connector 19cb via the lamp control board 107. The electrical wiring 19cd on the right side is electrically connected. The left side connector 19cb is electrically connected to the left side electrical wiring 19cd that is electrically connected to a decorative board (not shown) that lights up the variable winning device 22 in gradations, which is arranged below the fixed winning device 19 (first starting port 20). are electrically connected.

The normal variable winning device 22, like the fixed winning device 19, is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. The normal variable winning device 22 is equipped with a second starting port 21. The normal variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by operating the movable member 23. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 triggers the lottery of the second special symbol (jackpot lottery), and the gaming device triggers the acquisition of jackpot random numbers and the like and jackpot determination. There is. Further, the normal variable winning device 22 is capable of emitting light in multiple colors, similar to the fixed winning device 19, so it is a gaming device capable of emitting light in multiple colors.

The left connector 19cb connects control signals (serial data, clock signals), ground (GND) lines, and power lines from the right connector 19cb that are input via the right electrical wiring 19cd to the left electrical wiring 19cd. This is a connector for transmitting the variable winning device 22 to a decorative board (not shown) that lights up in gradations.

The right electrical wiring 19cd and the left electrical wiring 19cd are composed of four electrical wirings, the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wirings having a white color. For the first to fourth electrical wiring, each electrical wiring has a product number or name that is a different color from its own color (for example, the first electrical wiring is gray, which is close to white, so it is black, and the second to fourth electrical wiring is white, so it is printed in black, for example. Note that, since the first electrical wiring is gray, which is close to white, the color of the first electrical wiring, which is gray, which is close to white, is the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wiring.

The first electric wiring having a gray color close to white is a ground (GND) line, the second electric wiring having a white color is a line for transmitting serial data among control signals, and the third electric wiring having a white color is a ground (GND) line. , the fourth electric wire, which is a line for transmitting a clock signal among control signals and has a white color, is a power supply line.

The connector 19cb on the right side and the connector 19cb on the left side are both white connectors, and have the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings. Note that the right connector 19cb and the left connector 19cb may be made of ivory. Since ivory is a color close to white, it is the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings.

An electrical wiring 20ab is electrically connected to a connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a. The electrical wiring 20ab is composed of two electrical wirings, the first electrical wiring being a pink electrical wiring, and the second electrical wiring being a yellow electrical wiring. The first and second electrical wirings have product numbers and names that are different from their own color (for example, the first electrical wiring is pink, so it is white, and the second electrical wiring is yellow, so For example, printed in white). Pink is a color close to red and is in the same family as red.

The signal output from the first starting port sensor 20a is input to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88, and the game control microcomputer 81 is based on the input signal from the first starting port sensor 20a. , controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to the program.

The right wiring processing piece 19da includes an electrical wiring 20ab electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a, and a right electrical wiring 19cd electrically connected to the right connector 19cb. is locked, whereas a left electrical wiring 19cd electrically connected to a left connector 19cb is locked to the left wiring processing piece 19da.

In this embodiment, a green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative board 19c, respectively. Solder resist is a protective film having insulating properties, and protects circuit patterns from dust, moisture, heat, and the like. The green solder resist applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative board 19c is inexpensive and is suitable for the main control board 80, relay board 88, payout control board 110 shown in FIG. It is also coated on the front side (front side) and rear side of various boards such as the sub-control board 90, image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and relay board 108 shown in FIG. However, instead of the green solder resist on the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative board 19c, the same color as the white of the second to fourth electric wirings in the right electric wiring 19cd and the left electric wiring 19cd is used. Alternatively, solder resists having the following properties may be applied. Note that a through hole 19ce is formed in the decorative board 19c at a position corresponding to a mounting boss (not shown) formed on the rear side of the base body 19a.

Here, to briefly explain how to assemble the fixed prize winning device 19, first, place the rear surface of the bulging part 19b on the front side of the base body 19a, and screw in a screw (not shown) from the back side of the base body 19a. A bulging portion 19b is attached to the front side of 19a. Next, the first starting port sensor 20a is inserted from the rear of the base body 19a toward the bulge 19b, and is pushed along a guide groove (not shown) to the guide groove on the inner surface of the bulge 19b. A hook piece 19ab having a hook shape formed on the upper part of the rear surface (back surface) of the body 19a is automatically locked to the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a. Next, attach the ball gutter portion 19d to the rear side of the base body 19a by screwing screws (not shown) through mounting boss holes (not shown) provided on both front walls of the ball gutter portion 19d. Attach.

Subsequently, the right electrical wiring 19cd is electrically connected to the right connector 19cb of the decorative board 19c, and the left electrical wiring 19cd is electrically connected to the left connector 19cb of the decorative board 19c. Next, the decorative board 19c is arranged so that the front surface (surface) where the LED mounting surface faces the rear surface (back surface) of the base body 19a, and the through hole 19ce of the decorative board 19c is placed on the rear surface side of the base body 19a. The decorative board 19c is fixed to the base body 19a by inserting it into the formed mounting boss (not shown) and screwing it in with a screw (not shown) from the rear surface of the decorative board 19c.

Subsequently, the electrical wiring 20ab is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a, and the electrical wiring 20ab is bent and locked with the right wiring processing piece 19da. Subsequently, the right electrical wiring 19cd, which was electrically connected to the right connector 19cb of the decorative board 19c, was locked with the right wiring processing piece 19da, and was electrically connected to the left connector 19cb of the decorative board 19c. The left electric wiring 19cd is locked with the left wiring processing piece 19da.

As shown in FIGS. 113A, 113B, and 113E, the fixed prize winning device 19 assembled in this manner includes, from the front, a bulge portion 19b formed of a transparent synthetic resin material and a base body 19a. With the lamp 19ca turned off, the electrical wiring 19cd on the right side (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color), the electrical wiring 20ab (the first electrical wiring having a pink color), The electrical wiring 19cd on the left side (the first electrical wiring, which has a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring, which has a white color) can be easily recognized, and the decoration The substrate 19c can be easily seen, and the total of 10 lamps 19ca, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, can be easily seen.

The fixed winning device 19 is inserted into a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2 from the front side (surface side) of the game board 2 toward the rear of the game board 2, and is inserted at both left and right ends of the base body 19a. The fixed prize winning device 19 is fixed to the game board 2 by screwing in screws (not shown) from the two formed attachment pieces 19ad.

In this embodiment, the base body 19a and the bulging portion 19b are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, a part of the front surface and a part of the side surface of the base body 19a and the bulging part 19b may be configured to have a plating layer with metallic luster, or a three-dimensional design may be applied. It may also be configured to be painted with colored paint. Further, a sticker having the Chinese character "Hajime" printed with colored paint may be attached to a part of the front surface of the bulging portion 19b. Even with this configuration, when the lamp 19ca is turned off, the right electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the first electrical wiring having a white color, 2nd to 4th electrical wiring), electrical wiring 20ab (first electrical wiring with pink color, second electrical wiring with yellow color), left electrical wiring 19cd (first electrical wiring with gray color close to white, white electrical wiring), (second to fourth electrical wirings) are easily visible.

Further, in this embodiment, the base body 19a and the bulging portion 19b are formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the base body 19a and the bulging portion 19b may be formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colored colors include red, blue, and green. Even with this configuration, when the lamp 19ca is turned off, the electric wiring 19cd on the right side (the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electric wiring having a white color) can be connected to each other through a colored transparent region when the lamp 19ca is off. , electrical wiring 20ab (first electrical wiring with pink color, second electrical wiring with yellow color), left electrical wiring 19cd (first electrical wiring with gray color close to white, second to fourth electrical wirings with white color) ) is visible.

[Wiring visibility suppression effect of the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right part of the center decorative part 10]
Next, the wiring visibility suppression effect of the decoration part 10a arranged at the lower right part of the center decoration part 10 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 111A, 111B, and 111E, the decorative portion 10a is connected from the front through the cover body 10ac formed of a transparent synthetic resin material to the upper electrical wiring 10aad (nearly white). (first electrical wiring having gray color, second to fourth electrical wiring having white color) and lower electrical wiring 10aad (first electrical wiring having gray color close to white, second to fourth electrical wiring having white color) Can be visually recognized. Therefore, the player may feel that the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad, which are completely unrelated to the performance, are an eyesore.

In addition, the upper electrical wiring 10aad receives control signals (serial data, clock signals) from the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, as well as a ground (GND) line and a power supply line via the lamp control board 107. The lower electric wiring 10aad, which is a wiring for inputting, is a wiring electrically connected to a decorative board (not shown) that lights the stage part 11 at the lower part of the center decorative part 10 in gradation.

In this embodiment, the decoration part 10a is configured as a game device that can emit multicolor light, and as described above, the lowermost LED mounting surface is on the front side (surface side) of the decoration board 10aa. As a first stage, two lamps 10aaa are arranged approximately horizontally with a predetermined distance apart, and as a second stage, which is arranged above the first stage, three lamps 10aaa are arranged approximately horizontally and predetermined. Four lamps 10aaa are arranged substantially horizontally as a third stage, which are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance, and are arranged above the second stage, and are arranged above the third stage. Two lamps 10aaa are arranged substantially horizontally at a fourth stage, which is the uppermost stage, and spaced apart by a predetermined distance.

In addition, a total of 11 LEDs arranged on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (front side) of the decorative board 10aa, are arranged on the non-LED mounting surface, which is the rear side opposite to the front side (front side) of the decorative board 10aa. An LED control IC 10aac capable of lighting the lamp 10aaa in gradation is arranged. The LED control IC 10aac is capable of controlling the gradation of a total of 11 lamps 10aaa by adjusting the current output from a plurality of channels.

The two lamps 10aaa in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed. The three lamps 10aaa in the second stage are controlled in gradation as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed. The gradation of the 3 lamps 10aaa is controlled as a 3rd lamp group by adjusting the current output from the 3rd channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emitting mode is managed. The lamps 10aaa are gradation controlled as a fourth lamp group by adjusting the current output from the fourth channel of the LED control IC 10aac, and the light emission mode is managed.

The production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to select the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab of the first to fourth lamp groups as the light emission mode of the decorative part 10a. The first lamp group and/or the second lamp group, which are close to the connector 10aab, are set to emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group and the fourth lamp group are set to white light. The light emitting mode is a light emitting mode in which light is emitted in a different color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) from the light emitting mode (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting). As a result, the upper electrical wiring 10aad includes the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color, and the lower electrical wiring 10aad includes the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white. 1 electrical wiring, and the second to fourth electrical wirings having white color, by suppressing the visibility of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad, the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad are The electrical wiring 10aad can be made inconspicuous. Of course, the lighting mode of the decorative portion 10a is such that the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group among the first to fourth lamp groups always emit white light (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting). ), rather than the light emitting mode that emits white light (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting) as appropriate (e.g., the light emitting mode that emits white light, and the meaning of white). In addition to the light emitting mode that emits light in different colors and the light emitting mode that alternately changes, for example, when the light emitting mode that emits light in a color different from white changes only multiple times, there is a light emitting mode that emits white light. ), by suppressing the visibility of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad, the upper electrical wiring 10aad And the lower electrical wiring 10aad can be made less noticeable.

Further, as described above, the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab are both white connectors, and the second to fourth electrical wirings in the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad are white. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the decorative portion 10a is a light emitting mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), or a light emitting mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). ), it is possible to suppress the visibility of the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab and make the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab less noticeable. can. Even if the color of the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab is ivory, as described above, ivory is a color close to white, so the second color of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad is ~The color is the same as the white color of the fourth electric wiring, and the light emission mode of the decorative portion 10a is a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), or it emits white light. By including a light emitting mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), the visibility of the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab is suppressed and the upper connector 10aab and the lower connector 10aab are made conspicuous. It is possible to avoid this.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses control signals (serial data, clock signals) to set the light emission mode of all the lamp groups from the first lamp group to the fourth lamp group as the light emission mode of the decoration part 10a. The visibility of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad is suppressed by emitting white light as a single color (monochromatic emission) (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting). Thus, the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad can be made inconspicuous.

The white color emitted by the lamp 10aaa disposed on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 10aa is the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the upper electrical wiring 10aad. , it is also the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the lower electrical wiring 10aad. In addition, the white color emitted by the lamp 10aaa disposed on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 10aa is a white-based color of gray, which is close to the white color of the first electrical wiring in the upper electrical wiring 10aad. It is also a white-based color of gray, which is close to white, which the first electrical wiring in the lower electrical wiring 10aad has.

Note that, for example, the upper electrical wiring 10aad includes a first electrical wiring having a white color and second to fourth electrical wiring having a yellow color, and the lower electrical wiring 10aad includes a first electrical wiring having a white color, a first electrical wiring having a yellow color, and a second to fourth electrical wiring having a yellow color. in the case where the first lamp group and/or the first lamp group or/and The second lamp group is configured to emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the third and fourth lamp groups are configured to emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). It may be a light emitting mode that emits light in a different color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) from the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group. is a light emitting mode that emits yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group and the fourth lamp group are light emission modes that emit yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). may be a light emitting mode in which light is emitted in different colors (for example, blue, green, red, purple, white, rainbow, etc.). Even with this configuration, by suppressing the visibility of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad, the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad can be made inconspicuous. Of course, the lighting mode of the decorative part 10a is such that the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group out of the first to fourth lamp groups always emit white or yellow light (on, flashing, (Including gradation lighting.) Instead of lighting modes that emit light in white or yellow (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting) as appropriate (e.g., light emission that emits white or yellow). In addition to the light emitting mode that alternately changes the light emitting mode and the light emitting mode that emits light in a color different from white or yellow, for example, when changing the light emitting mode that emits light in a color different from white or yellow only multiple times. , a light emitting mode in which a light emitting mode that emits white or yellow light is incorporated (sandwiched) therein. By suppressing visibility, the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses control signals (serial data, clock signals) to set the light emission mode of all the lamp groups from the first lamp group to the fourth lamp group as the light emission mode of the decoration part 10a. The upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad can be The visibility of the wiring 10aad can be suppressed to make the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad less noticeable.

In this embodiment, as described above, green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative substrate 10aa, respectively. However, instead of the green solder resist on the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative board 10aa, the same white color as the second to fourth electric wirings in the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad is used. Colored solder resists may be applied respectively. In this way, the light emitting mode of the decorative portion 10a includes a light emitting mode that emits white light (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), thereby suppressing the visibility of the decorative substrate 10aa and making the decorative substrate 10aa more visible. It can be done inconspicuously.

[Wiring visibility suppression effect of first movable accessory 14]
Next, the wiring visibility suppression effect of the first movable accessory 14 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 112(A), 112(C), and 112(D), the first movable accessory 14 includes, from the front, a cable accommodation gutter unit 14d made of a transparent synthetic resin material, a cable accommodation gutter unit 14d made of a transparent synthetic resin material, Through the cover body 14cc of the left-right moving body 14cc formed by the above, it is possible to visually recognize the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (although the flexible flat cable 14ccbe has a white color as a whole, the gray color is close to white along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe). In addition, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (whose color is white as a whole) is inserted through the cover body 14cc of the left-right moving body 14cc made of a transparent synthetic resin material and the cover body 14eb of the decorative light emitting part 14e made of a transparent synthetic resin material. However, a gray color (almost white) can be seen along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. Therefore, the player may feel that the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, which are completely unrelated to the performance, are an eyesore.

In addition, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe receives control signals (serial data, clock signals) from the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, as well as a ground (GND) line and a power supply line, which are input via the lamp control board 107. The flexible flat cable 14ccbf includes a decorative board 14ccb arranged on the front side of the upper surface of the left-right moving body 14cc, a decorative board 14ec of the decorative light emitting part 14e attached to the front side of the left-right moving body 14cc, This is a wiring that electrically connects the two boards.

In this embodiment, a decorative board 14ccb is placed on the front side of the upper surface of the left and right moving body 14cc of the first movable accessory 14, and a decorative board 14ec is placed on the decorative light emitting part 14e attached to the front side of the left and right moving body 14cc. The game machine is configured with various lamps capable of emitting multicolor light. As described above, on the LED mounting surface which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc, there are approximately four side-view type lamps 14ccba as the first stage on the front side. Four lamps 14ccba of a top view type are arranged as a second stage on the rear side, spaced apart horizontally by a predetermined distance. As described above, ten lamps 14eca are arranged vertically in a line at a predetermined distance as the third stage on the LED mounting surface which is the front side (surface side) of the decorative substrate 14ec arranged in the decorative light emitting part 14e. They are spaced apart by the same size.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface on the front side (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc, eight An LED control IC 14ccbc capable of gradation lighting of the lamp 14ccba and ten lamps 14eca arranged on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec on the side of the decorative light emitting part 14e is arranged. . The LED control IC 14ccbc is capable of controlling the gradation of a total of 18 lamps by adjusting the current output from multiple channels.

The four lamps 14ccba in the first stage of the left and right moving body 14cc are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. The four lamps 14ccba in the second stage of the left and right moving body 14cc are gradation-controlled as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. The ten lamps 14eca in the third stage of the decorative light emitting section 14e are gradation-controlled as a third lamp group by adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 14ccbc, and the light emission mode is managed. There is.

The performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to select the upper connector 14ccbb of the first to third lamp groups as the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14. and the four side-view type lamps 14ccba of the first stage, which are the first lamp group, close to the lower connector 14ccbb are set to emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting); The second lamp group and the third lamp group emit white light in a different color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) from the light emission mode (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting). ). As a result, since the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf are entirely white, by suppressing the visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf are made inconspicuous. You can do it like this. Furthermore, since the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is arranged in front of the light guide section 14eaa described above, it is in a state where it straddles the light guide section 14eaa, and the four side view type cables in the first stage, which is the first lamp group, are connected to each other. The light from the lamp 14ccba emits white light in front of the light guide part 14eaa (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), thereby suppressing the visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf and making it flexible. The flat cable 14ccbf can be made inconspicuous.

Of course, as the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14, the first lamp group out of the first to third lamp groups always emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). Rather than specifying a light emitting mode that emits white light (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting) as appropriate (for example, a light emitting mode that emits white light and a light emitting mode that emits light in a color different from white), In addition to the light emitting mode that alternately changes the light emitting mode and the light emitting mode that alternately changes, for example, when changing the light emitting mode that emits light in a color different from white only multiple times, a light emitting mode that emits white light is incorporated (in between). ), the visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is suppressed to make the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf less noticeable. You can do it like this.

Further, as described above, the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc are white, which is the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe. It has the same color as white (the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccb), and the same color as white that is the entire color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). Since the first movable accessory 14 has the same color as the white color of the second to fifth electric wirings, the first movable accessory 14 has a white light emission mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). Alternatively, the visibility of the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb is suppressed by including a light emitting mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). The lower connector 14ccbb can be made less noticeable. Even if the color of the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb is ivory, as mentioned above, ivory is a color close to white, so the overall color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is white (flexible flat cable It is the same color as the white color of the 2nd to 4th electrical wiring of the 14ccbe, and the white color that is the entire color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the white color of the 2nd to 5th electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). The light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 is a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), or a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). ) is included to suppress the visibility of the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb and make the upper connector 14ccbb and the lower connector 14ccbb less noticeable. be able to.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls all the lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group as the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal). The visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is suppressed by setting the light emitting mode to a white light emitting mode (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting) as a single color (monochromatic light emission). Thus, the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf can be made inconspicuous.

Eight lamps 14ccba are arranged on the LED mounting surface which is the front side (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb on the side of the left and right moving body 14cc, and the front side (front side) of the decorative board 14ec on the side of the decorative light emitting part 14e. The white color emitted by the ten lamps 14eca arranged on the LED mounting surface is the same color as the entire white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the white color of the second to fourth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe). It is also the same color as the overall white color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the white color of the second to fifth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). In addition, eight lamps 14ccba are arranged on the front side (front side) of the decorative board 14ccb on the side of the left-right moving body 14cc, and eight lamps 14ccba are arranged on the front side (front side) of the decorative light emitting part 14e on the side of the decorative light emitting part 14e. ) The white light emitted by the ten lamps 14eca arranged on the LED mounting surface is the same as the white light emitted by the color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (the white color of the first electrical wiring). The color attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is a white color (gray close to the color of the first electrical wiring), which is a white color. be.

Note that, for example, although the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is configured as one package, it may be configured as individual electrical wiring. In this case, the first electrical wiring has a gray color close to white, and the second to fifth electrical wiring have a white color. The first to fifth electrical wirings each have a product number or name that is a different color from its own color (the first electrical wiring is gray close to white, so for example, black, the second to fifth electrical wiring is white, so it is printed in black, for example. Even with this configuration, the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is entirely white as described above, and a gray color close to white is attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. Even if the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is replaced with an individual electrical wiring, the first movable accessory 14 may have a white light emitting mode (on, flashing, (including gradation lighting), or by including a white light emitting mode (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), the visibility of each individual electrical wiring is suppressed and each individual electrical wiring is Wiring can be made inconspicuous.

Furthermore, in the case where the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is replaced by individual electrical wiring, for example, the first electrical wiring has a white color and the second to fifth electrical wiring have a yellow color. In this case, the first lamp group is configured to emit white light (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), and the second and third lamp groups are configured to emit white light (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting). The first lamp group may emit light in a different color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.), or the first lamp group may emit yellow light. The light emitting mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that For example, the light emitting mode may be such that light is emitted in blue, green, red, purple, white, rainbow, etc.). Even with this configuration, each individual electrical wiring can be made inconspicuous by suppressing the visibility of each individual electrical wiring. Of course, as a light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14, among the first to third lamp groups, the first lamp group always emits white or yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). ), but rather, as appropriate, include light emitting modes that emit light in white or yellow (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting) (e.g., light emitting modes that emit white or yellow light, and white light). Or, in addition to a light emitting mode that emits light in a color different from yellow and a light emitting mode that alternately changes, for example, when changing a light emitting mode that emits light in a color different from white or yellow only multiple times, For example, the light emitting mode can be changed by incorporating (sandwiching) a light emitting mode that emits white or yellow light.) However, by suppressing the visibility of each individual electrical wiring, each individual electrical Wiring can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls all the lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group as the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal). By changing the light emission mode to emit light in either white or yellow as a single color (monochromatic light emission) (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), it is possible to visually recognize each individual electrical wiring. It is possible to suppress the noise and make each individual electrical wiring inconspicuous.

In this embodiment, the front side (front side) and rear side of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc, and the front side (front side) and rear side of the decorative board 14ec arranged on the decorative light emitting part 14e. As mentioned above, a green solder resist is applied to each of them. However, the front side (front side) and rear side of the decorative board 14ccb arranged on the left-right moving body 14cc and the front side (front side) and rear side of the decorative board 14ec arranged on the decorative light emitting part 14e are colored green. Instead of the solder resist of A solder resist having the same color as the second to fifth electric wirings (white) of the flat cable 14ccbf may be applied respectively. In this way, since the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 includes a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), the decorative substrate 14ccb arranged on the left and right moving body 14cc can be By suppressing the visibility of the decorative board 14ec arranged in the decorative light emitting part 14e, the decorative board 14ccb arranged in the left-right moving body 14cc, and the decorative board 14ec arranged in the decorative light emitting part 14e, can be made inconspicuous.

[Wiring visibility suppression effect of fixed prize winning device 19]
Next, the wiring visibility suppression effect of the fixed prize winning device 19 will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 113(A), 113(B), and 113(E), the fixed prize winning device 19 is operated from the front through the bulging portion 19b formed of a transparent synthetic resin material and the base body 19a, and the electricity on the right side is Wiring 19cd (first electrical wiring with gray color close to white, second to fourth electrical wiring with white color), electrical wiring 20ab (first electrical wiring with pink color, second electrical wiring with yellow color), left side The electrical wiring 19cd (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) can be visually recognized. Therefore, the player may feel that the electric wiring 19cd, the electric wiring 20ab, and the electric wiring 19cd on the left side, which are completely unrelated to the performance, are an eyesore.

In addition to the control signals (serial data, clock signal) from the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, the electric wiring 19cd on the right side also connects a ground (GND) line and a power supply line via the lamp control board 107. The electrical wiring 20ab is a wiring that is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a, and the electrical wiring 19cd on the left side is the wiring that is input to the fixed winning device 19 (first starting port sensor 20a). 20) is a wiring that is electrically connected to a decorative board (not shown) that lights the variable winning device 22 arranged below in gradation.

In this embodiment, the fixed prize winning device 19 is configured as a gaming device capable of emitting multicolor light, and as described above, the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c has As a first stage, two lamps 19ca are arranged approximately horizontally and spaced apart by a first predetermined distance, and as a second stage, four lamps 19ca are arranged approximately horizontally. The four lamps 19ca are arranged horizontally apart from each other by a second predetermined distance, and above the second stage, four lamps 19ca are arranged as a third stage which is the uppermost stage and are spaced apart from each other by a third predetermined distance substantially horizontally. ing.

In addition, a total of 10 LEDs are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface, which is the rear side opposite to the front side (front side) of the decorative board 19c. An LED control IC 19cc capable of lighting the lamp 19ca in gradations is arranged. The LED control IC 19cc is capable of controlling the gradation of a total of 10 lamps 19ca by adjusting the current output from a plurality of channels.

The two lamps 19ca in the first stage, which is the lowest stage, are gradation-controlled as a first lamp group by adjusting the current output from the first channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and the light emission mode is managed. The four lamps 19ca in the second stage are controlled in gradation as a second lamp group by adjusting the current output from the second channel of the LED control IC 19cc, and the light emission mode is managed. By adjusting the current output from the third channel of the LED control IC 19cc, the gradation of the lamps 19ca is controlled as a third lamp group, and the light emission mode is managed.

The performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses control signals (serial data, clock signals) to select the right connector 19cb and the left connector of the first to third lamp groups as the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19. The first lamp group and/or the second lamp group, which are close to the connector 19cb, are configured to emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group is configured to emit white light ( (Including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting.) The light emission mode is to emit light in a different color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.). As a result, the electric wiring 19cd on the right side is composed of the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electric wirings having a white color, and the electric wiring 19cd on the left side is composed of the first electric wiring having a gray color close to white. Since the electrical wiring is composed of the second to fourth electrical wirings having white color, by suppressing the visibility of the right electrical wiring 19cd and the left electrical wiring 19cd, the right electrical wiring 19cd and the left electrical wiring 19cd are can be made inconspicuous. Of course, as a light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, among the first lamp group to third lamp group, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group always emits white light (lighting, blinking, gradation). (including lighting), but rather, as appropriate, light emission modes that include light emission modes that emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) (for example, light emission modes that emit white light, and white light emission modes). In addition to the light emitting mode that emits light in different colors and the light emitting mode that alternately changes, for example, when the light emitting mode that emits light in a color different from white changes only multiple times, there is a light emitting mode that emits white light. In this case, by suppressing the visibility of the right electric wiring 19cd and the left electric wiring 19cd, the right electric wiring 19cd Also, the electrical wiring 19cd on the left side can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a as the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19 by a control signal (serial data, clock signal). Since the electric wiring 20ab that is connected is bent and locked by the right wiring processing piece 19da, the first lamp of the first lamp group to the third lamp group is close to the right connector 19cb and the left connector 19cb. The group and/or the second lamp group is set to a red light emitting mode (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), and the third lamp group is set to a red light emitting mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). .) (for example, blue, green, white, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.), or make the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group yellow. The mode of emitting light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) is different from the emission mode of emitting yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) for the third lamp group (for example, blue, Examples include green, red, purple, white, rainbow, etc.). Note that the pink color of the first electrical wiring 20ab is the same color (red color) as the red color emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative substrate 19c. As a result, the electrical wiring 20ab is composed of the first electrical wiring having a pink color and the second electrical wiring having a yellow color, and is therefore electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a. By suppressing the visibility of the electrical wiring 20ab, the electrical wiring 20ab can be made inconspicuous. Of course, as a light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, among the first lamp group to third lamp group, the first lamp group and/or the second lamp group always emits red or yellow light (lighting, flashing, (Including gradation lighting.) Instead of a light emitting mode that emits red or yellow light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) as appropriate (e.g., emitting light in red or yellow). In addition to the light emission mode that alternately changes the light emission mode and the light emission mode that emits light in a color different from red or yellow, for example, when the light emission mode that emits light in a color different from red or yellow is changed only multiple times. However, even if the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a is By suppressing the visibility of the electrical wiring 20ab to be electrically connected, the electrical wiring 20ab can be made inconspicuous. The color emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative substrate 19c may be replaced with red, and may be pink, which is the color of the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19 by controlling the light emission of all the lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group according to the control signal (serial data, clock signal). The visibility of the electric wiring 19cd on the right side and the electric wiring 19cd on the left side is suppressed by making the mode a light emission mode that emits white light as a single color (monochromatic light emission) (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting). By doing so, the right electric wiring 19cd and the left electric wiring 19cd can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19 by controlling the control signal (serial data, clock signal) to emit light from all lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group. By setting the mode to a light emitting mode (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting) that emits red light as a single color (monochromatic light emission), it is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a. The visibility of the electrical wiring 20ab can be suppressed to make the electrical wiring 20ab inconspicuous. Note that the pink color of the first electrical wiring 20ab is the same color (red color) as the red color emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative substrate 19c. Of course, instead of red, the single color (monochromatic light emission) emitted by the lamp 19ca of the decorative board 19c may be pink, which is the color of the first electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the light emission mode of the fixed winning device 19 by controlling the control signal (serial data, clock signal) to emit light from all lamp groups from the first lamp group to the third lamp group. By setting the mode to a light emitting mode (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting) that emits yellow light as a single color (monochromatic light emission), it is electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a. The visibility of the electrical wiring 20ab can be suppressed to make the electrical wiring 20ab inconspicuous.

The white color emitted by the lamp 19ca disposed on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c is the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the right electrical wiring 19cd. However, it is also the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the left electrical wiring 19cd. Further, the white color emitted by the lamp 19ca disposed on the front side (surface side) of the LED mounting surface of the decorative board 19c is a white color of gray, which is close to the white color of the first electrical wiring in the right electrical wiring 19cd. It is also a white-based color of gray, which is close to white, which the first electrical wiring in the left electrical wiring 19cd has.

Further, the red color emitted by the lamp 19ca disposed on the LED mounting surface on the front side (front side) of the decorative board 19c is the red color of the first electric wiring of the electric wiring 20ab, which is the pink color, and is a decorative The yellow color emitted by the lamp 19ca disposed on the LED mounting surface, which is the front side (front side) of the board 19c, is the same color as the yellow color of the second electrical wiring of the electrical wiring 20ab.

Note that the light emission mode of all the lamps 19ca arranged on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 19c, that is, the light emission mode of the first lamp group to the third lamp group, is set to a single color (single color). By controlling the light emission to white, red, and yellow, the fixed prize winning device 19 can be set in a white light emission mode, a red light emission mode, and a yellow light emission mode. As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning in response to the fluctuation by the light emitting mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, and the degree of expectation of winning can be indicated to the player by the light emitting mode of the fixed prize winning device 19 as a pre-reading effect. can be suggested. In the variable icons 9C and pending icons 9A and 9B in the production button operation productions A to C of FIGS. 93 to 95 described above, the expected degree of winning can be suggested by color, and the order is white → red → yellow (gold). Expectations for a hit are high. Therefore, players are highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B.

Therefore, when indicating to the player the expected degree of winning in response to the fluctuation by the light emitting mode of the fixed winning device 19, or when indicating the expected degree of winning to the player as a pre-read effect using the light emitting mode of the fixed winning device 19, As for the lighting mode of the fixed prize winning device 19, it is suggested that the expectation of winning increases in the order of white lighting mode → red lighting mode → yellow lighting mode, similar to the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B. . The light emission mode includes lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting, and even if the colors are the same in the order of lighting → blinking → gradation lighting, the expectation of winning may be high. Specifically, when indicating the expectation of winning to the player by the light emitting mode of the fixed winning device 19, the light emitting mode of the fixed winning device 19 is as follows: white lighting mode → white blinking mode → white gradation lighting mode → Red lighting mode → Red blinking mode → Red gradation lighting mode → Yellow lighting mode → Yellow blinking mode → Yellow gradation lighting mode.

In this way, since the expectation level of winning with respect to the fluctuation and the expectation level of winning as a look-ahead effect can be suggested to the player by the light emitting mode of the fixed winning device 19, the player can It can increase interest. As interest in the fixed winning device 19 increases, even if the fixed winning device 19 is watched from the player, the bulge 19b and the base body 19a formed of the transparent synthetic resin material that constitute the fixed winning device 19 will be affected. Through the electrical wiring 19cd on the right side (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color), the electrical wiring 20ab (the first electrical wiring having a pink color, the second electrical wiring having a yellow color), Although various electrical wiring such as electrical wiring 19cd on the left side (first electrical wiring with gray color close to white, second to fourth electrical wiring with white color) can be seen, as mentioned above, fixed prizes are not included. Since the visibility of various electrical wirings can be suppressed by the light emitting mode of the device 19 itself, it is possible to make various electrical wirings inconspicuous.

In this embodiment, green solder resist is applied to the front side (surface side) and the rear side of the decorative board 19c, respectively, as described above. However, instead of the green solder resist on the front side (surface side) and rear side of the decorative board 19c, the same color as the white of the second to fourth electric wirings in the right electric wiring 19cd and the left electric wiring 19cd is used. Alternatively, solder resists having the following properties may be applied. In this way, the light emission mode of the fixed prize winning device 19 includes a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting), thereby suppressing the visibility of the decorative board 19c and reducing the visibility of the decorative board 19c. can be made inconspicuous.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the wiring visibility suppression effect of the gaming machine will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative part 10a (device capable of emitting light) disposed at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111, the first movable accessory 14 (device capable of emitting light) in FIG. 113 fixed prize winning device 19 (device capable of emitting light), upper electrical wiring 10aad and lower electrical wiring 10aad electrically connected to the decorative part 10a (device) in FIG. 111, and the first movable winning device in FIG. Flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) electrically connected to object 14 (device), flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring), right side electrically connected to fixed winning device 19 (device) in FIG. The game board 2 is equipped with a wiring 19cd, a left electric wiring 19cd, an electric wiring 20ab, and a performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) of a sub-control board 90 that can execute multiple types of performances. The control microcomputer 91 (effect execution means) is a decorative part 10a (device) disposed at the lower right part of the center decorative part 10 that can emit light in a color that is the same as the color of the electric wiring or includes a color of the same system. A display in which the first movable accessory 14 (device) that can emit light and the fixed winning device 19 (device) that can emit light emit multicolor light (a display that suppresses the visibility of the wiring of the decorative part 10a located at the lower right of the center decorative part 10) , the wiring visibility suppression effect of the first movable accessory 14, and the wiring visibility suppression effect of the fixed winning device 19).

Specifically, the decorative part 10a (device capable of emitting light) disposed at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111 has the same white color as the second to fourth electrical wirings in the upper electrical wiring 10aad. It is also the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the lower electrical wiring 10aad. In addition, it is a white-based color of gray that is close to white that the first electrical wiring in the upper electrical wiring 10aad has, and it is also a white-based color that is gray that is similar to white that the first electrical wiring in the lower electrical wiring 10aad has. be. Therefore, in the wiring visibility suppression effect of the decoration part 10a placed at the lower right part of the center decoration part 10, the lamp 10aaa placed on the LED mounting surface on the front side (front side) of the decoration board 10aa emits white light. can emit light in a color that is the same as the color of the upper electrical wiring 10aad and the lower electrical wiring 10aad, or a color that includes the same color.

In addition, the first movable accessory 14 (device capable of emitting light) in FIG. It is also the same color as the white color which is the entire color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (the same color as the white color of the second to fifth electrical wiring of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf). Furthermore, the color along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe is a gray color that is close to white (gray that is close to white that the first electrical wiring has), and the color that is attached along one end of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf is a white color. It is also a color in the white family, where the color labeled is a gray that is close to white (a gray that is close to white that the first electrical wiring has). For this reason, in the wiring visibility suppression effect of the first movable accessory 14, eight lamps 14ccba arranged on the LED mounting surface on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ccb on the side of the left and right moving body 14cc and the decorative The white color emitted by the ten lamps 14eca arranged on the front side (surface side) of the decorative board 14ec on the light emitting part 14e side is the same as the color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf. It can emit light in the same color or in colors that include colors of the same family.

In addition, in the fixed prize winning device 19 (device capable of emitting light) in FIG. 113, the white color is the same as that of the second to fourth electrical wirings in the right electrical wiring 19cd, and the second to fourth electrical wirings in the left electrical wiring 19cd are white. ~It is also the same color as the white color of the fourth electrical wiring. In addition, it is a white-based color of gray that is close to white that the first electrical wiring in the right-hand electrical wiring 19cd has, and it is also a white-based color that is gray that is similar to white that the first electrical wiring in the left-hand electrical wiring 19cd has. . Therefore, in the wiring visibility suppression effect of the fixed winning device 19, the white light emitted by the lamp 19ca arranged on the LED mounting surface on the front side (front side) of the decorative board 19c is the electric wiring 19cd on the right side, and the white color on the left side. It is possible to emit light in a color that is the same as the color of the electric wiring 19cd or includes a color of the same family.

According to this configuration, the device can emit multicolor light that is the same color as the color of the electrical wiring that is electrically connected to the device, or a color that includes the same color system, thereby suppressing the visibility of the electrical wiring. By doing so, you can make the electrical wiring less noticeable. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the electrical wiring is an eyesore, which is completely unrelated to the performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance execution means) is arranged in the lower right part of the center decoration part 10 in FIG. 111 in the same color or the same color as the color of the electric wiring. It is possible to perform an effect in which the decoration part 10a (device) and the fixed winning device 19 (device) shown in FIG. 113 emit monochrome light. According to this configuration, the decorative part 10a (device) arranged at the lower right part of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. Since the fixed prize winning device 19 (device) in FIG. 113 emits monochromatic light, the visibility of the electrical wiring can be further suppressed to make the electrical wiring more inconspicuous.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative part 10a (device) arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111 and the fixed winning device 19 (device) in FIG. 113 are transparent in which a transparent area is formed. (a cover body 10ac formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material of the decoration part 10a in FIG. 111, and a plate-shaped base body 19a formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material of the fixed winning device 19 of FIG. 113). and a bulging part 19b), a transparent part is arranged on the front side of the game board 2, and a part of the upper electric wiring 10aad and the lower electric wiring 10aad are electrically connected to the decorative part 10a (device) in FIG. 111. are visible through the transparent part, and part of the right electric wiring 19cd, the left electric wiring 19cd, and the electric wiring 20ab, which are electrically connected to the fixed winning device 19 (device) in FIG. 113, are visible through the transparent part. It is said to be visible. According to this configuration, although a part of the electrical wiring that is completely unrelated to the performance is visible to the player through the transparent part, the equipment is displayed in the same color or the same color as the electrical wiring. By emitting light, the visibility of the electrical wiring can be suppressed and the electrical wiring can be made inconspicuous.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first movable accessory 14 (device) shown in FIG. It has a moving body 14cc (movable body) and a decorative light emitting part 14e (movable body), and the left and right moving body 14cc (movable body) and the decorative light emitting part 14e (movable body) are arranged on the front side of the game board 2, and as shown in FIG. A part of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) that are electrically connected to the first movable accessory 14 (device) are arranged on the front side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized. It is said that According to this configuration, a part of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring), which are completely unrelated to the performance, are placed on the front side of the game board 2 so that they can be seen by the player. However, if the device emits light in the same color or the same color as the color of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) or the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring), the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) The visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) can be suppressed to make the electrical wiring less noticeable.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the wiring visibility suppression performance of the gaming machine will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111, the first movable accessory 14 in FIG. 112, the fixed winning device 19 in FIG. 113, etc. In this device, a plurality of various full-color LED lamps capable of emitting multicolor light were provided. Since full-color LEDs can emit multicolor light, they can of course emit white light. However, as a lamp that emits white light, a single color LED that emits white light may be used instead of a full color LED that can emit multicolor light, or a single color LED that emits white light may be used in addition to a full color LED that can emit multicolor light. A plurality of them may be mixed and arranged on the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards.

[Modification 2]
Various electrical wirings in the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111, the first movable accessory 14 in FIG. 112, and the fixed winning device 19 in FIG. 113 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment include: It was not held together with cable ties. However, various electrical wirings may be bundled together using a binding band. In this case, when the binding band is arranged so as to be visible through transparent areas of the gaming machine (device of the present invention) such as the decorative part 10a, the first movable accessory 14, and the fixed prize winning device 19, like various electric wirings, The color of the cable tie should be the same color as the various electrical wiring (white, gray close to white, pink, or yellow). In this way, even if the gaming machine (device of the present invention) emits light, the visibility of the binding band together with the various electrical wirings is suppressed, thereby making it possible to make the binding band inconspicuous together with the various electrical wirings.

[Modification 3]
An electric wiring 20ab was electrically connected to the connector 20aa on the rear surface of the first starting port sensor 20a in the fixed winning device 19 of FIG. 113 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment. The electrical wiring 20ab was composed of two electrical wirings, the first electrical wiring was a pink electrical wiring, and the second electrical wiring was a yellow electrical wiring. However, the first electrical wiring may be yellow electrical wiring, and the second electrical wiring may be pink electrical wiring. Further, the pink color may be a pink fluorescent color, or the yellow color may be a yellow fluorescent color.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative part 10a arranged at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111, the first movable accessory 14 in FIG. 112, the fixed winning device 19 in FIG. 113, etc. In the wiring visibility suppression effect in the gaming machine (device of the claimed invention), a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine (device of the claimed invention) emit white, red, or yellow light, thereby reducing the visibility of wiring in the gaming machine (device of the claimed invention). The wiring in the gaming machine (device of the present invention) was made inconspicuous by suppressing the noise. However, the light emitting mode of the gaming device (device of the present invention) may shift to a multicolor light emitting mode, such as a light emitting mode that emits white, red, or yellow light. For example, a light emitting mode in which a plurality of lamps in a gaming device (device of the present invention) emit white light, then a light emitting mode in which they emit rainbow colors, and then returning to a light emitting mode in which they emit white light can be mentioned. Then, a light emission mode in which the plurality of lamps in the gaming device (device of the present invention) emits white light, then a light emission mode in which light is emitted in blue → green → red → purple → yellow, and then returns to a light emission mode in which light is emitted in white color. Examples can be mentioned.

[Modification 5]
The visibility of the flexible flat cable 14ccbe (electrical wiring) and the flexible flat cable 14ccbf (electrical wiring) in the first movable accessory 14 (device of the present invention) in FIG. 112 in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can be suppressed. The configuration may also be applied to the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decoration part) written with "OARO" is movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by an arm member. Normally, it is stationary at the retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. It is designed to be able to stand still, and to cover a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. The arm member is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. Inside the rectangular member (decorative part) written as "OARO", there is provided a decorative board on which a plurality of lamps, which are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, are arranged. The above-mentioned LED control IC capable of lighting a plurality of lamps in gradations is arranged on the decorative board, and the connector is also arranged on the decorative board. In addition to the control signals (serial data, clock signals) from the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90, the connector also has a ground (GND) line and a power line connected to the lamp control board 107 and along the arm member. The twisted electrical wiring is electrically connected.

The electrical wiring is composed of four electrical wirings, the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wirings having a white color. For the first to fourth electrical wiring, each electrical wiring has a product number or name that is a different color from its own color (for example, the first electrical wiring is gray, which is close to white, so it is black, and the second to fourth electrical wiring is white, so it is printed in black, for example. Note that, since the first electrical wiring is gray, which is close to white, the color of the first electrical wiring, which is gray, which is close to white, is the same color as the white of the second to fourth electrical wiring.

The first electric wiring having a gray color close to white is a ground (GND) line, the second electric wiring having a white color is a line for transmitting serial data among control signals, and the third electric wiring having a white color is a ground (GND) line. , the fourth electric wire, which is a line for transmitting a clock signal among the control signals and has a white color, is a power supply line.

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to select, for example, a rectangular member (decoration part) as a light emitting mode of a rectangular member (decoration part) written as "OARO". The lamps placed around the decorative part and in the peripheral area connected to the arm member are designed to emit white light (including lighting, flashing, and gradation lighting), and are marked with "OARO" and are placed in the area. The lamps placed in the corresponding positions may emit white light in a different color (for example, blue, green, red, purple, yellow, rainbow, etc.) ). As a result, since the electrical wiring is composed of the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color, the visibility of the electrical wiring routed along the arm member is improved. By suppressing this, it is possible to make the electrical wiring routed along the arm member less noticeable. Of course, the lamps placed around the rectangular member (decorative part) and in the peripheral area connected to the arm member should always emit white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting). Rather, a light emission mode that includes a light emission mode that emits white light (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) as appropriate (for example, a light emission mode that emits white light and a light emission mode that emits light in a color different from white) In addition to the light emitting mode that alternately changes, for example, when changing the light emitting mode that emits light in a color different from white only multiple times, it is possible to incorporate (sandwich) the light emitting mode that emits white light among the light emitting modes. ), by suppressing the visibility of the electrical wiring routed along the arm member, the electrical wiring routed along the arm member can be changed. Wiring can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 uses a control signal (serial data, clock signal) to select a rectangular member (decoration part) as a light emitting mode of a rectangular member (decoration part) written as "OARO". By setting the light emitting mode of all the lamps arranged on the decorative board in the decorative part) to a light emitting mode (including lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting) that emits white light as a single color (monochromatic light emission), The visibility of the electrical wiring routed along the arm member can be suppressed to make the electrical wiring routed along the arm member less noticeable. The white color emitted by the lamp disposed on the decorative substrate is the same color as the white color of the second to fourth electric wires in the electric wires routed along the arm member. Further, the white color emitted by the lamp disposed on the decorative substrate is also a white-based color of gray, which is close to the white color of the first electrical wiring in the electrical wiring routed along the arm member.

A part of the front side and a part of the side of the arm member may be configured to have a plating layer with metallic luster, or a three-dimensional design may be applied and painted with colored paint. may be configured. Further, the electrical wiring may be accommodated and routed inside the arm member. Even with this configuration, when the lamp is off, the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color can be easily connected through the transparent area of the arm member. It is considered visible. Further, the arm member was formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin material. However, the arm member may be formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin material. Examples of colored colors include red, blue, and green. When storing and routing electrical wiring inside the arm member, it is easy to draw the electrical wiring (the first electrical wiring having a gray color close to white, and the second to fourth electrical wiring having a white color) when the lamp is off. visible.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative part 10a (device of the present invention) disposed at the lower right of the center decorative part 10 in FIG. 111 was emitting multicolor light. By controlling the light emission mode of the decorative portion 10a to be a single color (monochromatic light emission), such as white, red, and yellow, the light emission mode of the decorative portion 10a is set to white, red, and yellow. It may also be a light emitting mode. In the variable icons 9C and pending icons 9A and 9B in the production button operation productions A to C of FIGS. 93 to 95 described above, the expected degree of winning can be suggested by color, and the order is white → red → yellow (gold). Expectations for a hit are high. Therefore, players are highly interested in the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A and 9B. Thereby, the degree of expectation of winning with respect to the fluctuation can be indicated to the player by the light emitting mode of the decorative portion 10a. Even in this case, the light emitting mode of the decorative portion 10a changes from white to red or yellow depending on the expectation of winning, but basically it is a white light emitting mode, so the decoration The visibility of the electrical wiring in the portion 10a can be suppressed to make the electrical wiring inconspicuous.

[Modification 7]
The configuration that can suppress the visibility of various wirings in the fixed winning device 19 (device of the present invention) shown in FIG. ) 28, the first big winning device (first attacker) 31, and the second big winning device (second attacker) 36, respectively. In this way, various electric wirings in the normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22, gate (through chucker) 28, first big winning device (first attacker) 31, and second big winning device (second attacker) 36 can be visually recognized. It is possible to suppress the noise and make various electrical wirings less noticeable.

[Modification 8]
The wiring visibility suppression effect of the decoration part 10a placed at the lower right of the center decoration part 10 in FIG. 111, the wiring visibility suppression effect of the first movable accessory 14 in FIG. 112, and the wiring visibility of the fixed winning device 19 in FIG. 113. The sexual suppression effect may not include some of the effects described above, or may include other effects.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect G1-1]
A game machine comprising a game board on which a device capable of emitting light, electrical wiring electrically connected to the device, and performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of performances are arranged,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform an effect in which the device emits multicolor light in a color that is the same as the color of the electric wiring or includes a color of the same family.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform an effect in which the device emits monochrome light in the same color or the same color system as the color of the electric wiring,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1 or aspect G1-2,
The device has a transparent part in which a transparent area is formed, and the transparent part is arranged on the front side of the game board,
A part of the electrical wiring is made visible through the transparent part,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1 or aspect G1-2,
The device has a movable body that performs a predetermined operation by actuation of an electric drive source, and the movable body is arranged on the front side of the game board,
A portion of the electrical wiring is placed on the front side of the game board so that it is visible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Ball entering suggestion effects 1 to 7 will be explained below using FIGS. 114 to 116. These ball entry suggestion performances 1 to 7 are executed in the variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. display the image.

[Entry suggestion production 1]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining pitch entry suggestion production 1. Ball entrance suggestion production 1 is a game ball entering the starting hole (one or both of the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, the same in FIGS. 114 to 116) while the decorative pattern is changing on the display screen 7a. When the ball enters, an image representing that the ball has entered the ball and a hold icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and after that, the hold icon moves as the hold expires, but the image representing that the ball has entered does not move. be. Further, when the hold icon that was held when the image representing that the ball has entered the ball becomes the hold icon 9A1 (the first hold to be consumed), the image that represents that the ball has entered the ball disappears. Note that the timing at which the image representing that the ball has entered the ball disappears is when the hold icon that was held when the image representing that the ball entered the ball is displayed becomes the hold icon 9A1, and the fluctuation thereof ends.

In FIG. 114(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three pending states, and three pending icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Note that four pending icons 9A may be displayed, and the four pending icons 9A are also referred to as a pending icon 9A1, a pending icon 9A2, a pending icon 9A3, and a pending icon 9A4 in the order in which they are consumed. Further, the fluctuation icon 9C does not need to be displayed. Further, a hold icon 9B may be displayed (the same applies in FIGS. 114 to 116).

Next, FIG. 114(B) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the starting hole. When the game ball enters the starting port, a hold icon 9A4 (fourth hold, displayed in black) is displayed. The status is on hold 4. Further, since the game ball enters the starting port, an image NSE representing that the ball has entered is displayed along with the entry of the game ball. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed at a position close to the starting port on the display screen 7a. Note that the position does not have to be close to the starting port. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball is in a state where it overlaps with the fluctuation icon 9C, the hold icon 9A1, and the hold icon 9A2. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball does not overlap with the hold icon 9A3 and the hold icon 9A4. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was put on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball was entered is the hold icon 9A4.

Next, FIG. 114(C) shows a state where fluctuation has started. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. The status will be on hold 3. When the previous variation ends, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the relevant change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2, and the hold icon 9A4 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2. Move to position 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 are displayed. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball is in a state where it overlaps with the new fluctuation icon 9C, the hold icon 9A1, and the hold icon 9A2. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball does not overlap with the new hold icon 9A3. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was put on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball becomes a hold icon 9A3.

Next, FIG. 114(D) shows a state where fluctuation has started. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. The status will be on hold 2. When the previous variation ends, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, and the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2. In the new state after the movement, the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1 and 9A2 are displayed. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball is in a state where it overlaps with the new fluctuation icon 9C, the hold icon 9A1, and the hold icon 9A2. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was put on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball becomes a hold icon 9A2.

Next, FIG. 114(E) shows a state where fluctuation has started. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. The status becomes Pending 1. When the previous variation ends, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of variation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1. In the new state after the movement, the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1 are displayed. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball is in a state where it overlaps with the new fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was held when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is displayed becomes the hold icon 9A1.

Next, in FIG. 114(F), the state slightly before the end of the fluctuation ( (before the image control microcomputer 101 receives the confirmed stop command). The fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1 are displayed. At this time, an image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball is displayed.

Next, FIG. 114(G) shows a state in which the variation has ended when the hold icon (displayed in black) that was held when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is displayed is the hold icon 9A1. When the variation ends (when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the confirmed stop command), the variation icon 9C disappears. At this time, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball disappears. Note that the timing at which the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball may disappear may be after a certain period of time has elapsed after the image control microcomputer 101 receives the confirmed stop command.

Next, FIG. 114(H) shows a state in which the special drawing lottery, which was suspended when the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball, has started to fluctuate. Here, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball is not displayed. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. There will be no hold. At the start of variation, the pending icon 9A1 moves to the position of the variation icon 9C. In the new state after the movement, the fluctuation icon 9C is displayed. The pending icon (displayed in black) that was held when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is displayed becomes the variable icon 9C.

Next, in FIG. 114(I), the special drawing lottery that was put on hold when the image NSE representing that the ball entered is displayed is being changed. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was held when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is displayed is the variable icon 9C. The image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball is not displayed.

[Entry suggestion production 2]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining pitch-in suggestion productions 2, 3, and 4. FIGS. 115(A) to 115(D) are diagrams for explaining pitch entry suggestion production 2. In ball entry suggestion production 2, when a game ball enters the starting hole while the decorative pattern is changing on the display screen 7a, an image indicating that the ball has entered and a hold icon are displayed on the display screen 7a, and then , the hold icon moves as the hold expires, but the image representing the ball entering does not move. Furthermore, when the hold icon that was put on hold when the image representing that the ball has entered the ball becomes the variable icon 9C, the image representing that the ball has entered the ball disappears.

FIG. 115(A) shows a state in which the variation is completed when the hold icon (displayed in black) that was held when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is displayed is the hold icon 9A1. Also in pitch entry suggestion performance 2, the production in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered and the subsequent performance of holding the ball are the same as pitch entry suggestion production 1 (FIGS. 114 (A) to (F)). It is omitted here. In FIG. 115(A), when the variation ends (when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the confirmed stop command), the variation icon 9C disappears. At this time, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball does not disappear.

Next, FIG. 115(B) shows a state in which the variation of the special drawing lottery that was suspended when the image NSE indicating that a ball has entered is displayed. Here, too, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. There will be no hold. At the start of variation, the pending icon 9A1 moves to the position of the variation icon 9C. In the new state after the movement, the fluctuation icon 9C is displayed. The pending icon (displayed in black) that was held when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is displayed becomes the variable icon 9C.

Next, in FIG. 115(C), when the image NSE representing that a ball has entered the ball is displayed, the variation of the special drawing lottery that has been suspended is started, and when the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed, The suspended pending icon (displayed in black) is about to become the variable icon 9C. Here, too, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 115(D), when the image NSE representing that a ball has entered is displayed, the variation of the special drawing lottery that was suspended is started, and when the image NSE representing that a ball has entered is displayed, The held hold icon (displayed in black) has become the fluctuation icon 9C. At this point, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball disappears. Note that the timing at which the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball disappears may be during the movement of the pending icon that was held when the image NSE representing that the ball entered the ball becomes the variable icon 9C.

[Entry suggestion production 3]
FIG. 115(E) is a diagram for explaining pitch entry suggestion production 3. Ball entry suggestion performance 3 is a performance in which the image representing the ball entering does not disappear even if the pending icon that was held when the image representing the ball entering is displayed becomes the variable icon.

FIG. 115(E) shows that the variation of the special drawing lottery that was put on hold when the image NSE representing that a ball has been entered is displayed, and that the variation of the special drawing lottery was put on hold when the image NSE representing that a ball was entered is displayed. The hold icon (displayed in black) has become the fluctuation icon 9C. Also in ball entry suggestion performance 3, the production in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball, and the subsequent performance of holding the ball, are the ball entry suggestion performance 1 (Figures 114 (A) to (F)) and ball entry suggestion. Since it is similar to Performance 2 (FIGS. 115(A) to 115(C)), it will be omitted here. Also in FIG. 115(E), the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball does not disappear and is displayed. After that, it continues to be displayed until the end of the change. Note that the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball may be displayed until after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, until the reach of the decorative symbol is established, or until it develops into the super reach.

[Entering pitch suggestion production 4]
FIGS. 115(F) to (L) are diagrams for explaining pitch entry suggestion production 4. Ball entry suggestion production 4 displays, on the display screen 7a, an image indicating that the ball has entered the ball and a hold icon when the game ball enters the starting hole while the decorative pattern is changing on the display screen 7a. The image showing that the ball has been entered indicates the expectation of winning the special drawing lottery, and the pending icon indicates the expectation of winning the special drawing lottery.

In FIG. 115(F), it is changing, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three pending states, and three pending icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, FIG. 115(G) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the starting hole. When the game ball enters the starting port, a hold icon 9A4 (fourth hold) is displayed. The status is on hold 4. The pending icon 9A4 displayed here is blue (hatched 1). The color of this pending icon indicates the level of expectation of a jackpot. Details will be described later. Further, since the game ball enters the starting port, an image NSE representing that the ball has entered is displayed along with the entry of the game ball. Regarding the image NSE representing that the ball has entered, the same effects as the above-mentioned "ball entering suggestion effect 1", "ball entering suggestion presentation 2", and "ball entering suggestion presentation 3" are performed. Description will be omitted here. The hold icon 9A4 is held when the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball is displayed.

Regarding the hold icon, red is the strongest, green is the second, blue is the third, and white is the fourth (weakest). As shown in FIG. 115(L), white is represented by no hatching, blue by hatching 1, green by hatching 2, and red by hatching 3. Furthermore, the expectation level (also referred to as confidence level) of a jackpot is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. The same applies to FIGS. 114 to 116.

Next, FIG. 115(H) shows a state where fluctuation has started. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. The status becomes Pending 3. When the previous variation ends, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the relevant change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2, and the hold icon 9A4 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2. Move to position 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 are displayed. The hold icon that was put on hold when the image NSE representing that the ball entered the ball is displayed is blue (hatched 1) and becomes the hold icon 9A3. The expected level of jackpot is 20. Further, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes to blue (with hatching) at the start of the fluctuation. The color of the image NSE indicating that the ball has landed indicates the expectation of a jackpot. Before the change, the color is white (the expectation level of jackpot is 10), and by changing to blue (the expectation level of jackpot is 20), the expectation level of jackpot has increased. Details will be described later.

The colors of the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball are red as the first strongest, green as the second strongest, blue as the third strongest, and white as the fourth strongest (weakest). White is represented without hatching, and blue, green, and red are represented with hatching. Furthermore, the expectation level (also referred to as confidence level) of a jackpot is 10 for white, 20 for blue, 30 for green, and 50 for red. The same applies to FIGS. 114 to 116.

Next, FIG. 115(I) shows a state where fluctuation has started. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. The status becomes Pending 2. When the previous variation ends, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, and the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2. In the new state after the movement, the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1 and 9A2 are displayed. The hold icon that was put on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is green (hatched 2) and becomes the hold icon 9A2. At the start of this variation, the hold icon that was held when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball was displayed has changed from blue to green. The expectation level of jackpot has increased from 20 to 30. Further, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes to green (with hatching) at the start of the fluctuation. Before the change, the color is blue (expectation level of jackpot is 20), and by changing to green (expectation level of jackpot is 30), the expectation level of jackpot has increased.

Next, FIG. 115(J) shows a state where fluctuation has started. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. The status becomes Pending 1. When the previous variation ends, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1. In the new state after the movement, the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1 are displayed. The hold icon that was put on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is red (hatched 3) and becomes the hold icon 9A1. At the start of this variation, the hold icon that was placed on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is displayed changes from green to red. The expectation level of jackpot has increased from 30 to 50. Furthermore, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes to red (with hatching) at the start of the fluctuation. Before the change, the color is green (the expectation level of a jackpot is 30), and by changing to red (the expectation level of a jackpot is 50), the expectation level of a jackpot has increased.

Next, in FIG. 115(K), the special drawing lottery that was put on hold when the image NSE representing that the ball entered is displayed is being changed. The red (hatching 3) pending icon that was held when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is displayed is the variable icon 9C. Furthermore, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball has disappeared.

[Entry suggestion production 5]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining pitch-in suggestion productions 5, 6, and 7. FIGS. 116A to 116E are diagrams for explaining pitch entry suggestion production 5. Ball entry suggestion production 5 displays, on the display screen 7a, an image indicating that the ball has entered the ball and a hold icon when the game ball enters the starting hole while the decorative pattern is changing on the display screen 7a. This is a production that indicates the expectation of winning the special lottery with an image showing that the ball has been entered.

In FIG. 116(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three pending states, and three pending icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, FIG. 116(B) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the starting hole. When the game ball enters the starting port, a hold icon 9A4 (fourth hold, displayed in black) is displayed. The status is on hold 4. Further, since the game ball enters the starting port, an image NSE representing that the ball has entered is displayed along with the entry of the game ball. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball is displayed at a position close to the starting port on the display screen 7a. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered at this time is a relatively small image, that is, an image with a "small" size. The expectation level is 10. Note that the size of the image NSE indicating that the ball has landed suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot. Details will be described later.

In the image NSE representing that the ball has entered, the size "Extra Large" is the strongest, the size "Large" is the second strongest, the size "Medium" is the third strongest, and the size "Small" is the strongest The strongest (weakest). In addition, the expectation level (also called confidence level) of a jackpot is 10 for a “small” size, 20 for a “medium” size, and 30 for a “large” size. , if the size is "extra large", it is 50. The same applies to FIGS. 114 to 116.

Next, FIG. 116(C) shows a state where fluctuation has started. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered at this time is a relatively medium-sized image, that is, an image of "medium" size. The size of the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes from "small" to "medium". The expectation level will be 20. Also, the status becomes pending 3. When the previous variation ends, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the relevant change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2, and the hold icon 9A4 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2. Move to position 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 are displayed. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was put on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball becomes a hold icon 9A3. Note that the size of the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, FIG. 116(D) shows a state where fluctuation has started. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered at this time is a relatively large image, that is, an image with a "large" size. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes in size, from "medium" to "large." The expectation level will be 30. Also, the status becomes pending 2. When the previous variation ends, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, and the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2. In the new state after the movement, the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1 and 9A2 are displayed. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was put on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball becomes a hold icon 9A2. Note that the size of the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, FIG. 116(E) shows a state where fluctuation has started. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered at this time is a relatively extra-large image, that is, an "extra-large" image. The size of the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes from "large" to "extra large." The expectation level will be 50. Also, the status becomes pending 1. When the previous variation ends, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1. In the new state after the movement, the fluctuation icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1 are displayed. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was held when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is displayed becomes the hold icon 9A1. Note that the size of the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball changes at the start of the fluctuation.

[Entry suggestion production 6]
FIGS. 116(F) to 116(H) are diagrams for explaining pitch entry suggestion production 6. Ball entry suggestion production 6 displays, on the display screen 7a, an image indicating that the ball has entered the ball and a hold icon when the game ball enters the starting hole while the decorative pattern is changing on the display screen 7a. This is a production that indicates the expectation of winning the special lottery with an image showing that the ball has been entered. However, the image representing that the ball has entered the ball disappears before the hold icon that was held when the image representing that the ball entered the ball is displayed becomes the hold icon 9A1.

In FIG. 116(F), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. Pending is a state in which the game ball enters the starting hole when there are three balls. When the game ball enters the starting port, a hold icon 9A4 (fourth hold, displayed in black) is displayed. The status is on hold 4. Further, when the game ball enters the starting port, an image NSE representing that the ball has entered is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 116(G), it is in a state of fluctuation. One pending request has been completed and the status is now pending 3. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was put on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball was displayed is the hold icon 9A3. An image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 116(H), it is in a state of fluctuation. Furthermore, one hold has been completed and the status is now in hold 2. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was put on hold when the image NSE representing that the ball entered the ball was displayed is the hold icon 9A2. The image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball has disappeared. In other words, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball disappears before the hold icon that was put on hold when the image NSE representing that the ball entered the ball is displayed becomes the hold icon 9A1. The timing at which the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball disappears may be at the start of the fluctuation, during the fluctuation, or at the end of the fluctuation. For example, it may be during high-speed fluctuation of the decorative pattern or at the end of the fluctuation.

[Entry suggestion production 7]
FIGS. 116(I) to 116(L) are diagrams for explaining the ball entering suggestion production 7. The ball entry suggestion production 7 displays an image indicating that the ball has entered the ball and a hold icon on the display screen 7a when the game ball enters the starting hole while the decorative pattern is changing on the display screen 7a. This is an image that indicates that the ball has entered the ball and indicates the expectation of winning in the special lottery of the change in question.

In FIG. 116(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. There are three pending states, and three pending icons 9A and the corresponding variable icon 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, FIG. 116(J) shows a state in which the game ball has entered the starting hole. When the game ball enters the starting port, a hold icon 9A4 (fourth hold, displayed in black) is displayed. The status is on hold 4. Further, since the game ball enters the starting port, an image NSE representing that the ball has entered is displayed along with the entry of the game ball. The image NSE representing that the ball has entered at this time is a relatively extra-large image, that is, an "extra-large" image. The expectation level is 50. Note that the size of the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot due to the fluctuation at the time when the image NSE representing the ball entering the ball is displayed.

Next, FIG. 116(K) shows a state in which the image NSE indicating that the game ball has entered the ball is displayed and the fluctuation is off. The left decorative pattern 8L is fixed at "6", the middle decorative pattern 8C is fixed at "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R is fixed at "6". It indicates that it has gone awry. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was put on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball was entered is the hold icon 9A4. When the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R stop, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball disappears. Note that the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball may disappear after a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, at a specific timing when a reach is established or a fixed stop, or after a certain period of time has elapsed after being displayed.

Next, FIG. 116(L) shows a state where fluctuation has started. The hold is extinguished to start the fluctuation. The status becomes Pending 3. The image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball is not displayed. When the previous variation ends, the variation icon 9C disappears. At the start of the fluctuation, the hold icon 9A1 moves to the position of the relevant change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A2 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A1, the hold icon 9A3 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2, and the hold icon 9A4 moves to the position of the hold icon 9A2. Move to position 9A3. In the new state after the movement, the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 are displayed. The hold icon (displayed in black) that was put on hold when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball becomes a hold icon 9A3. Thereafter, as the hold icon is shifted each time the change starts, the hold icon (displayed in black) that was held when the image NSE indicating that the ball entered the ball is displayed also moves.

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of ball entry suggestion effects 1 to 7 are shown.

[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in "Ball entry suggestion effect 1", and one of the plurality of types of images indicates that the ball has entered the ball. One of the plural types of images is a hold icon 9A, and when a game ball enters the starting slot, an image NSE representing that the ball has entered and a hold icon 9A are displayed. After the first effect (FIG. 114(B)) and the first effect (FIG. 114(B)), the hold icon 9A moves every time the fluctuation starts, and the image NSE representing that the ball enters the fluctuation. After the second effect (FIGS. 114(C) to (F)) that does not move regardless of the start, and the second effect (FIGS. 114(C) to (F)), the hold icon 9A moves and changes to the hold icon 9A1. It is possible to execute a third effect (FIG. 114(G)) in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball disappears when the ball reaches the position. According to this configuration, while visually entertaining the players, it is possible to arouse the players' sense of anticipation and improve their interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Ball Entry Suggestion Production 1", in the second production (FIGS. 114(C) to (F)), the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered and the hold icon 9A are displayed. By moving the hold icon 9A, the state in which the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball and the hold icon 9A overlap (Fig. 114 (D), ( E)). According to this configuration, while visually entertaining the players, it is possible to arouse the players' sense of anticipation and improve their interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in "Ball entry suggestion performance 4" and "Ball entry suggestion performance 5", in the second performance, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered and the hold icon 9A are large. The size and color may each indicate the degree of expectation of winning in the special drawing lottery (FIGS. 116(B) to (E), FIGS. 115(G) to (K)). According to this configuration, while visually entertaining the players, it is possible to arouse the players' sense of anticipation and improve their interest.

[Effect 4]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in "Ball entry suggestion production 7", and one of the plurality of types of images indicates that the ball has entered the ball. One of the plural types of images is a hold icon 9A, and when a game ball enters the starting slot, an image NSE representing that the ball has entered and a hold icon 9A are displayed. The first effect (Fig. 116 (J)) and the second effect (Fig. 116 (K)) in which the image NSE representing the ball entering the ball disappears without moving after the first effect (Fig. 116 (J)). ), and after the second effect (FIG. 116(K)), the third effect (FIG. 116(L)) in which the hold icon 9A moves every time the change starts, can be executed. The image NSE representing this suggests, depending on the size, the degree of expectation of a hit in the special drawing lottery at the time of the new display at the time of the change (FIG. 116(J)). According to this configuration, while visually entertaining the players, it is possible to arouse the players' sense of anticipation and improve their interest.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of ball entering suggestion productions 1 to 7 are shown.

[Modification 1]
In the embodiment described above, the display form of the image NSE indicating that the ball has been entered and the hold icon 9A change at the start of the fluctuation, but it does not have to be at the start of the fluctuation. For example, it may be set when a reach is established, after a certain period of time has passed from the start of the fluctuation, or when the fluctuation ends.

[Modification 2]
In the embodiment described above, the image NSE indicating that a ball has been entered, the variable icon 9C, and the pending icon 9A each suggest the degree of expectation of winning in the special lottery, but each suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the general lottery. You may do so.

[Modification 3]
In the embodiment described above, the image NSE indicating that the ball has entered the ball, the fluctuation icon 9C, and the hold icons 9A1 and 9A2 overlap, but the number of overlapping hold icons 9A may not be two. For example, the variable icon 9C and the pending icon 9A1 may overlap, or the variable icon 9C and the pending icons 9A1, 9A2, and 9A3 may overlap. Furthermore, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball does not need to overlap with the fluctuation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A. Furthermore, the image NSE representing that the ball has entered the ball may overlap with the fluctuation icon 9C and all the hold icons 9A. Further, one pending icon 9A may change from an overlapping state to a non-overlapping state while changing.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, in the "ball entering suggestion performance 1" and "ball entering suggestion performance 2", when the hold icon that was held when the image representing the ball entering is displayed becomes the hold icon 9A1, the corresponding When the fluctuation icon 9C is reached, the image representing that the ball has entered the ball disappears, but the hold icon that was held when the image representing that the ball entered the ball is displayed is the same as the position where the hold icon 9A1 is displayed and the relevant change. When the icon 9C reaches a certain position between the displayed positions, the image representing that the ball has entered the ball may disappear.

[Modification 5]
In the embodiment described above, in the "ball entry suggestion production 4", the color of the image NSE representing the entry of the ball changes at the start of the variation, but it may change at the end of the variation. Alternatively, the value may change after a certain period of time has passed since the start of the change. For example, it may change when the left symbol stops.

[Modification 6]
In the embodiment described above, in the "ball entry suggestion production 5", the size of the image NSE representing the entry of the ball changes at the start of the fluctuation, but it may change by animation from the start of the fluctuation. Alternatively, the change may occur after a certain period of time has passed since the start of the change. For example, the change may occur one second after the start of the change.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect G3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
a first effect in which the first image and the second image are displayed when the game ball enters the starting port;
a second effect in which, after the first effect, the second image moves each time the variation starts, and the first image does not move regardless of the start of the variation;
After the second effect, when the second image moves to a specific position, the first image disappears.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect G3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1,
In the second effect, from a state where the first image and the second image do not overlap, a state where the first image and the second image overlap by moving the second image become,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect G3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1 or aspect G3-2,
In the second performance, the first image and the second image may each indicate the expected degree of winning in the special lottery or the general lottery depending on the display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect G3-4]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
a first effect in which the first image and the second image are displayed when the game ball enters the starting port;
a second effect in which the first image disappears without moving after the first effect;
After the second effect, it is possible to perform a third effect in which the second image moves every time the fluctuation starts,
Depending on the display mode, the first image suggests the expected degree of winning in the special lottery or general lottery at the time of new display.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other variations]
Among the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include some effects or effects other than those described above may be included.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel type game machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the production button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as the operation parts to be operated by the player, but is not limited to these, and the operation parts to be operated by the player include a lever, , a trigger, etc. may also be used. Further, in the display performance in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the performance button 63, but instead of this, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. In other words, two or more of the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above may be combined.
Furthermore, although the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, The display effects performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modified examples, the embodiments of the above-described aspect are for facilitating understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1...Game machine 3...Game area 5...Board lamp 7...Image display device 9A, 9B...Pending image (pending icon)
9C...The relevant pending image (pending icon)
14...First movable accessory 15...Second movable accessory 17...Big winning opening opening starting opening 20...First starting opening (first ball entrance)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64...Sub display screen 69...Frame movable accessory 66...Frame lamp 81...Microcomputer for game control 91...Microcomputer for performance control 101...Microcomputer for image control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In a state where the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, a first effect can be executed to display on the display means information related to the expected number of balls to be acquired per hit included in the hold by pre-reading;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images